Methods and systems for neural stimulation via visual stimulation

ABSTRACT

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to systems and methods for treating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The system can include eyeglasses, a photodiode positioned to detect ambient light, light sources, and an input device. The system can include a neural stimulation system that retrieves a profile and selects a light pattern having a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. The neural stimulation system can set a value of the variable parameter of the light pattern, construct an output signal, and then provide the output signal to the light sources to direct light towards the fovea.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of priority under 35 U.S.C. § 120 asa continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/816,222, filedNov. 17, 2017 and issuing as U.S. Pat. No. 10,279,192 on May 7, 2019,which claims the benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 62/423,452, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIAVISUAL STIMULATION,” filed Nov. 17, 2016, U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 62/431,698, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIAVISUAL STIMULATION,” filed Dec. 8, 2016, U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 62/423,569, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIAAUDITORY STIMULATION,” filed Nov. 17, 2016, U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 62/431,702, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIAAUDITORY STIMULATION,” filed Dec. 8, 2016, U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 62/423,517, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIAPERIPHERAL NERVE STIMULATION,” filed Nov. 17, 2016, U.S. ProvisionalApplication No. 62/431,720, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NEURALSTIMULATION VIA PERIPHERAL NERVE STIMULATION,” filed Dec. 8, 2016, U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/423,598, titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FORNEURAL STIMULATION VIA VISUAL AND AUDITORY STIMULATIONS,” filed Nov. 17,2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/431,725, titled “METHODS ANDSYSTEMS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION VIA VISUAL AND AUDITORY STIMULATIONS,”filed Dec. 8, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/423,557, titled“METHODS AND SYSTEMS OF SENSING FOR NEURAL STIMULATION,” filed Nov. 17,2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/423,536, titled “SYSTEMS ANDMETHODS FOR PROVIDING ASSESSMENTS FOR NEURAL STIMULATION,” filed Nov.17, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/423,532, titled“METHODS AND SYSTEMS OF DOSING FOR NEURAL STIMULATION,” filed Nov. 17,2016, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein in theirentireties for any and all purposes.

FIELD OF THE DISCLOSURE

This disclosure relates generally to methods and systems for neuralstimulation. In particular, the methods and system of the presentdisclosure can provide stimulation signals, including visual, auditoryand peripheral nerve stimulation signals, to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject.

BACKGROUND

Neural oscillation occurs in humans or animals and includes rhythmic orrepetitive neural activity in the central nervous system. Neural tissuecan generate oscillatory activity by mechanisms within individualneurons or by interactions between neurons. Oscillations can appear aseither oscillations in membrane potential or as rhythmic patterns ofaction potentials, which can produce oscillatory activation ofpost-synaptic neurons. Synchronized activity of a group of neurons cangive rise to macroscopic oscillations, which can be observed byelectroencephalography (“EEG”). Neural oscillations can be characterizedby their frequency, amplitude and phase. Neural oscillations can giverise to electrical impulses that form a brainwave. These signalproperties can be observed from neural recordings using time-frequencyanalysis.

BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to neuralstimulation via visual stimulation. Visual stimulation, including visualsignals, can affect frequencies of neural oscillations. The visualstimulation can elicit brainwave effects or stimulation via modulatedvisual input. The visual stimulation can adjust, control or otherwisemanage the frequency of the neural oscillations to provide beneficialeffects to one or more cognitive states or cognitive functions of thebrain or the immune system, while mitigating or preventing adverseconsequences on a cognitive state or cognitive function. For example,systems and methods of the present technology can treat, prevent,protect against or otherwise affect Alzheimer's Disease.

External signals, such as light pulses, can be observed or perceived bythe brain. The brain can observe or perceive the light pulses via theprocess of transduction in which specialized light sensing cells receivethe light pulse and conduct electrons or information to the brain viaoptical nerves. The brain, in response to observing or perceiving thelight pulses, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency of neuraloscillations. This stimulation can result in repeated activation ofportions of the brain which are known to process input, such as thevisual cortex. For example, light pulses generated at predeterminedfrequency and perceived by ocular means via a direct visual field or aperipheral visual field can trigger neural activity in the brain tocause a predetermined or resulting frequency of neural oscillations. Thefrequency of neural oscillations can be affected by or correspond to thefrequency of light pulses. Thus, systems and methods of the presentdisclosure can provide brainwave entrainment (or neural entrainment)using external visual stimulus such as light pulses emitted at apredetermined frequency to synchronize electrical activity among groupsof neurons based on the frequency of light pulses. Brain entrainment (orneural entrainment) can be observed based on the aggregate frequency ofoscillations produced by the synchronous electrical activity inensembles of cortical neurons.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for neural stimulation viavisual stimulation. The system can include or refer to a neuralstimulation system or a visual neural stimulation system. The neuralstimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwise communicatewith a light generation module, light adjustment module, unwantedfrequency filtering module, profile manager, side effects managementmodule, or feedback monitor. The neural stimulation system can include,interface with, or otherwise communicate with a visual signalingcomponent, filtering component, or feedback component.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of neural stimulation viavisual stimulation. The method can include a neural stimulation systemidentifying a visual signal to provide. The neural stimulation systemcan generate and transmit the identified visual signal. The neuralstimulation system can receive or determine feedback associated withneural activity, physiological activity, environmental parameters, ordevice parameters. The neural stimulation system can manage, control, oradjust the visual signal based on the feedback.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to neuralstimulation via auditory stimulation. For example, systems and methodsof the present disclosure can affect frequencies of neural oscillationsusing auditory stimulation. The auditory stimulation can elicitbrainwave effects or stimulation via modulated auditory input. Theauditory stimulation can adjust, control or otherwise manage thefrequency of the neural oscillations to provide beneficial effects toone or more cognitive states or cognitive functions of the brain or theimmune system, while mitigating or preventing adverse consequences on acognitive state or cognitive function. For example, systems and methodsof the present technology can treat, prevent, protect against orotherwise affect Alzheimer's Disease.

External signals, such as audio signals, can be observed or perceived bythe brain. The brain can observe or perceive the audio signals via theprocess of transduction in which specialized acoustic sensing cellsreceive the audio signals and conduct electrons or information to thebrain via cochlear cells or nerves. The brain, in response to perceivingthe audio signals, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency ofneural oscillations. This stimulation can result in repeated activationof portions of the brain which are known to process input, such as theauditory cortex. For example, audio signals having a predeterminedmodulation frequency and perceived by the auditory cortex via cochlearmeans can trigger neural activity in the brain to cause a predeterminedor resulting frequency of neural oscillations. The frequency of neuraloscillations can be affected by or correspond to the modulationfrequency of the audio signals. Thus, systems and methods of the presentdisclosure can perform neural stimulation via auditory stimulation.Systems and methods of the present disclosure can provide brainwaveentrainment (also referred to as neural entrainment or brainentrainment) using external auditory stimulus such as audio signalsforming acoustic pulses emitted at a predetermined modulation frequencyto synchronize electrical activity among groups of neurons based on themodulation frequency of the audio signals. Brainwave entrainment can beobserved based on the aggregate frequency of oscillations produced bythe synchronous electrical activity in ensembles of cortical neuronswhich the acoustic pulses can adjust to synchronize with frequency ofthe acoustic pulses.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for neural stimulation viaauditory stimulation. The system can include or refer to an neuralstimulation system. The neural stimulation system can include, interfacewith, or otherwise communicate with an audio generation module, audioadjustment module, unwanted frequency filtering module, profile manager,side effects management module, or feedback monitor. The neuralstimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwise communicatewith an audio signaling component, filtering component, or feedbackcomponent.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of performing neuralstimulation via auditory stimulation. The method can include a neuralstimulation system identifying an audio signal to provide. The neuralstimulation system can generate and transmit the identified audiosignal. The neural stimulation system can receive or determine feedbackassociated with neural activity, physiological activity, environmentalparameters, or device parameters. The neural stimulation system canmanage, control, or adjust the audio signal based on the feedback.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to neuralstimulation via peripheral nerve stimulation. Peripheral nervestimulation can include stimulation of nerves of the peripheral nervesystem. Peripheral nerve stimulation can include stimulation of nervesthat are peripheral to or remote from the brain. Peripheral nervestimulation can include stimulation of nerves which may be part of,associated with, or connected to the spinal cord. The peripheral nervestimulation can adjust, control or otherwise manage the frequency of theneural oscillations to provide beneficial effects to one or morecognitive states or cognitive functions of the brain, while mitigatingor preventing adverse consequences on a cognitive state or cognitivefunction. For example, systems and methods of the present technology cantreat, prevent, protect against or otherwise affect Alzheimer's disease.

Peripheral nerve stimulation can include controlled delivery of anelectric current (e.g., a discharge of an electric current) toperipheral portions of the body through the skin (e.g., transcutaneouselectrical nerve stimulation, “TENS”), which can cause or induceelectrical activity in targeted nerves of the peripheral nervous system,such as sensory nerves. In response, the sensory nerves and theperipheral nervous system transmit signals to the central nervous systemand the brain. The brain, in response to the peripheral nervestimulation, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency of neuraloscillations. For example, peripheral nerve stimulations having apredetermined frequency (e.g., a frequency of the underlying electriccurrent, or a modulation frequency at which an amplitude of the currentis modulated) can trigger neural activity in the brain to cause apredetermined or desired frequency of neural oscillations. The frequencyof neural oscillations can be based on or correspond to the frequency ofthe peripheral nerve stimulations. Thus, systems and methods of thepresent disclosure can cause or induce neural oscillations, which may beassociated with brainwave entrainment (also referred to as neuralentrainment or brain entrainment), using peripheral nerve stimulation,such as electrical currents applied to or across the peripheral nervoussystem, at a predetermined frequency, or based on feedback, tosynchronize electrical activity among groups of neurons based on thefrequency of the stimulation. Brainwave entrainment can be observedbased on the aggregate frequency of oscillations produced by thesynchronous electrical activity in ensembles of cortical neurons, andthe peripheral nerve stimulation pulses can be adjusted in frequency tosynchronize with the oscillations.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for inducing neuraloscillations via peripheral nerve stimulation. The system can include orrefer to a peripheral nerve stimulation system (e.g., peripheral nervestimulation neural stimulation system). The peripheral nerve stimulationsystem can include, interface with, or otherwise communicate with anerve stimulus generation module, nerve stimulus adjustment module, sideeffects management module, or feedback monitor. The peripheral nervestimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwise communicatewith a nerve stimulus generator component, shielding component, feedbackcomponent, or nerve stimulus amplification component.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of inducing neuraloscillations via peripheral nerve stimulation. The method can include aperipheral nerve stimulation system generating a control signalindicating instructions to generate a nerve stimulus. The nervestimulation system can generate and output the nerve stimulus based onthe control signal. The nerve stimulation system can receive ordetermine feedback associated with neural activity, physiologicalactivity, environmental parameters, or device parameters. The nervestimulation system can manage, control, or modify stimulus parametersbased on the feedback. The nerve stimulation system can modify thecontrol signal based on the stimulus parameters in order to modify thenerve stimulus based on the feedback.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to neuralstimulation via multiple modalities of stimulation, including, e.g.,visual signals or visual stimulation and audio signals or auditorystimulation and peripheral nerve signals or peripheral nervestimulation. The multi-modal stimuli can elicit brainwave effects orstimulation. The multi-modal stimuli can adjust, control or otherwiseaffect the frequency of the neural oscillations to provide beneficialeffects to one or more cognitive states, cognitive functions, the immunesystem or inflammation, while mitigating or preventing adverseconsequences on a cognitive state or cognitive function. For example,systems and methods of the present technology can treat, prevent,protect against or otherwise affect Alzheimer's Disease.

Multi-modal stimuli, such as light pulses and audio pulses, can beobserved or perceived by the brain. The brain can observe or perceivethe light pulses via the process of transduction in which specializedlight sensing cells receive the light pulse and conduct electrons orinformation to the brain via optical nerves. The brain, in response toobserving or perceiving the light pulses, can adjust, manage, or controlthe frequency of neural oscillations. This stimulation can result inrepeated activation of portions of the brain which are known to processinput, such as the visual cortex. For example, light pulses generated atpredetermined frequency and perceived by ocular means via a directvisual field or a peripheral visual field can trigger neural activity inthe brain to cause a predetermined or resulting frequency of neuraloscillations.

The brain can observe or perceive the audio signals via the process oftransduction in which specialized acoustic sensing cells receive theaudio signals and conduct electrons or information to the brain viacochlear cells or nerves. The brain, in response to perceiving the audiosignals, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency of neuraloscillations. This stimulation can result in repeated activation ofportions of the brain which are known to process input, such as theauditory cortex. For example, audio signals having a predeterminedmodulation frequency and perceived by the auditory cortex via cochlearmeans can trigger neural activity in the brain to cause a predeterminedor resulting frequency of neural oscillations.

The frequency of neural oscillations can be affected by or correspond tothe frequency of light pulses or audio pulses. Thus, systems and methodsof the present disclosure can provide brainwave entrainment (or neuralentrainment) using multi-modal stimuli such as light pulses and audiopulses emitted at a predetermined frequency to synchronize electricalactivity among groups of neurons based on the frequency or frequenciesof the multi-modal stimuli. Brain entrainment (or neural entrainment)can be observed based on the aggregate frequency of oscillationsproduced by the synchronous electrical activity in ensembles of corticalneurons.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for neural stimulation viaat least a combination of visual stimulation and auditory stimulationand peripheral nerve stimulation. The system can include or refer to aneural stimulation system. The neural stimulation system can include,interface with, or otherwise communicate with a stimuli generationmodule, stimuli adjustment module, unwanted frequency filtering module,profile manager, side effects management module, or feedback monitor.The neural stimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with a signaling component, filtering component, or feedbackcomponent.

At least one aspect is directed to a method for neural stimulation viavisual stimulation and auditory stimulation. The method can include aneural stimulation system identifying a signal to provide. The neuralstimulation system can generate and transmit the identified signal. Theneural stimulation system can receive or determine feedback associatedwith neural activity, physiological activity, environmental parameters,or device parameters. The neural stimulation system can manage, control,or adjust the signal based on the feedback.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to selectingdosing parameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject. Multi-modal stimuli (e.g.,visual, auditory, among others) can elicit brainwave effects orstimulation. The multi-modal stimuli can adjust, control or otherwisemanage the frequency of the neural oscillations to provide beneficialeffects to one or more cognitive states or cognitive functions of thebrain or the immune system, while mitigating or preventing adverseconsequences on a cognitive state or cognitive function.

Multi-modal stimuli, such as light pulses, audio pulses, and otherstimulation signals, can be observed or perceived by the brain. Thebrain can observe or perceive light pulses via the process oftransduction in which specialized light sensing cells receive the lightpulse and conduct electrons or information to the brain via opticalnerves. The brain, in response to observing or perceiving thestimulation signals, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency ofneural oscillations. This stimulation can result in repeated activationof portions of the brain which are known to process input, such as thevisual cortex. For example, light pulses generated at predeterminedfrequency and perceived by ocular means via a direct visual field or aperipheral visual field can trigger neural activity in the brain tocause a predetermined or resulting frequency of neural oscillations.

The brain can observe or perceive auditory (or audio) signals via theprocess of transduction in which specialized acoustic sensing cellsreceive the audio signals and conduct electrons or information to thebrain via cochlear cells or nerves. The brain, in response to perceivingthe audio signals, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency ofneural oscillations. This stimulation can result in repeated activationof portions of the brain which are known to process input, such as theauditory cortex. For example, audio signals having a predeterminedmodulation frequency and perceived by the auditory cortex via cochlearmeans can trigger neural activity in the brain to cause a predeterminedor resulting frequency of neural oscillations. The brain also canobserve or perceive various other forms of stimulation (e.g.,deep-brain, olfactory, touch, etc.) via other mechanisms, which cancause neural oscillations in the brain to occur at a particularfrequency, based on the stimulation signals.

The frequency of neural oscillations can be affected by or cancorrespond to the frequency of stimulation signals, such as light pulsesor audio pulses. Thus, systems and methods of the present disclosure canprovide brainwave entrainment (or neural entrainment) using multi-modalstimuli such as light pulses and audio pulses emitted at a predeterminedfrequency to synchronize electrical activity among groups of neuronsbased on the frequency or frequencies of the multi-modal stimuli. Brainentrainment (or neural entrainment) can be observed based on theaggregate frequency of oscillations produced by the synchronouselectrical activity in ensembles of cortical neurons.

The frequency of neural oscillations, as well as other factors that maybe relevant to the efficacy of treatment, also can be affected byvarious factors that may be specific to the subject. Subjects havingcertain characteristics (e.g., age, gender, dominant hand, cognitivefunction, mental illness, etc.) may respond differently to stimulationsignals based on these or other characteristics, traits or habits. Inaddition, other non-inherent factors, such as the stimulus method, thesubject's attention level, the time of day at which the therapy isadministered, and various factors related to the subject's diet (e.g.,blood sugar, caffeine intake, nicotine intake, etc.), state of mind,physical and/or mental condition also may impact the efficacy oftreatment. These and other factors also may impact the quality oftherapy indirectly by affecting the subject's adherence to a therapyregimen and by increasing or decreasing unpleasant or undesirable sideeffects or otherwise rendering the therapy intolerable for the subject.

In addition to the subject-specific factors described above, otherfactors also may impact the efficacy of treatment for certain subjects.Parameters related to stimulus signals may increase or decrease theefficacy of therapy for certain subjects. Such parameters may generallybe referred to as dosing parameters. For example, subjects may respondto therapies differently based on dosing parameters such as the modality(or the ordered combination of modalities) of deliverance for thestimulation signal, the duration of a stimulus signal, the intensity ofthe stimulus signal, and the brain region targeted by the stimulussignal. Monitoring conditions associated with the subject in real time(e.g., during the course of the stimulation therapy), as well as over alonger period of time (e.g., days, weeks, months, or years) can provideinformation that may be used to adjust a therapy regimen to make thetherapy more effective and/or more tolerable for an individual subject.In some instances, the therapy also may be adjusted based in part of thesubject-specific factors described above.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system forselecting dosing parameters of stimulation signals to inducesynchronized neural oscillations in the brain of the subject. The systemcan include or refer to a neural stimulation system. The neuralstimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwise communicatewith a dosing management module, unwanted frequency filtering module,profile manager, side effects management module, or feedback monitor.The neural stimulation system can include, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with a signaling component, filtering component, or feedbackcomponent.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of selecting dosingparameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of the subject. The method can be implementedby a neural stimulation system that can determine personalizationparameters and can identify a signal to provide. The neural stimulationsystem can generate and transmit the identified signal. The neuralstimulation system can receive or determine feedback associated withneural activity, physiological activity, environmental parameters, ordevice parameters. The neural stimulation system can manage, control, oradjust the signal based on the feedback.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to providingassessments for neural stimulation on subjects in response to externalstimuli. The external stimuli may adjust, control, or otherwise managethe frequency of the neural oscillations of the brain. When the neuraloscillations of the brain are entrained to a particular frequency, theremay be beneficial effects to the cognitive states or functions of thebrain, while mitigating or preventing adverse consequence to thecognitive state or functions. To determine whether the application ofthe external stimuli entrains the brain of a subject to the particularfrequency and affects the cognitive states or functions of the brain,cognitive assessments may be performed on the subject.

To determine select which type of external stimuli is to be applied tothe nervous system of a subject, a cognitive and physiologicalassessment may be performed on the subject. Certain types of externalstimuli may not be effective in entraining the neural oscillations ofthe brain to the particular frequency. For example, applying an auditorystimulus to a subject with severe hearing loss may not result in theneural oscillations of the brain to be entrained to the particularfrequency, as the auditory system of the brain may not pick up theexternal stimuli due to hearing loss. Based on the results of thecognitive and physiological assessments, the type of external stimuli toapply to the nervous system of the subject may be identified.

By applying the external stimuli to the nervous system of the subject,neural oscillations may be induced in the brain of the subject. Theexternal stimuli may be delivered to the nervous system of the subjectvia the visual system of the subject using visual stimuli, auditorysystem of the subject using auditory stimuli, or peripheral nervestimuli. The neural oscillations of the brain of the subject may bemonitored using brain wave sensors, electroencephalography (EEG)devices, electrooculography (EOG) devices, and magnetoencephalography(MEG) devices. Various other signs and indications (e.g., attentiveness,physiology, etc.) from the subject may also be monitored. After havingapplied the external stimuli to the nervous system of the subject,additional cognitive and physiological assessments may be repeatedlyperformed over time to determine whether the external stimuli wereeffective in entraining the brain of the subject to the particularfrequency and in improving the cognitive states or functions of thebrain.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation on a subject in response to external stimulation.The system may include an assessment administration module, a subjectassessment monitor, a subject physiological monitor, a stimulusgenerator module, a neural oscillation module, an assessment applicationdevice, a stimulus output device, and a measurement device. Theassessment administration module can send a control signal to theassessment application device. The control signal can specify a type ofassessment, a time duration of assessment, and/or one or morecharacteristics or parameters (for example, intensity, color, pulsefrequency, signal frequency, etc.) of stimulus of the assessment. Usingthe control signal, the assessment application device can administer theassessment to a subject. The subject assessment monitor can, via one ormore of the measurement device, measure a task response of the subjectto the administered assessment. The subject physiological monitor can,via one or more of the measurement device, measure a physiologicalresponse of the subject, while the assessment is administered. Thestimulus generation device can send a control signal to the stimulusoutput device to apply the stimulus to the subject. The neuraloscillation monitor can, via the one or more of measurement device,measure a neural response of the subject to the stimulus. Using feedbackdata from the subject assessment monitor, the subject physiologicalmonitor, and/or the neural oscillation monitor, the assessmentadministration module can modify the control signal sent to theassessment application device and modify the assessment administered tothe subject. Using feedback data from the subject assessment monitor,the subject physiological monitor, and/or the neural oscillationmonitor, the stimulus generator module can modify the control signalsent to the stimulus output device and can modify the stimulus appliedto the subject.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of providing assessments forneural stimulation on a subject in response to stimulation. A cognitiveassessment system can send a control signal to the assessmentapplication device. The control signal can specify a type of assessment,a time duration of assessment, and/or an intensity of stimulus of theassessment. Using the control signal, the cognitive assessment systemcan administer the assessment to a subject. The cognitive assessmentsystem can, via the measurement device, measure a task response of thesubject to the administered assessment. The cognitive assessment systemcan, via the measurement device, measure a physiological response of thesubject, while the assessment is administered. The cognitive assessmentsystem can send a control signal to the stimulus output device to applythe stimulus to the subject. The cognitive assessment system can, viathe measurement device, measure a neural response of the subject to thestimulus. Using feedback data, the cognitive assessment system canmodify the control signal sent to the assessment application device andmodify the assessment administered to the subject. Using feedback data,the cognitive assessment system can modify the control signal sent tothe stimulus output device and can modify the stimulus applied to thesubject.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed tostimulation sensing. An external stimulus may adjust, control, orotherwise manage the frequency of the neural oscillations of the brain.When the neural oscillations of the brain are entrained to a particularfrequency, there may be beneficial effects to the cognitive states orfunctions of the brain, while mitigating or preventing adverseconsequence to the cognitive state or functions. To ensure that theneural oscillations of the brain are entrained to the specificfrequency, the external stimuli may be adjusted, modified, or changedbased on measurements of the neural oscillations of the brain as well asother physiological traits of the subject.

To induce neural oscillations in a brain of a subject, external stimulimay be applied to the nervous system of a subject. The external stimulimay be delivered to the nervous system of the subject via the visualsystem of the subject using visual stimuli, auditory system of thesubject using auditory stimuli, or peripheral nerve stimuli. The neuraloscillations of the brain of the subject may be monitored usingelectroencephalography (EEG) and magnetoencephalography (MEG) readings.Various other signs and indications (e.g., attentiveness, physiology,etc.) from the subject may also be monitored, while applying theexternal stimuli. These measurements may then be used to adjust, modify,or change the external stimuli to ensure that the neural oscillationsare entrained to the specified frequency. The measurements may also beused to determine whether the subject is receiving the external stimuli.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for stimulation sensing. Thesystem may include a neural oscillation monitor, a subject attentivenessmonitor, a subject physiological monitor, a stimulus generator module, astimulus control module, a simulated response module, a stimulusgeneration policy, a sensor log, a multi-stimuli synchronization module,one or more stimulus output devices, and one or more measurementdevices. The stimulus generator module can generate a stimulus controlsignal for the one or more stimulus output devices to convert to anexternal stimulus to apply to a subject. The stimulus control module canadjust the stimulus control signal based on the stimulus generationpolicy. The simulated response module can determine a simulated responseto the external stimulus. The neural oscillation monitor can use the oneor more measurement devices to monitor neural oscillations of thesubject. The subject attentiveness monitor can use the one or moremeasurement devices to monitor whether the subject is attentive whilethe external stimulus is applied. The subject physiological monitor canuse the one or more measurement devices to monitor physiological statusof the subject while the external stimulus is applied. The sensor logcan store the neural oscillations, attentiveness, and physiologicalstatus of the subject.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of stimulation sensing. Theneural stimulation sensing system can generate a stimulus control signalfor a stimulus output device to convert to an external stimulus to applyto a subject. The neural stimulation sensing system can adjust thestimulus control signal based on a stimulus generation policy. Theneural stimulation sensing system can determine a simulated response tothe external stimulus. The neural stimulation sensing system can use theone or more measurement devices to monitor neural oscillations of thesubject, to monitor whether the subject is attentive while the externalstimulus is applied, and to monitor physiological status of the subjectwhile the external stimulus is applied. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can store the neural oscillations, attentiveness, andphysiological status of the subject.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for sensing neuraloscillations induced by external stimulus. The neural stimulationsensing system can include a stimulus generator module, a stimulusoutput device, a first measurement device, a second measurement device,a simulated response module, a neural oscillation monitor, and astimulus control module. The stimulus generator module can generate astimulus control signal. The stimulus output device can convert thestimulus control signal to an external stimulus and apply the externalstimulus to a subject. The first measurement device can measure theoutputted external stimulus from the stimulus output device and ambientnoise, and relay the measurement to the simulated response module. Thesimulated response module can generate a simulated neural oscillation ofthe subject based on the outputted external stimulus and the ambientnoise, and can relay the simulated neural oscillation to the neuraloscillation monitor. The second measurement device can measure neuraloscillations of the subject and relay the measurement to the neuraloscillation monitor. The neural oscillation monitor can receive themeasurements from the second measurement device and the simulated neuraloscillations from the simulated response module. The neural oscillationmonitor can identify an artefact from the received measurements and thesimulated neural oscillations, and relay to the stimulus control module.The stimulus control module can determine an adjustment to the externalstimulus based on the artefact identified by the neural oscillationmonitor and the stimulus generation policy. The stimulus generatormodule can adjust the stimulus control signal based on the adjustmentdetermined by the stimulus control module.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of sensing neuraloscillations induced by external stimulus. A neural stimulation sensingsystem can generate a stimulus control signal. The neural stimulationsensing system can convert the stimulus control signal to an externalstimulus and apply the external stimulus to a subject. The neuralstimulation sensing system can measure the outputted external stimulusand ambient noise. The neural stimulation sensing system can generate asimulated neural oscillation of the subject based on the outputtedexternal stimulus and the ambient noise. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can measure neural oscillations of the subject. The neuralstimulation sensing system can identify an artefact from the receivedmeasurements and the simulated neural oscillations. The neuralstimulation sensing system can determine an adjustment to the externalstimulus based on the artefact and a stimulus generation policy. Theneural stimulation sensing system can adjust the stimulus control signalbased on the determined adjustment.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for monitoring subjectattentiveness during application of an external stimulus to induceneural oscillation. The neural stimulation sensing system can include astimulus generator module, a stimulus output device, a first measurementdevice, a second measurement device, a subject attentiveness monitor, astimulus control module. The stimulus generator module can generate astimulus control signal. The stimulus output device can convert thestimulus control signal to an external stimulus and apply the externalstimulus to a subject. The first measurement device can measure theoutputted external stimulus from the stimulus output device and ambientnoise, and relay the measurement to the subject attentiveness monitor.The second measurement device can monitor the subject and relay themeasurement to the subject attentiveness monitor. The subjectattentiveness monitor can determine whether the subject is attentivebased on the monitoring of the subject and relay the determination tothe stimulus control module. The stimulus control module can determinean adjustment to the external stimulus based on the determination of thesubject attentiveness monitor and the stimulus generation policy. Thestimulus generator module can adjust the stimulus control signal basedon the adjustment determined by the stimulus control module.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of monitoring subjectattentiveness during application of an external stimulus to induceneural oscillation. A neural stimulation sensing system can generate astimulus control signal. The neural stimulation sensing system canconvert the stimulus control signal to an external stimulus and applythe external stimulus to a subject. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can measure the outputted external stimulus from the stimulusoutput device and ambient noise. The neural stimulation sensing systemcan monitor the subject. The neural stimulation system can determinewhether the subject is attentive based on the monitoring of the subject.The neural stimulation system can determine an adjustment to theexternal stimulus based on the determination and a stimulus generationpolicy. The neural stimulation system can adjust the stimulus controlsignal based on the determined adjustment.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for monitoring subjectphysiological status during application of an external stimulus toinduce neural oscillation. The neural stimulation sensing system caninclude a stimulus generator module, a stimulus output device, a firstmeasurement device, a second measurement device, a subject physiologicalmonitor, a stimulus control module. The stimulus generator module cangenerate a stimulus control signal. The stimulus output device canconvert the stimulus control signal to an external stimulus and applythe external stimulus to a subject. The first measurement device canmeasure the outputted external stimulus from the stimulus output deviceand ambient noise, and relay the measurement to the subjectattentiveness monitor. The second measurement device can monitor thesubject and relay the measurement to the subject attentiveness monitor.The subject physiological monitor can identify a physiological status ofthe subject based on the monitoring of the subject and relay thedetermination to the stimulus control module. The stimulus controlmodule can determine an adjustment to the external stimulus based on thephysiological status identified by the subject physiological monitor andthe stimulus generation policy. The stimulus generator module can adjustthe stimulus control signal based on the adjustment determined by thestimulus control module.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of monitoring subjectphysiological status during application of an external stimulus toinduce neural oscillation. Neural stimulation sensing system cangenerate a stimulus control signal. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can convert the stimulus control signal to an external stimulusand apply the external stimulus to a subject. The neural stimulationsensing system can measure the outputted external stimulus from thestimulus output device and ambient noise. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can monitor the subject. The neural stimulation system canidentify a physiological status of the subject based on the monitoringof the subject. The neural stimulation system can determine anadjustment to the external stimulus based on the identifiedphysiological status and a stimulus generation policy. The neuralstimulation system can adjust the stimulus control signal based on thedetermined adjustment.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for synchronizing multiplestimuli to induce neural oscillation. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can include a stimulus generator module, a stimulus outputdevice, a first measurement device, a second measurement device, asimulated response module, a neural oscillation monitor, a stimuluscontrol module, and a multi-stimuli synchronization module. The stimulusgenerator module can generate a plurality of stimuli waveforms. Thestimulus output device can convert the plurality of stimuli waveforms toa plurality of external stimuli and apply the plurality of externalstimuli to a subject. The first measurement device can measure theoutputted plurality of external stimuli from the stimulus output deviceand ambient noise, and relay the measurement to the simulated responsemodule. The simulated response module can generate a simulated neuraloscillation of the subject based on the outputted plurality of externalstimuli and the ambient noise, and can relay the simulated neuraloscillation to the neural oscillation monitor. The second measurementdevice can measure neural oscillations of the subject and relay themeasurement to the neural oscillation monitor. The neural oscillationmonitor can receive the measurements from the second measurement deviceand the simulated neural oscillations from the simulated responsemodule. The neural oscillation monitor can identify an artefact from thereceived measurements and the simulated neural oscillations, and relayto the multi-stimuli synchronization module. The multi-stimulisynchronization module can identify phase differences between the neuraloscillation measurements. The stimulus control module can determine anadjustment to the external stimuli based on the artefact identified bythe neural oscillation monitor, the phase differences between the neuraloscillation measurements, and the stimulus generation policy. Thestimulus generator module can adjust the stimuli waveform based on theadjustment determined by the stimulus control module.

At least one aspect is directed to a method of synchronizing multiplestimuli to induce neural oscillation. A neural stimulation sensingsystem can generate a plurality of stimulus control signals. The neuralstimulation sensing system can convert the plurality of stimulus controlsignals to a plurality of external stimuli and apply the plurality ofexternal stimuli to a subject. The neural stimulation sensing system canmeasure the outputted external stimulus and ambient noise. The neuralstimulation sensing system can generate a simulated neural oscillationof the subject based on the outputted plurality of external stimuli andthe ambient noise. The neural stimulation sensing system can measureneural oscillations of the subject. The neural stimulation sensingsystem can identify an artefact from the received measurements and thesimulated neural oscillations. The neural stimulation sensing system canidentify phase differences between the neural oscillation measurements.The neural stimulation sensing system can determine an adjustment to theexternal stimulus based on the artefact, the identified phasedifferences, and a stimulus generation policy. The neural stimulationsensing system can adjust the stimulus control signal based on thedetermined adjustment.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include eyeglasses. The eyeglasses may be formed from a wireframe.The system may include a photodiode. The photodiode may be coupled tothe wireframe and positioned to detect an ambient light level betweenthe wireframe and a fovea of a subject. The system may include aplurality of light sources. The plurality of light sources may becoupled to the wireframe and positioned to direct light towards thefovea of the subject. The system may include a profile manager executedby a neural stimulation system comprising a processor. The profilemanager may retrieve, based on a lookup, a profile corresponding to theidentifier of the subject. The profile manager may select, based on theprofile, a light pattern having a fixed parameter and a variableparameter. The system may include a light adjustment module, executed bythe neural stimulation system. The light adjustment module may set avalue of the variable parameter based on applying a policy associatedwith the profile using the ambient light level. The system may include alight generation module, executed by the neural stimulation system. Thelight generation module may construct an output signal based on thelight pattern, the fixed parameter and the variable parameter that isset by the ambient level. The light generation module, executed by theneural stimulation system, may provide the output signal to theplurality of light sources to direct light towards the fovea of thesubject in accordance with the constructed output signal.

In some embodiments, the system can administer a pharmacological agentto the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the method includes administering a pharmacologicalagent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the fixed parameter may correspond to a stimulationfrequency, and the variable parameter may correspond to an intensitylevel. In some embodiments, at least one of the plurality of lightsources may be positioned to direct the light towards within 15 degreesof the fovea of the subject. In some embodiments, a feedback monitor maytrack, via a feedback sensor, movement of the fovea of the subject. Insome embodiments, the light adjustment module may adjust, responsive tothe movement of the fovea of the subject, at least one of the pluralityof light sources to direct the light towards within 15 degrees of thefovea of the subject.

In some embodiments, a feedback monitor may measure physiologicalconditions using a feedback sensor. In some embodiments, a side effectsmanagement module may receive the measured physiological conditions fromthe feedback monitor. The side effects management module may generate aninstruction to adjust the variable parameter to a second value. The sideeffects management module may transmit the instruction to the lightadjustment module. In some embodiments, the light adjustment module mayreceive the instruction from the side effects management module. Thelight adjustment module may determine a second value for the variableparameter of the light pattern.

In some embodiments, a feedback monitor may measure a heart rate of thesubject using a pulse rate monitor. In some embodiments, a side effectsmanagement module may receive the heart rate measured by the feedbackmonitor. The side effects management module may compare the heart ratewith a threshold. The side effects management module may determine,based on the comparison, that the heart rate exceeds the threshold. Theside effects management module may adjust, responsive to thedetermination that the heart rate exceeds the threshold, the variableparameter to a second value to lower an intensity of the light. In someembodiments, the light adjustment module may receive the second value ofthe variable parameter. In some embodiments, the light adjustment modulemay provide a second output signal to cause the plurality of lightsources to direct light at a lower intensity corresponding to the secondvalue.

In some embodiments, a feedback monitor may measure a heart rate of thesubject using a pulse rate monitor. The feedback monitor may measurebrain wave activity using a brain wave sensor. In some embodiments, aside effects management module may receive the heart rate measured bythe feedback monitor. The side effects management module may receive thebrain wave activity measured by the brain wave sensor. The side effectsmanagement module may determine that the heart rate is less than a firstthreshold. The side effects management module may determine that thebrain wave activity is less than a second threshold. The side effectsmanagement module may adjust, responsive to the determination that theheart rate is less the first threshold and the brain wave activity isless than the second threshold, the variable parameter to a second valueto increase an intensity of the light. In some embodiments, the lightadjustment module may receive the second value of the variableparameter. The light adjustment module may provide a second outputsignal to cause the plurality of light sources to direct light at anincreased intensity corresponding to the second value. In someembodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include eyeglasses. The system may include a sensor. The sensor maybe coupled to a portion of the eyeglasses and positioned to detect anambient light level between the portion of the eyeglasses and a fovea ofa subject. The system may include a plurality of light sources. Theplurality of light sources may be coupled to the eyeglasses andpositioned to direct light towards the fovea of the subject. The systemmay include a neural stimulation system comprising a processor. Theneural stimulation system may retrieve, based on a lookup, a profilecorresponding to the identifier of the subject. The neural stimulationsystem may select, based on the profile, a light pattern having a fixedparameter and a variable parameter. The neural stimulation system mayset a value of the variable parameter based on applying a policyassociated with the profile using the ambient light level. The neuralstimulation system may construct an output signal based on the lightpattern, the fixed parameter and the variable parameter that is set bythe ambient level. The neural stimulation system may provide the outputsignal to the plurality of light sources to direct light towards thefovea of the subject in accordance with the constructed output signal.

In some embodiments, the system can administer a pharmacological agentto the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the fixed parameter may correspond to a stimulationfrequency, and the variable parameter may correspond to an intensitylevel. In some embodiments, at least one of the plurality of lightsources may be positioned to direct the light towards within 15 degreesof the fovea of the subject. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may track, via a feedback sensor, movement of the fovea of thesubject. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may adjust,responsive to the movement of the fovea of the subject, at least one ofthe plurality of light sources to direct the light towards within 15degrees of the fovea of the subject.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may measurephysiological conditions using a feedback sensor. In some embodiments,the neural stimulation system may receive the measured physiologicalconditions from the feedback monitor. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation system may generate an instruction to adjust the variableparameter to a second value. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may transmit the instruction to a light adjustment module. Insome embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine a secondvalue for the variable parameter of the light pattern.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may measure a heartrate of the subject using a pulse rate monitor. In some embodiments, theneural stimulation system may compare the heart rate with a threshold.In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine, basedon the comparison, that the heart rate exceeds the threshold. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation system may adjust, responsive to thedetermination that the heart rate exceeds the threshold, the variableparameter to a second value to lower an intensity of the light. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation system may provide a second outputsignal to cause the plurality of light sources to direct light at alower intensity corresponding to the second value.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may measure a heartrate of the subject using a pulse rate monitor. In some embodiments, theneural stimulation system may measure brain wave activity using a brainwave sensor. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system maydetermine that the heart rate is less than a first threshold. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine that the brainwave activity is less than a second threshold. In some embodiments, theneural stimulation system may adjust, responsive to the determinationthat the heart rate is less the first threshold and the brain waveactivity is less than the second threshold, the variable parameter to asecond value to increase an intensity of the light. In some embodiments,the neural stimulation system may provide a second output signal tocause the plurality of light sources to direct light at an increasedintensity corresponding to the second value. In some embodiments, thecognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include eyeglasses. The system may a sensor. The sensor may becoupled to a portion of the eyeglasses and positioned to detect anambient light level between the portion of the eyeglasses and a fovea ofa subject. The system may include a plurality of light sources. Aplurality of light sources may be coupled to the eyeglasses andpositioned to direct light towards the fovea of the subject. The systemmay include one or more processors. The one or more processors mayexecute one or more programs to treat a subject in need of a treatmentof a brain disease. The one or more programs may include instructionsfor conducting a therapy session. The therapy session may includeidentifying a profile corresponding to the identifier of the subject.The therapy session may include selecting, based on the profile, a lightpattern having a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. The therapysession may include setting a value of the variable parameter based onapplying a policy associated with the profile using the ambient lightlevel. The therapy session may include constructing an output signalbased on the light pattern, the fixed parameter and the variableparameter that is set by the ambient level. The therapy session mayinclude providing the output signal to the plurality of light sources todirect light towards the fovea of the subject in accordance with theconstructed output signal.

In some embodiments, the therapy session includes administering apharmacological agent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, orsubsequent to administration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agentcan be a monoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the fixed parameter may correspond to a stimulationfrequency, and the variable parameter may correspond to an intensitylevel. In some embodiments, at least one of the plurality of lightsources may be positioned to direct the light towards within 15 degreesof the fovea of the subject. In some embodiments, the therapy sessionmay include tracking, via a feedback sensor, movement of the fovea ofthe subject. In some embodiments, the therapy session may includeadjusting, responsive to the movement of the fovea of the subject, atleast one of the plurality of light sources to direct the light towardswithin 15 degrees of the fovea of the subject.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include measuringphysiological conditions using a feedback sensor. In some embodiments,the therapy session may include comparing the heart rate with athreshold. In some embodiments, the therapy session may includedetermining, based on the comparison, that the heart rate exceeds thethreshold. In some embodiments, the therapy session may includeadjusting, responsive to the determination that the heart rate exceedsthe threshold, the variable parameter to a second value to lower anintensity of the light. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude providing a second output signal to cause the plurality of lightsources to direct light at a lower intensity corresponding to the secondvalue.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method oftreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The methodmay include administering a stimulus to the subject using a system. Thesystem may include eyeglasses. The eye glasses may be formed from awireframe. The system may include a photodiode. The photodiode may becoupled to the wireframe and positioned to detect an ambient light levelbetween the wireframe and a fovea of a subject. The system may include aplurality of light sources. The plurality of light sources may becoupled to the wireframe and positioned to direct light towards thefovea of the subject. The system may include an input device. The inputdevice may receive an identifier of the subject. The system may includea profile manager executed by a neural stimulation system comprising aprocessor. The profile manager may retrieve, based on a lookup, aprofile corresponding to the identifier of the subject. The profilemanager may select, based on the profile, a light pattern having a fixedparameter and a variable parameter. The system may include a lightadjustment module executed by the neural stimulation system. The lightadjustment module may set a value of the variable parameter based onapplying a policy associated with the profile using the ambient lightlevel. The system may include a light generation module executed by theneural stimulation system. The light generation module may construct anoutput signal based on the light pattern, the fixed parameter and thevariable parameter that is set by the ambient level. The lightgeneration module may provide the output signal to the plurality oflight sources to direct light towards the fovea of the subject inaccordance with the constructed output signal. In some embodiments, thecognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

In some embodiments, the method includes administering a pharmacologicalagent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include a feedback monitor executed by at least one processor of aneural stimulation system. The feedback monitor may receive anindication of an ambient audio signal detected by a microphone. Thesystem may include a profile manager executed by the neural stimulationsystem. The profile manager may receive an identifier of the subject andselect, from a profile corresponding to the identifier, an audio signalcomprising a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. The system mayinclude an audio generation module executed by the neural stimulationsystem. The audio generation module may set the variable parameter to afirst value based on the variable parameter. The system may include anaudio generation module executed by the neural stimulation system. Theaudio generation module may generate an output signal based on the fixedparameter and the first value of the variable parameter, and provide theoutput signal to the speaker to cause the speaker to provide the soundto the subject. The feedback monitor may measure, via a feedback sensor,a physiological condition of the subject during a first time interval.The system may include an audio adjustment module executed by the neuralstimulation system. The audio adjustment module may adjust the variableparameter to a second value. The audio generation module may generate asecond output signal based on the fixed parameter and the second valueof the variable parameter, and provide the output signal to the speakerto cause the speaker to provide modified sound to the subject.

In some embodiments, the system can administer a pharmacological agentto the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine, basedon the physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during asecond time interval subsequent to the first time interval, a level ofattention. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system maycompare the level of attention with a threshold. In some embodiments,the neural stimulation system may determine, based on the comparison,that the level of attention does not satisfy the threshold. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation system may adjust, responsive to thelevel attention not satisfying the threshold, the variable parameter toa third value greater than the second value.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine asecond physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during asecond time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation systemmay adjust the variable parameter to a third value less than the secondvalue. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determinea second physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor duringa second time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may overlay an audio signal on the output signal based on thesecond physiological condition.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may detect a secondphysiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during a secondtime interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system mayoverlay, responsive to the detection, an audio signal on the outputsignal based on the second physiological condition. The audio signal mayindicate a duration remaining in a therapy session for treating thecognitive dysfunction.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may detect a secondphysiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during a secondtime interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system mayselect, using a policy, a prerecorded audio signal based on the secondphysiological condition. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may overlay, responsive to the detection, the prerecorded audiosignal on the output signal based on the second physiological condition.The audio signal may indicate a duration remaining in a therapy sessionfor treating the cognitive dysfunction. In some embodiments, thecognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include a microphone, a speaker, a feedback sensor, and a neuralstimulation system. The neural stimulation system may include at leastone processors and may be coupled to the microphone and the speaker. Theneural stimulation system may receive an indication of an ambient audiosignal detected by a microphone. The neural stimulation system mayreceive an identifier of the subject. The neural stimulation system mayselect, from a profile corresponding to the identifier, an audio signalcomprising a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. The neuralstimulation system may the variable parameter to a first value based onthe variable parameter. The neural stimulation system may generate anoutput signal based on the fixed parameter and the first value of thevariable parameter. The neural stimulation system may provide the outputsignal to the speaker to cause the speaker to provide the sound to thesubject. The neural stimulation system may measure, via the feedbacksensor, a physiological condition of the subject during a first timeinterval. The neural stimulation system may adjust the variableparameter to a second value. The neural stimulation system may generatea second output signal based on the fixed parameter and the second valueof the variable parameter, and may provide the output signal to thespeaker to cause the speaker to provide modified sound to the subject.

In some embodiments, the system can administer a pharmacological agentto the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine, basedon the physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during asecond time interval subsequent to the first time interval, a level ofattention. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system maycompare the level of attention with a threshold. In some embodiments,the neural stimulation system may determine, based on the comparison,that the level of attention does not satisfy the threshold. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation system may adjust, responsive to thelevel attention not satisfying the threshold, the variable parameter toa third value greater than the second value.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determine asecond physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during asecond time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation systemmay adjust the variable parameter to a third value less than the secondvalue. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may determinea second physiological condition measured by the feedback monitor duringa second time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may overlay an audio signal on the output signal based on thesecond physiological condition.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may detect a secondphysiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during a secondtime interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system mayoverlay, responsive to the detection, an audio signal on the outputsignal based on the second physiological condition. The audio signal mayindicate a duration remaining in a therapy session for treating thecognitive dysfunction.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system may detect a secondphysiological condition measured by the feedback monitor during a secondtime interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation system mayselect, using a policy, a prerecorded audio signal based on the secondphysiological condition. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationsystem may overlay, responsive to the detection, the prerecorded audiosignal on the output signal based on the second physiological condition.The audio signal may indicate a duration remaining in a therapy sessionfor treating the cognitive dysfunction. In some embodiments, thecognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include a microphone, a speaker, a feedback sensor, and one or moreprocessors. The one or more processors may execute one or more programsto treat a subject in need of a treatment of a brain disease. The one ormore programs may include instructions for conducting a therapy session.The therapy session may include receiving an indication of an ambientaudio signal detected by a microphone. The therapy session may includereceiving an identifier of the subject. The therapy session may includeselecting, from a profile corresponding to the identifier, an audiosignal comprising a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. Thetherapy session may include providing the output signal to the speakerto cause the speaker to provide the sound to the subject. The therapysession may include measuring, via the feedback sensor, a physiologicalcondition of the subject during a first time interval. The therapysession may include adjusting the variable parameter to a second value.The therapy session may include generating a second output signal basedon the fixed parameter and the second value of the variable parameter,and providing the output signal to the speaker to cause the speaker toprovide modified sound to the subject.

In some embodiments, the therapy session includes administering apharmacological agent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, orsubsequent to administration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agentcan be a monoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include determining, basedon the physiological condition measured during a second time intervalsubsequent to the first time interval, a level of attention. In someembodiments, the therapy session may include comparing the level ofattention with a threshold. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude determining, based on the comparison, that the level ofattention does not satisfy the threshold. In some embodiments, thetherapy session may include adjusting, responsive to the level attentionnot satisfying the threshold, the variable parameter to a third valuegreater than the second value.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include determining asecond physiological condition measured during a second time interval.In some embodiments, the therapy session may include adjusting thevariable parameter to a third value less than the second value. In someembodiments, the therapy session may include determining a secondphysiological condition measured during a second time interval. In someembodiments, the therapy session may include overlaying an audio signalon the output signal based on the second physiological condition.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include detecting a secondphysiological condition measured during a second time interval. In someembodiments, the therapy session may include overlaying, responsive tothe detection, an audio signal on the output signal based on the secondphysiological condition. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude detecting a second physiological condition measured during asecond time interval. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude overlaying, responsive to the detection, an audio signal on theoutput signal based on the second physiological condition. The audiosignal may indicate a duration remaining in a therapy session fortreating the cognitive dysfunction. In some embodiments, the cognitivedysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method oftreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The methodmay include administering a stimulus to the subject using a system. Thesystem may include a microphone, a speaker, a feedback sensor, and aneural stimulation system. The neural stimulation system may include atleast one processors and may be coupled to the microphone and thespeaker. The neural stimulation system may receive an indication of anambient audio signal detected by a microphone. The neural stimulationsystem may receive an identifier of the subject. The neural stimulationsystem may select, from a profile corresponding to the identifier, anaudio signal comprising a fixed parameter and a variable parameter. Theneural stimulation system may the variable parameter to a first valuebased on the variable parameter. The neural stimulation system maygenerate an output signal based on the fixed parameter and the firstvalue of the variable parameter. The neural stimulation system mayprovide the output signal to the speaker to cause the speaker to providethe sound to the subject. The neural stimulation system may measure, viathe feedback sensor, a physiological condition of the subject during afirst time interval. The neural stimulation system may adjust thevariable parameter to a second value. The neural stimulation system maygenerate a second output signal based on the fixed parameter and thesecond value of the variable parameter, and may provide the outputsignal to the speaker to cause the speaker to provide modified sound tothe subject. In some embodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may includeAlzheimer's disease.

In some embodiments, the method includes administering a pharmacologicalagent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

At least one aspect is directed to a system for treating cognitivedysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The system may include a lightsource and a speaker. The system may include a visual signalingcomponent executed by a visual neural stimulation system. The visualsignaling component may provide, via the light source, visualstimulation having a first value of a first parameter. The system mayinclude an audio signaling component executed by an auditory neuralstimulation system. The audio signaling component may provide, via thespeaker, audio stimulation having a second value of the secondparameter. The system may include a stimuli orchestration componentexecuted by a neural stimulation orchestration system. The stimuliorchestration component may select, for a first time interval, one ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary based on apolicy. The stimuli orchestration component may select, for the firsttime interval, the other of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to keep constant based on the policy. The stimuliorchestration component may provide instructions to the visual neuralstimulation system or the auditory neural stimulation systemcorresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary to cause the one of the visual neural stimulationsystem or the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation.

In some embodiments, the system can administer a pharmacological agentto the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayselect, for a second time interval subsequent to the first timeinterval, the other of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulationto vary based on the policy. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, the otherof the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to keep constantbased on the policy. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may provide instructions to the visual neuralstimulation system or the auditory neural stimulation systemcorresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary during the second time interval to cause the one ofthe visual neural stimulation system or the auditory neural stimulationsystem to vary the one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation during the second time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. Thefeedback monitor may detect a physiological condition of the subjectduring the first time interval. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may select, using the policy and basedon the detected physiological condition, one of the visual stimulationor the audio stimulation to vary during the first time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. Thefeedback monitor may detect a physiological condition of the subjectduring the first time interval. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may select, responsive to detecting thephysiological condition, the other of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation to vary during a second time interval subsequent tothe first time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, the otherof the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to keep constant. Insome embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayprovide instructions to the visual neural stimulation system or theauditory neural stimulation system corresponding to the selected one ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary during thesecond time interval to cause the one of the visual neural stimulationsystem or the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation during the second timeinterval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a microphone. The microphonemay detect an ambient sound level. In some embodiments, the system mayinclude a photodiode. The photodiode may detect an ambient light level.In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayselect, based on the ambient sound level and the ambient light level,one of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary duringthe first time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include an electrode. The electrodemay provide peripheral nerve stimulation to the subject. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system may select,based on the policy, one of the visual stimulation, the audiostimulation, or the peripheral nerve stimulation to vary during a secondtime interval.

In some embodiments, the visual stimulation may be is selected forvarying during the first time interval. In some embodiments, the systemmay include an electrode. The electrode may provide peripheral nervestimulation to the subject during the first time interval. In someembodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. The feedbackmonitor may detect a physiological condition of the subject during thefirst time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, responsive to detecting thephysiological condition, one of the audio stimulation or the peripheralnerve stimulation to vary during a second time interval subsequent tothe first time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, thevisual stimulation to keep constant. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may provide instructions to the visualneural stimulation system to keep constant during the second timeinterval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestrationsystem may provide instructions to the auditory neural stimulationsystem to vary during the second time interval. In some embodiments, theneural stimulation orchestration system may provide instructions to theelectrode to keep constant during the second time interval. In someembodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include a visual neural stimulation system. The visual neuralstimulation system may provide, via a light output source, visualstimulation having a first value of a first parameter. The system mayinclude an auditory neural stimulation system. The auditory neuralstimulation system may provide, via an audio output source, audiostimulation having a second value of the second parameter. The systemmay include a neural stimulation orchestration system. The neuralstimulation orchestration system may select, for a first time interval,one of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary based ona policy. The neural stimulation orchestration system may select, forthe first time interval, the other of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation to keep constant based on the policy. The neuralstimulation orchestration system may provide instructions to the visualneural stimulation system or the auditory neural stimulation systemcorresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary to cause the one of the visual neural stimulationsystem or the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation.

In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayselect, for a second time interval subsequent to the first timeinterval, the other of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulationto vary based on the policy. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, the otherof the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to keep constantbased on the policy. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may provide instructions to the visual neuralstimulation system or the auditory neural stimulation systemcorresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary during the second time interval to cause the one ofthe visual neural stimulation system or the auditory neural stimulationsystem to vary the one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation during the second time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. Thefeedback monitor may detect a physiological condition of the subjectduring the first time interval. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may select, using the policy and basedon the detected physiological condition, one of the visual stimulationor the audio stimulation to vary during the first time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. Thefeedback monitor may detect a physiological condition of the subjectduring the first time interval. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may select, responsive to detecting thephysiological condition, the other of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation to vary during a second time interval subsequent tothe first time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, the otherof the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to keep constant. Insome embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayprovide instructions to the visual neural stimulation system or theauditory neural stimulation system corresponding to the selected one ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary during thesecond time interval to cause the one of the visual neural stimulationsystem or the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation during the second timeinterval.

In some embodiments, the system may include a microphone. The microphonemay detect an ambient sound level. In some embodiments, the system mayinclude a photodiode. The photodiode may detect an ambient light level.In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system mayselect, based on the ambient sound level and the ambient light level,one of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary duringthe first time interval.

In some embodiments, the system may include an electrode. The electrodemay provide peripheral nerve stimulation to the subject. In someembodiments, the neural stimulation orchestration system may select,based on the policy, one of the visual stimulation, the audiostimulation, or the peripheral nerve stimulation to vary during a secondtime interval.

In some embodiments, the visual stimulation may be is selected forvarying during the first time interval. In some embodiments, the systemmay include an electrode. The electrode may provide peripheral nervestimulation to the subject during the first time interval. In someembodiments, the system may include a feedback monitor. The feedbackmonitor may detect a physiological condition of the subject during thefirst time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, responsive to detecting thephysiological condition, one of the audio stimulation or the peripheralnerve stimulation to vary during a second time interval subsequent tothe first time interval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulationorchestration system may select, for the second time interval, thevisual stimulation to keep constant. In some embodiments, the neuralstimulation orchestration system may provide instructions to the visualneural stimulation system to keep constant during the second timeinterval. In some embodiments, the neural stimulation orchestrationsystem may provide instructions to the auditory neural stimulationsystem to vary during the second time interval. In some embodiments, theneural stimulation orchestration system may provide instructions to theelectrode to keep constant during the second time interval. In someembodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer's disease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The systemmay include a visual neural stimulation system, an auditory neuralstimulation system, a neural stimulation orchestration system, a lightoutput source, an audio output source, and one or more processors. Theone or more processors may execute one or more programs to treat asubject in need of a treatment of a brain disease. The one or moreprograms may include instructions for conducting a therapy session. Thetherapy session may include providing, via the light output source,visual stimulation having a first value of a first parameter. Thetherapy session may include providing, via the audio output source,audio stimulation having a second value of the second parameter. Thetherapy session may include selecting, for a first time interval, one ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary based on apolicy. The therapy session may include selecting, for the first timeinterval, the other of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulationto keep constant based on the policy. The therapy session may includeproviding instructions to the visual neural stimulation system or theauditory neural stimulation system corresponding to the selected one ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary to cause the oneof the visual neural stimulation system or the auditory neuralstimulation system to vary the one of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include selecting, for asecond time interval subsequent to the first time interval, the other ofthe visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary based on thepolicy. In some embodiments, the therapy session may include selecting,for the second time interval, the other of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation to keep constant based on the policy. In someembodiments, the therapy session may include providing instructions tothe visual neural stimulation system or the auditory neural stimulationsystem corresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation orthe audio stimulation to vary during the second time interval to causethe one of the visual neural stimulation system or the auditory neuralstimulation system to vary the one of the visual stimulation or theaudio stimulation during the second time interval.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include detecting aphysiological condition of the subject during the first time interval.In some embodiments, the therapy session may include selecting, usingthe policy and based on the detected physiological condition, one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary during the firsttime interval.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include detecting aphysiological condition of the subject during the first time interval.In some embodiments, the therapy session may include selecting,responsive to detecting the physiological condition, the other of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary during a second timeinterval subsequent to the first time interval. In some embodiments, thetherapy session may include selecting, for the second time interval, theother of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to keepconstant. In some embodiments, the therapy session may include providinginstructions to the visual neural stimulation system or the auditoryneural stimulation system corresponding to the selected one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary during the secondtime interval to cause the one of the visual neural stimulation systemor the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of the visualstimulation or the audio stimulation during the second time interval.

In some embodiments, the therapy session may include detecting anambient sound level. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude detecting an ambient light level. In some embodiments, thetherapy session may include selecting, based on the ambient sound leveland the ambient light level, one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary during the first time interval. In some embodiments,the therapy session may include providing, via an electrode, peripheralnerve stimulation to the subject. In some embodiments, the therapysession may include selecting, based on the policy, one of the visualstimulation, the audio stimulation, or the peripheral nerve stimulationto vary during a second time interval.

In some embodiments, the visual stimulation may be selected for varyingduring the first time interval. In some embodiments, the therapy sessionmay include providing, via an electrode, peripheral nerve stimulation tothe subject during the first time interval. In some embodiments, thetherapy session may include detecting a physiological condition of thesubject during the first time interval. In some embodiments, the therapysession may include selecting, responsive to detecting the physiologicalcondition, one of the audio stimulation or the peripheral nervestimulation to vary during a second time interval subsequent to thefirst time interval. In some embodiments, the therapy session mayinclude selecting, for the second time interval, the visual stimulationto keep constant. In some embodiments, the therapy session may includeproviding instructions to the visual neural stimulation system to keepconstant during the second time interval. In some embodiments, thetherapy session may include providing instructions to the auditoryneural stimulation system to vary during the second time interval. Insome embodiments, the therapy session may include providing instructionsto the electrode to keep constant during the second time interval. Insome embodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer'sdisease.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof. The methodmay include administering a stimulus to the subject using a system. Thesystem may include a light source and a speaker. The system may includea visual signaling component executed by a visual neural stimulationsystem. The visual signaling component may provide, via the lightsource, visual stimulation having a first value of a first parameter.The system may include an audio signaling component executed by anauditory neural stimulation system. The audio signaling component mayprovide, via the speaker, audio stimulation having a second value of thesecond parameter. The system may include a stimuli orchestrationcomponent executed by a neural stimulation orchestration system. Thestimuli orchestration component may select, for a first time interval,one of the visual stimulation or the audio stimulation to vary based ona policy. The stimuli orchestration component may select, for the firsttime interval, the other of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to keep constant based on the policy. The stimuliorchestration component may provide instructions to the visual neuralstimulation system or the auditory neural stimulation systemcorresponding to the selected one of the visual stimulation or the audiostimulation to vary to cause the one of the visual neural stimulationsystem or the auditory neural stimulation system to vary the one of thevisual stimulation or the audio stimulation.

In some embodiments, the cognitive dysfunction may include Alzheimer'sDisease.

In some embodiments, the method includes administering a pharmacologicalagent to the subject prior to, simultaneous to, or subsequent toadministration of the stimulus. The pharmacological agent can be amonoclonal antibody. The monoclonal antibody can be aducanumab.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method ofevaluating neural responses to different stimulation modalities forsubjects. The method may include sequentially applying a plurality offirst neural stimuli to a subject. Each first neural stimulus may bedefined by a predetermined amplitude. Each first neural stimulusassociated with a different modality of neural stimulus may include anauditory stimulation modality, a visual stimulation modality, and aperipheral nerve stimulation modality. The method may include sensing,while applying each first neural stimulus to the subject, a firstelectroencephalogram (EEG) response to the corresponding first neuralstimulus. The method may include generating, based on each first neuralstimulus, a corresponding first simulated EEG response to the firstneural stimulus. The method may include comparing each first EEGresponse to each corresponding first simulated response to determinewhether the first EEG response indicates a particular neural activityresponse of the subject. The method may include selecting, based on thecomparison, a candidate first neural stimuli associated with an EEGresponse associated with the particular neural activity response of thesubject. The method may include applying, for the candidate first neuralstimulus, a plurality of second neural stimuli to the subject, thesecond neural stimuli having varying values of amplitude. The method mayinclude sensing, while applying each second neural stimulus to thesubject, a second EEG response of the subject. The method may includegenerating, based on each second neural stimulus, a corresponding secondsimulated EEG response to the second neural stimulus. The method mayinclude comparing each second EEG response to each corresponding secondsimulated EEG response to determine whether the second EEG responseindicates the particular neural activity response of the subject. Themethod may include selecting, based on the comparison, a therapyamplitude for a therapy neural stimulus corresponding to the secondneural stimulus associated with the particular neural response. Themethod may include applying the therapy neural stimulus to the subjectusing the therapy amplitude.

In some embodiments, the method may include sensing an attentivenessresponse of the subject by executing at least one of eye tracking ofeyes of the subject, monitoring heart rate of the subject, or monitoringan orientation of at least one of a head or a body of the subject, andusing the attentiveness response to determine whether the particularneural activity response is indicated. In some embodiments, generatingeach simulated response may include maintaining a model for the subjectbased on historical response data for one or more subjects. Thehistorical response data may be associated prior physiological responseswith corresponding neural stimuli. The model may be based on at leastone of an age parameter, a height parameter, a weight parameter, or aheart rate parameter of the subject.

In some embodiments, applying at least one of the plurality of firstneural stimuli may include applying multiple modalities simultaneously.In some embodiments, applying at least one of the plurality of firstneural stimuli may include applying multiple modalities simultaneously.In some embodiments, the method may include applying a plurality of thetherapy neural stimuli by varying a therapy parameter of each therapyneural stimulus

In some embodiments, the therapy parameter may be a duty cycle. In someembodiments, the duty cycle of each of the plurality of therapy neuralstimuli may be less than or equal to fifty percent. In some embodiments,the modality of the therapy neural stimuli may be the auditorystimulation modality, and the therapy parameter may be a pitch. In someembodiments, the modality of therapy neural stimuli may be the visualstimulation modality, and the therapy parameter may include at least oneof a color or an image selection. In some embodiments, the modality ofthe therapy neural stimuli may be the peripheral neural stimulationmodality, and the therapy parameter may be a location.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system forevaluating neural responses to different stimulation modalities forsubject. The system may include one or more processors coupled to amemory device. The memory device may store instructions. Theinstructions, which when executed by the one or more processors, maycause the one or more processors to sequentially apply a plurality offirst neural stimuli to a subject. Each first neural stimulus may bedefined by a predetermined amplitude. A different modality of neuralstimulus may include an auditory stimulation modality, a visualstimulation modality, and a peripheral nerve stimulation modality. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to sense, whileapplying each first neural stimulus to the subject, a firstelectroencephalogram (EEG) response to the corresponding first neuralstimulus. The instructions may cause the one or more processors togenerate, based on each first neural stimulus, a corresponding firstsimulated EEG response to the first neural stimulus. The instructionsmay cause the one or more processors to compare each first EEG responseto each corresponding first simulated response to determine whether thefirst EEG response indicates a particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toselect, based on the comparison, a candidate first neural stimuliassociated with an EEG response associated with the particular neuralactivity response of the subject. The instructions may cause the one ormore processors to apply, for the candidate first neural stimulus, aplurality of second neural stimuli to the subject, the second neuralstimuli having varying values of amplitude. The instructions may causethe one or more processors to sense, while applying each second neuralstimulus to the subject, a second EEG response of the subject. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to generate, based oneach second neural stimulus, a corresponding second simulated EEGresponse to the second neural stimulus. The instructions may cause theone or more processors to compare each second EEG response to eachcorresponding second simulated EEG response to determine whether thesecond EEG response indicates the particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toselect, based on the comparison, a therapy amplitude for a therapyneural stimulus corresponding to the second neural stimulus associatedwith the particular neural response. The instructions may cause the oneor more processors to apply the therapy neural stimulus to the subjectusing the therapy amplitude.

In some embodiments, the one or more processors may sense anattentiveness response of the subject by executing at least one of eyetracking of eyes of the subject, monitoring heart rate of the subject,or monitoring an orientation of at least one of a head or a body of thesubject, and using the attentiveness response to determine whether theparticular neural activity response is indicated. In some embodiments,the one or more processors may generate each simulated response bymaintaining a model for the subject based on historical response datafor one or more subjects, the historical response data associated priorphysiological responses with corresponding neural stimuli, the modelbased on at least one of an age parameter, a height parameter, a weightparameter, or a heart rate parameter of the subject. In someembodiments, the one or more processors may apply at least one of theplurality of first neural stimuli by applying multiple modalitiessimultaneously.

In some embodiments, the one or more processors may apply a plurality ofthe therapy neural stimuli by varying a therapy parameter of eachtherapy neural stimulus. In some embodiments, the therapy parameter maybe a duty cycle. In some embodiments, the duty cycle of each of theplurality of therapy neural stimuli may be less than or equal to fiftypercent. In some embodiments, the modality of the therapy neural stimulimay be the auditory stimulation modality, and the therapy parameter maybe a pitch. In some embodiments, the modality of therapy neural stimulimay be the visual stimulation modality, and the therapy parameter mayinclude at least one of a color or an image selection. In someembodiments, the modality of the therapy neural stimuli may be theperipheral neural stimulation modality, and the therapy parameter may bea location.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a -transientcomputer readable medium for evaluating neural responses to differentstimulation modalities for subjects. The non-transient computer readablemedium may store instructions. The instructions, which when executed byone or more processors, may cause the one or more processors tosequentially apply a plurality of first neural stimuli to a subject.Each first neural stimulus may be defined by a predetermined amplitude.Each first neural stimulus associated with a different modality ofneural stimulus may include an auditory stimulation modality, a visualstimulation modality, and a peripheral nerve stimulation modality. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to sense, whileapplying each first neural stimulus to the subject, a firstelectroencephalogram (EEG) response to the corresponding first neuralstimulus. The instructions may cause the one or more processors togenerate, based on each first neural stimulus, a corresponding firstsimulated EEG response to the first neural stimulus. The instructionsmay cause the one or more processors to compare each first EEG responseto each corresponding first simulated response to determine whether thefirst EEG response indicates a particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toselect, based on the comparison, a candidate first neural stimuliassociated with an EEG response associated with the particular neuralactivity response of the subject. The instructions may cause the one ormore processors to apply, for the candidate first neural stimulus, aplurality of second neural stimuli to the subject, the second neuralstimuli having varying values of amplitude. The instructions may causethe one or more processors to sense, while applying each second neuralstimulus to the subject, a second EEG response of the subject. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to generate, based oneach second neural stimulus, a corresponding second simulated EEGresponse to the second neural stimulus. The instructions may cause theone or more processors to compare each second EEG response to eachcorresponding second simulated EEG response to determine whether thesecond EEG response indicates the particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toselect, based on the comparison, a therapy amplitude for a therapyneural stimulus corresponding to the second neural stimulus associatedwith the particular neural response. The instructions may cause the oneor more processors to apply the therapy neural stimulus to the subjectusing the therapy amplitude.

In some embodiments, the instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to sense an attentiveness response of the subject byexecuting at least one of eye tracking of eyes of the subject,monitoring heart rate of the subject, or monitoring an orientation of atleast one of a head or a body of the subject, and using theattentiveness response to determine whether the particular neuralactivity response is indicated, In some embodiments, the instructionsmay cause the one or more processors to generate each simulated responseby maintaining a model for the subject based on historical response datafor one or more subjects. The historical response data may be associatedprior physiological responses with corresponding neural stimuli. Themodel may be based on at least one of an age parameter, a heightparameter, a weight parameter, or a heart rate parameter of the subject.

In some embodiments, the instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to apply a plurality of the therapy neural stimuli by varyinga therapy parameter of each therapy neural stimulus. In someembodiments, the therapy parameter may be a duty cycle. In someembodiments, the duty cycle of each of the plurality of therapy neuralstimuli may be less than or equal to fifty percent. In some embodiments,the modality of the therapy neural stimuli may be the auditorystimulation modality, and the therapy parameter may be a pitch. In someembodiments, the modality of therapy neural stimuli may be the visualstimulation modality, and the therapy parameter may include at least oneof a color or an image selection. In some embodiments, the modality ofthe therapy neural stimuli may be the peripheral neural stimulationmodality, and the therapy parameter may be a location.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method ofgenerating therapy regimens based on comparison of assessments fordifferent stimulation modalities. For each of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, and a peripheral nervestimulation modality, the method may include performing steps. The stepsmay include providing a first assessment to the subject. The steps mayinclude determining, based on the first assessment, a first taskresponse of the subject. The steps may include applying a first neuralstimulus to the subject. The steps may include, subsequent to applyingthe first neural stimulus, providing a second assessment to the subject.The steps may include determining, based on the second assessment, asecond task response of the subject. The steps may include comparing thesecond task response to the first task response to determine whether thesecond task response indicates a particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The steps may include selecting a candidate stimulationmodality from the auditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulationmodality, and the peripheral nerve stimulation modality based on thecomparisons of the first and second task responses. The steps mayinclude generating a therapy regimen for the subject using the candidatestimulation modality.

In some embodiments, the first and second assessments each may includeat least one of an N-back task, a serial reaction time test, a visualcoordination test, a voluntary movement test, or a force productiontest. In some embodiments, selecting the candidate stimulation modalitymay include selecting the modality associated with at least one of ahighest increase in score of the second assessment or a highest score ofthe second assessment. In some embodiments, selecting the candidatestimulation modality may include selecting at least one modalityassociated with at least one of an increase in score of the secondassessment being greater than an increase threshold or a score of thesecond assessment being greater than a score threshold. In someembodiments, the first neural stimuli for each modality may be providedat a same predetermined frequency.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system forgenerating therapy regimens based on comparison of assessments fordifferent stimulation modalities. The system may include one or moreprocessors coupled to a memory device. The memory device may storeinstructions. The instructions, which when executed by the one or moreprocessors, may cause the one or more processors to, for each of anauditory stimulation modality, a visual stimulation modality, and aperipheral nerve stimulation modality, perform steps. The steps mayinclude providing a first assessment to the subject. The steps mayinclude determining, based on the first assessment, a first taskresponse of the subject. The steps may include applying a first neuralstimulus to the subject. The steps may include, subsequent to applyingthe first neural stimulus, providing a second assessment to the subject.The steps may include determining, based on the second assessment, asecond task response of the subject. The steps may include comparing thesecond task response to the first task response to determine whether thesecond task response indicates a particular neural activity response ofthe subject. The steps may include selecting a candidate stimulationmodality from the auditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulationmodality, and the peripheral nerve stimulation modality based on thecomparisons of the first and second task responses. The steps mayinclude generating a therapy regimen for the subject using the candidatestimulation modality.

In some embodiments, the first and second assessments each may includeat least one of an N-back task, a serial reaction time test, a visualcoordination test, a voluntary movement test, or a force productiontest. In some embodiments, selecting the candidate stimulation modalitymay include selecting the modality associated with at least one of ahighest increase in score of the second assessment or a highest score ofthe second assessment. In some embodiments, selecting the candidatestimulation modality may include selecting at least one modalityassociated with at least one of an increase in score of the secondassessment being greater than an increase threshold or a score of thesecond assessment being greater than a score threshold. In someembodiments, the first neural stimuli for each modality may be providedat a same predetermined frequency.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a non-transientcomputer readable medium for generating therapy regimens based oncomparison of assessments for different stimulation modalities. Thenon-transient computer readable medium may store instructions. Theinstructions, which when executed by one or more processors, may causethe one or more processors to for each of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, and a peripheral nervestimulation modality, perform the steps. The steps may include providinga first assessment to the subject. The steps may include determining,based on the first assessment, a first task response of the subject. Thesteps may include applying a first neural stimulus to the subject. Thesteps may include, subsequent to applying the first neural stimulus,providing a second assessment to the subject. The steps may includedetermining, based on the second assessment, a second task response ofthe subject. The steps may include comparing the second task response tothe first task response to determine whether the second task responseindicates a particular neural activity response of the subject. Thesteps may include selecting a candidate stimulation modality from theauditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulation modality, and theperipheral nerve stimulation modality based on the comparisons of thefirst and second task responses. The steps may include generating atherapy regimen for the subject using the candidate stimulationmodality.

In some embodiments, the first and second assessments each may includeat least one of an N-back task, a serial reaction time test, a visualcoordination test, a voluntary movement test, or a force productiontest. In some embodiments, selecting the candidate stimulation modalitymay include selecting the modality associated with at least one of ahighest increase in score of the second assessment or a highest score ofthe second assessment. In some embodiments, selecting the candidatestimulation modality may include selecting at least one modalityassociated with at least one of an increase in score of the secondassessment being greater than an increase threshold or a score of thesecond assessment being greater than a score threshold. In someembodiments, the first neural stimuli for each modality may be providedat a same predetermined frequency.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method ofconducting a therapy session. The method may include selecting afrequency at which to provide a first neural stimulation having a firststimulation modality, a second neural stimulation having a secondstimulation modality, and a third neural stimulation having the secondstimulation modality. The method may include providing, to a subject fora duration, the first neural stimulation as a plurality of first pulsesat the frequency. The method may include providing, to the subjectduring a first portion of the duration, the second neural stimulation asa plurality of second pulses at the frequency. The plurality of secondpulses may be offset from the plurality of first pulses by a firstoffset. The method may include terminating the second neuralstimulation. The method may include, subsequent to terminating thesecond neural stimulation, providing to the subject during a secondportion of the duration, a third neural stimulation as a plurality ofthird pulses at the frequency. The plurality of third pulses may beoffset from the plurality of first pulses by a second offset differentfrom the first offset. The third neural stimulation and the secondneural stimulation may have a same stimulation modality.

In some embodiments, the first offset and second offset may be eachselected as a random value greater than zero and less than a timeconstant equal to an inverse of the frequency. In some embodiments, thefirst stimulation modality may be one of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, or a peripheral nervestimulation modality. The second stimulation modality may be another ofthe auditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulation modality, orthe peripheral nerve stimulation modality. In some embodiments, a pulsewidth of the plurality of first pulses may be different from a pulsewidth of at least one of the plurality of second pulses or the pluralityof third pulses.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system. Thesystem may include one or more processors coupled to a memory device.The memory device may store instructions. The instructions, which whenexecuted by the one or more processors, may cause the one or moreprocessors to select a frequency at which to provide a first neuralstimulation having a first stimulation modality, a second neuralstimulation having a second stimulation modality, and a third neuralstimulation having the second stimulation modality. The instructions maycause the one or more processors to provide, to a subject for aduration, the first neural stimulation as a plurality of first pulses atthe frequency. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toprovide, to the subject during a first portion of the duration, thesecond neural stimulation as a plurality of second pulses at thefrequency. The plurality of second pulses may be offset from theplurality of first pulses by a first offset. The instructions may causethe one or more processors to terminate the second neural stimulation.The instructions may cause the one or more processors to, subsequent toterminating the second neural stimulation, provide to the subject duringa second portion of the duration, a third neural stimulation as aplurality of third pulses at the frequency. The plurality of thirdpulses may be offset from the plurality of first pulses by a secondoffset different from the first offset. The third neural stimulation andthe second neural stimulation may have a same stimulation modality.

In some embodiments, the first offset and second offset may be eachselected as a random value greater than zero and less than a timeconstant equal to an inverse of the frequency. In some embodiments, thefirst stimulation modality may be one of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, or a peripheral nervestimulation modality. The second stimulation modality may be another ofthe auditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulation modality, orthe peripheral nerve stimulation modality. In some embodiments, a pulsewidth of the plurality of first pulses may be different from a pulsewidth of at least one of the plurality of second pulses or the pluralityof third pulses.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a non-transientcomputer readable medium for conducting a therapy session. Thenon-transient computer readable medium may store instructions. Theinstructions, which when executed by one or more processors, may causethe one or more processors to select a frequency at which to provide afirst neural stimulation having a first stimulation modality, a secondneural stimulation having a second stimulation modality, and a thirdneural stimulation having the second stimulation modality. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to provide, to asubject for a duration, the first neural stimulation as a plurality offirst pulses at the frequency. The instructions may cause the one ormore processors to provide, to the subject during a first portion of theduration, the second neural stimulation as a plurality of second pulsesat the frequency. The plurality of second pulses may be offset from theplurality of first pulses by a first offset. The instructions may causethe one or more processors to terminate the second neural stimulation.The instructions may cause the one or more processors to, subsequent toterminating the second neural stimulation, provide to the subject duringa second portion of the duration, a third neural stimulation as aplurality of third pulses at the frequency. The plurality of thirdpulses may be offset from the plurality of first pulses by a secondoffset different from the first offset. The third neural stimulation andthe second neural stimulation may have a same stimulation modality

In some embodiments, the first offset and second offset may be eachselected as a random value greater than zero and less than a timeconstant equal to an inverse of the frequency. In some embodiments, thefirst stimulation modality may be one of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, or a peripheral nervestimulation modality. The second stimulation modality may be another ofthe auditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulation modality, orthe peripheral nerve stimulation modality. In some embodiments, a pulsewidth of the plurality of first pulses may be different from a pulsewidth of at least one of the plurality of second pulses or the pluralityof third pulses.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a method ofcounteracting distraction while applying a neural stimulus. The methodmay include applying a first neural stimulus to a subject. The methodmay include applying, at a plurality of first time points during thefirst neural stimulus, a plurality of first counter-distractionmeasures. The plurality of first counter-distraction measures mayinclude at least one of an audible alert or a visible alert. The methodmay include measuring, during the first neural stimulus, anattentiveness parameter including at least one of an eye direction, ahead position, a heart rate, or a respiration rate of the subject. Themethod may include comparing the attentiveness parameter to acorresponding first threshold to identify a distraction and acorresponding time of distraction. The method may include determiningwhether each first counter-distraction measure is effective by comparinga change in the attentiveness parameter before and after eachcounter-distraction measure to a corresponding second threshold. Themethod may include, responsive to determining that a firstcounter-distraction measure is effective, including thecounter-distraction measure in a plurality of second counter-distractionmeasures. The method may include selecting a plurality of second timepoints closer to each time of distraction than the plurality of firsttime points. The method may include applying a second neural stimulus tothe subject while applying, at the plurality of second time points, theplurality of second counter-distraction measures.

In some embodiments, the method may include incrementing a count ofdistractions in response to identifying each distraction. In someembodiments, the method may include resetting the count of distractionssubsequent to each effective first counter-distraction measure. In someembodiments, the method may include ranking the plurality of firstcounter-distraction measures based on a magnitude of the correspondingcount of distractions. In some embodiments, the first neural stimulusmay include at least one of an auditory stimulus, a visual stimulus, ora peripheral nerve stimulus.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a system forcounteracting distraction while applying a neural stimulus. The systemmay include one or more processors coupled to a memory device. Thememory device may instructions. The instructions, which when executed bythe one or more processors, may cause the one or more processors toapply a first neural stimulus to a subject. The instructions may causethe one or more processors to apply, at a plurality of first time pointsduring the first neural stimulus, a plurality of firstcounter-distraction measures. The plurality of first counter-distractionmeasures may include at least one of an audible alert or a visiblealert. The instructions may cause the one or more processors to measure,during the first neural stimulus, an attentiveness parameter includingat least one of an eye direction, a head position, a heart rate, or arespiration rate of the subject. The instructions may cause the one ormore processors to compare the attentiveness parameter to acorresponding first threshold to identify a distraction and acorresponding time of distraction. The instructions may cause the one ormore processors to determine whether each first counter-distractionmeasure is effective by comparing a change in the attentivenessparameter before and after each counter-distraction measure to a secondthreshold. The instructions may cause the one or more processors to,responsive to determining that a first counter-distraction measure iseffective, include the counter-distraction measure in a plurality ofsecond counter-distraction measures. The instructions may cause the oneor more processors to select a plurality of second time points closer toeach time of distraction than the plurality of first time points. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to apply a secondneural stimulus to the subject while applying, at the plurality ofsecond time points, the plurality of second counter-distractionmeasures.

In some embodiments, the instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to increment a count of distractions in response toidentifying each distraction. In some embodiments, the instructions maycause the one or more processors to reset the count of distractionssubsequent to each effective first counter-distraction measure. In someembodiments, the instructions may cause the one or more processors torank the plurality of first counter-distraction measures based on amagnitude of the corresponding count of distractions. In someembodiments, the first neural stimulus may include at least one of anauditory stimulus, a visual stimulus, or a peripheral nerve stimulus.

At least one aspect of the disclosure is directed to a-transientcomputer readable medium for counteracting distractions while applying aneural stimulus. The non-transient computer readable medium may storeinstructions. The instructions, which when executed by the one or moreprocessors, may cause the one or more processors to apply a first neuralstimulus to a subject. The instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to apply, at a plurality of first time points during thefirst neural stimulus, a plurality of first counter-distractionmeasures. The plurality of first counter-distraction measures mayinclude at least one of an audible alert or a visible alert. Theinstructions may cause the one or more processors to measure, during thefirst neural stimulus, an attentiveness parameter including at least oneof an eye direction, a head position, a heart rate, or a respirationrate of the subject. The instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to compare the attentiveness parameter to a correspondingfirst threshold to identify a distraction and a corresponding time ofdistraction. The instructions may cause the one or more processors todetermine whether each first counter-distraction measure is effective bycomparing a change in the attentiveness parameter before and after eachcounter-distraction measure to a second threshold. The instructions maycause the one or more processors to, responsive to determining that afirst counter-distraction measure is effective, include thecounter-distraction measure in a plurality of second counter-distractionmeasures. The instructions may cause the one or more processors toselect a plurality of second time points closer to each time ofdistraction than the plurality of first time points. The instructionsmay cause the one or more processors to apply a second neural stimulusto the subject while applying, at the plurality of second time points,the plurality of second counter-distraction measures.

In some embodiments, the instructions may cause the one or moreprocessors to increment a count of distractions in response toidentifying each distraction. In some embodiments, the instructions maycause the one or more processors to reset the count of distractionssubsequent to each effective first counter-distraction measure. In someembodiments, the instructions may cause the one or more processors torank the plurality of first counter-distraction measures based on amagnitude of the corresponding count of distractions. In someembodiments, the first neural stimulus may include at least one of anauditory stimulus, a visual stimulus, or a peripheral nerve stimulus.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

The details of one or more embodiments of the subject matter describedin this specification are set forth in the accompanying drawings and thedescription below. Other features, aspects, and advantages of thesubject matter will become apparent from the description, the drawings,and the claims.

FIG. 1 is a bock diagram depicting a system to perform visual brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment.

FIGS. 2A-2F illustrate visual signals for visual brain entrainment inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 3A-3C illustrate fields of vision in which visual signals can betransmitted for visual brain entrainment in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 4A-4C illustrate devices configured to transmit visual signals forvisual brain entrainment in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 5A-5D illustrate devices configured to transmit visual signals forvisual brain entrainment in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 6A and 6B illustrate devices configured to receive feedback tofacilitate visual brain entrainment in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 7A and 7B are block diagrams depicting embodiments of computingdevices useful in connection with the systems and methods describedherein.

FIG. 8 is a flow diagram of a method of performing visual brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram depicting a system to induce neuraloscillations via auditory stimulation in accordance with an embodiment.

FIGS. 10A-10I illustrate audio signals and types of modulations to audiosignals used to induce neural oscillations via auditory stimulation inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 11A illustrates audio signals generated using binaural beats, inaccordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 11B illustrates acoustic pulses having isochronic tones, inaccordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 11C illustrates audio signals having a modulation techniqueincluding audio filters, in accordance with an embodiment.

FIGS. 12A-12C illustrate system configurations for auditory brainentrainment in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 13 illustrates a system configuration for room-based auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrate devices configured to receive feedback to facilitateauditory brain entrainment in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram of a method of performing auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a block diagram depicting a system to induce neuraloscillations via peripheral nerve stimulation in accordance with anembodiment.

FIGS. 17A-17D illustrate peripheral nerve stimulations and types ofmodulations to peripheral nerve stimulations used to induce neuraloscillations via peripheral nerve stimulation in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 18A-18C illustrate systems for peripheral nerve stimulation inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 19 illustrates a control scheme for synchronized peripheral nervestimulation by a plurality of devices in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 20 illustrates a process flow diagram for peripheral nervestimulation to induce and control neural oscillations in accordance withan embodiment.

FIGS. 21A-21D illustrate devices configured to deliver peripheral nervestimulation to targeted parts of the body of a subject in accordancewith some embodiments.

FIG. 22 is a flow diagram of a method of performing peripheral nervestimulation in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 23A is a block diagram depicting a system for neural stimulationvia multiple stimulation modalities in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 23B is a diagram depicting waveforms used for neural stimulationvia multiple stimulation modalities in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 24A is a block diagram depicting a system for neural stimulationvia visual stimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with anembodiment.

FIG. 24B is a diagram depicting waveforms used for neural stimulationvia visual stimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with anembodiment.

FIG. 25 is a flow diagram of a method for neural stimulation via visualstimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram depicting a system for selecting dosingparameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a subject profile that can be included inthe system shown in FIG. 26 in accordance with an embodiment.

FIG. 28 is a graphical representation of adjusting a therapy sessionbased on feedback collected during the therapy session.

FIG. 29A is a flow diagram of a method for selecting dosing parametersof stimulation signals to induce synchronized neural oscillations in thebrain of a subject in accordance with an embodiment;

FIG. 29B is a flow diagram of a method for conducting a therapy sessionin accordance with an embodiment;

FIG. 29C is a flow diagram of a method for counteracting distractionswhile applying a neural stimulus in accordance with an embodiment;

FIG. 30 is a block diagram depicting an environment for modifying anexternal stimulus based on a response by a subject to an assessmenttask, in connection with the systems and methods described herein;

FIG. 31 is a block diagram depicting a system for providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation, in accordance to an embodiment;

FIG. 32 is a block diagram depicting a system for providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation on a subject in response to stimulation, inaccordance to an embodiment;

FIG. 33 is a flow diagram depicting a method of providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation on a subject in response to stimulation;

FIG. 34 is a flow diagram depicting a method of providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation on a subject in response to stimulation;

FIG. 35A is a flow diagram depicting a method of providing assessmentsfor neural stimulation on a subject in response to iterativestimulation;

FIG. 35B is a flow diagram depicting a method for generating therapyregimens based on comparison of assessments for different stimulationmodalities;

FIG. 36 is a block diagram depicting an environment for adjusting anexternal stimulus to induce neural oscillations based on measurements ona subject, in connection with the systems and methods described herein;

FIG. 37 is a block diagram depicting a system for neural stimulationsensing, in accordance to an embodiment;

FIG. 38 is a block diagram depicting a system for sensing neuraloscillations induced by an external stimulus, in accordance to anembodiment;

FIG. 39 illustrates graphs depicting frequency-domain measurements ofvarious states of neural stimulation, in accordance to an embodiment;

FIG. 40 illustrates an EEG device for measuring neural activity at thebrain, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment;

FIG. 41 illustrates an MEG device for measuring neural activity at thebrain, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment;

FIG. 42 is a block diagram depicting a system for monitoring subjectattentiveness during application of an external stimulus to induceneural oscillations, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment;

FIG. 43 is a block diagram depicting an environment for adjusting anexternal stimuli to induce neural oscillations based on subjectattentiveness, in connection with the systems and methods describedherein;

FIG. 44 is a block diagram depicting a system for monitoring subjectphysiology during application of an external stimulus to induce neuraloscillation, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment;

FIG. 45 is a block diagram depicting a system for synchronizing multiplestimuli to induce neural oscillation, in accordance to an illustrativeembodiment;

FIG. 46A is a flow diagram illustrating a method of sensing neuraloscillations induced by an external stimulus and subject attentivenessduring application of the external stimuli, in accordance to anembodiment;

FIG. 46B is a flow diagram of a method for evaluating neural responsesto different stimulation modalities for subjects, in accordance to anembodiment;

FIG. 47 shows an illustrative Combinatorial Stimulation System;

FIG. 48 is a rendering of a Combinatorial Stimulation System controller.And

FIG. 49 is an overview of study design and of patient enrollmentprocess.

The features and advantages of the present solution will become moreapparent from the detailed description set forth below when taken inconjunction with the drawings, in which like reference charactersidentify corresponding elements throughout. In the drawings, likereference numbers generally indicate like elements.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

For purposes of reading the description of the various embodimentsbelow, the following descriptions of the sections of the specificationand their respective contents may be helpful:

Section A describes neural stimulation via visual stimulation, inaccordance with some embodiments;

Section B describes systems and devices configured to perform neuralstimulation via visual stimulation, in accordance with some embodiments;

Section C describes a computing environment which may be useful forpracticing embodiments described herein;

Section D describes a method for performing neural stimulation viavisual stimulation, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section E describes an NSS operating with a frame, in accordance with anembodiment;

Section F describes an NSS operating with a virtual reality headset, inaccordance with an embodiment;

Section G describes an NSS operating with a tablet, in accordance withan embodiment;

Section H describes neural stimulation via auditory stimulation, inaccordance with some embodiments;

Section I describes systems and devices for neural stimulation viaauditory stimulation, in accordance with some embodiments;

Section J describes a method for neural stimulation via auditorystimulation, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section K describes how the neural stimulation system can operate withheadphones, in accordance with some embodiments;

Section L describes inducing neural oscillations via peripheral nervestimulation, in accordance with some embodiments;

Section M describes systems and devices configured to induce neuraloscillations via peripheral nerve stimulation, in accordance with someembodiments;

Section N describes a method for inducing neural oscillations viaperipheral nerve stimulation, in accordance with an embodiment.

Section O describes neural stimulation via multiple modes ofstimulation, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section P describes neural stimulation via a combination of audiostimulation and visual stimulation, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section Q describes a method for neural stimulation via a combination ofaudio stimulation and visual stimulation, in accordance with anembodiment;

Section R describes selecting dosing parameters of stimulation signalsto induce synchronized neural oscillations in the brain of the subject,in accordance with an embodiment;

Section S describes a system for selecting dosing parameters ofstimulation signals to induce synchronized neural oscillations in thebrain of the subject, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section T describes a subject profile that can be used to storesubject-specific data, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section U describes generation of a personalized therapy regimen for asubject, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section V describes techniques for generating and utilizing a predictivemodel to generate a therapy regimen of a subject, in accordance with anembodiment;

Section W describes techniques for promoting subject adherence to atherapy regimen, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section X describes open loop therapy techniques, in accordance with anembodiment;

Section Y describes closed loop therapy techniques, in accordance withan embodiment;

Section Z describes a method for selecting dosing parameters ofstimulation signals to induce synchronized neural oscillations in thebrain of the subject, in accordance with an embodiment;

Section AA describes environments for modifying an external stimulusbased on feedback from a subject performing an assessment task, inaccordance to an embodiment;

Section BB describes an overview of systems for performing assessmentsto measure effects of stimulation, in accordance to an embodiment;

Section CC describes the modules for administering assessments orapplying the stimulus on the subject in the systems for performingassessments to measure effects of stimulation, in accordance to anembodiment;

Section DD describes the modules for measuring the data from the subjectduring the administration of the assessments in the system forperforming assessments to measure effects of stimulation, in accordanceto an embodiment;

Section EE describes the modules for modifying the assessment or thestimulus in response to feedback data in the systems for performingassessments to measure effects of stimulation, in accordance to anembodiment;

Section FF describes methods of performing assessments to measureeffects of stimulation, in accordance to an embodiment;

Section GG describes systems for adjusting an external stimulus toinduce neural oscillations based on measurement on a subject, inaccordance to an embodiment;

Section HH describes systems for neural stimulation sensing, inaccordance to an embodiment;

Section II describes adjusting the stimulus to further entrain neuraloscillations to a target frequency, in accordance to an embodiment;

Section JJ describes measurement devices for measuring neuraloscillations, in accordance to an embodiment;

Section KK describes systems for monitoring subject attentiveness duringapplication of an external stimulus to induce neural oscillations, inaccordance to an embodiment;

Section LL describes systems for monitoring subject physiology duringapplication of an external stimulus to induce neural oscillations, inaccordance to an embodiment;

Section MM describes systems for synchronizing multiple stimuli duringapplication of an external stimulus to induce neural oscillations, inaccordance to an embodiment; and

Section NN describes a method of adjusting an external stimulus toinduce neural oscillations based on measurement on a subject.

A. Neural Stimulation Via Visual Stimulation

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed tocontrolling frequencies of neural oscillations using visual signals. Thevisual stimulation can adjust, control or otherwise affect the frequencyof the neural oscillations to provide beneficial effects to one or morecognitive states or cognitive functions of the brain, or the immunesystem, while mitigating or preventing adverse consequences on acognitive state or cognitive function. The visual stimulation can resultin brainwave entrainment that can provide beneficial effects to one ormore cognitive states of the brain, cognitive functions of the brain,the immune system, or inflammation. In some cases, the visualstimulation can result in local effect, such as in the visual cortex andassociate regions. The brainwave entrainment can treat disorders,maladies, diseases, inefficiencies, injuries or other issues related toa cognitive function of the brain, cognitive state of the brain, theimmune system, or inflammation.

Neural oscillation occurs in humans or animals and includes rhythmic orrepetitive neural activity in the central nervous system. Neural tissuecan generate oscillatory activity by mechanisms within individualneurons or by interactions between neurons. Oscillations can appear aseither oscillations in membrane potential or as rhythmic patterns ofaction potentials, which can produce oscillatory activation ofpost-synaptic neurons. Synchronized activity of a group of neurons cangive rise to macroscopic oscillations, which, for example, can beobserved by electroencephalography (“EEG”), magnetoencephalography(“MEG”), functional magnetic resonance imaging (“fMRI”), orelectrocorticography (“ECoG”). Neural oscillations can be characterizedby their frequency, amplitude and phase. These signal properties can beobserved from neural recordings using time-frequency analysis.

For example, an EEG can measure oscillatory activity among a group ofneurons, and the measured oscillatory activity can be categorized intofrequency bands as follows: delta activity corresponds to a frequencyband from 1-4 Hz; theta activity corresponds to a frequency band from4-8 Hz; alpha activity corresponds to a frequency band from 8-12 Hz;beta activity corresponds to a frequency band from 13-30 Hz; and gammaactivity corresponds to a frequency band from 30-70 Hz.

The frequency and presence or activity of neural oscillations can beassociated with cognitive states or cognitive functions such asinformation transfer, perception, motor control and memory. Based on thecognitive state or cognitive function, the frequency of neuraloscillations can vary. Further, certain frequencies of neuraloscillations can have beneficial effects or adverse consequences on oneor more cognitive states or function. However, it may be challenging tosynchronize neural oscillations using external stimulus to provide suchbeneficial effects or reduce or prevent such adverse consequences.

Brainwave entrainment (e.g., neural entrainment or brain entrainment)occurs when an external stimulation of a particular frequency isperceived by the brain and triggers neural activity in the brain thatresults in neurons oscillating at a frequency corresponding to theparticular frequency of the external stimulation. Thus, brainentrainment can refer to synchronizing neural oscillations in the brainusing external stimulation such that the neural oscillations occur at afrequency that corresponds to the particular frequency of the externalstimulation.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure can provide externalvisual stimulation to achieve brain entrainment. For example, externalsignals, such as light pulses or high-contrast visual patterns, can beperceived by the brain. The brain, responsive to observing or perceivingthe light pulses, can adjust, manage, or control the frequency of neuraloscillations. The light pulses generated at a predetermined frequencyand perceived by ocular means via a direct visual field or a peripheralvisual field can trigger neural activity in the brain to inducebrainwave entrainment. The frequency of neural oscillations can beaffected at least in part by the frequency of light pulses. Whilehigh-level cognitive function may gate or interfere with some regionsbeing entrained, the brain can react to the visual stimulation at thesensory cortices. Thus, systems and methods of the present disclosurecan provide brainwave entrainment using external visual stimulus such aslight pulses emitted at a predetermined frequency to synchronizeelectrical activity among groups of neurons based on the frequency oflight pulses. The entrainment of one or more portion or regions of thebrain can be observed based on the aggregate frequency of oscillationsproduced by the synchronous electrical activity in ensembles of corticalneurons. The frequency of the light pulses can cause or adjust thissynchronous electrical activity in the ensembles of cortical neurons tooscillate at a frequency corresponding to the frequency of the lightpulses.

FIG. 1 is a block diagram depicting a system to perform visual brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The system 100 can includea neural stimulation system (“NSS”) 105. The NSS 105 can be referred toas visual NSS 105 or NSS 105. In brief overview, the NSS 105 caninclude, access, interface with, or otherwise communicate with one ormore of a light generation module 110, light adjustment module 115,unwanted frequency filtering module 120, profile manager 125, sideeffects management module 130, feedback monitor 135, data repository140, visual signaling component 150, filtering component 155, orfeedback component 160. The light generation module 110, lightadjustment module 115, unwanted frequency filtering module 120, profilemanager 125, side effects management module 130, feedback monitor 135,visual signaling component 150, filtering component 155, or feedbackcomponent 160 can each include at least one processing unit or otherlogic device such as programmable logic array engine, or moduleconfigured to communicate with the database repository 140. The lightgeneration module 110, light adjustment module 115, unwanted frequencyfiltering module 120, profile manager 125, side effects managementmodule 130, feedback monitor 135, visual signaling component 150,filtering component 155, or feedback component 160 can be separatecomponents, a single component, or part of the NSS 105. The system 100and its components, such as the NSS 105, may include hardware elements,such as one or more processors, logic devices, or circuits. The system100 and its components, such as the NSS 105, can include one or morehardware or interface component depicted in system 700 in FIGS. 7A and7B. For example, a component of system 100 can include or execute on oneor more processors 721, access storage 728 or memory 722, andcommunicate via network interface 718.

Still referring to FIG. 1, and in further detail, the NSS 105 caninclude at least one light generation module 110. The light generationmodule 110 can be designed and constructed to interface with a visualsignaling component 150 to provide instructions or otherwise cause orfacilitate the generation of a visual signal, such as a light pulse orflash of light, having one or more predetermined parameter. The lightgeneration module 110 can include hardware or software to receive andprocess instructions or data packets from one or more module orcomponent of the NSS 105. The light generation module 110 can generateinstructions to cause the visual signaling component 150 to generate avisual signal. The light generation module 110 can control or enable thevisual signaling component 150 to generate the visual signal having oneor more predetermined parameters.

The light generation module 110 can be communicatively coupled to thevisual signaling component 150. The light generation module 110 cancommunicate with the visual signaling component 150 via a circuit,electrical wire, data port, network port, power wire, ground, electricalcontacts or pins. The light generation module 110 can wirelesslycommunicate with the visual signaling component 150 using one or morewireless protocols such as BlueTooth, BlueTooth Low Energy, Zigbee,Z-Wave, IEEE 802.11, WIFI, 3G, 4G, LTE, near field communications(“NFC”), or other short, medium or long range communication protocols,etc. The light generation module 110 can include or access networkinterface 718 to communicate wirelessly or over a wire with the visualsignaling component 150.

The light generation module 110 can interface, control, or otherwisemanage various types of visual signaling components 150 in order tocause the visual signaling component 150 to generate, block, control, orotherwise provide the visual signal having one or more predeterminedparameters. The light generation module 110 can include a driverconfigured to drive a light source of the visual signaling component150. For example, the light source can include a light emitting diode(“LED”), and the light generation module 110 can include an LED driver,chip, microcontroller, operational amplifiers, transistors, resistors,or diodes configured to drive the LED light source by providingelectricity or power having certain voltage and current characteristics.

In some embodiments, the light generation module 110 can instruct thevisual signaling component 150 to provide a visual signal that include alight wave 200 as depicted in FIG. 2A. The light wave 200 can include orbe formed of electromagnetic waves. The electromagnetic waves of thelight wave can have respective amplitudes and travel orthogonal to oneanother as depicted by the amplitude of the electric field 205 versustime and the amplitude of the magnetic field 210 versus time. The lightwave 200 can have a wavelength 215. The light wave can also have afrequency. The product of the wavelength 215 and the frequency can bethe speed of the light wave. For example, the speed of the light wavecan be approximately 299,792,458 meters per second in a vacuum.

The light generation module 110 can instruct the visual signalingcomponent 150 to generate light waves having one or more predeterminedwavelength or intensity. The wavelength of the light wave can correspondto the visible spectrum, ultraviolet spectrum, infrared spectrum, orsome other wavelength of light. For example, the wavelength of the lightwave within the visible spectrum range can range from 390 to 700nanometers (“nm”). Within the visible spectrum, the light generationmodule 110 can further specify one or more wavelengths corresponding toone or more colors. For example, the light generation module 110 caninstruct the visual signaling component 150 to generate visual signalscomprising one or more light waves having one or more wavelengthcorresponding to one or more of ultraviolet (e.g., 10-380 nm); violet(e.g., 380-450 nm), blue (e.g., 450-495 nm), green (e.g., 495-570 nm),yellow (e.g., 570-590 nm), orange (e.g., 590-620 nm), red (e.g., 620-750nm); or infrared (e.g., 750-1000000 nm). The wavelength can range from10 nm to 100 micrometers. In some embodiments, the wavelength can be inthe range of 380 to 750 nm.

The light generation module 110 can determine to provide visual signalsthat include light pulses. The light generation module 110 can instructor otherwise cause the visual signaling component 150 to generate lightpulses. A light pulse can refer to a burst of light waves. For example,FIG. 2B illustrates a burst of a light wave. The burst of light wave canrefer to a burst of an electric field 250 generated by the light wave.The burst of the electric field 250 of the light wave can be referred toas a light pulse or a flash of light. For example, a light source thatis intermittently turned on and off can create bursts, flashes or pulsesof light.

FIG. 2C illustrates pulses of light 235 a-c in accordance with anembodiment. The light pulses 235 a-c can be illustrated via a graph inthe frequency spectrum where the y-axis represent frequency of the lightwave (e.g., the speed of the light wave divided by the wavelength) andthe x-axis represents time. The visual signal can include modulations oflight wave between a frequency of F_(a) and frequency different fromF_(a). For example, the NSS 105 can modulate a light wave between afrequency in the visible spectrum, such as Fa, and a frequency outsidethe visible spectrum. The NSS 105 can modulate the light wave betweentwo or more frequencies, between an on state and an off state, orbetween a high power state and a low power state.

In some cases, the frequency of the light wave used to generate thelight pulse can be constant at F_(a), thereby generating a square wavein the frequency spectrum. In some embodiments, each of the three pulses235 a-c can include light waves having a same frequency F_(a).

The width of each of the light pulses (e.g., the duration of the burstof the light wave) can correspond to a pulse width 230 a. The pulsewidth 230 a can refer to the length or duration of the burst. The pulsewidth 230 a can be measured in units of time or distance. In someembodiments, the pulses 235 a-c can include lights waves havingdifferent frequencies from one another. In some embodiments, the pulses235 a-c can have different pulse widths 230 a from one another, asillustrated in FIG. 2D. For example, a first pulse 235 d of FIG. 2D canhave a pulse width 230 a, while a second pulse 235 e has a second pulsewidth 230 b that is greater than the first pulse width 230 a. A thirdpulse 235 f can have a third pulse width 230 c that is less than thesecond pulse width 230 b. The third pulse width 230 c can also be lessthan the first pulse width 230 a. While the pulse widths 230 a-c of thepulses 235 d-f of the pulse train may vary, the light generation module110 can maintain a constant pulse rate interval 240 for the pulse train.

The pulses 235 a-c can form a pulse train having a pulse rate interval240. The pulse rate interval 240 can be quantified using units of time.The pulse rate interval 240 can be based on a frequency of the pulses ofthe pulse train 201. The frequency of the pulses of the pulse train 201can be referred to as a modulation frequency. For example, the lightgeneration module 110 can provide a pulse train 201 with a predeterminedfrequency corresponding to gamma activity, such as 40 Hz. To do so, thelight generation module 110 can determine the pulse rate interval 240 bytaking the multiplicative inverse (or reciprocal) of the frequency(e.g., 1 divided by the predetermined frequency for the pulse train).For example, the light generation module 110 can take the multiplicativeinverse of 40 Hz by dividing 1 by 40 Hz to determine the pulse rateinterval 240 as 0.025 seconds. The pulse rate interval 240 can remainconstant throughout the pulse train. In some embodiments, the pulse rateinterval 240 can vary throughout the pulse train or from one pulse trainto a subsequent pulse train. In some embodiments, the number of pulsestransmitted during a second can be fixed, while the pulse rate interval240 varies.

In some embodiments, the light generation module 110 can generate alight pulse having a light wave that varies in frequency. For example,the light generation module 110 can generate up-chirp pulses where thefrequency of the light wave of the light pulse increases from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse as illustrated in FIG.2E. For example, the frequency of a light wave at the beginning of pulse235 g can be F_(a). The frequency of the light wave of the pulse 235 gcan increase from F_(a) to F_(b) in the middle of the pulse 235 g, andthen to a maximum of Fc at the end of the pulse 235 g. Thus, thefrequency of the light wave used to generate the pulse 235 g can rangefrom F_(a) to F_(c). The frequency can increase linearly, exponentially,or based on some other rate or curve.

The light generation module 110 can generate down-chirp pulses, asillustrated in FIG. 2F, where the frequency of the light wave of thelight pulse decreases from the beginning of the pulse to the end of thepulse. For example, the frequency of a light wave at the beginning ofpulse 235 j can be F_(d). The frequency of the light wave of the pulse235 j can decrease from Fd to Fe in the middle of the pulse 235 j, andthen to a minimum of Ff at the end of the pulse 235 j. Thus, thefrequency of the light wave used to generate the pulse 235 j can rangefrom F_(d) to F_(f). The frequency can decrease linearly, exponentially,or based on some other rate or curve.

Visual signaling component 150 can be designed and constructed togenerate the light pulses responsive to instructions from the lightgeneration module 110. The instructions can include, for example,parameters of the light pulse such as a frequency or wavelength of thelight wave, intensity, duration of the pulse, frequency of the pulsetrain, pulse rate interval, or duration of the pulse train (e.g., anumber of pulses in the pulse train or the length of time to transmit apulse train having a predetermined frequency). The light pulse can beperceived, observed, or otherwise identified by the brain via ocularmeans such as eyes. The light pulses can be transmitted to the eye viadirect visual field or peripheral visual field.

FIG. 3A illustrates a horizontal direct visual field 310 and ahorizontal peripheral visual field. FIG. 3B illustrates a verticaldirect visual field 320 and a vertical peripheral visual field 325. FIG.3C illustrates degrees of direct visual fields and peripheral visualfields, including relative distances at which visual signals might beperceived in the different visual fields. The visual signaling component150 can include a light source 305. The light source 305 can bepositioned to transmit light pulses into the direct visual field 310 or320 of a person's eyes. The NSS 105 can be configured to transmit lightpulses into the direct visual field 310 or 320 because this mayfacilitate brain entrainment as the person may pay more attention to thelight pulses. The level of attention can be quantitatively measureddirectly in the brain, indirectly through the person's eye behavior, orby active feedback (e.g., mouse tracking).

The light source 305 can be positioned to transmit light pulses into aperipheral visual field 315 or 325 of a person's eyes. For example, theNSS 105 can transmit light pulses into the peripheral visual field 315or 325 as these light pulses may be less distracting to the person whomight be performing other tasks, such as reading, walking, driving, etc.Thus, the NSS 105 can provide subtle, on-going visual stimulation bytransmitting light pulses via the peripheral visual field.

In some embodiments, the light source 305 can be head-worn, while inother embodiments the light source 305 can be held by a subject's hands,placed on a stand, hung from a ceiling, or connected to a chair orotherwise positioned to direct light towards the direct or peripheralvisual fields. For example, a chair or externally supported system caninclude or position the light source 305 to provide the visual inputwhile maintaining a fixed/pre-specified relationship between thesubject's visual field and the visual stimulus. The system can providean immersive experience. For example, the system can include an opaqueor partially opaque dome that includes the light source. The dome canpositioned over the subject's head while the subject sits or reclines inchair. The dome can cover portions of the subject's visual field,thereby reducing external distractions and facilitating entrainment ofregions of the brain.

The light source 305 can include any type of light source or lightemitting device. The light source can include a coherent light source,such as a laser. The light source 305 can include an LED, Organic LED,fluorescent light source, incandescent light, or any other lightemitting device. The light source can include a lamp, light bulb, or oneor more light emitting diodes of various colors (e.g., white, red,green, blue). In some embodiments, the light source includes asemiconductor light emitting device, such as a light emitting diode ofany spectral or wavelength range. In some embodiments, the light source305 includes a broadband lamp or a broadband light source. In someembodiments, the light source includes a black light. In someembodiments, light source 305 includes a hollow cathode lamp, afluorescent tube light source, a neon lamp, an argon lamp, a plasmalamp, a xenon flash lamp, a mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, or asulfur lamp. In some embodiments, the light source 305 includes a laser,or a laser diode. In some embodiments, light source 305 includes anOLED, PHOLED, QDLED, or any other variation of a light source utilizingan organic material. In some embodiments, light source 305 includes amonochromatic light source. In some embodiments, light source 305includes a polychromatic light source. In some embodiments, the lightsource 305 includes a light source emitting light partially in thespectral range of ultraviolet light. In some embodiments, light source305 includes a device, product or a material emitting light partially inthe spectral range of visible light. In some embodiments, light source305 is a device, product or a material partially emanating or emittinglight in the spectral range of the infrared light. In some embodiments,light source 305 includes a device, product or a material emanating oremitting light in the visible spectral range. In some embodiments, lightsource 305 includes a light guide, an optical fiber or a waveguidethrough which light is emitted from the light source.

In some embodiments, light source 305 includes one or more mirrors forreflecting or redirecting of light. For example, the mirrors can reflector redirect light towards the direct visual field 310 or 320, or theperipheral visual field 315 or 325. The light source 305 can includeinteract with microelectromechanical devices (“MEMS”). The light source305 can include or interact with a digital light projector (“DLP”). Insome embodiments, the light source 305 can include ambient light orsunlight. The ambient light or sunlight can be focused by one or moreoptical lenses and directed towards the direct visual field orperipheral field. The ambient light or sunlight can be directed by oneor more mirrors towards the directed visual field or peripheral visualfield.

In cases where the light source is ambient light, the ambient light isnot positioned but the ambient light can enter the eye via a directvisual field or peripheral visual field. In some embodiments, the lightsource 305 can be positioned to direct light pulses towards the directvisual field or peripheral field. For example, one or more light sources305 can be attached, affixed, coupled, mechanically coupled, orotherwise provided with a frame 400 as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In someembodiments, the visual signaling component 150 can include the frame400. Additional details of the operation of the NSS 105 in conjunctionwith the frame 400 including one or more light sources 305 are providedbelow in Section E.

Thus, the light source can include any type of light source such as anoptical light source, mechanical light source, or chemical light source.The light source can include any material or object that is reflectiveor opaque that can generate, emit, or reflect oscillating patterns oflight, such as a fan rotating in front of a light, or bubbles. In someembodiments, the light source can include optical illusions that areinvisible, physiological phenomena that are within the eye (e.g.,pressing the eyeball), or chemicals applied to the eye.

B. Systems and Devices Configured for Neural Stimulation Via VisualStimulation

Referring now to FIG. 4A, the frame 400 can be designed and constructedto be placed or positioned on a person's head. The frame 400 can beconfigured to be worn by the person. The frame 400 can be designed andconstructed to stay in place. The frame 400 can be configured to be wornand stay in place as a person sits, stands, walks, runs, or lays downflat. The light source 305 can be configured on the frame 400 to projectlight pulses towards the person's eyes during these various positions.In some embodiments, the light source 305 can be configured to projectlight pulses towards the person's eyes if their eyelids are closed suchthat the light pulse penetrates the eyelid to be perceived by theretina. The frame 400 can include a bridge 420. The frame 400 caninclude one or more eye wires 415 coupled to the bridge 420. The bridge420 can be positioned in between the eye wires 415. The frame 400 caninclude one or more temples extending from the one or more eye wires415. In some embodiments, the eye wires 415 can include or hold a lens425. In some embodiments, the eye wires 415 can include or hold a solidmaterial 425 or cover 425. The lens, solid material, or cover 425 can betransparent, semi-transparent, opaque, or completely block out externallight.

The frame 400 can be referred to as glasses or eyeglasses. The frame 400can be formed of various materials, including, for example, metal,alloy, aluminum, plastic, rubber, steel, or any other material thatprovides sufficient structural support for the light sources 305 and canbe placed on a subject or user. Eyeglasses or frame 400 can refer to anystructure configured to house or hold one or more light sources 305 andbe positioned or placed on a subject such that the light sources 305 candirected light towards the fovea or eye of the subject.

One or more light sources 305 can be positioned on or adjacent to theeye wire 415, lens or other solid material 425, or bridge 420. Forexample, a light source 305 can be positioned in the middle of the eyewire 415 on a solid material 425 in order to transmit light pulses intothe direct visual field. In some embodiments, a light source 305 can bepositioned at a corner of the eye wire 415, such as a corner of the eyewire 415 coupled to the temple 410, in order to transmit light pulsestowards a peripheral field. The lens or solid material 425 can providevisibility through the frame 400. The lens or solid material 425 canprovide full visibility, or limited visibility. The lens or solidmaterial 425 can be tinted, opaque, or switchable. For example, a useror subject can change or replace the lens or solid 425 material (e.g.,different prescription lens, or different color or level of tint). TheNSS 105 can switch or change the lens or solid material 425 (e.g.,electrochromic or a liquid crystal display). The NSS 105 can switch orchange the lens or solid material 425 to increase or decrease a contrastratio between the visual stimulation signal provided by the lightsources 305 and the ambient light. The NSS 105 can switch or change thelens or solid material 425 to improve adherence, such as by increasingvisibility so the subject is more aware of the surrounding environment.

In some cases, a diffuser element can be added between the light source305 and the eyes or fovea of the subject in order to create a moreuniform light distribution. The diffuser can facilitate spreading thelight from the light sources 305, thereby making the visual stimulationsignal less harsh on the subject.

The NSS 105 can perform visual brain entrainment via a single eye orboth eyes. For example, the NSS 105 can direct light pulses to a singleeye or both eyes. The NSS 105 can interface with a visual signalingcomponent 150 that includes a frame 400 and two eye wires 415. However,the visual signaling component 150 may include a single light source 305configured and positioned to direct light pulses to a first eye. Thevisual signaling component 150 can further include a light blockingcomponent that keeps out or blocks the light pulses generated from thelight source 305 from entering a second eye. The visual signalingcomponent 150 can block or prevent light from entering the second eyeduring the brain entrainment process.

In some embodiments, the visual signaling component 150 canalternatively transmit or direct light pulses to the first eye and thesecond eye. For example, the visual signaling component 150 can directlight pulses to the first eye for a first time interval. The visualsignaling component 150 can direct light pulses to the second eye for asecond time interval. The first time interval and the second timeinterval can be a same time interval, overlapping time intervals,mutually exclusive time intervals, or subsequent time intervals.

FIG. 4B illustrates a frame 400 comprising a set of shutters 435 thatcan block at least a portion of light that enters through the eye wire415. The set of shutters 435 can intermittently block ambient light orsunlight that enters through the eye wire 415. The set of shutters 435can open to allow light to enter through the eye wire 415, and close toat least partially block light that enters through the eye wire 415.Additional details of the operation of the NSS 105 in conjunction withthe frame 400 including one or more shutters 430 are provided below inSection E.

The set of shutters 435 can include one or more shutter 430 that isopened and closed by one or more actuator. The shutter 430 can be formedfrom one or more materials. The shutter 430 can include one or morematerials. The shutter 430 can include or be formed from materials thatare capable of at least partially blocking or attenuating light.

The frame 400 can include one or more actuators configured to at leastpartially open or close the set of shutters 435 or an individual shutter430. The frame 400 can include one or more types of actuators to openand close the shutters 435. For example, the actuator can include amechanically driven actuator. The actuator can include a magneticallydriven actuator. The actuator can include a pneumonic actuator. Theactuator can include a hydraulic actuator. The actuator can include apiezoelectric actuator. The actuator can include amicro-electromechanical systems (“MEMS”).

The set of shutters 435 can include one or more shutter 430 that isopened and closed via electrical or chemical techniques. For example,the shutter 430 or set of shutters 435 can be formed from one or morechemicals. The shutter 430 or set of shutters can include one or morechemicals. The shutter 430 or set of shutters 435 can include or beformed from chemicals that are capable of at least partially blocking orattenuating light.

For example, the shutter 430 or set of shutters 435 can include caninclude photochromic lenses configured to filter, attenuate or blocklight. The photochromic lenses can automatically darken when exposed tosunlight. The photochromic lens can include molecules that areconfigured to darken the lens. The molecules can be activated by lightwaves, such as ultraviolet radiation or other light wavelengths. Thus,the photochromic molecules can be configured to darken the lens inresponse to a predetermined wavelength of light.

The shutter 430 or set of shutters 435 can include electrochromic glassor plastic. Electrochromic glass or plastic can change from light todark (e.g., clear to opaque) in response to an electrical voltage orcurrent. Electrochromic glass or plastic can include metal-oxidecoatings that are deposited on the glass or plastic, multiple layers,and lithium ions that travel between two electrodes between a layer tolighten or darken the glass.

The shutter 430 or set of shutters 435 can include micro shutters. Microshutters can include tiny windows that measure 100 by 200 microns. Themicro shutters can be arrayed in the eye frame 415 in a waffle-likegrid. The individual micro shutters can be opened or closed by anactuator. The actuator can include a magnetic arm that sweeps past themicro shutter to open or close the micro shutter. An open micro shuttercan allow light to enter through the eye frame 415, while a closed microshutter can block, attenuate, or filter the light.

The NSS 105 can drive the actuator to open and close one or moreshutters 430 or the set of shutters 435 at a predetermined frequencysuch as 40 Hz. By opening and closing the shutter 430 at thepredetermined frequency, the shutter 430 can allow flashes of light topass through the eye wire 415 at the predetermined frequency. Thus, theframe 400 including a set of shutters 435 may not include or useseparate light source coupled to the frame 400, such as a light source305 coupled to frame 400 depicted in FIG. 4A.

In some embodiments, the visual signaling component 150 or light source305 can refer to or be included in a virtual reality headset 401, asdepicted in FIG. 4C. For example, the virtual reality headset 401 can bedesigned and constructed to receive a light source 305. The light source305 can include a computing device having a display device, such as asmartphone or mobile telecommunications device. The virtual realityheadset 401 can include a cover 440 that opens to receive the lightsource 305. The cover 440 can close to lock or hold the light source 305in place. When closed, the cover 440 and case 450 and 445 can form anenclosure for the light source 305. This enclosure can provide animmersive experience that minimize or eliminates unwanted visualdistractions. The virtual reality headset can provide an environment tomaximize brainwave entrainment. The virtual reality headset can providean augmented reality experience. In some embodiments, the light source305 can form an image on another surface such that the image isreflected off the surface and towards a subject's eye (e.g., a heads updisplay that overlays on the screen a flickering object or an augmentedportion of reality). Additional details of the operation of the NSS 105in conjunction with the virtual reality headset 401 are provided belowin Section B.

The virtual reality headset 401 includes straps 455 and 460 configuredto secure the virtual reality headset 401 to a person's head. Thevirtual reality headset 401 can be secured via straps 455 and 460 suchto minimize movement of the headset 401 worn during physical activity,such as walking or running. The virtual reality headset 401 can includea skull cap formed from 460 or 455.

The feedback sensor 605 can include an electrode, dry electrode, gelelectrode, saline soaked electrode, or adhesive-based electrodes.

FIGS. 5A-5D illustrate embodiments of the visual signaling component 150that can include a tablet computing device 500 or other computing device500 having a display screen 305 as the light source 305. The visualsignaling component 150 can transmit light pulses, light flashes, orpatterns of light via the display screen 305 or light source 305.

FIG. 5A illustrates a display screen 305 or light source 305 thattransmits light. The light source 305 can transmit light comprising awavelength in the visible spectrum. The NSS 105 can instruct the visualsignaling component 150 to transmit light via the light source 305. TheNSS 105 can instruct the visual signaling component 150 to transmitflashes of light or light pulses having a predetermined pulse rateinterval. For example, FIG. 5B illustrates the light source 305 turnedoff or disabled such that the light source does not emit light, or emitsa minimal or reduced amount of light. The visual signaling component 150can cause the tablet computing device 500 to enable (e.g., FIG. 5A) anddisable (e.g., FIG. 5B) the light source 305 such that flashes of lighthave a predetermined frequency, such as 40 Hz. The visual signalingcomponent 150 can toggle or switch the light source 305 between two ormore states to generate flashes of light or light pulses with thepredetermined frequency.

In some embodiments, the light generation module 110 can instruct orcause the visual signaling component 150 to display a pattern of lightvia display device 305 or light source 305, as depicted in FIGS. 5C and5D. The light generation module 110 can cause the visual signalingcomponent 150 can flicker, toggle or switch between two or more patternsto generate flashes of light or light pulses. Patterns can include, forexample, alternating checkerboard patterns 510 and 515. The pattern caninclude symbols, characters, or images that can be toggled or adjustedfrom one state to another state. For example, the color of a characteror text relative to a background color can be inverted to cause a switchbetween a first state 510 and a second state 515. Inverting a foregroundcolor and background color at a predetermined frequency can generatelight pulses by way of indicating visual changes that can facilitateadjusting or managing a frequency of neural oscillations. Additionaldetails of the operation of the NSS 105 in conjunction with the tablet500 are provided below in Section G.

In some embodiments, the light generation module 110 can instruct orcause the visual signaling component 150 to flicker, toggle, or switchbetween images configured to stimulate specific or predeterminedportions of the brain or a specific cortex. The presentation, form,color, motion and other aspects of the light or an image based stimulican dictate which cortex or cortices are recruited to process thestimuli. The visual signaling component 150 can stimulate discreteportions of the cortex by modulating the presentation of the stimuli totarget specific or general regions of interest. The relative position inthe field of view, the color of the input, or the motion and speed ofthe light stimuli can dictate which region of the cortex is stimulated.

For example, the brain can include at least two portions that processpredetermined types of visual stimuli: the primary visual cortex on theleft side of the brain, and the calcarine fissure on the right side ofthe brain. Each of these two portions can have one or more multiplesub-portions that process predetermined types of visual stimuli. Forexample, the calcarine fissure can include a sub-portion referred to asarea V5 that can include neurons that respond strongly to motion but maynot register stationary objects. Subjects with damage to area V5 mayhave motion blindness, but otherwise normal vision. In another example,the primary visual cortex can include a sub-portion referred to as areaV4 that can include neurons that are specialized for color perception.Subjects with damage to area V4 may have color blindness and onlyperceive objects in shades of gray. In another example, the primaryvisual cortex can include a sub-portion referred to as area V1 thatincludes neurons that respond strongly to contrast edges and helpssegment the image into separate objects.

Thus, the light generation module 110 can instruct or cause the visualsignaling component 150 to form a type of still image or video, orgenerate a flicker, or toggle between images that configured tostimulate specific or predetermined portions of the brain or a specificcortex. For example, the light generation module 110 can instruct orcause the visual signaling component 150 to generate images of humanfaces to stimulate a fusiform face area, which can facilitate brainentrainment for subjects having prosopagnosia or face blindness. Thelight generation module 110 can instruct or cause the visual signalingcomponent 150 to generate images of faces flickering to target this areaof the subject's brain. In another example, the light generation module110 can instruct the visual signaling component 150 to generate imagesthat include edges or line drawings to stimulate neurons of the primaryvisual cortex that respond strongly to contrast edges. In someembodiments,

The NSS 105 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one light adjustment module 115. The lightadjustment module 115 can be designed and constructed to measure orverify an environmental variable (e.g., light intensity, timing,incident light, ambient light, eye lid status, etc.) to adjust aparameter associated with the visual signal, such as a frequency,amplitude, wavelength, intensity pattern or other parameter of thevisual signal. The light adjustment module 115 can automatically vary aparameter of the visual signal based on profile information or feedback.The light adjustment module 115 can receive the feedback informationfrom the feedback monitor 135. The light adjustment module 115 canreceive instructions or information from a side effects managementmodule 130. The light adjustment module 115 can receive profileinformation from profile manager 125.

The NSS 105 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one unwanted frequency filtering module 120.The unwanted frequency filtering module 120 can be designed andconstructed to block, mitigate, reduce, or otherwise filter outfrequencies of visual signals that are undesired to prevent or reduce anamount of such visual signals from being perceived by the brain. Theunwanted frequency filtering module 120 can interface, instruct,control, or otherwise communicate with a filtering component 155 tocause the filtering component 155 to block, attenuate, or otherwisereduce the effect of the unwanted frequency on the neural oscillations.

The NSS 105 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one profile manager 125. The profile manager125 can be designed or constructed to store, update, retrieve orotherwise manage information associated with one or more subjectsassociated with the visual brain entrainment. Profile information caninclude, for example, historical treatment information, historical brainentrainment information, dosing information, parameters of light waves,feedback, physiological information, environmental information, or otherdata associated with the systems and methods of brain entrainment.

The NSS 105 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one side effects management module 130. Theside effects management module 130 can be designed and constructed toprovide information to the light adjustment module 115 or the lightgeneration module 110 to change one or more parameter of the visualsignal in order to reduce a side effect. Side effects can include, forexample, nausea, migraines, fatigue, seizures, eye strain, or loss ofsight.

The side effects management module 130 can automatically instruct acomponent of the NSS 105 to alter or change a parameter of the visualsignal. The side effects management module 130 can be configured withpredetermined thresholds to reduce side effects. For example, the sideeffects management module 130 can be configured with a maximum durationof a pulse train, maximum intensity of light waves, maximum amplitude,maximum duty cycle of a pulse train (e.g., the pulse width multiplied bythe frequency of the pulse train), maximum number of treatments forbrainwave entrainment in a time period (e.g., 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours,or 24 hours).

The side effects management module 130 can cause a change in theparameter of the visual signal in response to feedback information. Theside effect management module 130 can receive feedback from the feedbackmonitor 135. The side effects management module 130 can determine toadjust a parameter of the visual signal based on the feedback. The sideeffects management module 130 can compare the feedback with a thresholdto determine to adjust the parameter of the visual signal.

The side effects management module 130 can be configured with or includea policy engine that applies a policy or a rule to the current visualsignal and feedback to determine an adjustment to the visual signal. Forexample, if feedback indicates that a patient receiving visual signalshas a heart rate or pulse rate above a threshold, the side effectsmanagement module 130 can turn off the pulse train until the pulse ratestabilizes to a value below the threshold, or below a second thresholdthat is lower than the threshold.

The NSS 105 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one feedback monitor 135. The feedback monitorcan be designed and constructed to receive feedback information from afeedback component 160. Feedback component 160 can include, for example,a feedback sensor 605 such as a temperature sensor, heart or pulse ratemonitor, physiological sensor, ambient light sensor, ambient temperaturesensor, sleep status via actigraphy, blood pressure monitor, respiratoryrate monitor, brain wave sensor, EEG probe, electrooculography (“EOG”)probes configured to measure the corneo-retinal standing potential thatexists between the front and the back of the human eye, accelerometer,gyroscope, motion detector, proximity sensor, camera, microphone, orphoto detector.

In some embodiments, a computing device 500 can include the feedbackcomponent 160 or feedback sensor 605, as depicted in FIGS. 5C and 5D.For example, the feedback sensor on tablet 500 can include afront-facing camera that can capture images of a person viewing thelight source 305.

FIG. 6A depicts one or more feedback sensors 605 provided on a frame400. In some embodiments, a frame 400 can include one or feedbacksensors 605 provided on a portion of the frame, such as the bridge 420or portion of the eye wire 415. The feedback sensor 605 can be providedwith or coupled to the light source 305. The feedback sensor 605 can beseparate from the light source 305.

The feedback sensor 605 can interact with or communicate with NSS 105.For example, the feedback sensor 605 can provide detected feedbackinformation or data to the NSS 105 (e.g., feedback monitor 135). Thefeedback sensor 605 can provide data to the NSS 105 in real-time, forexample as the feedback sensor 605 detects or senses or information. Thefeedback sensor 605 can provide the feedback information to the NSS 105based on a time interval, such as 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10minutes, hourly, 2 hours, 4 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The feedbacksensor 605 can provide the feedback information to the NSS 105responsive to a condition or event, such as a feedback measurementexceeding a threshold or falling below a threshold. The feedback sensor605 can provide feedback information responsive to a change in afeedback parameter. In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can ping, query, orsend a request to the feedback sensor 605 for information, and thefeedback sensor 605 can provide the feedback information in response tothe ping, request, or query.

FIG. 6B illustrates feedback sensors 605 placed or positioned at, on, ornear a person's head. Feedback sensors 605 can include, for example, EEGprobes that detect brain wave activity.

The feedback monitor 135 can detect, receive, obtain, or otherwiseidentify feedback information from the one or more feedback sensors 605.The feedback monitor 135 can provide the feedback information to one ormore component of the NSS 105 for further processing or storage. Forexample, the profile manager 125 can update profile data structure 145stored in data repository 140 with the feedback information. Profilemanager 125 can associate the feedback information with an identifier ofthe patient or person undergoing the visual stimulation, as well as atime stamp and date stamp corresponding to receipt or detection of thefeedback information.

The feedback monitor 135 can determine a level of attention. The levelof attention can refer to the focus provided to the light pulses usedfor stimulation. The feedback monitor 135 can determine the level ofattention using various hardware and software techniques. The feedbackmonitor 135 can assign a score to the level of attention (e.g., 1 to 10with 1 being low attention and 10 being high attention, or vice versa, 1to 100 with 1 being low attention and 100 being high attention, or viceversa, 0 to 1 with 0 being low attention and 1 being high attention, orvice versa), categorize the level of attention (e.g., low, medium,high), grade the attention (e.g., A, B, C, D, or F), or otherwiseprovide an indication of a level of attention.

In some cases, the feedback monitor 135 can track a person's eyemovement to identify a level of attention. The feedback monitor 135 caninterface with a feedback component 160 that includes an eye-tracker.The feedback monitor 135 (e.g., via feedback component 160) can detectand record eye movement of the person and analyze the recorded eyemovement to determine an attention span or level of attention. Thefeedback monitor 135 can measure eye gaze which can indicate or provideinformation related to covert attention. For example, the feedbackmonitor 135 (e.g., via feedback component 160) can be configured withelectrooculography (“EOG”) to measure the skin electric potential aroundthe eye, which can indicate a direction the eye faces relative to thehead. In some embodiments, the EOG can include a system or device tostabilize the head so it cannot move in order to determine the directionof the eye relative to the head. In some embodiments, the EOG caninclude or interface with a head tracker system to determine theposition of the heads, and then determine the direction of the eyerelative to the head.

In some embodiments, the feedback monitor 135 and feedback component 160can determine or track the direction of the eye or eye movement usingvideo detection of the pupil or corneal reflection. For example, thefeedback component 160 can include one or more camera or video camera.The feedback component 160 can include an infra-red source that sendslight pulses towards the eyes. The light can be reflected by the eye.The feedback component 160 can detect the position of the reflection.The feedback component 160 can capture or record the position of thereflection. The feedback component 160 can perform image processing onthe reflection to determine or compute the direction of the eye or gazedirection of the eye.

The feedback monitor 135 can compare the eye direction or movement tohistorical eye direction or movement of the same person, nominal eyemovement, or other historical eye movement information to determine alevel of attention. For example, if the eye is focused on the lightpulses during the pulse train, then the feedback monitor 135 candetermine that the level of attention is high. If the feedback monitor135 determines that the eye moved away from the pulse train for 25% ofthe pulse train, then the feedback monitor 135 can determine that thelevel of attention is medium. If the feedback monitor 135 determinesthat the eye movement occurred for more than 50% of the pulse train orthe eye was not focused on the pulse train for greater than 50%, thenthe feedback monitor 135 can determine that the level of attention islow.

In some embodiments, the system 100 can include a filter (e.g.,filtering component 155) to control the spectral range of the lightemitted from the light source. In some embodiments, light sourceincludes a light reactive material affecting the light emitted, such asa polarizer, filter, prism or a photochromic material, or electrochromicglass or plastic. The filtering component 155 can receive instructionsfrom the unwanted frequency filtering module 120 to block or attenuateone or more frequencies of light.

The filtering component 155 can include an optical filter that canselectively transmit light in a particular range of wavelengths orcolors, while blocking one or more other ranges of wavelengths orcolors. The optical filter can modify the magnitude or phase of theincoming light wave for a range of wavelengths. The optical filter caninclude an absorptive filter, or an interference or dichroic filter. Anabsorptive filter can take energy of a photon to transform theelectromagnetic energy of a light wave into internal energy of theabsorber (e.g., thermal energy). The reduction in intensity of a lightwave propagating through a medium by absorption of a part of its photonscan be referred to as attenuation.

An interference filter or dichroic filter can include an optical filterthat reflects one or more spectral bands of light, while transmittingother spectral bands of light. An interference filter or dichroic filtermay have a nearly zero coefficient of absorption for one or morewavelengths. Interference filters can be high-pass, low-pass, bandpass,or band-rejection. An interference filter can include one or more thinlayers of a dielectric material or metallic material having differentrefractive indices.

In an illustrative implementation, the NSS 105 can interface with avisual signaling component 150, a filtering component 155, and afeedback component 160. The visual signaling component 150 can includehardware or devices, such as glass frames 400 and one or more lightsources 305. The filtering component 155 can include hardware ordevices, such as a feedback sensor 605. The filtering component 155 caninclude hardware, materials or chemicals, such as a polarizing lens,shutters, electrochromic materials or photochromic materials.

C. Computing Environment

FIGS. 7A and 7B depict block diagrams of a computing device 700. Asshown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, each computing device 700 includes a centralprocessing unit 721, and a main memory unit 722. As shown in FIG. 7A, acomputing device 700 can include a storage device 728, an installationdevice 716, a network interface 718, an I/O controller 723, displaydevices 724 a-724 n, a keyboard 726 and a pointing device 727, e.g. amouse. The storage device 728 can include, without limitation, anoperating system, software, and software of a neural stimulation system(“NSS”) 701. The NSS 701 can include or refer to one or more of VisualNSS 105, NSS 905, NSOS 2305, NSS 2605, Cognitive Assessment System 3105,NSSS 3705. As shown in FIG. 7B, each computing device 700 can alsoinclude additional optional elements, e.g. a memory port 703, a bridge770, one or more input/output devices 730 a-730 n (generally referred tousing reference numeral 730), and a cache memory 740 in communicationwith the central processing unit 721.

The central processing unit 721 is any logic circuitry that responds toand processes instructions fetched from the main memory unit 722. Inmany embodiments, the central processing unit 721 is provided by amicroprocessor unit, e.g.: those manufactured by Intel Corporation ofMountain View, Calif.; those manufactured by Motorola Corporation ofSchaumburg, Ill.; the ARM processor (from, e.g., ARM Holdings andmanufactured by ST, TI, ATMEL, etc.) and TEGRA system on a chip (SoC)manufactured by Nvidia of Santa Clara, Calif.; the POWER7 processor,those manufactured by International Business Machines of White Plains,N.Y.; or those manufactured by Advanced Micro Devices of Sunnyvale,Calif.; or field programmable gate arrays (“FPGAs”) from Altera in SanJose, Calif., Intel Corporation, Xlinix in San Jose, Calif., orMicroSemi in Aliso Viejo, Calif., etc. The computing device 700 can bebased on any of these processors, or any other processor capable ofoperating as described herein. The central processing unit 721 canutilize instruction level parallelism, thread level parallelism,different levels of cache, and multi-core processors. A multi-coreprocessor can include two or more processing units on a single computingcomponent. Examples of multi-core processors include the AMD PHENOMIIX2, INTEL CORE i5 and INTEL CORE i7.

Main memory unit 722 can include one or more memory chips capable ofstoring data and allowing any storage location to be directly accessedby the microprocessor 721. Main memory unit 722 can be volatile andfaster than storage 728 memory. Main memory units 722 can be Dynamicrandom access memory (DRAM) or any variants, including static randomaccess memory (SRAM), Burst SRAM or SynchBurst SRAM (BSRAM), Fast PageMode DRAM (FPM DRAM), Enhanced DRAM (EDRAM), Extended Data Output RAM(EDO RAM), Extended Data Output DRAM (EDO DRAM), Burst Extended DataOutput DRAM (BEDO DRAM), Single Data Rate Synchronous DRAM (SDR SDRAM),Double Data Rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), Direct Rambus DRAM (DRDRAM), orExtreme Data Rate DRAM (XDR DRAM). In some embodiments, the main memory722 or the storage 728 can be non-volatile; e.g., non-volatile readaccess memory (NVRAM), flash memory non-volatile static RAM (nvSRAM),Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), Phase-changememory (PRAM), conductive-bridging RAM (CBRAIVI),Silicon-Oxide-Nitride-Oxide-Silicon (SONOS), Resistive RAM (RRAM),Racetrack, Nano-RAM (NRAM), or Millipede memory. The main memory 722 canbe based on any of the above described memory chips, or any otheravailable memory chips capable of operating as described herein. In theembodiment shown in FIG. 7A, the processor 721 communicates with mainmemory 722 via a system bus 750 (described in more detail below). FIG.7B depicts an embodiment of a computing device 700 in which theprocessor communicates directly with main memory 722 via a memory port703. For example, in FIG. 7B the main memory 722 can be DRDRAM.

FIG. 7B depicts an embodiment in which the main processor 721communicates directly with cache memory 740 via a secondary bus,sometimes referred to as a backside bus. In other embodiments, the mainprocessor 721 communicates with cache memory 740 using the system bus750. Cache memory 740 typically has a faster response time than mainmemory 722 and is typically provided by SRAM, BSRAM, or EDRAM. In theembodiment shown in FIG. 7B, the processor 721 communicates with variousI/O devices 730 via a local system bus 750. Various buses can be used toconnect the central processing unit 721 to any of the I/O devices 730,including a PCI bus, a PCI-X bus, or a PCI-Express bus, or a NuBus. Forembodiments in which the I/O device is a video display 724, theprocessor 721 can use an Advanced Graphics Port (AGP) to communicatewith the display 724 or the I/O controller 723 for the display 724. FIG.7B depicts an embodiment of a computer 700 in which the main processor721 communicates directly with I/O device 730 b or other processors 721′via HYPERTRANSPORT, RAPIDIO, or INFINIBAND communications technology.FIG. 7B also depicts an embodiment in which local busses and directcommunication are mixed: the processor 721 communicates with I/O device730 a using a local interconnect bus while communicating with I/O device730 b directly.

A wide variety of I/O devices 730 a-730 n can be present in thecomputing device 700. Input devices can include keyboards, mice,trackpads, trackballs, touchpads, touch mice, multi-touch touchpads andtouch mice, microphones (analog or MEMS), multi-array microphones,drawing tablets, cameras, single-lens reflex camera (SLR), digital SLR(DSLR), CMOS sensors, CCDs, accelerometers, inertial measurement units,infrared optical sensors, pressure sensors, magnetometer sensors,angular rate sensors, depth sensors, proximity sensors, ambient lightsensors, gyroscopic sensors, or other sensors. Output devices caninclude video displays, graphical displays, speakers, headphones, inkjetprinters, laser printers, and 3D printers.

Devices 730 a-730 n can include a combination of multiple input oroutput devices, including, e.g., Microsoft KINECT, Nintendo Wiimote forthe WII, Nintendo WII U GAMEPAD, or Apple IPHONE. Some devices 730 a-730n allow gesture recognition inputs through combining some of the inputsand outputs. Some devices 730 a-730 n provides for facial recognitionwhich can be utilized as an input for different purposes includingauthentication and other commands. Some devices 730 a-730 n provides forvoice recognition and inputs, including, e.g., Microsoft KINECT, SIRIfor IPHONE by Apple, Google Now or Google Voice Search.

Additional devices 730 a-730 n have both input and output capabilities,including, e.g., haptic feedback devices, touchscreen displays, ormulti-touch displays. Touchscreen, multi-touch displays, touchpads,touch mice, or other touch sensing devices can use differenttechnologies to sense touch, including, e.g., capacitive, surfacecapacitive, projected capacitive touch (PCT), in-cell capacitive,resistive, infrared, waveguide, dispersive signal touch (DST), in-celloptical, surface acoustic wave (SAW), bending wave touch (BWT), orforce-based sensing technologies. Some multi-touch devices can allow twoor more contact points with the surface, allowing advanced functionalityincluding, e.g., pinch, spread, rotate, scroll, or other gestures. Sometouchscreen devices, including, e.g., Microsoft PIXELSENSE orMulti-Touch Collaboration Wall, can have larger surfaces, such as on atable-top or on a wall, and can also interact with other electronicdevices. Some I/O devices 730 a-730 n, display devices 724 a-724 n orgroup of devices can be augmented reality devices. The I/O devices canbe controlled by an I/O controller 721 as shown in FIG. 7A. The I/Ocontroller 721 can control one or more I/O devices, such as, e.g., akeyboard 126 and a pointing device 727, e.g., a mouse or optical pen.Furthermore, an I/O device can also provide storage and/or aninstallation medium 116 for the computing device 700. In still otherembodiments, the computing device 700 can provide USB connections (notshown) to receive handheld USB storage devices. In further embodiments,an I/O device 730 can be a bridge between the system bus 750 and anexternal communication bus, e.g. a USB bus, a SCSI bus, a FireWire bus,an Ethernet bus, a Gigabit Ethernet bus, a Fibre Channel bus, or aThunderbolt bus.

In some embodiments, display devices 724 a-724 n can be connected to I/Ocontroller 721. Display devices can include, e.g., liquid crystaldisplays (LCD), thin film transistor LCD (TFT-LCD), blue phase LCD,electronic papers (e-ink) displays, flexile displays, light emittingdiode displays (LED), digital light processing (DLP) displays, liquidcrystal on silicon (LCOS) displays, organic light-emitting diode (OLED)displays, active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (AMOLED) displays,liquid crystal laser displays, time-multiplexed optical shutter (TMOS)displays, or 3D displays. Examples of 3D displays can use, e.g.stereoscopy, polarization filters, active shutters, or autostereoscopy.Display devices 724 a-724 n can also be a head-mounted display (HMD). Insome embodiments, display devices 724 a-724 n or the corresponding I/Ocontrollers 723 can be controlled through or have hardware support forOPENGL or DIRECTX API or other graphics libraries.

In some embodiments, the computing device 700 can include or connect tomultiple display devices 724 a-724 n, which each can be of the same ordifferent type and/or form. As such, any of the I/O devices 730 a-730 nand/or the I/O controller 723 can include any type and/or form ofsuitable hardware, software, or combination of hardware and software tosupport, enable or provide for the connection and use of multipledisplay devices 724 a-724 n by the computing device 700. For example,the computing device 700 can include any type and/or form of videoadapter, video card, driver, and/or library to interface, communicate,connect or otherwise use the display devices 724 a-724 n. In oneembodiment, a video adapter can include multiple connectors to interfaceto multiple display devices 724 a-724 n. In other embodiments, thecomputing device 700 can include multiple video adapters, with eachvideo adapter connected to one or more of the display devices 724 a-724n. In some embodiments, any portion of the operating system of thecomputing device 700 can be configured for using multiple displays 724a-724 n. In other embodiments, one or more of the display devices 724a-724 n can be provided by one or more other computing devices 700 a or700 b connected to the computing device 700, via the network 740. Insome embodiments software can be designed and constructed to use anothercomputer's display device as a second display device 724 a for thecomputing device 700. For example, in one embodiment, an Apple iPad canconnect to a computing device 700 and use the display of the device 700as an additional display screen that can be used as an extended desktop.One ordinarily skilled in the art will recognize and appreciate thevarious ways and embodiments that a computing device 700 can beconfigured to have multiple display devices 724 a-724 n.

Referring again to FIG. 7A, the computing device 700 can comprise astorage device 728 (e.g. one or more hard disk drives or redundantarrays of independent disks) for storing an operating system or otherrelated software, and for storing application software programs such asany program related to the software for the NSS. Examples of storagedevice 728 include, e.g., hard disk drive (HDD); optical drive includingCD drive, DVD drive, or BLU-RAY drive; solid-state drive (SSD); USBflash drive; or any other device suitable for storing data. Some storagedevices can include multiple volatile and non-volatile memories,including, e.g., solid state hybrid drives that combine hard disks withsolid state cache. Some storage device 728 can be non-volatile, mutable,or read-only. Some storage device 728 can be internal and connect to thecomputing device 700 via a bus 750. Some storage device 728 can beexternal and connect to the computing device 700 via a I/O device 730that provides an external bus. Some storage device 728 can connect tothe computing device 700 via the network interface 718 over a network,including, e.g., the Remote Disk for MACBOOK AIR by Apple. Some clientdevices 700 can not require a non-volatile storage device 728 and can bethin clients or zero clients 202. Some storage device 728 can also beused as an installation device 716, and can be suitable for installingsoftware and programs. Additionally, the operating system and thesoftware can be run from a bootable medium, for example, a bootable CD,e.g. KNOPPIX, a bootable CD for GNU/Linux that is available as aGNU/Linux distribution from knoppix.net.

Computing device 700 can also install software or application from anapplication distribution platform. Examples of application distributionplatforms include the App Store for iOS provided by Apple, Inc., the MacApp Store provided by Apple, Inc., GOOGLE PLAY for Android OS providedby Google Inc., Chrome Webstore for CHROME OS provided by Google Inc.,and Amazon Appstore for Android OS and KINDLE FIRE provided byAmazon.com, Inc.

Furthermore, the computing device 700 can include a network interface718 to interface to the network 740 through a variety of connectionsincluding, but not limited to, standard telephone lines LAN or WAN links(e.g., 802.11, T1, T3, Gigabit Ethernet, Infiniband), broadbandconnections (e.g., ISDN, Frame Relay, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet,Ethernet-over-SONET, ADSL, VDSL, BPON, GPON, fiber optical includingFiOS), wireless connections, or some combination of any or all of theabove. Connections can be established using a variety of communicationprotocols (e.g., TCP/IP, Ethernet, ARCNET, SONET, SDH, Fiber DistributedData Interface (FDDI), IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac CDMA, GSM, WiMax and directasynchronous connections). In one embodiment, the computing device 700communicates with other computing devices 700′ via any type and/or formof gateway or tunneling protocol e.g. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) orTransport Layer Security (TLS), or the Citrix Gateway Protocolmanufactured by Citrix Systems, Inc. of Ft. Lauderdale, Fla. The networkinterface 118 can comprise a built-in network adapter, network interfacecard, PCMCIA network card, EXPRESSCARD network card, card bus networkadapter, wireless network adapter, USB network adapter, modem or anyother device suitable for interfacing the computing device 700 to anytype of network capable of communication and performing the operationsdescribed herein.

A computing device 700 of the sort depicted in FIG. 7A can operate underthe control of an operating system, which controls scheduling of tasksand access to system resources. The computing device 700 can be runningany operating system such as any of the versions of the MICROSOFTWINDOWS operating systems, the different releases of the Unix and Linuxoperating systems, any version of the MAC OS for Macintosh computers,any embedded operating system, any real-time operating system, any opensource operating system, any proprietary operating system, any operatingsystems for mobile computing devices, or any other operating systemcapable of running on the computing device and performing the operationsdescribed herein. Typical operating systems include, but are not limitedto: WINDOWS 7000, WINDOWS Server 2012, WINDOWS CE, WINDOWS Phone,WINDOWS XP, WINDOWS VISTA, and WINDOWS 7, WINDOWS RT, and WINDOWS 8 allof which are manufactured by Microsoft Corporation of Redmond, Wash.;MAC OS and iOS, manufactured by Apple, Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.; andLinux, a freely-available operating system, e.g. Linux Mint distribution(“distro”) or Ubuntu, distributed by Canonical Ltd. of London, UnitedKingdom; or Unix or other Unix-like derivative operating systems; andAndroid, designed by Google, of Mountain View, Calif., among others.Some operating systems, including, e.g., the CHROME OS by Google, can beused on zero clients or thin clients, including, e.g., CHROMEBOOKS.

The computer system 700 can be any workstation, telephone, desktopcomputer, laptop or notebook computer, netbook, ULTRABOOK, tablet,server, handheld computer, mobile telephone, smartphone or otherportable telecommunications device, media playing device, a gamingsystem, mobile computing device, or any other type and/or form ofcomputing, telecommunications or media device that is capable ofcommunication. The computer system 700 has sufficient processor powerand memory capacity to perform the operations described herein. In someembodiments, the computing device 700 can have different processors,operating systems, and input devices consistent with the device. TheSamsung GALAXY smartphones, e.g., operate under the control of Androidoperating system developed by Google, Inc. GALAXY smartphones receiveinput via a touch interface.

In some embodiments, the computing device 700 is a gaming system. Forexample, the computer system 700 can comprise a PLAYSTATION 3, orPERSONAL PLAYSTATION PORTABLE (PSP), or a PLAYSTATION VITA devicemanufactured by the Sony Corporation of Tokyo, Japan, a NINTENDO DS,NINTENDO 3DS, NINTENDO WII, or a NINTENDO WII U device manufactured byNintendo Co., Ltd., of Kyoto, Japan, or an XBOX 360 device manufacturedby the Microsoft Corporation of Redmond, Wash., or an OCULUS RIFT orOCULUS VR device manufactured BY OCULUS VR, LLC of Menlo Park, Calif.

In some embodiments, the computing device 700 is a digital audio playersuch as the Apple IPOD, IPOD Touch, and IPOD NANO lines of devices,manufactured by Apple Computer of Cupertino, Calif. Some digital audioplayers can have other functionality, including, e.g., a gaming systemor any functionality made available by an application from a digitalapplication distribution platform. For example, the IPOD Touch canaccess the Apple App Store. In some embodiments, the computing device700 is a portable media player or digital audio player supporting fileformats including, but not limited to, MP3, WAV, M4A/AAC, WMA ProtectedAAC, AIFF, Audible audiobook, Apple Lossless audio file formats and.mov, .m4v, and .mp4 MPEG-4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC) video file formats.

In some embodiments, the computing device 700 is a tablet e.g. the IPADline of devices by Apple; GALAXY TAB family of devices by Samsung; orKINDLE FIRE, by Amazon.com, Inc. of Seattle, Wash. In other embodiments,the computing device 700 is an eBook reader, e.g. the KINDLE family ofdevices by Amazon.com, or NOOK family of devices by Barnes & Noble, Inc.of New York City, N.Y.

In some embodiments, the communications device 700 includes acombination of devices, e.g. a smartphone combined with a digital audioplayer or portable media player. For example, one of these embodimentsis a smartphone, e.g. the IPHONE family of smartphones manufactured byApple, Inc.; a Samsung GALAXY family of smartphones manufactured bySamsung, Inc.; or a Motorola DROID family of smartphones. In yet anotherembodiment, the communications device 700 is a laptop or desktopcomputer equipped with a web browser and a microphone and speakersystem, e.g. a telephony headset. In these embodiments, thecommunications devices 700 are web-enabled and can receive and initiatephone calls. In some embodiments, a laptop or desktop computer is alsoequipped with a webcam or other video capture device that enables videochat and video call.

In some embodiments, the status of one or more machines 700 in thenetwork are monitored, generally as part of network management. In oneof these embodiments, the status of a machine can include anidentification of load information (e.g., the number of processes on themachine, CPU and memory utilization), of port information (e.g., thenumber of available communication ports and the port addresses), or ofsession status (e.g., the duration and type of processes, and whether aprocess is active or idle). In another of these embodiments, thisinformation can be identified by a plurality of metrics, and theplurality of metrics can be applied at least in part towards decisionsin load distribution, network traffic management, and network failurerecovery as well as any aspects of operations of the present solutiondescribed herein. Aspects of the operating environments and componentsdescribed above will become apparent in the context of the systems andmethods disclosed herein.

D. A Method for Neural Stimulation

FIG. 8 is a flow diagram of a method of performing visual brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The method 800 can beperformed by one or more system, component, module or element depictedin FIGS. 1-7B, including, for example, a neural stimulation system(NSS). In brief overview, the NSS can identify a visual signal toprovide at block 805. At block 810, the NSS can generate and transmitthe identified visual signal. At 815 the NSS can receive or determinefeedback associated with neural activity, physiological activity,environmental parameters, or device parameters. At 820 the NSS canmanage, control, or adjust the visual signal based on the feedback.

E. NSS Operating with a Frame

The NSS 105 can operate in conjunction with the frame 400 including alight source 305 as depicted in FIG. 4A. The NSS 105 can operate inconjunction with the frame 400 including a light source 30 and afeedback sensor 605 as depicted in FIG. 6A. The NSS 105 can operate inconjunction with the frame 400 including at least one shutter 430 asdepicted in FIG. 4B. The NSS 105 can operate in conjunction with theframe 400 including at least one shutter 430 and a feedback sensor 605.

In operation, a user of the frame 400 can wear the frame 400 on theirhead such that eye wires 415 encircle or substantially encircle theireyes. In some cases, the user can provide an indication to the NSS 105that the glass frames 400 have been worn and that the user is ready toundergo brainwave entrainment. The indication can include aninstruction, command, selection, input, or other indication via aninput/output interface, such as a keyboard 726, pointing device 727, orother I/O devices 730 a-n. The indication can be a motion-basedindication, visual indication, or voice-based indication. For example,the user can provide a voice command that indicates that the user isready to undergo brainwave entrainment.

In some cases, the feedback sensor 605 can determine that the user isready to undergo brainwave entrainment. The feedback sensor 605 candetect that the glass frames 400 have been placed on a user's head. TheNSS 105 can receive motion data, acceleration data, gyroscope data,temperature data, or capacitive touch data to determine that the frames400 have been placed on the user's head. The received data, such asmotion data, can indicate that the frames 400 were picked up and placedon the user's head. The temperature data can measure the temperature ofor proximate to the frames 400, which can indicate that the frames areon the user's head. In some cases, the feedback sensor 605 can performeye tracking to determine a level of attention a user is paying to thelight source 305 or feedback sensor 605. The NSS 105 can detect that theuser is ready responsive to determining that the user is paying a highlevel of attention to the light source 305 or feedback sensor 605. Forexample, staring at, gazing or looking in the direction of the lightsource 305 or feedback sensor 605 can provide an indication that theuser is ready to undergo brainwave entrainment.

Thus, the NSS 105 can detect or determine that the frames 400 have beenworn and that the user is in a ready state, or the NSS 105 can receivean indication or confirmation from the user that the user has worn theframes 400 and the user is ready to undergo brainwave entrainment. Upondetermining that the user is ready, the NSS 105 can initialize thebrainwave entrainment process. In some embodiments, the NSS 105 canaccess a profile data structure 145. For example, a profile manager 125can query the profile data structure 145 to determine one or moreparameter for the external visual stimulation used for the brainentrainment process. Parameters can include, for example, a type ofvisual stimulation, an intensity of the visual stimulation, frequency ofthe visual stimulation, duration of the visual stimulation, orwavelength of the visual stimulation. The profile manager 125 can querythe profile data structure 145 to obtain historical brain entrainmentinformation, such as prior visual stimulation sessions. The profilemanager 125 can perform a lookup in the profile data structure 145. Theprofile manager 125 can perform a look-up with a username, useridentifier, location information, fingerprint, biometric identifier,retina scan, voice recognition and authentication, or other identifyingtechnique.

The NSS 105 can determine a type of external visual stimulation based onthe hardware 400. The NSS 105 can determine the type of external visualstimulation based on the type of light source 305 available. Forexample, if the light source 305 includes a monochromatic LED thatgenerates light waves in the red spectrum, the NSS 105 can determinethat the type of visual stimulation includes pulses of light transmittedby the light source. However, if the frames 400 do not include an activelight source 305, but, instead, include one or more shutters 430, theNSS 105 can determine that the light source is sunlight or ambient lightthat is to be modulated as it enters the user's eye via a plane formedby the eye wire 415.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can determine the type of externalvisual stimulation based on historical brainwave entrainment sessions.For example, the profile data structure 145 can be pre-configured withinformation about the type of visual signaling component 150.

The NSS 105 can determine, via the profile manager 125, a modulationfrequency for the pulse train or the ambient light. For example, NSS 105can determine, from the profile data structure 145, that the modulationfrequency for the external visual stimulation should be set to 40 Hz.Depending on the type of visual stimulation, the profile data structure145 can further indicate a pulse length, intensity, wavelength of thelight wave forming the light pulse, or duration of the pulse train.

In some cases, the NSS 105 can determine or adjust one or more parameterof the external visual stimulation. For example, the NSS 105 (e.g., viafeedback component 160 or feedback sensor 605) can determine a level oramount of ambient light. The NSS 105 (e.g., via light adjustment module115 or side effects management module 130) can establish, initialize,set, or adjust the intensity or wavelength of the light pulse. Forexample, the NSS 105 can determine that there is a low level of ambientlight. Due to the low level of ambient light, the user's pupils may bedilated. The NSS 105 can determine, based on detecting a low level ofambient light, that the user's pupils are likely dilated. In response todetermining that the user's pupils are likely dilated, the NSS 105 canset a low level of intensity for the pulse train. The NSS 105 canfurther use a light wave having a longer wavelength (e.g., red), whichmay reduce strain on the eyes.

The light adjustment module 115 can increase or decrease a contrastratio between the light stimulation signal and an ambient light level.For example, the light adjustment module 115 can determine or detect theambient light level at or proximate to a fovea of the subject. The lightadjustment module 115 can increase or decrease the intensity of thelight source or visual stimulation signal relative to the ambient lightlevel. The light adjustment module 115 can increase or decrease thiscontrast ratio to facilitate adherence to the treatment or therapysession or reduce side effects. The light adjustment module 115 can, forexample, increase the contrast ratio upon detecting a low level ofattention, or lack of satisfactory neural stimulation.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can monitor (e.g., via feedback monitor135 and feedback component 160) the level of ambient light throughoutthe brainwave entrainment process to automatically and periodicallyadjust the intensity or color of light pulses. For example, if the userbegan the brainwave entrainment process when there was a high level ofambient light, the NSS 105 can initially set a higher intensity levelfor the light pulses and use a color that includes light waves havinglower wavelengths (e.g., blue). However, in some embodiments in whichthe ambient light level decreases throughout the brainwave entrainmentprocess, the NSS 105 can automatically detect the decrease in ambientlight and, in response to the detection, adjust or lower the intensitywhile increasing the wavelength of the light wave. The NSS 105 canadjust the light pulses to provide a high contrast ratio to facilitatebrainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via feedback monitor 135 andfeedback component 160) can monitor or measure physiological conditionsto set or adjust a parameter of the light wave. For example, the NSS 105can monitor or measure a level of pupil dilation to adjust or set aparameter of the light wave. In some embodiments, the NSS 105 canmonitor or measure heart rate, pulse rate, blood pressure, bodytemperature, perspiration, or brain activity to set or adjust aparameter of the light wave.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can be preconfigured to initiallytransmit light pulses having a lowest setting for light wave intensity(e.g., low amplitude of the light wave or high wavelength of the lightwave) and gradually increase the intensity (e.g., increase the amplitudeof the light wave or decrease the wavelength of the light wave) whilemonitoring feedback until an optimal light intensity is reached. Anoptimal light intensity can refer to a highest intensity without adversephysiological side effects, such as blindness, seizures, heart attack,migraines, or other discomfort. The NSS 105 (e.g., via side effectsmanagement module 130) can monitor the physiological symptoms toidentify the adverse side effects of the external visual stimulation,and adjust (e.g., via light adjustment module 115) the external visualstimulation accordingly to reduce or eliminate the adverse side effects.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via light adjustment module 115)can adjust a parameter of the light wave or light pulse based on a levelof attention. For example, during the brainwave entrainment process, theuser may get bored, lose focus, fall asleep, or otherwise not payattention to the light pulses. Not paying attention to the light pulsesmay reduce the efficacy of the brainwave entrainment process, resultingin neurons oscillating at a frequency different from the desiredmodulation frequency of the light pulses.

NSS 105 can detect the level of attention the user is paying to thelight pulses using the feedback monitor 135 and one or more feedbackcomponent 160. The NSS 105 can perform eye tracking to determine thelevel of attention the user is providing to the light pulses based onthe gaze direction of the retina or pupil. The NSS 105 can measure eyemovement to determine the level of attention the user is paying to thelight pulses. The NSS 105 can provide a survey or prompt asking for userfeedback that indicates the level of attention the user is paying to thelight pulses. Responsive to determining that the user is not paying asatisfactory amount of attention to the light pulses (e.g., a level ofeye movement that is greater than a threshold or a gaze direction thatis outside the direct visual field of the light source 305), the lightadjustment module 115 can change a parameter of the light source to gainthe user's attention. For example, the light adjustment module 115 canincrease the intensity of the light pulse, adjust the color of the lightpulse, or change the duration of the light pulse. The light adjustmentmodule 115 can randomly vary one or more parameters of the light pulse.The light adjustment module 115 can initiate an attention seeking lightsequence configured to regain the user's attention. For example, thelight sequence can include a change in color or intensity of the lightpulses in a predetermined, random, or pseudo-random pattern. Theattention seeking light sequence can enable or disable different lightsources if the visual signaling component 150 includes multiple lightsources. Thus, the light adjustment module 115 can interact with thefeedback monitor 135 to determine a level of attention the user isproviding to the light pulses, and adjust the light pulses to regain theuser's attention if the level of attention falls below a threshold.

In some embodiments, the light adjustment module 115 can change oradjust one or more parameter of the light pulse or light wave atpredetermined time intervals (e.g., every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15minutes, or 20 minutes) to regain or maintain the user's attentionlevel.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via unwanted frequency filteringmodule 120) can filter, block, attenuate, or remove unwanted visualexternal stimulation. Unwanted visual external stimulation can include,for example, unwanted modulation frequencies, unwanted intensities, orunwanted wavelengths of light waves. The NSS 105 can deem a modulationfrequency to be unwanted if the modulation frequency of a pulse train isdifferent or substantially different (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%,25%, or more than 25%) from a desired frequency.

For example, the desired modulation frequency for brainwave entrainmentcan be 40 Hz. However, a modulation frequency of 20 Hz or 80 Hz canhinder brainwave entrainment. Thus, the NSS 105 can filter out the lightpulses or light waves corresponding to the 20 Hz or 80 Hz modulationfrequency.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can detect, via feedback component 160,that there are light pulses from an ambient light source thatcorresponds to an unwanted modulation frequency of 20 Hz. The NSS 105can further determine the wavelength of the light waves of the lightpulses corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. The NSS 105can instruct the filtering component 155 to filter out the wavelengthcorresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. For example, thewavelength corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency cancorrespond to the color blue. The filtering component 155 can include anoptical filter that can selectively transmit light in a particular rangeof wavelengths or colors, while blocking one or more other ranges ofwavelengths or colors. The optical filter can modify the magnitude orphase of the incoming light wave for a range of wavelengths. Forexample, the optical filter can be configured to block, reflect orattenuate the blue light wave corresponding to the unwanted modulationfrequency. The light adjustment module 115 can change the wavelength ofthe light wave generated by the light generation module 110 and lightsource 305 such that the desired modulation frequency is not blocked orattenuated by the unwanted frequency filtering module 120.

F. NSS Operating with a Virtual Reality Headset

The NSS 105 can operate in conjunction with the virtual reality headset401 including a light source 305 as depicted in FIG. 4C. The NSS 105 canoperate in conjunction with the virtual reality headset 401 including alight source 305 and a feedback sensor 605 as depicted in FIG. 4C. Insome embodiments, the NSS 105 can determine that the visual signalingcomponent 150 hardware includes a virtual reality headset 401.Responsive to determining that the visual signaling component 150includes a virtual reality headset 401, the NSS 105 can determine thatthe light source 305 includes a display screen of a smartphone or othermobile computing device.

The virtual reality headset 401 can provide an immersive, non-disruptivevisual stimulation experience. The virtual reality headset 401 canprovide an augmented reality experience. The feedback sensors 605 cancapture pictures or video of the physical, real world to provide theaugmented reality experience. The unwanted frequency filtering module120 can filter out unwanted modulation frequencies prior to projecting,displaying or providing the augmented reality images via the displayscreen 305.

In operation, a user of the frame 401 can wear the frame 401 on theirhead such that the virtual reality headset eye sockets 465 cover theuser's eyes. The virtual reality headset eye sockets 465 can encircle orsubstantially encircle their eyes. The user can secure the virtualreality headset 401 to the user's headset using one or more straps 455or 460, a skull cap, or other fastening mechanism. In some cases, theuser can provide an indication to the NSS 105 that the virtual realityheadset 401 has been placed and secured to the user's head and that theuser is ready to undergo brainwave entrainment. The indication caninclude an instruction, command, selection, input, or other indicationvia an input/output interface, such as a keyboard 726, pointing device727, or other I/O devices 730 a-n. The indication can be a motion-basedindication, visual indication, or voice-based indication. For example,the user can provide a voice command that indicates that the user isready to undergo brainwave entrainment.

In some cases, the feedback sensor 605 can determine that the user isready to undergo brainwave entrainment. The feedback sensor 605 candetect that the virtual reality headset 401 has been placed on a user'shead. The NSS 105 can receive motion data, acceleration data, gyroscopedata, temperature data, or capacitive touch data to determine that thevirtual reality headset 401 has been placed on the user's head. Thereceived data, such as motion data, can indicate that the virtualreality headset 401 was picked up and placed on the user's head. Thetemperature data can measure the temperature of or proximate to thevirtual reality headset 401, which can indicate that the virtual realityheadset 401 is on the user's head. In some cases, the feedback sensor605 can perform eye tracking to determine a level of attention a user ispaying to the light source 305 or feedback sensor 605. The NSS 105 candetect that the user is ready responsive to determining that the user ispaying a high level of attention to the light source 305 or feedbacksensor 605. For example, staring at, gazing or looking in the directionof the light source 305 or feedback sensor 605 can provide an indicationthat the user is ready to undergo brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, a sensor 605 on the straps 455, straps 460 or eyesocket 605 can detect that the virtual reality headset 401 is secured,placed, or positioned on the user's head. The sensor 605 can be a touchsensor that senses or detects the touch of the user's head.

Thus, the NSS 105 can detect or determine that the virtual realityheadset 401 has been worn and that the user is in a ready state, or theNSS 105 can receive an indication or confirmation from the user that theuser has worn the virtual reality headset 401 and the user is ready toundergo brainwave entrainment. Upon determining that the user is ready,the NSS 105 can initialize the brainwave entrainment process. In someembodiments, the NSS 105 can access a profile data structure 145. Forexample, a profile manager 125 can query the profile data structure 145to determine one or more parameter for the external visual stimulationused for the brain entrainment process. Parameters can include, forexample, a type of visual stimulation, an intensity of the visualstimulation, frequency of the visual stimulation, duration of the visualstimulation, or wavelength of the visual stimulation. The profilemanager 125 can query the profile data structure 145 to obtainhistorical brain entrainment information, such as prior visualstimulation sessions. The profile manager 125 can perform a lookup inthe profile data structure 145. The profile manager 125 can perform alook-up with a username, user identifier, location information,fingerprint, biometric identifier, retina scan, voice recognition andauthentication, or other identifying technique.

The NSS 105 can determine a type of external visual stimulation based onthe hardware 401. The NSS 105 can determine the type of external visualstimulation based on the type of light source 305 available. Forexample, if the light source 305 includes a smartphone or displaydevice, the visual stimulation can include turning on and off thedisplay screen of the display device. The visual stimulation can includedisplaying a pattern on the display device 305, such as a checkeredpattern, that can alternate in accordance with the desired frequencymodulation. The visual stimulation can include light pulses generated bya light source 305 such as an LED that is placed within the virtualreality headset 401 enclosure.

In cases where the virtual reality headset 401 provides an augmentedreality experience, the visual stimulation can include overlayingcontent on the display device and modulating the overlaid content at thedesired modulation frequency. For example, the virtual reality headset401 can include a camera 605 that captures the real, physical world.While displaying the captured image of the real, physical world, the NSS105 can also display content that is modulated at the desired modulationfrequency. The NSS 105 can overlay the content modulated at the desiredmodulation frequency. The NSS 105 can otherwise modify, manipulate,modulation, or adjust a portion of the display screen or a portion ofthe augmented reality to generate or provide the desired modulationfrequency.

For example, the NSS 105 can modulate one or more pixels based on thedesired modulation frequency. The NSS 105 can turn pixels on and offbased on the modulation frequency. The NSS 105 can turn of pixels on anyportion of the display device. The NSS 105 can turn on and off pixels ina pattern. The NSS 105 can turn on and off pixels in the direct visualfield or peripheral visual field. The NSS 105 can track or detect a gazedirection of the eye and turn on and off pixels in the gaze direction sothe light pulses (or modulation) are in the direct vision field. Thus,modulating the overlaid content or otherwise manipulated the augmentedreality display or other image provided via a display device in thevirtual reality headset 401 can generate light pulses or light flasheshaving a modulation frequency configured to facilitate brainwaveentrainment.

The NSS 105 can determine, via the profile manager 125, a modulationfrequency for the pulse train or the ambient light. For example, NSS 105can determine, from the profile data structure 145, that the modulationfrequency for the external visual stimulation should be set to 40 Hz.Depending on the type of visual stimulation, the profile data structure145 can further indicate a number of pixels to modulate, intensity ofpixels to modulate, pulse length, intensity, wavelength of the lightwave forming the light pulse, or duration of the pulse train.

In some cases, the NSS 105 can determine or adjust one or more parameterof the external visual stimulation. For example, the NSS 105 (e.g., viafeedback component 160 or feedback sensor 605) can determine a level oramount of light in captured image used to provide the augmented realityexperience. The NSS 105 (e.g., via light adjustment module 115 or sideeffects management module 130) can establish, initialize, set, or adjustthe intensity or wavelength of the light pulse based on the light levelin the image data corresponding to the augmented reality experience. Forexample, the NSS 105 can determine that there is a low level of light inthe augmented reality display because it may be dark outside. Due to thelow level of light in the augmented reality display, the user's pupilsmay be dilated. The NSS 105 can determine, based on detecting a lowlevel of light, that the user's pupils are likely dilated. In responseto determining that the user's pupils are likely dilated, the NSS 105can set a low level of intensity for the light pulses or light sourceproviding the modulation frequency. The NSS 105 can further use a lightwave having a longer wavelength (e.g., red), which may reduce strain onthe eyes.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can monitor (e.g., via feedback monitor135 and feedback component 160) the level of light throughout thebrainwave entrainment process to automatically and periodically adjustthe intensity or color of light pulses. For example, if the user beganthe brainwave entrainment process when there was a high level of ambientlight, the NSS 105 can initially set a higher intensity level for thelight pulses and use a color that includes light waves having lowerwavelengths (e.g., blue). However, as the light level decreasesthroughout the brainwave entrainment process, the NSS 105 canautomatically detect the decrease in light and, in response to thedetection, adjust or lower the intensity while increasing the wavelengthof the light wave. The NSS 105 can adjust the light pulses to provide ahigh contrast ratio to facilitate brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via feedback monitor 135 andfeedback component 160) can monitor or measure physiological conditionsto set or adjust a parameter of the light pulses while the user iswearing the virtual reality headset 401. For example, the NSS 105 canmonitor or measure a level of pupil dilation to adjust or set aparameter of the light wave. In some embodiments, the NSS 105 canmonitor or measure, via one or more feedback sensor of the virtualreality headset 401 or other feedback sensor, a heart rate, pulse rate,blood pressure, body temperature, perspiration, or brain activity to setor adjust a parameter of the light wave.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can be preconfigured to initiallytransmit, via display device 305, light pulses having a lowest settingfor light wave intensity (e.g., low amplitude of the light wave or highwavelength of the light wave) and gradually increase the intensity(e.g., increase the amplitude of the light wave or decrease thewavelength of the light wave) while monitoring feedback until an optimallight intensity is reached. An optimal light intensity can refer to ahighest intensity without adverse physiological side effects, such asblindness, seizures, heart attack, migraines, or other discomfort. TheNSS 105 (e.g., via side effects management module 130) can monitor thephysiological symptoms to identify the adverse side effects of theexternal visual stimulation, and adjust (e.g., via light adjustmentmodule 115) the external visual stimulation accordingly to reduce oreliminate the adverse side effects.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via light adjustment module 115)can adjust a parameter of the light wave or light pulse based on a levelof attention. For example, during the brainwave entrainment process, theuser may get bored, lose focus, fall asleep, or otherwise not payattention to the light pulses generated via the display screen 305 ofthe virtual reality headset 401. Not paying attention to the lightpulses may reduce the efficacy of the brainwave entrainment process,resulting in neurons oscillating at a frequency different from thedesired modulation frequency of the light pulses.

NSS 105 can detect the level of attention the user is paying orproviding to the light pulses using the feedback monitor 135 and one ormore feedback component 160 (e.g., including feedback sensors 605). TheNSS 105 can perform eye tracking to determine the level of attention theuser is providing to the light pulses based on the gaze direction of theretina or pupil. The NSS 105 can measure eye movement to determine thelevel of attention the user is paying to the light pulses. The NSS 105can provide a survey or prompt asking for user feedback that indicatesthe level of attention the user is paying to the light pulses.Responsive to determining that the user is not paying a satisfactoryamount of attention to the light pulses (e.g., a level of eye movementthat is greater than a threshold or a gaze direction that is outside thedirect visual field of the light source 305), the light adjustmentmodule 115 can change a parameter of the light source 305 or displaydevice 305 to gain the user's attention. For example, the lightadjustment module 115 can increase the intensity of the light pulse,adjust the color of the light pulse, or change the duration of the lightpulse. The light adjustment module 115 can randomly vary one or moreparameters of the light pulse. The light adjustment module 115 caninitiate an attention seeking light sequence configured to regain theuser's attention. For example, the light sequence can include a changein color or intensity of the light pulses in a predetermined, random, orpseudo-random pattern. The attention seeking light sequence can enableor disable different light sources if the visual signaling component 150includes multiple light sources. Thus, the light adjustment module 115can interact with the feedback monitor 135 to determine a level ofattention the user is providing to the light pulses, and adjust thelight pulses to regain the user's attention if the level of attentionfalls below a threshold.

In some embodiments, the light adjustment module 115 can change oradjust one or more parameter of the light pulse or light wave atpredetermined time intervals (e.g., every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15minutes, or 20 minutes) to regain or maintain the user's attentionlevel.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 (e.g., via unwanted frequency filteringmodule 120) can filter, block, attenuate, or remove unwanted visualexternal stimulation. Unwanted visual external stimulation can include,for example, unwanted modulation frequencies, unwanted intensities, orunwanted wavelengths of light waves. The NSS 105 can deem a modulationfrequency to be unwanted if the modulation frequency of a pulse train isdifferent or substantially different (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%,25%, or more than 25%) from a desired frequency.

For example, the desired modulation frequency for brainwave entrainmentcan be 40 Hz. However, a modulation frequency of 20 Hz or 80 Hz canhinder brainwave entrainment. Thus, the NSS 105 can filter out the lightpulses or light waves corresponding to the 20 Hz or 80 Hz modulationfrequency. For example, the virtual reality headset 401 can detectunwanted modulation frequencies in the physical, real world andeliminate, attenuate, filter out or otherwise remove the unwantedfrequencies providing to generating the or providing the augmentedreality experience. The NSS 105 can include an optical filter configuredto perform digital signal processing or digital image processing todetect the unwanted modulation frequency in the real world captured bythe feedback sensor 605. The NSS 105 can detect other content, image ormotion having an unwanted parameter (e.g., color, brightness, contrastratio, modulation frequency), and eliminate same from the augmentedreality experience projected to the user via the display screen 305. TheNSS 105 can apply a color filter to adjust the color or remove a colorof the augmented reality display. The NSS 105 can adjust, modify, ormanipulate the brightness, contrast ratio, sharpness, tint, hue, orother parameter of the image or video displayed via the display device305.

In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can detect, via feedback component 160,that there is captured image or video content from the real, physicalworld that corresponds to an unwanted modulation frequency of 20 Hz. TheNSS 105 can further determine the wavelength of the light waves of thelight pulses corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. The NSS105 can instruct the filtering component 155 to filter out thewavelength corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. Forexample, the wavelength corresponding to the unwanted modulationfrequency can correspond to the color blue. The filtering component 155can include a digital optical filter that can digital remove content orlight in a particular range of wavelengths or colors, while allowing oneor more other ranges of wavelengths or colors. The digital opticalfilter can modify the magnitude or phase of the image for a range ofwavelengths. For example, the digital optical filter can be configuredto attenuate, erase, replace or otherwise alter the blue light wavecorresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. The light adjustmentmodule 115 can change the wavelength of the light wave generated by thelight generation module 110 and display device 305 such that the desiredmodulation frequency is not blocked or attenuated by the unwantedfrequency filtering module 120.

G. NSS Operating with a Tablet

The NSS 105 can operate in conjunction with the tablet 500 as depictedin FIGS. 5A-5D. In some embodiments, the NSS 105 can determine that thevisual signaling component 150 hardware includes a tablet device 500 orother display screen that is not affixed or secured to a user's head.The tablet 500 can include a display screen that has one or morecomponent or function of the display screen 305 or light source 305depicted in conjunction with FIGS. 4A and 4C. The light source 305 in atablet can be the display screen. The tablet 500 can include one or morefeedback sensor that includes one or more component or function of thefeedback sensor depicted in conjunction with FIGS. 4B, 4C and 6A.

The tablet 500 can communicate with the NSS 105 via a network, such as awireless network or a cellular network. The NSS 105 can, in someembodiments, execute the NSS 105 or a component thereof. For example,the tablet 500 can launch, open or switch to an application or resourceconfigured to provide at least one functionality of the NSS 105. Thetablet 500 can execute the application as a background process or aforeground process. For example, the graphical user interface for theapplication can be in the background while the application causes thedisplay screen 305 of the tablet to overlay content or light thatchanges or modulates at a desired frequency for brain entrainment (e.g.,40 Hz).

The tablet 500 can include one or more feedback sensors 605. In someembodiments, the tablet can use the one or more feedback sensors 605 todetect that a user is holding the tablet 500. The tablet can use the oneor more feedback sensors 605 to determine a distance between the lightsource 305 and the user. The tablet can use the one or more feedbacksensors 605 to determine a distance between the light source 305 and theuser's head. The tablet can use the one or more feedback sensors 605 todetermine a distance between the light source 305 and the user's eyes.

In some embodiments, the tablet 500 can use a feedback sensor 605 thatincludes a receiver to determine the distance. The tablet can transmit asignal and measure the amount of time it takes for the transmittedsignal to leave the tablet 500, bounce on the object (e.g., user's head)and be received by the feedback sensor 605. The tablet 500 or NSS 105can determine the distance based on the measured amount of time and thespeed of the transmitted signal (e.g., speed of light).

In some embodiments, the tablet 500 can include two feedback sensors 605to determine a distance. The two feedback sensors 605 can include afirst feedback sensor 605 that is the transmitter and a second feedbacksensor that is the receiver.

In some embodiments, the tablet 500 can include two or more feedbacksensors 605 that include two or more cameras. The two or more camerascan measure the angles and the position of the object (e.g., the user'shead) on each camera, and use the measured angles and position todetermine or compute the distance between the tablet 500 and the object.

In some embodiments, the tablet 500 (or application thereof) candetermine the distance between the tablet and the user's head byreceiving user input. For example, user input can include an approximatesize of the user's head. The tablet 500 can then determine the distancefrom the user's head based on the inputted approximate size.

The tablet 500, application, or NSS 105 can use the measured ordetermined distance to adjust the light pulses or flashes of lightemitted by the light source 305 of the tablet 500. The tablet 500,application, or NSS 105 can use the distance to adjust one or moreparameter of the light pulses, flashes of light or other content emittedvia the light source 305 of the tablet 500. For example, the tablet 500can adjust the intensity of the light pulses emitted by light source 305based on the distance. The tablet 500 can adjust the intensity based onthe distance in order to maintain a consistent or similar intensity atthe eye irrespective of the distance between the light source 305 andthe eye. The tablet can increase the intensity proportional to thesquare of the distance.

The tablet 500 can manipulate one or more pixels on the display screen305 to generate the light pulses or modulation frequency for brainwaveentrainment. The tablet 500 can overlay light sources, light pulses orother patterns to generate the modulation frequency for brainwaveentrainment. Similar to the virtual reality headset 401, the tablet canfilter out or modify unwanted frequencies, wavelengths or intensity.

Similar to the frames 400, the tablet 500 can adjust a parameter of thelight pulses or flashes of light generated by the light source 305 basedon ambient light, environmental parameters, or feedback.

In some embodiments, the tablet 500 can execute an application that isconfigured to generate the light pulses or modulation frequency forbrainwave entrainment. The application can execute in the background ofthe tablet such that all content displayed on a display screen of thetablet are displayed as light pulses at the desired frequency. Thetablet can be configured to detect a gaze direction of the user. In someembodiments, the tablet may detect the gaze direction by capturing animage of the user's eye via the camera of the tablet. The tablet 500 canbe configured to generate light pulses at particular locations of thedisplay screen based on the gaze direction of the user. In embodimentswhere direct vision field is to be employed, the light pulses can bedisplayed at locations of the display screen that correspond to theuser's gaze. In embodiments where peripheral vision field is to beemployed, the light pulses can be displayed at locations of the displaysscreen that are outside the portion of the display screen correspondingto the user's gaze.

H. Neural Stimulation Via Auditory Stimulation

FIG. 9 is a block diagram depicting a system for neural stimulation viaauditory stimulation in accordance with an embodiment. The system 900can include a neural stimulation system (“NSS”) 905. The NSS 905 can bereferred to as an auditory NSS 905 or NSS 905. In brief overview, theauditory neural stimulation system (“NSS”) 905 can include, access,interface with, or otherwise communicate with one or more of an audiogeneration module 910, audio adjustment module 915, unwanted frequencyfiltering module 920, profile manager 925, side effects managementmodule 930, feedback monitor 935, data repository 940, audio signalingcomponent 950, filtering component 955, or feedback component 960. Theaudio generation module 910, audio adjustment module 915, unwantedfrequency filtering module 920, profile manager 925, side effectsmanagement module 930, feedback monitor 935, audio signaling component950, filtering component 955, or feedback component 960 can each includeat least one processing unit or other logic device such as programmablelogic array engine, or module configured to communicate with thedatabase repository 940. The audio generation module 910, audioadjustment module 915, unwanted frequency filtering module 920, profilemanager 925, side effects management module 930, feedback monitor 935,audio signaling component 950, filtering component 955, or feedbackcomponent 960 can be separate components, a single component, or part ofthe NSS 905. The system 100 and its components, such as the NSS 905, mayinclude hardware elements, such as one or more processors, logicdevices, or circuits. The system 100 and its components, such as the NSS905, can include one or more hardware or interface component depicted insystem 700 in FIGS. 7A and 7B. For example, a component of system 100can include or execute on one or more processors 721, access storage 728or memory 722, and communicate via network interface 718.

Still referring to FIG. 9, and in further detail, the NSS 905 caninclude at least one audio generation module 910. The audio generationmodule 910 can be designed and constructed to interface with an audiosignaling component 950 to provide instructions or otherwise cause orfacilitate the generation of an audio signal, such as an audio burst,audio pulse, audio chirp, audio sweep, or other acoustic wave having oneor more predetermined parameters. The audio generation module 910 caninclude hardware or software to receive and process instructions or datapackets from one or more module or component of the NSS 905. The audiogeneration module 910 can generate instructions to cause the audiosignaling component 950 to generate an audio signal. The audiogeneration module 910 can control or enable the audio signalingcomponent 950 to generate the audio signal having one or morepredetermined parameters.

The audio generation module 910 can be communicatively coupled to theaudio signaling component 950. The audio generation module 910 cancommunicate with the audio signaling component 950 via a circuit,electrical wire, data port, network port, power wire, ground, electricalcontacts or pins. The audio generation module 910 can wirelesslycommunicate with the audio signaling component 950 using one or morewireless protocols such as BlueTooth, BlueTooth Low Energy, Zigbee,Z-Wave, IEEE 802.11, WIFI, 3G, 4G, LTE, near field communications(“NFC”), or other short, medium or long range communication protocols,etc. The audio generation module 910 can include or access networkinterface 718 to communicate wirelessly or over a wire with the audiosignaling component 950.

The audio generation module 910 can interface, control, or otherwisemanage various types of audio signaling components 950 in order to causethe audio signaling component 950 to generate, block, control, orotherwise provide the audio signal having one or more predeterminedparameters. The audio generation module 910 can include a driverconfigured to drive an audio source of the audio signaling component950. For example, the audio source can include a speaker, and the audiogeneration module 910 (or the audio signaling component) can include atransducer that converts electrical energy to sound waves or acousticwaves. The audio generation module 910 can include a computing chip,microchip, circuit, microcontroller, operational amplifiers,transistors, resistors, or diodes configured to provide electricity orpower having certain voltage and current characteristics to drive thespeaker to generate an audio signal with desired acousticcharacteristics.

In some embodiments, the audio generation module 910 can instruct theaudio signaling component 950 to provide an audio signal. For example,the audio signal can include an acoustic wave 1000 as depicted in FIG.10A. The audio signal can include multiple acoustic waves. The audiosignal can generate one or more acoustic waves. The acoustic wave 1000can include or be formed of a mechanical wave of pressure anddisplacement that travels through media such as gases, liquids, andsolids. The acoustic wave can travel through a medium to causevibration, sound, ultrasound or infrasound. The acoustic wave canpropagate through air, water or solids as longitudinal waves. Theacoustic wave can propagate through solids as a transverse wave.

The acoustic wave can generate sound due to the oscillation in pressure,stress, particle displacement, or particle velocity propagated in amedium with internal forces (e.g., elastic or viscous), or thesuperposition of such propagated oscillation. Sound can refer to theauditory sensation evoked by this oscillation. For example, sound canrefer to the reception of acoustic waves and their perception by thebrain.

The audio signaling component 950 or audio source thereof can generatethe acoustic waves by vibrating a diaphragm of the audio source. Forexample, the audio source can include a diaphragm such as a transducerconfigured to inter-convert mechanical vibrations to sounds. Thediaphragm can include a thin membrane or sheet of various materials,suspended at its edges. The varying pressure of sound waves impartsmechanical vibrations to the diaphragm which can then create acousticwaves or sound.

The acoustic wave 1000 illustrated in FIG. 10A includes a wavelength1010. The wavelength 1010 can refer to a distance between successivecrests 1020 of the wave. The wavelength 1010 can be related to thefrequency of the acoustic wave and the speed of the acoustic wave. Forexample, the wavelength can be determined as the quotient of the speedof the acoustic wave divided by the frequency of the acoustic wave. Thespeed of the acoustic wave can the product of the frequency and thewavelength. The frequency of the acoustic wave can be the quotient ofthe speed of the acoustic wave divided by the wavelength of the acousticwave. Thus, the frequency and the wavelength of the acoustic wave can beinversely proportional. The speed of sound can vary based on the mediumthrough which the acoustic wave propagates. For example, the speed ofsound in air can be 343 meters per second.

A crest 1020 can refer to the top of the wave or point on the wave withthe maximum value. The displacement of the medium is at a maximum at thecrest 1020 of the wave. The trough 1015 is the opposite of the crest1020. The trough 1015 is the minimum or lowest point on the wavecorresponding to the minimum amount of displacement.

The acoustic wave 1000 can include an amplitude 1005. The amplitude 1005can refer to a maximum extent of a vibration or oscillation of theacoustic wave 1000 measured from a position of equilibrium. The acousticwave 1000 can be a longitudinal wave if it oscillates or vibrates in thesame direction of travel 1025. In some cases, the acoustic wave 1000 canbe a transverse wave that vibrates at right angles to the direction ofits propagation.

The audio generation module 910 can instruct the audio signalingcomponent 950 to generate acoustic waves or sound waves having one ormore predetermined amplitude or wavelength. Wavelengths of the acousticwave that are audible to the human ear range from approximately 17meters to 17 millimeters (or 20 Hz to 20 kHz). The audio generationmodule 910 can further specify one or more properties of an acousticwave within or outside the audible spectrum. For example, the frequencyof the acoustic wave can range from 0 to 50 kHz. In some embodiments,the frequency of the acoustic wave can range from 8 to 12 kHz. In someembodiments, the frequency of the acoustic wave can be 10 kHz.

The NSS 905 can modulate, modify, change or otherwise alter propertiesof the acoustic wave 1000. For example, the NSS 905 can modulate theamplitude or wavelength of the acoustic wave. As depicted in FIG. 10Band FIG. 10C, the NSS 905 can adjust, manipulate, or otherwise modifythe amplitude 1005 of the acoustic wave 1000. For example, the NSS 905can lower the amplitude 1005 to cause the sound to be quieter, asdepicted in FIG. 10B, or increase the amplitude 1005 to cause the soundto be louder, as depicted in FIG. 10C.

In some cases, the NSS 905 can adjust, manipulate or otherwise modifythe wavelength 1010 of the acoustic wave. As depicted in FIG. 10D andFIG. 10E, the NSS 905 can adjust, manipulate, or otherwise modify thewavelength 1010 of the acoustic wave 1000. For example, the NSS 905 canincrease the wavelength 1010 to cause the sound to have a lower pitch,as depicted in FIG. 10D, or reduce the wavelength 1010 to cause thesound to have a higher pitch, as depicted in FIG. 10E.

The NSS 905 can modulate the acoustic wave. Modulating the acoustic wavecan include modulating one or more properties of the acoustic wave.Modulating the acoustic wave can include filtering the acoustic wave,such as filtering out unwanted frequencies or attenuating the acousticwave to lower the amplitude. Modulating the acoustic wave can includeadding one or more additional acoustic waves to the original acousticwave. Modulating the acoustic wave can include combining the acousticwave such that there is constructive or destructive interference wherethe resultant, combined acoustic wave corresponds to the modulatedacoustic wave.

The NSS 905 can modulate or change one or more properties of theacoustic wave based on a time interval. The NSS 905 can change the oneor more properties of the acoustic at the end of the time interval. Forexample, the NSS 905 can change a property of the acoustic wave every 30seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 7 minutes, 10minutes, or 15 minutes. The NSS 905 can change a modulation frequency ofthe acoustic wave, where the modulation frequency refers to the repeatedmodulations or inverse of the pulse rate interval of the acousticpulses. The modulation frequency can be a predetermined or desiredfrequency. The modulation frequency can correspond to a desiredstimulation frequency of neural oscillations. The modulation frequencycan be set to facilitate or cause brainwave entrainment. The NSS 905 canset the modulation frequency to a frequency in the range of 0.1 Hz to10,000 Hz. For example, the NSS 905 can set the modulation frequency to0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 5 Hz, 10 Hz, 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 31 Hz, 32 Hz, 33 Hz, 34Hz, 35 Hz, 36 Hz, 37 Hz, 38 Hz, 39 Hz, 40 Hz, 41 Hz, 42 Hz, 43 Hz, 44Hz, 45 Hz, 46 Hz, 47 Hz, 48 Hz, 49 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz, 90Hz, 100 Hz, 150 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 300 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 1000 Hz,2000 Hz, 3000 Hz, 4,000 Hz, 5000 Hz, 6,000 Hz, 7,000 Hz, 8,000 Hz, 9,000Hz, or 10,000 Hz.

The audio generation module 910 can determine to provide audio signalsthat include bursts of acoustic waves, audio pulses, or modulations toacoustic waves. The audio generation module 910 can instruct orotherwise cause the audio signaling component 950 to generate acousticbursts or pulses. An acoustic pulse can refer to a burst of acousticwaves or a modulation to a property of an acoustic wave that isperceived by the brain as a change in sound. For example, an audiosource that is intermittently turned on and off can create audio burstsor changes in sound. The audio source can be turned on and off based ona predetermined or fixed pulse rate interval, such as every 0.025seconds, to provide a pulse repetition frequency of 40 Hz. The audiosource can be turned on and off to provide a pulse repetition frequencyin the range of 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz or more.

For example, FIGS. 10F-10I illustrates bursts of acoustic waves orbursts of modulations that can be applied to acoustic waves. The burstsof acoustic waves can include, for example, audio tones, beeps, orclicks. The modulations can refer to changes in the amplitude of theacoustic wave, changes in frequency or wavelength of the acoustic wave,overlaying another acoustic wave over the original acoustic wave, orotherwise modifying or changing the acoustic wave.

For example, FIG. 10F illustrates acoustic bursts 1035 a-c (ormodulation pulses 1035 a-c) in accordance with an embodiment. Theacoustic bursts 1035 a-c can be illustrated via a graph where the y-axisrepresents a parameter of the acoustic wave (e.g., frequency,wavelength, or amplitude) of the acoustic wave. The x-axis can representtime (e.g., seconds, milliseconds, or microseconds).

The audio signal can include a modulated acoustic wave that is modulatedbetween different frequencies, wavelengths, or amplitudes. For example,the NSS 905 can modulate an acoustic wave between a frequency in theaudio spectrum, such as M_(a), and a frequency outside the audiospectrum, such as M_(o). The NSS 905 can modulate the acoustic wavebetween two or more frequencies, between an on state and an off state,or between a high power state and a low power state.

The acoustic bursts 1035 a-c can have an acoustic wave parameter withvalue M_(a) that is different from the value M_(o) of the acoustic waveparameter. The modulation M_(a) can refer to a frequency or wavelength,or amplitude. The pulses 1035 a-c can be generated with a pulse rateinterval (PRI) 1040.

For example, the acoustic wave parameter can be the frequency of theacoustic wave. The first value M_(o) can be a low frequency or carrierfrequency of the acoustic wave, such as 10 kHz. The second value, M_(a),can be different from the first frequency M_(o). The second frequencyM_(a) can be lower or higher than the first frequency M_(o). Forexample, the second frequency M_(a) can be 11 kHz. The differencebetween the first frequency and the second frequency can be determinedor set based on a level of sensitivity of the human ear. The differencebetween the first frequency and the second frequency can be determinedor set based on profile information 945 for the subject. The differencebetween the first frequency M_(o) and the second frequency M_(a) can bedetermined such that the modulation or change in the acoustic wavefacilitate brainwave entrainment.

In some cases, the parameter of the acoustic wave used to generate theacoustic burst 1035 a can be constant at M_(a), thereby generating asquare wave as illustrated in FIG. 10F. In some embodiments, each of thethree pulses 1035 a-c can include acoustic waves having a same frequencyM_(a).

The width of each of the acoustic bursts or pulses (e.g., the durationof the burst of the acoustic wave with the parameter M_(a)) cancorrespond to a pulse width 1030 a. The pulse width 1030 a can refer tothe length or duration of the burst. The pulse width 1030 a can bemeasured in units of time or distance. In some embodiments, the pulses1035 a-c can include acoustic waves having different frequencies fromone another. In some embodiments, the pulses 1035 a-c can have differentpulse widths 1030 a from one another, as illustrated in FIG. 10G. Forexample, a first pulse 1035 d of FIG. 10G can have a pulse width 1030 a,while a second pulse 1035 e has a second pulse width 1030 b that isgreater than the first pulse width 1030 a. A third pulse 1035 f can havea third pulse width 1030 c that is less than the second pulse width 1030b. The third pulse width 1030 c can also be less than the first pulsewidth 1030 a. While the pulse widths 1030 a-c of the pulses 1035 d-f ofthe pulse train may vary, the audio generation module 910 can maintain aconstant pulse rate interval 1040 for the pulse train.

The pulses 1035 a-c can form a pulse train having a pulse rate interval1040. The pulse rate interval 1040 can be quantified using units oftime. The pulse rate interval 1040 can be based on a frequency of thepulses of the pulse train 201. The frequency of the pulses of the pulsetrain 201 can be referred to as a modulation frequency. For example, theaudio generation module 910 can provide a pulse train 201 with apredetermined frequency, such as 40 Hz. To do so, the audio generationmodule 910 can determine the pulse rate interval 1040 by taking themultiplicative inverse (or reciprocal) of the frequency (e.g., 1 dividedby the predetermined frequency for the pulse train). For example, theaudio generation module 910 can take the multiplicative inverse of 40 Hzby dividing 1 by 40 Hz to determine the pulse rate interval 1040 as0.025 seconds. The pulse rate interval 1040 can remain constantthroughout the pulse train. In some embodiments, the pulse rate interval1040 can vary throughout the pulse train or from one pulse train to asubsequent pulse train. In some embodiments, the number of pulsestransmitted during a second can be fixed, while the pulse rate interval1040 varies.

In some embodiments, the audio generation module 910 can generate anaudio burst or audio pulse having an acoustic wave that varies infrequency, amplitude, or wavelength. For example, the audio generationmodule 910 can generate up-chirp pulses where the frequency, amplitudeor wavelength of the acoustic wave of the audio pulse increases from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse as illustrated in FIG.10H. For example, the frequency, amplitude or wavelength of the acousticwave at the beginning of pulse 1035 g can be M_(a). The frequency,amplitude or wavelength of the acoustic wave of the pulse 1035 g canincrease from M_(a) to M_(b) in the middle of the pulse 1035 g, and thento a maximum of M_(c) at the end of the pulse 1035 g. Thus, thefrequency, amplitude or wavelength of the acoustic wave used to generatethe pulse 1035 g can range from M_(a) to M_(c). The frequency, amplitudeor wavelength can increase linearly, exponentially, or based on someother rate or curve. One or more of the frequency, amplitude orwavelength of the acoustic wave can change from the beginning of thepulse to the end of the pulse.

The audio generation module 910 can generate down-chirp pulses, asillustrated in FIG. 10I, where the frequency, amplitude or wavelength ofthe acoustic wave of the acoustic pulse decreases from the beginning ofthe pulse to the end of the pulse. For example, the frequency, amplitudeor wavelength of an acoustic wave at the beginning of pulse 1035 j canbe M_(c). The frequency, amplitude or wavelength of the acoustic wave ofthe pulse 1035 j can decrease from M_(c) to M_(b) in the middle of thepulse 1035 j, and then to a minimum of M_(a) at the end of the pulse1035 j. Thus, the frequency, amplitude or wavelength of the acousticwave used to generate the pulse 1035 j can range from Mc to M_(a). Thefrequency, amplitude or wavelength can decrease linearly, exponentially,or based on some other rate or curve. One or more of the frequency,amplitude or wavelength of the acoustic wave can change from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse.

In some embodiments, the audio generation module 910 can instruct orcause the audio signaling component 950 to generate audio pulses tostimulate specific or predetermined portions of the brain or a specificcortex. The frequency, wavelength, modulation frequency, amplitude andother aspects of the audio pulse, tone or music based stimuli candictate which cortex or cortices are recruited to process the stimuli.The audio signaling component 950 can stimulate discrete portions of thecortex by modulating the presentation of the stimuli to target specificor general regions of interest. The modulation parameters or amplitudeof the audio stimuli can dictate which region of the cortex isstimulated. For example, different regions of the cortex are recruitedto process different frequencies of sound, called their characteristicfrequencies. Further, ear laterality of stimulation can have an effecton cortex response since some subjects can be treated by stimulating oneear as opposed to both ears.

Audio signaling component 950 can be designed and constructed togenerate the audio pulses responsive to instructions from the audiogeneration module 910. The instructions can include, for example,parameters of the audio pulse such as a frequency, wavelength or of theacoustic wave, duration of the pulse, frequency of the pulse train,pulse rate interval, or duration of the pulse train (e.g., a number ofpulses in the pulse train or the length of time to transmit a pulsetrain having a predetermined frequency). The audio pulse can beperceived, observed, or otherwise identified by the brain via cochlearmeans such as ears. The audio pulses can be transmitted to the ear viaan audio source speaker in close proximity to the ear, such asheadphones, earbuds, bone conduction transducers, or cochlear implants.The audio pulses can be transmitted to the ear via an audio source orspeaker not in close proximity to the ear, such as a surround soundspeaker system, bookshelf speakers, or other speaker not directly orindirectly in contact with the ear.

FIG. 11A illustrates audio signals using binaural beats or binauralpulses, in accordance with an embodiment. In brief summary, binauralbeats refers to providing a different tone to each ear of the subject.When the brain perceives the two different tones, the brain mixes thetwo tones together to create a pulse. The two different tones can beselected such that the sum of the tones creates a pulse train having adesired pulse rate interval 1040.

The audio signaling component 950 can include a first audio source thatprovides an audio signal to the first ear of a subject, and a secondaudio source that provides a second audio signal to the second ear of asubject. The first audio source and the second audio source can bedifferent. The first ear may only perceive the first audio signal fromthe first audio source, and the second ear may only receive the secondaudio signal from the second audio source. Audio sources can include,for example, headphones, earbuds, or bone conduction transducers. Theaudio sources can include stereo audio sources.

The audio generation component 910 can select a first tone for the firstear and a different second tone for the second ear. A tone can becharacterized by its duration, pitch, intensity (or loudness), or timbre(or quality). In some cases, the first tone and the second tone can bedifferent if they have different frequencies. In some cases, the firsttone and the second tone can be different if they have different phaseoffsets. The first tone and the second tone can each be pure tones. Apure tone can be a tone having a sinusoidal waveform with a singlefrequency.

As illustrated in FIG. 11A, the first tone or offset wave 1105 isslightly different from the second tone 1110 or carrier wave 1110. Thefirst tone 1105 has a higher frequency than the second tone 1110. Thefirst tone 1105 can be generated by a first earbud that is inserted intoone of the subject's ears, and the second tone 1110 can be generated bya second earbud that is inserted into the other of the subject's ears.When the auditory cortex of the brain perceives the first tone 1105 andthe second tone 1110, the brain can sum the two tones. The brain can sumthe acoustic waveforms corresponding to the two tones. The brain can sumthe two waveforms as illustrated by waveform sum 1115. Due to the firstand second tones having a different parameter (such as a differentfrequency or phase offset), portions of the waves can add and subtractfrom another to result in waveform 1115 having one or more pulses 1130(or beats 1130). The pulses 1130 can be separated by portions 1125 thatare at equilibrium. The pulses 1130 perceived by the brain by mixingthese two different waveforms together can induce brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can generate binaural beats using apitch panning technique. For example, the audio generation module 910 oraudio adjustment module 915 can include or use a filter to modulate thepitch of a sound file or single tone up and down, and at the same timepan the modulation between stereo sides, such that one side will have aslightly higher pitch while the other side has a pitch that is slightlylower. The stereo sides can refer to the first audio source thatgenerates and provides the audio signal to the first ear of the subject,and the second audio source that generates and provides the audio signalto the second ear of the subject. A sound file can refer to a fileformat configured to store a representation of, or information about, anacoustic wave. Example sound file formats can include .mp3, .wav, .aac,.m4a, .smf, etc.

The NSS 905 can use this pitch panning technique to generate a type ofspatial positioning that, when listened to through stereo headphones, isperceived by the brain in a manner similar to binaural beats. The NSS905 can, therefore, use this pitch panning technique to generate pulsesor beats using a single tone or a single sound file.

In some cases, the NSS 905 can generate monaural beats or monauralpulses. Monaural beats or pulses are similar to binaural beats in thatthey are also generated by combining two tones to form a beat. The NSS905 or component of system 100 can form monaural beats by combining thetwo tones using a digital or analog technique before the sound reachesthe ears, as opposed to the brain combining the waveforms as in binauralbeats. For example, the NSS 905 (or audio generation component 910) canidentify and select two different waveforms that, when combined, producebeats or pulses having a desired pulse rate interval. The NSS 905 canidentify a first digital representation of a first acoustic waveform,and identify a second digital representation of a second acousticwaveform have a different parameter than the first acoustic waveform.The NSS 905 can combine the first and second digital waveforms togenerate a third digital waveform different from the first digitalwaveform and the second digital waveform. The NSS 905 can then transmitthe third digital waveform in a digital form to the audio signalingcomponent 950. The NSS 905 can translate the digital waveform to ananalog format and transmit the analog format to the audio signalingcomponent 950. The audio signaling component 950 can then, via an audiosource, generate the sound to be perceived by one or both ears. The samesound can be perceived by both ears. The sound can include the pulses orbeats spaced at the desired pulse rate interval 1040.

FIG. 11B illustrates acoustic pulses having isochronic tones, inaccordance with an embodiment. Isochronic tones are evenly spaced tonepulses. Isochronic tones can be created without having to combine twodifferent tones. The NSS 905 or other component of system 100 can createthe isochronic tone by turning a tone on and off. The NSS 905 cangenerate the isochronic tones or pulses by instructing the audiosignaling component to turn on and off. The NSS 905 can modify a digitalrepresentation of an acoustic wave to remove or set digital values ofthe acoustic wave such that sound is generated during the pulses 1135and no sound is generated during the null portions 1140.

By turning on and off the acoustic wave, the NSS 905 can establishacoustic pulses 1135 that are spaced apart by a pulse rate interval 1040that corresponds to a desired stimulation frequency, such as 40 Hz. Theisochronic pulses spaced part at the desired PRI 1040 can inducebrainwave entrainment.

FIG. 11C illustrates audio pulses generated by the NSS 905 using a soundtrack, in accordance with an embodiment. A sound track can include orrefer to a complex acoustical wave that includes multiple differentfrequencies, amplitudes, or tones. For example, a sound track caninclude a voice track, a musical instrument track, a musical trackhaving both voice and musical instruments, nature sounds, or whitenoise.

The NSS 905 can modulate the sound track to induce brainwave entrainmentby rhythmically adjusting a component in the sound. For example, the NSS905 can modulate the volume by increasing and decreasing the amplitudeof the acoustic wave or sound track to create the rhythmic stimuluscorresponding to the stimulation frequency for inducing brainwaveentrainment. Thus, the NSS 905 can embed, into a sound track acousticpulses having a pulse rate interval corresponding to the desiredstimulation frequency to induce brainwave entrainment. The NSS 905 canmanipulate the sound track to generate a new, modified sound trackhaving acoustic pulses with a pulse rate interval corresponding to thedesired stimulation frequency to induce brainwave entrainment.

As illustrated in FIG. 11C, pulses 1135 are generated by modulating thevolume from a first level V_(a) to a second level V_(b). During portions1140 of the acoustic wave 345, the NSS 905 can set or keep the volume atV_(a). The volume V_(a) can refer to an amplitude of the wave, or amaximum amplitude or crest of the wave 345 during the portion 1140. TheNSS 905 can then adjust, change, or increase the volume to V_(b) duringportion 1135. The NSS 905 can increase the volume by a predeterminedamount, such as a percentage, a number of decibels, a subject-specifiedamount, or other amount. The NSS 905 can set or maintain the volume atV_(b) for a duration corresponding to a desired pulse length for thepulse 1135.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can include an attenuator to attenuatethe volume from level V_(b) to level V_(a). In some embodiments, the NSS905 can instruct an attenuator (e.g., an attenuator of audio signalingcomponent 950) to attenuate the volume from level V_(b) to level V_(a).In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can include an amplifier to amplify orincrease the volume from V_(a) to V_(b). In some embodiments, the NSS905 can instruct an amplifier (e.g., an amplifier of the audio signalingcomponent 950) to amplify or increase the volume from V_(a) to V_(b).

Referring back to FIG. 9, the NSS 905 can include, access, interfacewith, or otherwise communicate with at least one audio adjustment module915. The audio adjustment module 915 can be designed and constructed toadjust a parameter associated with the audio signal, such as afrequency, amplitude, wavelength, pattern or other parameter of theaudio signal. The audio adjustment module 915 can automatically vary aparameter of the audio signal based on profile information or feedback.The audio adjustment module 915 can receive the feedback informationfrom the feedback monitor 935. The audio adjustment module 915 canreceive instructions or information from a side effects managementmodule 930. The audio adjustment module 915 can receive profileinformation from profile manager 925.

The audio adjustment module 915 can increase or decrease a contrastratio between the auditory stimulation signal and an ambient soundlevel. For example, the audio adjustment module 915 can determine ordetect the ambient sound level at or proximate to an ear of the subject.The audio adjustment module 915 can increase or decrease the volume ortone of the audio source or auditory stimulation signal relative to theambient sound level. The audio adjustment module 915 can increase ordecrease this contrast ratio to facilitate adherence to the treatment ortherapy session or reduce side effects. The audio adjustment module 915can, for example, increase the contrast ratio upon detecting a low levelof attention, or lack of satisfactory neural stimulation.

The NSS 905 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one unwanted frequency filtering module 920.The unwanted frequency filtering module 920 can be designed andconstructed to block, mitigate, reduce, or otherwise filter outfrequencies of audio signals that are undesired to prevent or reduce anamount of such audio signals from being perceived by the brain. Theunwanted frequency filtering module 920 can interface, instruct,control, or otherwise communicate with a filtering component 955 tocause the filtering component 955 to block, attenuate, or otherwisereduce the effect of the unwanted frequency on the neural oscillations.

The unwanted frequency filtering module 920 can include an active noisecontrol component (e.g., active noise cancellation component 1215depicted in FIG. 12B). Active noise control can be referred to orinclude active noise cancellation or active noise reduction. Activenoise control can reduce an unwanted sound by adding a second soundhaving a parameter specifically selected to cancel or attenuate thefirst sound. In some cases, the active noise control component can emita sound wave with the same amplitude but with an inverted phase (orantiphase) to the original unwanted sound. The two waves can combine toform a new wave, and effectively cancel each other out by destructiveinterference.

The active noise control component can include analog circuits ordigital signal processing. The active noise control component caninclude adaptive techniques to analyze waveforms of the background auralor monaural noise. Responsive to the background noise, the active noisecontrol component can generate an audio signal that can either phaseshift or invert the polarity of the original signal. This invertedsignal can be amplified by a transducer or speaker to create a soundwave directly proportional to the amplitude of the original waveform,creating destructive interference. This can reduce the volume of theperceivable noise.

In some embodiments, a noise-cancellation speaker can be co-located witha sound source speaker. In some embodiments, a noise cancellationspeaker can be co-located with a sound source that is to be attenuated.

The unwanted frequency filtering module 920 can filter out unwantedfrequencies that can adversely impact auditory brainwave entrainment.For example, an active noise control component can identify that audiosignals include acoustic bursts having the desired pulse rate interval,as well as acoustic bursts having an unwanted pulse rate interval. Theactive noise control component can identify the waveforms correspondingto the acoustic bursts having the unwanted pulse rate interval, andgenerate an inverted phase waveform to cancel out or attenuate theunwanted acoustic bursts.

The NSS 905 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one profile manager 925. The profile manager925 can be designed or constructed to store, update, retrieve orotherwise manage information associated with one or more subjectsassociated with the auditory brain entrainment. Profile information caninclude, for example, historical treatment information, historical brainentrainment information, dosing information, parameters of acousticwaves, feedback, physiological information, environmental information,or other data associated with the systems and methods of brainentrainment.

The NSS 905 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one side effects management module 930. Theside effects management module 930 can be designed and constructed toprovide information to the audio adjustment module 915 or the audiogeneration module 910 to change one or more parameter of the audiosignal in order to reduce a side effect. Side effects can include, forexample, nausea, migraines, fatigue, seizures, ear strain, deafness,ringing, or tinnitus.

The side effects management module 930 can automatically instruct acomponent of the NSS 905 to alter or change a parameter of the audiosignal. The side effects management module 930 can be configured withpredetermined thresholds to reduce side effects. For example, the sideeffects management module 930 can be configured with a maximum durationof a pulse train, maximum amplitude of acoustic waves, maximum volume,maximum duty cycle of a pulse train (e.g., the pulse width multiplied bythe frequency of the pulse train), maximum number of treatments forbrainwave entrainment in a time period (e.g., 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours,or 24 hours).

The side effects management module 930 can cause a change in theparameter of the audio signal in response to feedback information. Theside effect management module 930 can receive feedback from the feedbackmonitor 935. The side effects management module 930 can determine toadjust a parameter of the audio signal based on the feedback. The sideeffects management module 930 can compare the feedback with a thresholdto determine to adjust the parameter of the audio signal.

The side effects management module 930 can be configured with or includea policy engine that applies a policy or a rule to the current audiosignal and feedback to determine an adjustment to the audio signal. Forexample, if feedback indicates that a patient receiving audio signalshas a heart rate or pulse rate above a threshold, the side effectsmanagement module 930 can turn off the pulse train until the pulse ratestabilizes to a value below the threshold, or below a second thresholdthat is lower than the threshold.

The NSS 905 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one feedback monitor 935. The feedback monitorcan be designed and constructed to receive feedback information from afeedback component 960. Feedback component 960 can include, for example,a feedback sensor 1405 such as a temperature sensor, heart or pulse ratemonitor, physiological sensor, ambient noise sensor, microphone, ambienttemperature sensor, blood pressure monitor, brain wave sensor, EEGprobe, electrooculography (“EOG”) probes configured measure thecorneo-retinal standing potential that exists between the front and theback of the human eye, accelerometer, gyroscope, motion detector,proximity sensor, camera, microphone, or photo detector.

The NSS 905 can, responsive to feedback, adjust the audio stimulationsignal. The NSS 905 can increase or decrease a parameter of the audiostimulation signal responsive to physiological conditions, such as heartrate, blood pressure, level of attention, agitation, temperature, etc.The NSS 905 can overlay an auditory signal over the audio stimulationsignal. The NSS 905 can overlay an audio prompt or message over theauditory stimulation signal. The audio prompt can indicate a durationremaining in the therapy session. The audio prompt can include aprerecorded message, such as a message from a person known to thesubject or user receiving the auditory stimulation. The audio prompt caninclude words of guidance, training, encouragement, reminders,motivational messages, or other messages that can facilitate adherence,improve attentiveness, or reduce agitation in the subject.

I. Systems and Devices Configured for Neural Stimulation Via AuditoryStimulation

FIG. 12A illustrates a system for auditory brain entrainment inaccordance with an embodiment. The system 1200 can include one or morespeakers 1205. The system 1200 can include one or more microphones. Insome embodiments, the system can include both speakers 1205 andmicrophones 1210. In some embodiments, the system 1200 includes speakers1205 and may not include microphones 1210. In some embodiments, thesystem 1200 includes microphones 1210 and may not include speakers 1210.

The speakers 1205 can be integrated with the audio signaling component950. The audio signaling component 950 can include speakers 1205. Thespeakers 1205 can interact or communicate with audio signaling component950. For example, the audio signaling component 950 can instruct thespeaker 1205 to generate sound.

The microphones 1210 can be integrated with the feedback component 960.The feedback component 960 can include microphones 1210. The microphones1210 can interact or communicate with feedback component 960. Forexample, the feedback component 960 can receive information, data orsignals from microphone 1210.

In some embodiments, the speaker 1205 and the microphone 1210 can beintegrated together or a same device. For example, the speaker 1205 canbe configured to function as the microphone 1210. The NSS 905 can togglethe speaker 1205 from a speaker mode to a microphone mode.

In some embodiments, the system 1200 can include a single speaker 1205positioned at one of the ears of the subject. In some embodiments, thesystem 1200 can include two speakers. A first speaker of the twospeakers can be positioned at a first ear, and the second speaker of thetwo speakers can be positioned at the second ear. In some embodiments,additional speakers can be positioned in front of the subject's head, orbehind the subject's head. In some embodiments, one or more microphones1210 can be positioned at one or both ears, in front of the subject'shead, or behind the subject's head.

The speaker 1205 can include a dynamic cone speaker configured toproduce sound from an electrical signal. The speaker 1205 can include afull-range driver to produce acoustic waves with frequencies over someor all of the audible range (e.g., 60 Hz to 20,000 Hz). The speaker 1205can include a driver to produce acoustic waves with frequencies outsidethe audible range, such as 0 to 60 Hz, or in the ultrasonic range suchas 20 kHz to 4 GHz. The speaker 1205 can include one or more transducersor drivers to produce sounds at varying portions of the audiblefrequency range. For example, the speaker 1205 can include tweeters forhigh range frequencies (e.g., 2,000 Hz to 20,000 Hz), mid-range driversfor middle frequencies (e.g., 250 Hz to 2000 Hz), or woofers for lowfrequencies (e.g., 60 Hz to 250 Hz).

The speaker 1205 can include one or more types of speaker hardware,components or technology to produce sound. For example, the speaker 1205can include a diaphragm to produce sound. The speaker 1205 can include amoving-iron loudspeaker that uses a stationary coil to vibrate amagnetized piece of metal. The speaker 1205 can include a piezoelectricspeaker. A piezoelectric speaker can use the piezoelectric effect togenerate sound by applying a voltage to a piezoelectric material togenerate motion, which is converted into audible sound using diaphragmsand resonators.

The speaker 1205 can include various other types of hardware ortechnology, such as magnetostatic loudspeakers, magnetostrictivespeakers, electrostatic loudspeakers, a ribbon speaker, planar magneticloudspeakers, bending wave loudspeakers, coaxial drivers, hornloudspeakers, Heil air motion transducers, or transparent ionicconductions speaker.

In some cases, the speaker 1205 may not include a diaphragm. Forexample, the speaker 1205 can be a plasma arc speaker that useselectrical plasma as a radiating element. The speaker 1205 can be athermoacoustic speakers that uses carbon nanotube thin film. The speaker1205 can be a rotary woofer that includes a fan with blades thatconstantly change their pitch.

In some embodiments, the speaker 1205 can include a headphone or a pairof headphones, earspeakers, earphones, or earbuds. Headphones can berelatively small speakers as compared to loudspeakers. headphones can bedesigned and constructed to be placed in the ear, around the ear, orotherwise at or near the ear. Headphones can include electroacoustictransducers that convert an electrical signal to a corresponding soundin the subject's ear. In some embodiments, the headphones 1205 caninclude or interface with a headphone amplifier, such as an integratedamplifier or a standalone unit.

In some embodiments, the speaker 1205 can include headphones that caninclude an air jet that pushes air into the auditory canal, pushing thetympanum in a manner similar to that of a sound wave. The compressionand rarefaction of the tympanic membrane through bursts of air (with orwithout any discernible sound) can control frequencies of neuraloscillations similar to auditory signals. For example, the speaker 1205can include air jets or a device that resembles in-ear headphones thateither push, pull or both push and pull air into and out of the earcanal in order to compress or pull the tympanic membrane to affect thefrequencies of neural oscillations. The NSS 905 can instruct, configureor cause the air jets to generate bursts of air at a predeterminedfrequency.

In some embodiments, the headphones can connect to the audio signalingcomponent 950 via a wired or wireless connection. In some embodiments,the audio signaling component 950 can include the headphones. In someembodiments, the headphones 1205 can interface with one or morecomponents of the NSS 905 via a wired or wireless connection. In someembodiments, the headphones 1205 can include one or more components ofthe NSS 905 or system 100, such as the audio generation module 910,audio adjustment module 915, unwanted frequency filtering module 920,profile manager 925, side effects management module 930, feedbackmonitor 935, audio signaling component 950, filtering component 955, orfeedback component 960.

The speaker 1205 can include or be integrated into various types ofheadphones. For example, the headphones can include, for example,circumaural headphones (e.g., full size headphones) that includecircular or ellipsoid earpads that are designed and constructed to sealagainst the head to attenuate external noise. Circumaural headphones canfacilitate providing an immersive auditory brainwave wave stimulationexperience, while reducing external distractions. In some embodiments,headphones can include supra-aural headphones, which include pads thatpress against the ears rather than around them. Supra-aural headphonesmay provide less attenuation of external noise.

Both circumaural headphones and supra-aural headphones can have an openback, closed back, or semi open back. An open back leaks more sound andallows more ambient sounds to enter, but provides a more natural orspeaker-like sound. Closed back headphones block more of the ambientnoise as compared to open back headphones, thus providing a moreimmersive auditory brainwave stimulation experience while reducingexternal distractions.

In some embodiments, headphones can include ear-fitting headphones, suchas earphones or in-ear headphones. Earphones (or earbuds) can refer tosmall headphones that are fitted directly in the outer ear, facing butnot inserted in the ear canal. Earphones, however, provide minimalacoustic isolation and allow ambient noise to enter. In-ear headphones(or in-ear monitors or canalphones) can refer to small headphones thatcan be designed and constructed for insertion into the ear canal. In-earheadphones engage the ear canal and can block out more ambient noise ascompared to earphones, thus providing a more immersive auditorybrainwave stimulation experience. In-ear headphones can include earcanal plugs made or formed from one or more material, such as siliconerubber, elastomer, or foam. In some embodiments, in-ear headphones caninclude custom-made castings of the ear canal to create custom-moldedplugs that provide added comfort and noise isolation to the subject,thereby further improving the immersiveness of the auditory brainwavestimulation experience.

In some embodiments, one or more microphones 1210 can be used to detectsound. A microphone 1210 can be integrated with a speaker 1205. Themicrophone 1210 can provide feedback information to the NSS 905 or othercomponent of system 100. The microphone 1210 can provide feedback to acomponent of the speaker 1205 to cause the speaker 1205 to adjust aparameter of audio signal.

The microphone 1210 can include a transducer that converts sound into anelectrical signal. The Microphone 1210 can use electromagneticinduction, capacitance change, or piezoelectricity to produce theelectrical signal from air pressure variations. In some cases, themicrophone 1210 can include or be connected to a pre-amplifier toamplify the signal before it is recorded or processed. The microphone1210 can include one or more type of microphone, including, for example,a condenser microphone, RF condenser microphone, electret condenser,dynamic microphone, moving-coil microphone, ribbon microphone, carbonmicrophone, piezoelectric microphone, crystal microphone, fiber opticmicrophone, laser microphone, liquid or water microphone,microelectromechanical systems (“MEMS”) microphone, or speakers asmicrophones.

The feedback component 960 can include or interface with the microphone1210 to obtain, identify, or receive sound. The feedback component 960can obtain ambient noise. The feedback component 960 can obtain soundfrom the speakers 1205 to facilitate the NSS 905 adjusting acharacteristic of the audio signal generated by the speaker 1205. Themicrophone 1210 can receive voice input from the subject, such as audiocommands, instructions, requests, feedback information, or responses tosurvey questions.

In some embodiments, one or more speakers 1205 can be integrated withone or more microphones 1210. For example, the speaker 1205 andmicrophone 1210 can form a headset, be placed in a single enclosure, ormay even be the same device since the speaker 1205 and the microphone1210 may be structurally designed to toggle between a sound generationmode and a sound reception mode.

FIG. 12B illustrates a system configuration for auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The system 1200 caninclude at least one speaker 1205. The system 1200 can include at leastmicrophone 1210. The system 1200 can include at least one active noisecancellation component 1215. The system 1200 can include at least onefeedback sensor 1225. The system 1200 can include or interface with theNSS 905. The system 1200 can include or interface with an audio player1220.

The system 1200 can include a first speaker 1205 positioned at a firstear. The system 1200 can include a second speaker 1205 positioned at asecond year. The system 1200 can include a first active noisecancellation component 1215 communicatively coupled with the firstmicrophone 1210. The system 1200 can include a second active noisecancellation component 1215 communicatively coupled with the secondmicrophone 1210. In some cases, the active noise cancellation component1215 can communicate with both the first speaker 1205 and the secondspeaker 1205, or both the first microphone 1210 and the secondmicrophone 1210. The system 1200 can include a first microphone 1210communicatively coupled with the active noise cancellation component1215. The system 1200 can include a second microphone 1210communicatively coupled with the active noise cancellation component1215. In some embodiments, each of the microphone 1210, speaker 1205 andactive noise cancellation component can communicate or interface withthe NSS 905. In some embodiments, the system 1200 can include a feedbacksensor 1225 and a second feedback sensor 1225 communicatively coupled tothe NSS 905, the speaker 1205, microphone 1210, or active noisecancellation component 1215.

In operation, and in some embodiments, the audio player 1220 can play amusical track. The audio player 1220 can provide the audio signalcorresponding to the musical track via a wired or wireless connection tothe first and second speakers 1205. In some embodiments, the NSS 905 canintercept the audio signal from the audio player. For example, the NSS905 can receive the digital or analog audio signal from the audio player1220. The NSS 905 can be intermediary to the audio player 1220 and aspeaker 1205. The NSS 905 can analyze the audio signal corresponding tothe music in order to embed an auditory brainwave stimulation signal.For example, the NSS 905 can adjust the volume of the auditory signalfrom the audio player 1220 to generate acoustic pulses having a pulserate interval as depicted in FIG. 11C. In some embodiments, the NSS 905can use a binaural beats technique to provide different auditory signalsto the first and second speakers that, when perceived by the brain, iscombined to have the desired stimulation frequency.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can adjust for any latency betweenfirst and second speakers 1205 such that the brain perceives the audiosignals at the same or substantially same time (e.g., within 1milliseconds, 2 milliseconds, 5 milliseconds, or 10 milliseconds). TheNSS 905 can buffer the audio signals to account for latency such thataudio signals are transmitted from the speakers at the same time.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 may not be intermediary to the audioplayer 1220 and the speaker. For example, the NSS 905 can receive themusical track from a digital music repository. The NSS 905 canmanipulate or modify the musical track to embed acoustic pulses inaccordance with the desired PRI. The NSS 905 can then provide themodified musical track to the audio player 1220 to provide the modifiedaudio signal to the speaker 1205.

In some embodiments, an active noise cancellation component 1215 canreceive ambient noise information from the microphone 1210, identifyunwanted frequencies or noise, and generate an inverted phase waveformto cancel out or attenuate the unwanted waveforms. In some embodiments,the system 1200 can include an additional speaker that generates thenoise canceling waveform provided by the noise cancellation component1215. The noise cancellation component 1215 can include the additionalspeaker.

The feedback sensor 1225 of the system 1200 can detect feedbackinformation, such as environmental parameters or physiologicalconditions. The feedback sensor 1225 can provide the feedbackinformation to NSS 905. The NSS 905 can adjust or change the audiosignal based on the feedback information. For example, the NSS 905 candetermine that a pulse rate of the subject exceeds a predeterminedthreshold, and then lower the volume of the audio signal. The NSS 905can detect that the volume of the auditory signal exceeds a threshold,and decrease the amplitude. The NSS 905 can determine that the pulserate interval is below a threshold, which can indicate that a subject islosing focus or not paying a satisfactory level of attention to theaudio signal, and the NSS 905 can increase the amplitude of the audiosignal or change the tone or music track. In some embodiments, the NSS905 can vary the tone or the music track based on a time interval.Varying the tone or the music track can cause the subject to pay agreater level of attention to the auditory stimulation, which canfacilitate brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can receive neural oscillationinformation from EEG probes 1225, and adjust the auditory stimulationbased on the EEG information. For example, the NSS 905 can determine,from the probe information, that neurons are oscillating at an undesiredfrequency. The NSS 905 can then identify the corresponding undesiredfrequency in ambient noise using the microphone 1210. The NSS 905 canthen instruct the active noise cancellation component 1215 to cancel outthe waveforms corresponding to the ambient noise having the undesiredfrequency.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can enable a passive noise filter. Apass noise filter can include a circuit having one or more or aresistor, capacitor or an inductor that filters out undesiredfrequencies of noise. In some cases, a passive filter can include asound insulating material, sound proofing material, or sound absorbingmaterial.

FIG. 4C illustrates a system configuration for auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The system 401 can provideauditory brainwave stimulation using ambient noise source 1230. Forexample, system 401 can include the microphone 1210 that detects theambient noise 1230. The microphone 1210 can provide the detected ambientnoise to NSS 905. The NSS 905 can modify the ambient noise 1230 beforeproviding it to the first speaker 1205 or the second speaker 1205. Insome embodiments, the system 401 can be integrated or interface with ahearing aid device. A hearing aid can be a device designed to improvehearing.

The NSS 905 can increase or decrease the amplitude of the ambient noise1230 to generate acoustic bursts having the desired pulse rate interval.The NSS 905 can provide the modified audio signals to the first andsecond speakers 1205 to facilitate auditory brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can overlay a click train, tones, orother acoustic pulses over the ambient noise 1230. For example, the NSS905 can receive the ambient noise information from the microphone 1210,apply an auditory stimulation signal to the ambient noise information,and then present the combined ambient noise information and auditorystimulation signal to the first and second speakers 1205. In some cases,the NSS 905 can filter out unwanted frequencies in the ambient noise1230 prior to providing the auditory stimulation signal to the speakers1205.

Thus, using the ambient noise 1230 as part of the auditory stimulation,a subject can observe the surroundings or carry on with their dailyactivities while receiving auditory stimulation to facilitate brainwaveentrainment.

FIG. 13 illustrates a system configuration for auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The system 1300 canprovide auditory stimulation for brainwave entrainment using a roomenvironment. The system 1300 can include one or more speakers. Thesystem 1300 can include a surround sound system. For example, the system1300 includes a left speaker 1310, right speaker 1315, center speaker1305, right surround speaker 1325, and left surround speaker 1330.System 1300 an include a sub-woofer 1320. The system 1300 can includethe microphone 1210. The system 1300 can include or refer to a 5.1surround system. In some embodiments, the system 1300 can have 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7 or more speakers.

When providing auditory stimulation using a surround system, the NSS 905can provide the same or different audio signals to each of the speakersin the system 1300. The NSS 905 can modify or adjust audio signalsprovided to one or more of the speakers in system 1300 in order tofacilitate brainwave entrainment. For example, the NSS 905 can receivefeedback from microphone 1210 and modify, manipulate or otherwise adjustthe audio signal to optimize the auditory stimulation provided to asubject located at a position in the room that corresponds to thelocation of the microphone 1210. The NSS 905 can optimize or improve theauditory stimulation perceived at the location corresponding tomicrophone 1210 by analyzing the acoustic beams or waves generated bythe speakers that propagate towards the microphone 1210.

The NSS 905 can be configured with information about the design andconstruction of each speaker. For example, speaker 1305 can generatesound in a direction that has an angle of 1335; speaker 1310 cangenerate sound that travels in a direction having an angle of 1340;speaker 1315 can generate sound that travels in a direction having anangle of 1345; speaker 1325 can generate sound that travels in adirection having an angle of 1355; and speaker 1330 can generate soundthat travels in a direction having an angle of 1350. These angles can bethe optimal or predetermined angles for each of the speakers. Theseangles can refer to the optimal angle of each speaker such that a personpositioned at location corresponding to microphone 1210 can receive theoptimum auditory stimulation. Thus, the speakers in system 1300 can beoriented to transmit auditory stimulation towards the subject.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can enable or disable one or morespeakers. In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can increase or decrease thevolume of the speakers to facilitate brainwave entrainment. The NSS 905can intercept musical tracks, television audio, movie audio, internetaudio, audio output from a set top box, or other audio source. The NSS905 can adjust or manipulate the received audio, and transmit theadjusted audio signals to the speakers in system 1300 to inducebrainwave entrainment.

FIG. 14 illustrates feedback sensors 1405 placed or positioned at, on,or near a person's head. Feedback sensors 1405 can include, for example,EEG probes that detect brain wave activity.

The feedback monitor 935 can detect, receive, obtain, or otherwiseidentify feedback information from the one or more feedback sensors1405. The feedback monitor 935 can provide the feedback information toone or more component of the NSS 905 for further processing or storage.For example, the profile manager 925 can update profile data structure945 stored in data repository 940 with the feedback information. Profilemanager 925 can associate the feedback information with an identifier ofthe patient or person undergoing the auditory stimulation, as well as atime stamp and date stamp corresponding to receipt or detection of thefeedback information.

The feedback monitor 935 can determine a level of attention. The levelof attention can refer to the focus provided to the acoustic pulses usedfor stimulation. The feedback monitor 935 can determine the level ofattention using various hardware and software techniques. The feedbackmonitor 935 can assign a score to the level of attention (e.g., 1 to 10with 1 being low attention and 10 being high attention, or vice versa, 1to 100 with 1 being low attention and 100 being high attention, or viceversa, 0 to 1 with 0 being low attention and 1 being high attention, orvice versa), categorize the level of attention (e.g., low, medium,high), grade the attention (e.g., A, B, C, D, or F), or otherwiseprovide an indication of a level of attention.

In some cases, the feedback monitor 935 can track a person's eyemovement to identify a level of attention. The feedback monitor 935 caninterface with a feedback component 960 that includes an eye-tracker.The feedback monitor 935 (e.g., via feedback component 960) can detectand record eye movement of the person and analyze the recorded eyemovement to determine an attention span or level of attention. Thefeedback monitor 935 can measure eye gaze which can indicate or provideinformation related to covert attention. For example, the feedbackmonitor 935 (e.g., via feedback component 960) can be configured withelectrooculography (“EOG”) to measure the skin electric potential aroundthe eye, which can indicate a direction the eye faces relative to thehead. In some embodiments, the EOG can include a system or device tostabilize the head so it cannot move in order to determine the directionof the eye relative to the head. In some embodiments, the EOG caninclude or interface with a head tracker system to determine theposition of the heads, and then determine the direction of the eyerelative to the head.

In some embodiments, the feedback monitor 935 and feedback component 960can determine a level of attention the subject is paying to the auditorystimulation based on eye movement. For example, increased eye movementmay indicate that the subject is focusing on visual stimuli, as opposedto the auditory stimulation. To determine the level of attention thesubject is paying to visual stimuli as opposed to the auditorystimulation, the feedback monitor 935 and feedback component 960 candetermine or track the direction of the eye or eye movement using videodetection of the pupil or corneal reflection. For example, the feedbackcomponent 960 can include one or more camera or video camera. Thefeedback component 960 can include an infra-red source that sends lightpulses towards the eyes. The light can be reflected by the eye. Thefeedback component 960 can detect the position of the reflection. Thefeedback component 960 can capture or record the position of thereflection. The feedback component 960 can perform image processing onthe reflection to determine or compute the direction of the eye or gazedirection of the eye.

The feedback monitor 935 can compare the eye direction or movement tohistorical eye direction or movement of the same person, nominal eyemovement, or other historical eye movement information to determine alevel of attention. For example, the feedback monitor 935 can determinea historical amount of eye movement during historical auditorystimulation sessions. The feedback monitor 935 can compare the currenteye movement with the historical eye movement to identify a deviation.The NSS 905 can determine, based on the comparison, an increase in eyemovement and further determine that the subject is paying less attentionto the current auditory stimulation based on the increase in eyemovement. In response to detecting the decrease in attention, thefeedback monitor 935 can instruct the audio adjustment module 915 tochange a parameter of the audio signal to capture the subject'sattention. The audio adjustment module 915 can change the volume, tone,pitch, or music track to capture the subject's attention or increase thelevel of attention the subject is paying to the auditory stimulation.Upon changing the audio signal, the NSS 905 can continue to monitor thelevel of attention. For example, upon changing the audio signal, the NSS905 can detect a decrease in eye movement which can indicate an increasein a level of attention provided to the audio signal.

The feedback sensor 1405 can interact with or communicate with NSS 905.For example, the feedback sensor 1405 can provide detected feedbackinformation or data to the NSS 905 (e.g., feedback monitor 935). Thefeedback sensor 1405 can provide data to the NSS 905 in real-time, forexample as the feedback sensor 1405 detects or senses or information.The feedback sensor 1405 can provide the feedback information to the NSS905 based on a time interval, such as 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10minutes, hourly, 2 hours, 4 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The feedbacksensor 1405 can provide the feedback information to the NSS 905responsive to a condition or event, such as a feedback measurementexceeding a threshold or falling below a threshold. The feedback sensor1405 can provide feedback information responsive to a change in afeedback parameter. In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can ping, query, orsend a request to the feedback sensor 1405 for information, and thefeedback sensor 1405 can provide the feedback information in response tothe ping, request, or query.

J. Method for Neural Stimulation Via Auditory Stimulation

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram of a method of performing auditory brainentrainment in accordance with an embodiment. The method 800 can beperformed by one or more system, component, module or element depictedin FIGS. 7A, 7B, and 9-14, including, for example, a neural stimulationsystem (NSS). In brief overview, the NSS can identify an audio signal toprovide at block 1505. At block 1510, the NSS can generate and transmitthe identified audio signal. At 1515 the NSS can receive or determinefeedback associated with neural activity, physiological activity,environmental parameters, or device parameters. At 1520 the NSS canmanage, control, or adjust the audio signal based on the feedback.

K. NSS Operating with Headphones

The NSS 905 can operate in conjunction with the speakers 1205 asdepicted in FIG. 12A. The NSS 905 can operate in conjunction withearphones or in-ear phones including the speaker 1205 and a feedbacksensor 1405.

In operation, a subject using the headphones can wear the headphones ontheir head such that speakers or placed at or in the ear canals. In somecases, the subject can provide an indication to the NSS 905 that theheadphones have been worn and that the subject is ready to undergobrainwave entrainment. The indication can include an instruction,command, selection, input, or other indication via an input/outputinterface, such as a keyboard 726, pointing device 727, or other I/Odevices 730 a-n. The indication can be a motion-based indication, visualindication, or voice-based indication. For example, the subject canprovide a voice command that indicates that the subject is ready toundergo brainwave entrainment.

In some cases, the feedback sensor 1405 can determine that the subjectis ready to undergo brainwave entrainment. The feedback sensor 1405 candetect that the headphones have been placed on a subject's head. The NSS905 can receive motion data, acceleration data, gyroscope data,temperature data, or capacitive touch data to determine that theheadphones have been placed on the subject's head. The received data,such as motion data, can indicate that the headphones were picked up andplaced on the subject's head. The temperature data can measure thetemperature of or proximate to the headphones, which can indicate thatthe headphones are on the subject's head. The NSS 905 can detect thatthe subject is ready responsive to determining that the subject ispaying a high level of attention to the headphones or feedback sensor1405.

Thus, the NSS 905 can detect or determine that the headphones have beenworn and that the subject is in a ready state, or the NSS 905 canreceive an indication or confirmation from the subject that the subjecthas worn the headphones and the subject is ready to undergo brainwaveentrainment. Upon determining that the subject is ready, the NSS 905 caninitialize the brainwave entrainment process. In some embodiments, theNSS 905 can access a profile data structure 945. For example, a profilemanager 925 can query the profile data structure 945 to determine one ormore parameter for the external auditory stimulation used for the brainentrainment process. Parameters can include, for example, a type ofaudio stimulation technique, an intensity or volume of the audiostimulation, frequency of the audio stimulation, duration of the audiostimulation, or wavelength of the audio stimulation. The profile manager925 can query the profile data structure 945 to obtain historical brainentrainment information, such as prior auditory stimulation sessions.The profile manager 925 can perform a lookup in the profile datastructure 945. The profile manager 925 can perform a look-up with ausername, user identifier, location information, fingerprint, biometricidentifier, retina scan, voice recognition and authentication, or otheridentifying technique.

The NSS 905 can determine a type of external auditory stimulation basedon the components connected to the headphones. The NSS 905 can determinethe type of external auditory stimulation based on the type of speakers1205 available. For example, if the headphones are connected to an audioplayer, the NSS 905 can determined to embed acoustic pulses. If theheadphones are not connected to an audio player, but only themicrophone, the NSS 905 can determine to inject a pure tone or modifyambient noise.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can determine the type of externalauditory stimulation based on historical brainwave entrainment sessions.For example, the profile data structure 945 can be pre-configured withinformation about the type of audio signaling component 950.

The NSS 905 can determine, via the profile manager 925, a modulationfrequency for the pulse train or the audio signal. For example, NSS 905can determine, from the profile data structure 945, that the modulationfrequency for the external auditory stimulation should be set to 40 Hz.Depending on the type of auditory stimulation, the profile datastructure 945 can further indicate a pulse length, intensity, wavelengthof the acoustic wave forming the audio signal, or duration of the pulsetrain.

In some cases, the NSS 905 can determine or adjust one or more parameterof the external auditory stimulation. For example, the NSS 905 (e.g.,via feedback component 960 or feedback sensor 1405) can determine anamplitude of the acoustic wave or volume level for the sound. The NSS905 (e.g., via audio adjustment module 915 or side effects managementmodule 930) can establish, initialize, set, or adjust the amplitude orwavelength of the acoustic waves or acoustic pulses. For example, theNSS 905 can determine that there is a low level of ambient noise. Due tothe low level of ambient noise, subject's hearing may not be impaired ordistracted. The NSS 905 can determine, based on detecting a low level ofambient noise, that it may not be necessary to increase the volume, orthat it may be possible to reduce the volume to maintain the efficacy ofbrainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can monitor (e.g., via feedback monitor935 and feedback component 960) the level of ambient noise throughoutthe brainwave entrainment process to automatically and periodicallyadjust the amplitude of the acoustic pulses. For example, if the subjectbegan the brainwave entrainment process when there was a high level ofambient noise, the NSS 905 can initially set a higher amplitude for theacoustic pulses and use a tone that includes frequencies that are easierto perceive, such as 10 kHz. However, in some embodiments in which theambient noise level decreases throughout the brainwave entrainmentprocess, the NSS 905 can automatically detect the decrease in ambientnoise and, in response to the detection, adjust or lower the volumewhile decreasing the frequency of the acoustic wave. The NSS 905 canadjust the acoustic pulses to provide a high contrast ratio with respectto ambient noise to facilitate brainwave entrainment.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 (e.g., via feedback monitor 935 andfeedback component 960) can monitor or measure physiological conditionsto set or adjust a parameter of the acoustic wave. In some embodiments,the NSS 905 can monitor or measure heart rate, pulse rate, bloodpressure, body temperature, perspiration, or brain activity to set oradjust a parameter of the acoustic wave.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can be preconfigured to initiallytransmit acoustic pulses having a lowest setting for the acoustic waveintensity (e.g., low amplitude or high wavelength) and graduallyincrease the intensity (e.g., increase the amplitude of the or decreasethe wavelength) while monitoring feedback until an optimal audiointensity is reached. An optimal audio intensity can refer to a highestintensity without adverse physiological side effects, such as deafness,seizures, heart attack, migraines, or other discomfort. The NSS 905(e.g., via side effects management module 930) can monitor thephysiological symptoms to identify the adverse side effects of theexternal auditory stimulation, and adjust (e.g., via audio adjustmentmodule 915) the external auditory stimulation accordingly to reduce oreliminate the adverse side effects.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 (e.g., via audio adjustment module 915)can adjust a parameter of the audio wave or acoustic pulse based on alevel of attention. For example, during the brainwave entrainmentprocess, the subject may get bored, lose focus, fall asleep, orotherwise not pay attention to the acoustic pulses. Not paying attentionto the acoustic pulses may reduce the efficacy of the brainwaveentrainment process, resulting in neurons oscillating at a frequencydifferent from the desired modulation frequency of the acoustic pulses.

NSS 905 can detect the level of attention the subject is paying to theacoustic pulses using the feedback monitor 935 and one or more feedbackcomponent 960. Responsive to determining that the subject is not payinga satisfactory amount of attention to the acoustic pulses, the audioadjustment module 915 can change a parameter of the audio signal to gainthe subject's attention. For example, the audio adjustment module 915can increase the amplitude of the acoustic pulse, adjust the tone of theacoustic pulse, or change the duration of the acoustic pulse. The audioadjustment module 915 can randomly vary one or more parameters of theacoustic pulse. The audio adjustment module 915 can initiate anattention seeking acoustic sequence configured to regain the subject'sattention. For example, the audio sequence can include a change infrequency, tone, amplitude, or insert words or music in a predetermined,random, or pseudo-random pattern. The attention seeking audio sequencecan enable or disable different acoustic sources if the audio signalingcomponent 950 includes multiple audio sources or speakers. Thus, theaudio adjustment module 915 can interact with the feedback monitor 935to determine a level of attention the subject is providing to theacoustic pulses, and adjust the acoustic pulses to regain the subject'sattention if the level of attention falls below a threshold.

In some embodiments, the audio adjustment module 915 can change oradjust one or more parameter of the acoustic pulse or acoustic wave atpredetermined time intervals (e.g., every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15minutes, or 20 minutes) to regain or maintain the subject's attentionlevel.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 (e.g., via unwanted frequency filteringmodule 920) can filter, block, attenuate, or remove unwanted auditoryexternal stimulation. Unwanted auditory external stimulation caninclude, for example, unwanted modulation frequencies, unwantedintensities, or unwanted wavelengths of sound waves. The NSS 905 candeem a modulation frequency to be unwanted if the modulation frequencyof a pulse train is different or substantially different (e.g., 1%, 2%,5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, or more than 25%) from a desired frequency.

For example, the desired modulation frequency for brainwave entrainmentcan be 40 Hz. However, a modulation frequency of 20 Hz or 80 Hz canreduce the beneficial effects to cognitive functioning of the brain, acognitive state of the brain, the immune system, or inflammation thatcan result from brainwave entrainment at other frequencies, such as 40Hz. Thus, the NSS 905 can filter out the acoustic pulses correspondingto the 20 Hz or 80 Hz modulation frequency.

In some embodiments, the NSS 905 can detect, via feedback component 960,that there are acoustic pulses from an ambient noise source thatcorresponds to an unwanted modulation frequency of 20 Hz. The NSS 905can further determine the wavelength of the acoustic waves of theacoustic pulses corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency. TheNSS 905 can instruct the filtering component 955 to filter out thewavelength corresponding to the unwanted modulation frequency.

L. Inducing Neural Oscillations Via Peripheral Nerve Stimulation

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to peripheralnerve stimulation. As described herein, peripheral nerve stimulation caninclude stimulation of nerves of the peripheral nerve system. Peripheralnerve stimulation can include stimulation of nerves that are peripheralto or remote from the brain. Peripheral nerve stimulation can includestimulation of nerves which may be part of, associated with, orconnected to the spinal cord. The peripheral nerve stimulation canadjust, control or otherwise manage the frequency of the neuraloscillations to provide beneficial effects to one or more cognitivestates or cognitive functions of the brain, while mitigating orpreventing adverse consequences on a cognitive state or cognitivefunction. For example, the stimulation can treat, prevent, protectagainst or otherwise affect Alzheimer's disease. The peripheral nervestimulation can result in neural oscillations associated with brainwaveentrainment that can provide beneficial effects to one or more cognitivestates or cognitive functions of the brain. For example, brainwaveentrainment (or the neural oscillations associated thereto) can treatdisorders, maladies, diseases, inefficiencies, injuries or other issuesrelated to a cognitive function or cognitive state of the brain.

Neural oscillation occurs in humans or animals and includes rhythmic orrepetitive neural activity in the central nervous system. Neural tissuecan generate oscillatory activity by mechanisms within individualneurons or by interactions between neurons. Oscillations can appear aseither oscillations in membrane potential or as rhythmic patterns ofaction potentials, which can produce oscillatory activation ofpost-synaptic neurons. Synchronized activity of a group of neurons cangive rise to macroscopic oscillations, which can be observed byelectroencephalography (“EEG”). Neural oscillations can be characterizedby their frequency, amplitude and phase. These signal properties can beobserved from neural recordings using time-frequency analysis.

For example, an EEG can measure oscillatory activity among a group ofneurons, and the measured oscillatory activity can be categorized intofrequency bands as follows: delta activity corresponds to a frequencyband from 1-4 Hz; theta activity corresponds to a frequency band from4-8 Hz; alpha activity corresponds to a frequency band from 8-12 Hz;beta activity corresponds to a frequency band from 163-30 Hz; and gammaactivity corresponds to a frequency band from 30-60 Hz.

The frequency of neural oscillations can be associated with cognitivestates or cognitive functions such as information transfer, perception,motor control and memory. Based on the cognitive state or cognitivefunction, the frequency of neural oscillations can vary. Further,certain frequencies of neural oscillations can have beneficial effectsor adverse consequences on one or more cognitive states or function.However, it may be challenging to synchronize neural oscillations usingexternal stimulus to provide such beneficial effects or reduce orprevent such adverse consequences.

Brainwave entrainment (e.g., neural entrainment or brain entrainment)occurs when an external stimulation of a particular frequency isperceived by the brain and triggers neural activity in the brain thatresults in neurons oscillating at a frequency corresponding to theparticular frequency of the external stimulation. Thus, brainentrainment can refer to synchronizing neural oscillations in the brainusing external stimulation such that the neural oscillations occur atfrequency that corresponds to the particular frequency of the externalstimulation.

Systems and methods of the present disclosure can provide peripheralnerve stimulation to cause or induce neural oscillations. For example,electric currents on or through the skin around sensory nerves formingpart of or connected to the peripheral nervous system can cause orinduce electrical activity in the sensory nerves, causing a transmissionto the brain via the central nervous system, which can be perceived bythe brain or can cause or induce electrical and neural activity in thebrain, including activity resulting in neural oscillations. The brain,responsive to receiving the peripheral nerve stimulations, can adjust,manage, or control the frequency of neural oscillations. The electriccurrents can result in depolarization of neural cells, such as due toelectric current stimuli such as time-varying pulses. The electriccurrent pulse may directly cause depolarization. Secondary effects inother regions of the brain may be gated or controlled by the brain inresponse to the depolarization. The peripheral nerve stimulationsgenerated at a predetermined frequency can trigger neural activity inthe brain to cause or induce neural oscillations. The frequency ofneural oscillations can be based on or correspond to the frequency ofthe peripheral nerve stimulations, or a modulation frequency associatedwith the peripheral nerve stimulations. Thus, systems and methods of thepresent disclosure can cause or induce neural oscillations usingperipheral nerve stimulations such as electric current pulses modulatedat a predetermined frequency to synchronize electrical activity amonggroups of neurons based on the frequency of the peripheral nervestimulations. Brain entrainment associated with neural oscillations canbe observed based on the aggregate frequency of oscillations produced bythe synchronous electrical activity in ensembles of cortical neurons.The frequency of the modulation of the electric currents, or pulsesthereof, can cause or adjust this synchronous electrical activity in theensembles of cortical neurons to oscillate at a frequency correspondingto the frequency of the peripheral nerve stimulation pulses.

FIG. 16 is a block diagram depicting a system to perform peripheralnerve stimulation to cause or induce neural oscillations, such as tocause brain entrainment, in accordance with an embodiment. The system1600 can include a peripheral nerve stimulation system 1605. In briefoverview, the peripheral nerve stimulation system (or peripheral nervestimulation neural stimulation system) (“NSS”) 1605 can include, access,interface with, or otherwise communicate with one or more of a nervestimulus generation module 1610, nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615,profile manager 1625, side effects management module 1630, feedbackmonitor 1635, data repository 1640, nerve stimulus generator component1650, shielding component 1655, feedback component 1660, or nervestimulus amplification component 1665. The nerve stimulus generationmodule 1610, nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615, profile manager1625, side effects management module 1630, feedback monitor 1635, nervestimulus generator component 1650, shielding component 1655, feedbackcomponent 1660, or nerve stimulus amplification component 1665 can eachinclude at least one processing unit or other logic device such asprogrammable logic array engine, or module configured to communicatewith the database repository 1650. The nerve stimulus generation module1610, nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615, profile manager 1625, sideeffects management module 1630, feedback monitor 1635, nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650, shielding component 1655, feedback component1660, or nerve stimulus amplification component 1665 can be separatecomponents, a single component, or part of the NSS 1605. The system 1600and its components, such as the NSS 1605, may include hardware elements,such as one or more processors, logic devices, or circuits. The system1600 and its components, such as the NSS 1605, can include one or morehardware or interface component depicted in system 700 in FIGS. 7A and7B. For example, a component of system 1600 can include or execute onone or more processors 721, access storage 728 or memory 722, andcommunicate via network interface 718.

Still referring to FIG. 16, and in further detail, the NSS 1605 caninclude at least one nerve stimulus generation module 1610. The nervestimulus generation module 1610 can be designed and constructed tointerface with a nerve stimulus generator component 1650 to provideinstructions or otherwise cause or facilitate the generation of a nervestimulus, such as an electric current controlled or modulated as a wave,burst, pulse, chirp, sweep, or other modulated current having one ormore predetermined parameters. The nerve stimulus generation module 1610can include hardware or software to receive and process instructions ordata packets from one or more module or component of the NSS 1605. Thenerve stimulus generation module 1610 can generate instructions to causethe nerve stimulus generator component 1650 to generate a nervestimulus. The nerve stimulus may be an electric current controlledaccording to one or more desired characteristics, such as amplitude,voltage, frequency (e.g., alternating current frequency, or acorresponding wavelength), or modulation frequency (e.g., a frequency atwhich an amplitude of a direct current stimulus is modulated, or atwhich a current stimulus is turned on or off). The characteristics maybe provided to the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 aspredetermined parameters, or the predetermined parameters may includeinstructions or other control commands causing the nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 to generate a nerve stimulus according to thedesired characteristics. The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 cancontrol or enable the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 togenerate the nerve stimulus having one or more predetermined parameters.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can be communicatively coupledto the nerve stimulus generator component 1650. The nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can communicate with the nerve stimulus generatorcomponent 1650 via a circuit, electrical wire, data port, network port,power wire, ground, electrical contacts or pins. The nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can wirelessly communicate with the nervestimulus generator component 1650 using one or more wireless protocolssuch as BlueTooth, BlueTooth Low Energy, Zigbee, Z-Wave, IEEE 802, WIFI,3G, 4G, LTE, near field communications (“NFC”), or other short, mediumor long range communication protocols, etc. The nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can include or access network interface 2120 tocommunicate wirelessly or over a wire with the nerve stimulus generatorcomponent 1650.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can interface, control, orotherwise manage various types of nerve stimulus generator components1650 in order to cause the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 togenerate, control, modulate, or otherwise provide the nerve stimulushaving one or more predetermined parameters. The nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can include a driver configured to drive thenerve stimulus generator component 1650. For example, the nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 can include electrodes and a power supplyconfigured to deliver current to be discharged between the electrodes.The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can include a computing chip,microchip, circuit, microcontroller, operational amplifiers,transistors, resistors, or diodes configured to drive the power supplyto provide electricity or power having certain voltage and currentcharacteristics to drive the electrodes to output or discharge anelectric current with desired characteristics. The nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 may also directly drive the electrodes.

The nerve stimulus can be an electric current characterized by anamplitude. The amplitude may represent a strength of the electriccurrent, and thus indicate a magnitude of a force that will induce orcause electrical activity in the peripheral nervous system and, in turn,the brain. The nerve stimulus generator component 1650 can be configuredto output variable current, such that the amplitude can be controlled.

The nerve stimulus generator component 1650 can be configured to outputat least one of direct current or alternating current. Where the nervestimulus generator component 1650 is configured to output alternatingcurrent, the nerve stimulus can be characterized by a frequency (or acorresponding wavelength) of the alternating current.

The nerve stimulus may also be characterized by a modulation frequencyof intermittent features of the electric current. For example, theamplitude of the electric current may be modulated by the nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 at a predetermined frequency, such as by turninga power supply delivering current through the electrodes on or off, ordriving the current as a variable current. The nerve stimulus may alsobe characterized by a voltage of the electric current. The nervestimulus generation module 1610 can instruct the nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 to generate electric currents having one ormore of a predetermined amplitude, voltage, or frequency.

The NSS 1605 can modulate, modify, change or otherwise alter propertiesof the nerve stimulus. For example, the NSS 1605 can modulate theamplitude, voltage, or frequency of the electric current of the nervestimulus. Where the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 isconfigured to be driven with a variable current, the NSS 1605 can lowerthe amplitude to cause the electric current to have a lesser strength(e.g., to reduce a resulting effect on electrical activity in theperipheral nervous system and the brain), or increase the amplitude tocause the electric current to have a greater strength (e.g., to increasea resulting effect on electrical activity in the peripheral nervoussystem and the brain).

The NSS 1605 can modulate or change one or more properties of the nervestimulus based on a time interval. For example, the NSS 1605 can changea property of the nerve stimulus every 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 20 minutes, 7 minutes, 10minutes, or 15 minutes. The NSS 1605 can change a modulation frequencyof the nerve stimulus, where the modulation frequency refers to therepeated modulations or inverse of the pulse rate interval of the nervestimulus. The modulation frequency can be a predetermined or desiredfrequency. The modulation frequency can correspond to a desiredstimulation frequency of neural oscillations. The modulation frequencycan be set to facilitate or cause neural oscillations, which may beassociated with brain entrainment. The NSS 1605 can set the frequency ormodulation frequency of the electric current to a frequency in the rangeof 0.1 Hz to 10,000 Hz. For example, the NSS 1605 can set the modulationfrequency to 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 5 Hz, 10 Hz, 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 31 Hz, 32Hz, 33 Hz, 34 Hz, 35 Hz, 36 Hz, 37 Hz, 38 Hz, 39 Hz, 40 Hz, 41 Hz, 42Hz, 43 Hz, 44 Hz, 45 Hz, 46 Hz, 47 Hz, 48 Hz, 49 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 1650 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 300 Hz, 400 Hz, 500Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 3000 Hz, 4,000 Hz, 5000 Hz, 6,000 Hz, 7,000 Hz,8,000 Hz, 9,000 Hz, or 10,000 Hz.

Referring now to FIGS. 17A-17D, various implementations of pulse schemesfor peripheral nerve stimulation, including peripheral nerve stimulationby the NSS 1605, are illustrated according to some embodiments. Thenerve stimulus generation module 1610 can determine to provideperipheral nerve stimulations that include bursts of electric currents,electric current pulses, or modulations to electric currents. The nervestimulus generation module 1610 can instruct or otherwise cause thenerve stimulus generator component 1650 to generate electric currentbursts or pulses. An electric current pulse can refer to a burst ofelectric currents or a modulation to a property of an electric currentthat causes or induces a change in electrical activity in the brain. Anelectric current that is intermittently turned on and off can createelectric current pulses. For example, a current driven through andoutput by electrodes of the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 canbe turned on and off to create electric current pulses. The electriccurrent can be turned on and off based on a predetermined or fixed pulserate interval, such as every 0.025 seconds, to provide a pulserepetition frequency of 40 Hz. The electric current can be turned on andoff to provide a pulse repetition frequency in the range of 0.1 Hz to 10kHz.

FIGS. 17A-17D illustrates bursts of electric currents or bursts ofmodulations that can be applied to cause peripheral nerve stimulation.The modulations can refer to changes in the amplitude or magnitude ofthe electric current, changes in frequency (or wavelength) of themodulation of alternating currents, changes in voltage of the electriccurrent, or otherwise modifying or changing the electric current. Thepulse schemes (e.g., pulse width modulation schemes) shown in FIGS.17A-17D can be generated as or incorporated as instructions in a controlsignal transmitted from the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 to thenerve stimulus generator component 1650. For example, the nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can modulate an output of the control signalaccording to a pulse scheme; the nerve stimulus generation module 1610can also generate the control signal to include instructions indicatinga pulse scheme, such that the nerve stimulus generator component 1650can extract the pulse scheme from the instructions of the control signaland control modulation of the electric current based on the pulsescheme.

In some embodiments, the control signal indicates at least one of anamplitude, voltage, frequency, or modulation frequency of the electriccurrent. Multiple such characteristics may be indicated, for examplewhere a particular region or cortex of the brain is to be targeted bythe electric current peripheral nerve stimulus. For example, the controlsignal can indicate characteristics for the nerve stimulus such that aparticular region of the brain receives an electric current having amagnitude between a lower threshold below which desired neuraloscillations do not occur (e.g., below which neural oscillations or achange in neural oscillations does not occur) and an upper thresholdabove which adverse side effects may occur. The nerve stimulus may becontrolled such that only a targeted cortex receives the nerve stimuluswithin such thresholds (e.g., the electric current generated accordingto the control signal have a desired magnitude, and are targeted toparticular sensory nerves, such that only a targeted cortex receives aportion of the nerve stimulus having a magnitude that is greater thanthe lower threshold).

FIG. 17A illustrates electric current bursts 1735 a-c (or modulationpulses 1735 a-c) in accordance with an embodiment. The electric currentbursts 1735 a-c can be illustrated via a graph where the y-axisrepresents a parameter of the electric current (e.g., frequency (orwavelength), amplitude) of the electric current. The x-axis canrepresent time (e.g., seconds, milliseconds, or microseconds).

The nerve stimulus can include a modulated electric current that ismodulated between different frequencies (or wavelengths), amplitudes, orvoltages. For example, the NSS 1605 can modulate an electric currentbetween a first frequency, such as M_(a), and a second frequency, suchas M_(o). The NSS 1605 can modulate the electric current between two ormore frequencies.

The NSS 1605 can modulate an amplitude of the electric current. Forexample, the NSS 1605 can control operation of a power supply deliveringcurrent through electrodes between an on state and an off state, orbetween a high power state and a low power state. The NSS 1605 canmodulate the amplitude where the system is configured to output avariable current, such as between a relatively high amplitude currentand a relatively low amplitude current.

The pulses 1735 a-c can be generated with a pulse rate interval (PRI)1740. The PRI 1740 may indicate points in time at which an electriccurrent is turned on, outputted, or transmitted. Modulation of the PRI1740 can allow for control of the modulation frequency of the electriccurrent.

The nerve stimulus parameter can be the frequency of the electriccurrent (e.g., an intermittency of when the electric current is turnedon). The first value M_(o) can be a low frequency or baseline frequencyof the nerve stimulus, such as zero frequency or a baseline frequency atwhich the electric current is generated in the absence of a controlsignal from the nerve stimulus generation module 1610. The second value,M_(a), can be different from the first frequency M_(o). The secondfrequency M_(a) can be lower or higher than the first frequency M_(o).For example, the second frequency M_(a) can be in the range of 1 Hz-60Hz. The difference between the first frequency and the second frequencycan be determined or set based on a level of sensitivity of the brain toelectrical activity caused by peripheral nerve stimulation. Thedifference between the first frequency and the second frequency can bedetermined or set based on profile information 1645 for the subject. Thedifference between the first frequency M_(o) and the second frequencyM_(a) can be determined such that the modulation or change in the nervestimulus facilitates causing or inducing neural oscillations.

The nerve stimulus parameter can be the amplitude of the electric field,and can be selected, determined, received, transmitted, and/or generatedin a manner similar to the frequency. The first value M_(o) can be a lowmagnitude or baseline magnitude of the electric current, such as zeromagnitude or a minimum magnitude at which the nerve stimulus generatorcomponent 1650 is configured to generator or output the electriccurrent. The second value, M_(a), can be different from the first valueM_(o), such as to be a treatment magnitude selected to facilitatecausing or inducing neural oscillations.

In some cases, the parameter of the nerve stimulus used to generate theelectric current burst 1735 a can be constant at M_(a), therebygenerating a square wave as illustrated in FIG. 17A. In someembodiments, each of the three pulses 1735 a-c can include electriccurrents having a same parameter of stimulus M_(a).

The width of each of the electric current bursts or pulses (e.g., theduration of the burst of the electric current with the parameter M_(a))can correspond to a pulse width 1730 a. The pulse width 1730 a can referto the length or duration of the burst. The pulse width 1730 a can bemeasured in units of time or distance. In some embodiments, the pulses1735 a-c can include electric current modulated at different frequenciesfrom one another. In some embodiments, the pulses 1735 a-c can havedifferent pulse widths 1730 a from one another, as illustrated in FIG.17B. For example, a first pulse 1735 d of FIG. 17B can have a pulsewidth 1730 a, while a second pulse 1735 e has a second pulse width 1730b that is greater than the first pulse width 1730 a. A third pulse 1735f can have a third pulse width 1730 c that is less than the second pulsewidth 1730 b. The third pulse width 1730 c can also be less than thefirst pulse width 1730 a. While the pulse widths 1730 a-c of the pulses1735 d-f of the pulse train may vary, the nerve stimulus generationmodule 1610 can maintain a constant pulse rate interval 1740 for thepulse train. In some embodiments, the pulse rate interval 1740 and/orthe pulse widths 1730 of the pulse train may be limited by a minimum ontime, minimum off time, minimum ramp up time, or minimum ramp down timefor the nerve stimulus generator component 1650.

The pulses 1735 a-c can form a pulse train 1701 having a pulse rateinterval 1740. The pulse rate interval 1740 can be quantified usingunits of time. The pulse rate interval 1740 can be based on a frequencyof the pulses of the pulse train 1701. The frequency of the pulses ofthe pulse train 1701 can be referred to as a modulation frequency. Forexample, the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can provide a pulsetrain 1701 with a predetermined frequency, such as 40 Hz. To do so, thenerve stimulus generation module 1610 can determine the pulse rateinterval 1740 by taking the multiplicative inverse (or reciprocal) ofthe frequency (e.g., 1 divided by the predetermined frequency for thepulse train). For example, the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 cantake the multiplicative inverse of 40 Hz by dividing 1 by 40 Hz todetermine the pulse rate interval 1740 as 0.025 seconds. The pulse rateinterval 1740 can remain constant throughout the pulse train. In someembodiments, the pulse rate interval 1740 can vary throughout the pulsetrain or from one pulse train to a subsequent pulse train. In someembodiments, the number of pulses transmitted during a second can befixed, while the pulse rate interval 1740 varies.

In some embodiments, the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 cangenerate an electric current as a burst or pulse having that varies infrequency, amplitude, voltage. For example, the nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610 can generate up-chirp pulses where the frequency,amplitude, or voltage of the electric current pulse increases from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse as illustrated in FIG.17C. For example, the frequency, amplitude or voltage of the electriccurrent at the beginning of pulse 1735 g can be M_(a). The frequency,amplitude, or voltage of the electric current of the pulse 1735 g canincrease (or change, in the case of direction) from M_(a) to M_(b) inthe middle of the pulse 1735 g, and then to a maximum of M_(c) at theend of the pulse 1735 g. Thus, the frequency, amplitude, or voltage ofthe electric current used to generate the pulse 1735 g can range fromM_(a) to M_(c). The frequency, amplitude, or voltage can increaselinearly, exponentially, or based on some other rate or curve. One ormore of the frequency, amplitude, or voltage of the electric current canchange from the beginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can generate decreasingpulses, as illustrated in FIG. 17D, where the frequency, amplitude, orvoltage of the electric current of the pulse decreases from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse.

For example, the frequency, amplitude, or voltage of the electriccurrent at the beginning of pulse 1735 j can be M_(c). The frequency,amplitude, or voltage of the electric current of the pulse 1735 j candecrease from M_(c) to M_(b) in the middle of the pulse 1735 j, and thento a minimum of M_(a) at the end of the pulse 1735 j. Thus, thefrequency, amplitude, or amplitude of the electric current used togenerate the pulse 1735 j can range from M_(c) to M_(a). The frequency,amplitude, or voltage can decrease (or change) linearly, exponentially,or based on some other rate or curve. One or more of the frequency,amplitude, or voltage of the electric current can change from thebeginning of the pulse to the end of the pulse.

In some embodiments, the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 isconfigured to compensate for a side effect caused by the nerve stimulus.For example, the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can output thenerve stimulus according to a pulse scheme selected to reduce thelikelihood of a side effect such as tetany (e.g., delivering 10 pulsesat maximum intensity, such as 8 mA, at 40 Hz, then delivering 10 morepulses at half intensity, at 40 Hz). Such pulse schemes may make thetherapy more comfortable.

Nerve stimulus generator component 1650 can be designed and constructedto generate the nerve stimulations responsive to instructions from thenerve stimulus generation module 1610. The instructions can include, forexample, parameters of the pulse such as a frequency, amplitude, orvoltage, duration of the pulse, frequency of the pulse train, pulse rateinterval, or duration of the pulse train (e.g., a number of pulses inthe pulse train or the length of time to transmit a pulse train having apredetermined frequency). The nerve stimulus can be generated by adevice positioned at a distance from the sensory nerves of theperipheral nervous system of the subject such that the amplitude of theelectric current is within guidelines targeted by a therapy (e.g.,within thresholds defining targeted neural oscillations or brainentrainment).

Referring back to FIG. 16, the NSS 1605 can include, access, interfacewith, or otherwise communicate with at least one nerve stimulusadjustment module 1615. The nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 can bedesigned and constructed to adjust a parameter associated with the nervestimulus, such as a frequency (or wavelength), amplitude, voltage,direction, pattern, or other parameter of the nerve stimulus. The nervestimulus adjustment module 1615 can automatically vary a parameter ofthe nerve stimulus based on profile information or feedback. The nervestimulus adjustment module 1615 can receive the feedback informationfrom the feedback monitor 1635. The nerve stimulus adjustment module1615 can receive instructions or information from a side effectsmanagement module 1630. The nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 canreceive profile information from profile manager 1625.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can interface, instruct,control, or otherwise communicate with a shielding component 1655 tocause the shielding component 1655 to shield, block, attenuate, orotherwise reduce the amplitude of the electric currents on theperipheral nervous system, and thus reduce the effect of the nervestimulus on neural oscillations.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can interface, instruct,control, or otherwise communicate with a nerve stimulus amplificationcomponent 165. The nerve stimulus amplification component 165 can beconfigured to increase (or decrease) a magnitude or amplitude of nervestimulations caused by the nerve stimulus generator component 1650, suchas along a nervous system pathway between a sensory nerve relativelyclose to where the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 is locatedand the brain. For example, the nerve stimulus amplification component165 can be configured to apply a potential difference across a length ofa nervous system pathway (e.g., along a spinal cord, along a pathbetween a site at which the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 islocated and a position closer to the brain along a nervous systempathway), which can increase a rate of neural transmissions and/orincrease a number of neurons that fire or a rate of neuron firing. Thenerve stimulus amplification component 165 can be apply a direct currentor alternating current stimulus (e.g., to the spinal cord), which canwhich can increase a rate of neural transmissions and/or increase anumber of neurons that fire or a rate of neuron firing. In someembodiments, the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 can beconfigured to be positioned proximate to (or implanted proximate to) thespinal column of the subject, detect the nerve stimulus (or resultingnervous system activity caused by the nerve stimulus generator component1650) caused by the nerve stimulus generator 1650 as the nerve stimuluspasses to the brain, including a frequency or other parameters orcharacteristics of the nerve stimulus, and output an electric currentcontrolled to be synchronized with the detected nerve stimulus.

The NSS 1605 can include, access, interface with, or otherwisecommunicate with at least one profile manager 1625. The profile manager1625 can be designed or constructed to store, update, retrieve orotherwise manage information associated with one or more subjectsassociated with the peripheral nerve stimulation. Profile informationcan include, for example, historical treatment information, historicalneural oscillation information, historical brain entrainmentinformation, dosing information, parameters and characteristics ofelectric currents, feedback, physiological information, environmentalinformation, or other data associated with the systems and methods ofperipheral nerve stimulation for causing or inducing neuraloscillations.

The peripheral nerve NSS 1605 can include, access, interface with, orotherwise communicate with at least one side effects management module1630. The side effects management module 1630 can be designed andconstructed to provide information to the nerve stimulus adjustmentmodule 1615 or the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 to change oneor more parameter of the nerve stimulus in order to reduce a sideeffect. Side effects can include, for example, nausea, migraines,fatigue, or seizures.

The side effects management module 1630 can automatically instruct acomponent of the NSS 1605 to alter or change a parameter of the nervestimulus. The side effects management module 1630 can be configured withpredetermined thresholds to reduce side effects. For example, the sideeffects management module 1630 can be configured with a maximum durationof a pulse train, maximum amplitude of acoustic waves, maximum volume,maximum duty cycle of a pulse train (e.g., the pulse width multiplied bythe frequency of the pulse train), maximum number of treatments forcausing or inducing neural oscillations in a time period (e.g., 1 hour,2 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours).

The side effects management module 1630 can cause a change in theparameter of the nerve stimulus in response to feedback information. Theside effect management module 1630 can receive feedback from thefeedback monitor 1635. The side effects management module 1630 candetermine to adjust a parameter of the nerve stimulus based on thefeedback. The side effects management module 1630 can compare thefeedback with a threshold to determine to adjust the parameter of thenerve stimulus.

The side effects management module 1630 can be configured with orinclude a policy engine that applies a policy or a rule to the currentnerve stimulus and feedback to determine an adjustment to the nervestimulus. For example, if feedback indicates that a subject receivingnerve stimulations has a heart rate or pulse rate above a threshold, theside effects management module 1630 can turn off the pulse train untilthe pulse rate stabilizes to a value below the threshold, or below asecond threshold that is lower than the threshold. In someimplementations, the side effects management module 1630 may present auser interface to a subject through which the subject can report sideeffects, such as pain, discomfort, nausea, headaches, among other sideeffects. Responsive to receiving input from the subject, the sideeffects management module 1630 can be configured to cause the nervestimulus to stop or be adjusted to reduce the side effects. Furthermore,the subject profile can be updated to indicate the side effectsassociated with the stimulus/therapy provided to prevent futureoccurrences of side effects through the delivery of the same or similarstimulus/therapy.

The peripheral nerve NSS 1605 can include, access, interface with, orotherwise communicate with at least one feedback monitor 1635. Thefeedback monitor can be designed and constructed to receive feedbackinformation from a feedback component 160. Feedback component 1660 caninclude, for example, a feedback sensor such as a temperature sensor,heart or pulse rate monitor, physiological sensor, ambient noise sensor,microphone, ambient temperature sensor, blood pressure monitor, brainwave sensor, EEG probe, electrooculography (“EOG”) probes configuredmeasure the corneo-retinal standing potential that exists between thefront and the back of the human eye, accelerometer, gyroscope, motiondetector, proximity sensor, camera, microphone, or photo detector.

M. Systems and Devices Configured to Induce Neural Oscillations ViaPeripheral Nerve Stimulation

FIG. 18A illustrates devices for peripheral nerve stimulation inaccordance with some embodiments. The devices 1800, 1801 can be orinclude features of the NSS 1605 described with reference to FIG. 1. Forexample, the devices 1800, 1801 can include the nerve stimulus generatorcomponent 1650, and can include, be communicatively coupled to, or bedriven by the nerve stimulus generation module 1610. The devices 1800,1801 can be configured to generate a controllable electric current 1805.For example, the devices 1800, 1801 can include a first electrode (e.g.,a stimulation electrode) and a second electrode (e.g., a groundelectrode, a reference electrode), and a power source (e.g., powersupply, battery, universal power supply, interface to a remote powersource) configured to deliver current from the first electrode to thesecond electrode, such as to discharge an electric current through thebody of a subject 1850 in a manner that will cause electrical activityin sensory nerves of the peripheral nervous system of the subject 1850.

In some embodiments, the device 1800 is configured to deliver anelectric current as a nerve stimulus 1805 to a hand of the subject 1850.Similarly, the device 1801 can deliver an electric current to a leg orfoot. The nerve stimulus 1805 causes or induces electrical activity inthe peripheral nerve system (e.g., peripheral nerve 1870 in the hand;peripheral nerve 1865 in the leg), which is transmitted to the brain1860 via the central nervous system 1855. The nerve stimulus 1805 can begenerated by controlling and delivering an electric current in variousmanners as described herein (e.g., direct current; alternating current;periodically modulating the electric current on/off; periodicallymodulating the amplitude of the electric current; controlling ormodulating an alternating current frequency of the electric current).While FIG. 18A illustrates nerve stimulations being delivered to thehand and foot, in various embodiments, configurations, or treatmentprotocols, various nerve stimulations may be delivered to variouslocations on the body of the subject 1850 (including variouscombinations of stimulations), including the quadriceps just below theknee, the top of the foot, the back of the knee, the legs, the clavicle,the neck, or the lips/teeth/gums. In some embodiments, targeted deliveryof nerve stimulations to the body of the subject 1850 may advantageouslytarget cortices or regions of the brain 1860. For example, deliveringthe nerve stimulus 1805 to one or more of the lips, teeth, or gums maybe advantageous because those portions of the body of the subject 1850are have relatively greater innervation by the peripheral nervoussystem, and also may more directly cause activity in the hippocampus.For example, the nerve stimulus 1805 may be delivered to locations thathave relatively greater or closer access to the trigeminal nerve (e.g.,lips, teeth, gums), or to the vagus nerve (e.g., neck).

The device 1800 can be configured to generate the nerve stimulusaccording to a pulse scheme 1810 a. The pulse scheme 1810 a can beanalogous to the pulse schemes described with reference to FIGS. 17A-17Dabove. For example, the pulse scheme 1810 a can indicate characteristicsof the electric current 1805 (e.g., amplitude, frequency, modulationfrequency), and/or parameters enabling generation of the electriccurrent (e.g., an amplitude of a current to be delivered to theelectrodes to result in a desired amplitude of the nerve stimulus 1805).The device 1800 (or a component thereof) can receive the pulse scheme1810 a as a control signal modulated according to the pulse scheme 1810a, or as a control signal including instructions indicating the pulsescheme 1810 a.

The nerve stimulus generated by the device 1800 is configured to induceor cause resulting neural oscillations 1815 in the brain 1860. Thecharacteristics of the electric current 1805 a can be controlled tocause desired neural oscillations 1815. The electric current 1805 maycause neural oscillations 1815 a when the electric current 1805 has anamplitude that is greater than a minimum threshold amplitude required tocause or induce neural oscillations; the electric current 1805 may alsohave an amplitude that is less than a maximum threshold amplitude atwhich adverse side effects may occur. The electric current 1805 maycause neural oscillations 1815 having a target frequency when theelectric current 1805 is modulated or oscillated at the target frequency(e.g., a pulse repetition interval 1740 of the pulse scheme 1810 adriving the electric current 1805 may correspond to the targetfrequency).

In some embodiments, the device 1800 is configured to control theelectric current 1805 to cause a first state of neural oscillations orneural inducement, and then modify the electric current 1805 to cause asecond state of neural oscillations or neural inducement. The firststate may be a state at which the brain 1860 is determined to be morereceptive to neural oscillations, neural inducement, or brainwaveentrainment. For example, the first state may correspond to a frequencyor range of frequencies at which the brain 1860 is relatively morereceptive to neural oscillations, neural inducement, or brainwaveentrainment as compared to other frequencies. The second state may be adesired or targeted state, such as a state at which the neuraloscillations 1815 occur at a desired or targeted frequency. In someembodiments, a pulse train of the pulse scheme 1810 a may include pulseshaving varying frequencies corresponding to the first and second states.In some embodiments, the pulse train may include pulses having ramp-upor ramp-down configurations (e.g., ramping from a first frequencycorresponding to the first state to a second frequency corresponding tothe second state).

The device 1800 can be integrated with the feedback component 160. Thefeedback component 1660 can be an EEG. The device 1800 can interact orcommunicate with feedback component 160. For example, the feedbackcomponent 1660 can transmit or receive information, data or signals toor from the device 1800. As will be described with further reference toFIG. 20, a nerve stimulus system or device in accordance with theembodiments disclosed herein can use feedback received from the feedbackcomponent 1660 to modify the nerve stimulus based on the feedback.

The devices 1800, 1801 can be configured to deliver nerve stimulationssynchronized to cause neural oscillations 1815. For example, the devices1800, 1801 can be driven with corresponding pulse schemes 1810 a, 1810b, which may be offset in time to result in desired neural oscillations1815, as will be described further with reference to FIG. 19.

In some embodiments, the devices 1800 can be configured to deliver nervestimulus to particular locations on the body of the subject 1850 basedon an expected response of the subject 1850, such as at least one of asensation response of the subject 1850, neural oscillations of thesubject 1850, or brain entrainment of the subject 1850. For example,delivering the nerve stimulus 1805 to the hand of the subject 1850 withan amplitude of 8 mA may cause the subject 1850 to heavily sense or feelthe nerve stimulus 1805, which may be uncomfortable; delivering thenerve stimulus 1805 to the quadriceps with an amplitude of 8 mA maycause or induce a similar (or greater) magnitude of neural oscillationsin the brain 1860, without the sensation.

The devices 1800, 1801 can be configured to output nerve stimulations1805 based on predetermined operating limits, which may be targeted tocause or induce neural oscillations while reducing or minimizing thelikelihood of discomfort or other undesired side effects. For example,the devices 1800, 1801 can be configured to output pulses ofapproximately 1 μs to 300 μs (e.g., 1 μs, 300 μs; greater than or equalto 1 μs and less than or equal to 500 μs), with a voltage range ofapproximately 0.1 to 200 V (e.g., 0.1 V, 200 V; greater than or equal to0.1 V and less than or equal to 500 V). For impedances of 2000 to 4000ohms, the pulses can have a range of corresponding current amplitudes ofapproximately 0.1 to 50 mA (e.g., 0.1 mA, 50 mA; greater than or equalto 0.1 mA and less than or equal to 100 mA); for impedances ofapproximately 500 to 2000 ohms, the pulses can have a range ofcorresponding current amplitudes of approximately 0.1 to 100 mA (e.g.,0.1 mA, 50 mA; greater than or equal to 0.1 mA and less than or equal to200 mA).

In some embodiments, a nerve stimulus amplification device 1802 isconfigured to amplify nerve stimulus signals transmitted through thenervous system to the brain 1860 (e.g., through central nervous system1855). For example, the nerve stimulus amplification device 1802 can besupercutaneous or implantable amplifier configured to apply a potentialdifference across a nervous system pathway, or to apply a direct currentor alternating current stimulus to a location on the nervous systempathway between the site at which stimulus is delivered by the nervestimulus generator component 1650 and the brain (e.g., at the spinalcord). The nerve stimulus amplification device 1802 can be configured tobe always in an ON mode (e.g., always causing amplification), or to bein an ON mode for a duration of time that can be selected based on acontrol signal from the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 or basedon user input. The nerve stimulus amplification device 1802 can beconfigured to detect nerve activity corresponding to the nerve stimulus1805 (e.g., using an EEG; using feedback component 160) and output ordeliver a synchronized nerve stimulus to the nervous system to increasean effective magnitude of the nerve stimulus 1805.

FIG. 18B illustrates the device 1800 configured for peripheral nervestimulation, such as to cause or induce neural oscillations, inaccordance with some embodiments. The device 1800 can include a controlcomponent 200 (e.g., control box). The control component 200 can includea user interface configured to receive user inputs and displayinformation, such as a pulse scheme being operated by the device 1800 orparameters of nerve stimulus outputted by the device 1800.

The device 1800 can be portable. For example, the device 1800 caninclude an independent power supply (e.g., a battery). The device 1800can include straps or otherwise be configured to be held or support bythe subject. In some embodiments, the device 1800 may have a weight lessthan a threshold weight supportable by the subject, and further includea power interface configured to receive power from a wall outlet orother remote power supply.

The device 1800 includes a first electrode 1800 b (e.g., stimulationelectrode) and a second electrode 1800 c (e.g., reference electrode,ground electrode). The device 1801 may be configured in a similar manneras the device 1800. The electrodes 1800 b, 1800 c are configured todeliver, output, transmit, or otherwise provide a nerve stimulus 1805 asan electric current to sensory nerves of the peripheral nerve system.For example, the control component 1800 a can be configured to apply avoltage across the electrodes 1800 b, 1800 c to cause discharge of anelectric current according to predetermined parameters from the firstelectrode 1800 b to the second electrode 1800 c.

In some embodiments, a feedback device 1850 is configured to detectneural activity caused by the nerve stimulus 1805 outputted by thedevice 1800. The feedback device 1850 may be similar to the feedbackcomponent 1660 described with reference to FIG. 1. The feedback device1850 may be further configured to detect neural activity along theperipheral nervous system in a vicinity of where the device 1800delivers the nerve stimulus 1805. For example, the feedback device 1850can be configured to detect neural activity along the upper arm wherethe device 1800 delivers the nerve stimulus 1805 to the hand.

In some embodiments, a shielding device 1875 is configured toselectively permit electrical activity caused by the device 1800 to movetowards the brain of the subject. The shielding device 1875 can besimilar to the shielding component 1655 described with reference toFIG. 1. The shielding device 1875 can be configured to prevent electriccurrents from travelling along the skin of the subject due to skinconductance. The shielding device 1875 can be or include an electricalinsulator configured to increase a resistance to electrical conductionalong the skin of the subject. The feedback device 1850 may be used todetect electrical activity on either side of the shielding device 1875relative to the brain of the subject, to confirm that the shieldingdevice 1875 is increasing the resistance to electrical conduction. Theshielding device 1875 may include a cuff, strap, or other componentconfigured to attach the shielding device 1875 to the subject.

In some embodiments, topical ointments, gels, or other materials may beused to augment functionality of the device 1800. For example, electrodegel or other similar materials configured to increase local conductanceof the skin can be applied below the electrodes 1800 b, 1800 c,facilitating transmission of the nerve stimulus 1805 to the targetedsensory nerves. This may advantageously decrease discomfort to thesubject from the nerve stimulus 1805, and also decrease the likelihoodthat the nerve stimulus 1805 travels along the skin to the brain ratherthan cause activity in the targeted sensory nerve. In some embodiments,pharmacological aids can be used to enhance neural transmissions,increase a speed of neural transmissions, improve sensory nervesensitivity to external current stimulation, reduce a motor nervesensitivity to reduce motor response, or decrease a pain nervesensitivity.

Referring now to FIG. 18C, a schematic diagram illustrating interactionbetween the device 1800 and the peripheral nerve system is shownaccording to some embodiments. The device 1800 can be positioned on theskin adjacent to targeted sensory nerves such as a thermos-receptor 1880a, a Meissner's corpuscle 1880 b (e.g., a touch receptor), a nociceptor1880 c (e.g., a pain receptor), and Pacinian corpuscle 1880 d (e.g., apressure receptor). The nerve stimulus 1805 delivered by the device 1800can cause or induce electrical activity in one or more of the receptors1880 a-d, resulting in neural transmissions through the peripheralnervous system 1880 to the brain of the subject, causing neuraloscillations corresponding to the nerve stimulus 1805.

In some embodiments, the device 1800 is configured to control deliveryor output of the nerve stimulus 1805 based on the receptors 1880 a-d.For example, characteristics of the receptors 1880 a-d, such assensitivity to electrical stimulus (e.g., a first threshold at whichneural oscillations occur; a second threshold at which discomfortoccurs), an amplitude of electrical stimulus associated with resultingneural oscillations, can be used to determine parameters of the nervestimulus 1805. In some embodiments, the nerve stimulus 1805 (e.g., acharacteristic or parameter thereof) is configured to cause electricalactivity in the receptors 1880 a-d but not in an adjacent motor nerve,which can advantageously make the treatment more comfortable for thesubject while reducing the likelihood of distraction due to motorresponses.

Referring now to FIG. 19, a control scheme 1900 for controllingoperation of a plurality of peripheral nerve stimulation devices (e.g.,by NSS 1605; using devices 1800, 1801 described with reference to FIG.18A; etc.) is shown according to some embodiments. The pulse schemesshown in FIG. 19 can be controlled in a similar manner to thosedescribed with reference to FIGS. 2A-2D, with the exception of thefurther details regarding coordinated control described further herein.The control scheme 1900 can be determined based on characteristics ofthe peripheral nervous system of the subject, such as a signal delayfrom a first point in time at which the nerve stimulus 1805 isdelivered, and a second point in time at which neural oscillations inthe brain of the subject occur (or at which neural oscillations in thebrain of the subject are detected, such as by feedback component 160).For example, the profile manager 1625 may store include be configured toaccess predetermined parameters associated with signal delay fromtargeted portions of the body of the subject to the brain, and the nervestimulus generation module 1610 can determine a corresponding offset ortime delay between the nerve stimulations (or the corresponding pulseschemes) for electric currents delivered by each device 1800, 1801.

As shown in FIG. 19, a first device (e.g., device 1800) is configured todeliver a first nerve stimulus according to pulse scheme 1901 a. After afirst delay 1955 a from a start time 1905, the pulse scheme 1901 a isinitiated (it will be appreciated that the start of any of the pulseschemes such as pulse schemes 1901 a, 1901 b may also serve as a starttime). Similarly, after a second delay 1955 b from the start time 1905,a second pulse scheme 1901 a is initiated. The difference between thedelays 1955 a, 1955 b indicates an offset in time selected (e.g.,determined by the nerve stimulus generation module 1610) to causesynchronized neural oscillations in the brain of the subject.

The NSS 1605 can be configured to control operation of stimulationdevices according to the pulse schemes 1901 a, 1901 b to cause neuraloscillations 1902 in the brain of the subject. The first delay 1955 amay correspond to, be associated with, or be determined based on a firstsignal delay 1960 a between a pulse of the first scheme 1901 a (e.g., asshown in FIG. 19, as measured from an end of the pulse) to the start ofneural oscillations 1902); similarly, the second delay 1955 b maycorrespond to, be associated with, or be determined based on a secondsignal delay 1960 b between a pulse of the second scheme 1901 b and thestart of the neural oscillations 1902. For example, the pulse scheme1901 a may be used to deliver the first nerve stimulus by a devicelocated further from the brain (e.g., further along a differentiallength of the peripheral nervous system) than a device operatingaccording to the second pulse scheme 1901 b.

In some embodiments, the NSS 1605 is configured to determine the delays1955 a, 1955 b according to feedback information received regarding theneural oscillations 1902. For example, if the feedback component 1660detects asynchronous neural oscillations 1902, the NSS 1605 can adjustone or both of the delays 1955 a, 1955 b to decrease a phase delay orother asynchronicity in the neural oscillations 1902 to synchronize theneural oscillations 1902.

FIG. 20 illustrates a process flow for using a peripheral nervestimulation system 2000 to cause neural oscillations in the subject 1850according to some embodiments. The peripheral nerve stimulation system2000 can include the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 and the nervestimulus adjustment module 1615.

The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 is configured to generate acontrol signal 2005. The control signal 2005 can indicate desiredcharacteristics or parameters of a nerve stimulus to be applied to thesubject 1850 (e.g., to the brain of the subject 1850). For example, thecontrol signal 2005 can indicate values for the characteristics orparameters, or the control signal 2005 can indicate values for operationof the nerve stimulus generator component 1650 (e.g., values for anamplitude of a current delivered to electrodes to generate the desirednerve stimulations) that will result in the desired nerve stimulus. Thecontrol signal 2005 can be modulated, generated, transmitted, and/oroutputted by the nerve stimulus generation module 1610 to the nervestimulus generator component 1650. The control signal 2005 can betransmitted and/or output according to a pulse scheme indicating thedesired characteristics or parameters, or the control signal 2005 caninclude instructions indicating the pulse scheme. The control signal2005 may be determined or generated based on predetermined parameters,such as parameters associated with a predetermined therapy plan (whichmay be associated with the subject 1850 and stored in or received fromthe profile 1645).

The nerve stimulus generator component 1650 is configured to generate anerve stimulus 2010 based on the control signal 2005. For example, thenerve stimulus generator component 1650 can identify the pulse schemebased on how the control signal 2005 is received (e.g., based on amodulation of the control signal 2005) or can extract the pulse schemefrom the control signal 2005. Based on the pulse scheme or otherinstructions extracted from the control signal 2005, the nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 can determine characteristics of the nervestimulus 2010, such as an amplitude, voltage, frequency, and/ormodulation frequency of the nerve stimulus 2010. The nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 can generate the nerve stimulus 2010 to havethe desired amplitude, voltage, frequency, and/or modulation frequency.

The nerve stimulus generator component 1650 generates the nerve stimulus2010 to have a desired effect on the subject 1850, particularly to causeneural oscillations (e.g., neural oscillations associated with brainentrainment). In some embodiments, the feedback component 1660 isconfigured to detected induced neural activity 2015 (e.g., neuraloscillations, brain entrainment) from the subject 1850. For example, thefeedback component 1660 may be an EEG configured to detect electricalactivity in the brain of the subject 1850. In some embodiments, such asdescribed with reference to FIG. 18B, the feedback component 1660 canadditionally or alternatively be configured to detect neural activity inthe peripheral nervous system, such as adjacent to where the nervestimulus generator component 1650 delivers the nerve stimulus 2010, todetect or confirm the induced neural activity 2015.

The feedback component 1660 is configured to output a detect neuralactivity signal 2020. The detected neural activity signal 2020 may be anindication of the electrical activity detected in the brain by the EEG(e.g., may be an electroencephalogram). In some embodiments, the system2000 includes the feedback monitor 1635, which can monitor an outputreceived from the feedback component 160, process the output asdescribed herein, and deliver the processed output to the nerve stimulusadjustment module 1615.

In some embodiments, the nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 isconfigured to process the detected neural activity signal 2020 togenerate or adjust stimulus parameters 2025. The nerve stimulusadjustment module 1615 may be configured to extract an indication ofneural oscillations or brain entrainment from the detected neuralactivity signal 2020. For example, the nerve stimulus adjustment module1615 may be configured to identify or extract a frequency of neuraloscillations from the detected neural activity signal 2020.

In some embodiments, the feedback component 1660 is configured toprocess the detected induced neural activity 2015, and output thedetected neural activity signal 2020 as an indication of neuraloscillations or brain entrainment. For example, the feedback component1660 can be configured to identify or extract a frequency of neuraloscillations from the induced neural activity 2015, and output theextracted frequency in or as the detected neural activity signal 2020.The nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 may then generate or adjustthe stimulus parameters 2025 based on the frequency received from thefeedback component 160.

The stimulus parameters 2025 can be generated to cause desired neuraloscillations in the subject 1850. For example, the stimulus parameters2025 may indicate appropriate characteristics or parameters of the nervestimulus 2010 to cause neural oscillations (e.g., frequency, magnitude,direction, location in the brain of the subject 10). Where the stimulusparameters 2025 are generated based on the detected neural activitysignal 2020, the stimulus parameters 2025 may indicate modifications tothe nerve stimulus 2010 (e.g., if the frequency of the induced neuralactivity 2015 is too great, the stimulus parameters 2025 may includeinstructions to decrease the frequency of the nerve stimulus 2010; ifthe induced neural activity 2015 indicates that neural oscillations havenot occurred, the stimulus parameters 2025 may include instructions toincrease the amplitude of the nerve stimulus 2010).

The stimulus parameters 2025 can be determined based on or associatedwith the nerve stimulus generator component 1650. For example, as willbe described further reference to FIGS. 18A-18B, the nerve stimulusgenerator component 1650 can include two or more electrodes (e.g., fourelectrodes) or electrical lead wires that can be attached to the skin,and driven to output electric current pulses by a power source or otherdriver component, such as at a high frequency with an amplitude (e.g.,intensity) less than a threshold intensity at which motor response isevoked. A first electrode (e.g., a stimulation electrode) can receive anelectrical current from the driver component, where the electricalcurrent is generated and/or controlled based on the control signal 2005(which can be generated or modulated based on the stimulus parameters2025). The first electrode can output, pass, transmit, or otherwisedeliver the electrical current to the subject 1850 to excite sensorynerves of the peripheral nerve system of the subject 1850 (e.g., todeliver the electrical current to a second electrode, such as areference electrode).

Referring further to FIG. 16, the feedback component 1660 can detectfeedback information, such as environmental parameters or physiologicalconditions. The feedback component 1660 can provide the feedbackinformation to system 2000 (or NSS 1605). The system 2000 can adjust orchange the nerve stimulus based on the feedback information. Forexample, the system 2000 can determine that a pulse rate of the subjectexceeds a predetermined threshold, and then lower the amplitude of thenerve stimulus. The feedback component 1660 can include a detectorconfigured to detect an amplitude of the nerve stimulus 2010, and thesystem 2000 can determine that the amplitude exceeds a threshold, anddecrease the amplitude. The system 2000 can determine that the pulserate interval is below a threshold, which can indicate that a subject isnot being sufficiently affected by the nerve stimulus, and the system2000 can increase the amplitude of the nerve stimulus. In someembodiments, the system 2000 can vary the nerve stimulus (e.g., varyamplitude, voltage, frequency) based on a time interval. Varying thenerve stimulus can prevent the subject 1850 from adapting to the nervestimulus (e.g., prevent the brain from determining that the nervestimulus is a background condition), which can facilitate causing orinducing neural oscillations.

In some embodiments, the feedback component 1660 can include EEG probes,and the nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 can adjust the nervestimulation based on the EEG information. For example, the nervestimulus adjustment module 1615 can determine, from the probeinformation, that neurons are oscillating at an undesired frequency, andmodify the frequency at which the nerve stimulus 2010 is generatedaccordingly.

The feedback component 1660 can detect, receive, obtain, or otherwiseidentify feedback information from one or more feedback sensors. Thefeedback component 1660 can provide the feedback information to one ormore component of the system 2000 (or the NSS 1605) for furtherprocessing or storage. For example, the profile manager 1625 can updateprofile data structure 1645 stored in data repository 1640 with thefeedback information. Profile manager 1625 can associate the feedbackinformation with an identifier of the subject or person undergoing theperipheral nerve stimulation, as well as a time stamp and date stampcorresponding to receipt or detection of the feedback information.

The feedback component 1660 can determine a level of attention. Thelevel of attention may indicate whether the nerve stimulus is resultingin neural oscillations (e.g., desired neural oscillations; neuraloscillations associated with brainwave entrainment). The level ofattention can refer to the focus provided to the nerve stimulus. Thefeedback component 1660 can determine the level of attention usingvarious hardware and software techniques. The feedback component 1660can assign a score to the level of attention (e.g., 1 to 10 with 1 beinglow attention and 10 being high attention, or vice versa, 1 to 100 with1 being low attention and 100 being high attention, or vice versa, 0 to1 with 0 being low attention and 1 being high attention, or vice versa),categorize the level of attention (e.g., low, medium, high), grade theattention (e.g., A, B, C, D, or F), or otherwise provide an indicationof a level of attention.

In some cases, the feedback component 1660 can track a person's eyemovement to identify a level of attention. The feedback component 1660can interface with an eye-tracker. The feedback component 1660 candetect and record eye movement of the person and analyze the recordedeye movement to determine an attention span or level of attention. Thefeedback component 1660 can measure eye gaze which can indicate orprovide information related to covert attention. For example, thefeedback component 1660 can be configured with electrooculography(“EOG”) to measure the skin electric potential around the eye, which canindicate a direction the eye faces relative to the head. In someembodiments, the EOG can include a system or device to stabilize thehead so it cannot move in order to determine the direction of the eyerelative to the head. In some embodiments, the EOG can include orinterface with a head tracker system to determine the position of theheads, and then determine the direction of the eye relative to the head.

In some embodiments, the feedback component 1660 can determine a levelof attention the subject is paying to the nerve stimulus based on eyemovement. For example, increased eye movement may indicate that thesubject is focusing on visual stimuli, as opposed to other stimuli. Todetermine the level of attention the subject is paying to the nervestimulus, feedback component 1660 can determine or track the directionof the eye or eye movement using video detection of the pupil or cornealreflection. For example, the feedback component 1660 can include one ormore camera or video camera. The feedback component 1660 can include aninfra-red source that sends light pulses towards the eyes. The light canbe reflected by the eye. The feedback component 1660 can detect theposition of the reflection. The feedback component 1660 can capture orrecord the position of the reflection. The feedback component 1660 canperform image processing on the reflection to determine or compute thedirection of the eye or gaze direction of the eye.

The feedback component 1660 can compare the eye direction or movement tohistorical eye direction or movement of the same person, nominal eyemovement, or other historical eye movement information to determine alevel of attention. For example, the feedback component 1660 candetermine a historical amount of eye movement during historicalperipheral nerve stimulation sessions. The feedback component 1660 cancompare the current eye movement with the historical eye movement toidentify a deviation. The system 2000 can determine, based on thecomparison, an increase in eye movement and further determine that thesubject is paying less attention to the current nerve stimulation basedon the increase in eye movement. In response to detecting the decreasein attention, the nerve stimulus adjustment module 1615 can change thestimulus parameters 2025 so that the nerve stimulus 2010 causes orinduces neural oscillations.

The feedback component 1660 can interact with or communicate with thesystem 2000. For example, the feedback component 1660 can providedetected feedback information or data to the system 2000. The feedbackcomponent 1660 can provide data to the system 2000 in real-time, forexample as the feedback component 1660 detects or senses or information.The feedback component 1660 can provide the feedback information to thesystem 2000 based on a time interval, such as 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5minutes, 10 minutes, hourly, 2 hours, 4 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours.The feedback component 1660 can provide the feedback information to thefeedback component 1660 responsive to a condition or event, such as afeedback measurement exceeding a threshold or falling below a threshold.The feedback component 1660 can provide feedback information responsiveto a change in a feedback parameter. In some embodiments, the system2000 can ping, query, or send a request to the feedback component 1660for information, and the feedback component 1660 can provide thefeedback information in response to the ping, request, or query.

Referring now to FIGS. 21A-21D, further embodiments of devicesconfigured to deliver nerve stimulations to cause or induce neuraloscillations are shown. The devices shown in FIGS. 21A-21D can beconfigured in a similar manner as the devices 1800, 1801.

As shown in FIG. 21A, a glove 2114 can be configured to deliverperipheral nerve stimulus to cause or induce neural oscillations. Theglove 2114 includes a first electrode 2102 a, a second electrode 2102 b,and a control unit 2104 (the controller may be included in or attachedto one or more of the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b, or may be in a separatecomponent 2122 that is operatively coupled (e.g., by a wired or wirelessconnection) to the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b. The control unit 2104 isconfigured to control operation of the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b. Thecontrol unit 2104 may include a controller 2116, a power source 2118,and a communication interface 2120. The controller 2116 can beconfigured to control operation of the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b. Thecontroller 2116 can include or can be coupled to the nerve stimulusgeneration module 1610. The controller 2116 can, for example, generate,control, or otherwise process a control signal indicating a pulse schemefor causing a desired nerve stimulus.

The control unit 2104 can include a power source 2118, such as one ormore batteries to provide power supply for the control unit 2104 and theelectrodes 2102 a, 2102 b. The communication interface 2120 forcommunicating with other electronic devices, such as the NSS 1605 ormodules thereof. The communication interface 2120 can include a wiredcommunication interface, a wireless communications interface, WiFicommunications interface, a BLUETOOTH® communication interface, a nearfiled communications (NFC) interface, or the like. The control unit 2104can transmit data, such as vibration frequency information, motor ortouch element setting information, or a combination thereof to the NSS1605. The NSS 1605 can also transmit signals or data to the control unit2104.

The glove 2114 can employ active cooling. For example, the glove 2114can include tubular wires 2124 integrated therein for circulating arelatively cold fluid (e.g., cold water, other cold liquid or cold gas),to cool down the skin or to prevent skin and/or touch element fromoverheating. The tubular wires 2124 can be positioned in the vicinity ofthe electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b (e.g., in close proximity to thestimulation area), or can traverse the glove 2114. The tubular wires2124 can be coupled to a fluid container and a pump. The pump can causethe cold fluid to circulate through the tubular wires 2124. The pump canbe configured to pump fluid when the touch element 2004 is notphysically interacting with the stimulation area on the subject's skin.For example, the mechanical stimulus generation module 1615 can instructthe pump to pump the cold fluid during non-stimulation time intervalsand stop pumping fluid during the pulse trains 201. In someimplementations, the pump can pump the cold fluid continuouslythroughout the total duration of the stimulation signal 2006.

In some implementations, the glove 2114 can include passive coolingmeans, such as vents or apertures that allow any heat to dissipate awayfrom the skin of the subject. The glove 2114 can also include heatabsorbing material(s) that can absorb heat generated responsive to thephysical contact between the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b and the skin ofthe subject. The heat absorbing the material can transfer the absorbedheat into the air. The nerve stimulus generation module 1610 can selectdurations of pulse schemes during which stimulation is not provided tocool down or prevent overheating. The glove 2114 and/or the NSS 1605 caninclude a combination of one or more passive cooling mechanisms and/orone or more active cooling mechanisms.

Referring now to FIG. 21B, a stimulation device 2110 is shown accordingto an embodiment. The stimulation device 2110 can be similar to theglove 2114, except that the stimulation device 2114 is configured as astrap (e.g., cuff, wrap), such as for delivering nerve stimulus to thequadriceps. In some embodiments, the stimulation device 2110 isconfigured to be adjusted in position. For example, while FIG. 21B showsthe stimulation device 2110 with electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b (and controlunit 2104) oriented to deliver nerve stimulus to the quadriceps, thestimulation device 2114 could be rotated or otherwise adjusted inposition or orientation such that the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b candeliver nerve stimulus to the back of the knee.

Referring now to FIG. 21C, a stimulation device 2120 (e.g., amouthpiece) is shown according to an embodiment. The stimulation device2120 can be similar to the glove 2114 and the stimulation device 2110,except that the stimulation device 2120 is configured as a mouthpiece,such as for delivering nerve stimulus to the lips, teeth, or gums. Forexample, the locations of electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b in the stimulationdevice 2120 can be selected (or modified prior to use, such as throughthe use of removable electrodes) based on whether the lips, teeth, orgums are targeted by the nerve stimulus. In some embodiments, theelectrodes 2102 a, 2102 b are located in the stimulation device 2120such that the electrodes 2102 a, 2102 b will be exposed to relativelylow levels of saliva, such as to reduce the likelihood of conduction bythe saliva as opposed to the lips, teeth, or gums.

Referring now to FIG. 21D, a stimulation device 2140 (e.g., a nose plugor nose piece) is shown according to an embodiment. The stimulationdevice 2140 can be similar to the glove 2114, the stimulation device2110, and the stimulation device 2120, except that the stimulationdevice 2140 is configured as a nose plug, such as for delivering nervestimulus to the olfactory nerve 2148. For example, the stimulationdevice 2140 can include a control component 2142 (e.g., a controlcomponent 2142 including a power supply) configured to deliver anelectrical current to electrode 2146 (which may be a stimulationelectrode paired with a reference electrode) via electrical lead 2144 todeliver nerve stimulus to the olfactory nerve 2148.

N. Method for Inducing Neural Oscillations Via Peripheral NerveStimulation

FIG. 22 is a flow diagram of a method of performing peripheral nervestimulation, such as to cause or induce neural oscillations, inaccordance with an embodiment. The method 2200 can be performed by oneor more of the systems, components, modules or elements depicted inFIGS. 16A-16B, including, for example, a peripheral nerve stimulationsystem (NSS). In brief overview, the NSS can generate a control signalindicating instructions to generate a nerve stimulus havingpredetermined parameters or characteristics at block 2205. At block2210, the NSS can generate and output the nerve stimulus based on thecontrol signal. At block 2215, the NSS can receive or determine feedbackassociated with neural activity, physiological activity, environmentalparameters, or device parameters. At block 2220, the NSS can manage,control, or modify stimulus parameters based on the feedback. At block2225, the NSS can modify the control signal based on the stimulusparameters in order to modify the nerve stimulus based on the feedback.

O. Neural Stimulation Via Multiple Modes of Stimulation

FIG. 23A is a block diagram depicting a system for neural stimulationvia multiple stimulation modalities in accordance with an embodiment.The system 2300 can include a neural stimulation orchestration system(“NSOS”) 2305. The NSOS 2305 can provide multiple modes of stimulation.For example, the NSOS 2305 can provide a first mode of stimulation thatincludes visual stimulation, and a second mode of stimulation thatincludes auditory stimulation. For each mode of stimulation, the NSOS2305 can provide a type of signal. For example, for the visual mode ofstimulation, the NSOS 2305 can provide the following types of signals:light pulses, image patterns, flicker of ambient light, or augmentedreality. NSOS 2305 can orchestrate, manage, control, or otherwisefacilitate providing multiple modes of stimulation and types ofstimulation.

In brief overview, the NSOS 2305 can include, access, interface with, orotherwise communicate with one or more of a stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310, a subject assessment module 2350, a data repository2315, one or more signaling components 2330 a-n, one or more filteringcomponents 2335 a-n, one or more feedback components 2340 a-n, and oneor more neural stimulation systems (“NSS”) 2345 a-n. The data repository2315 can include or store a profile data structure 2320 and a policydata structure 2325. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 andsubject assessment module 2350 can include at least one processing unitor other logic device such as programmable logic array engine, or moduleconfigured to communicate with the database repository 2315. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 and subject assessment module 2350 can be asingle component, include separate components, or be part of the NSOS2305. The system 2300 and its components, such as the NSOS 2305, mayinclude hardware elements, such as one or more processors, logicdevices, or circuits. The system 2300 and its components, such as theNSOS 2305, can include one or more hardware or interface componentdepicted in system 700 in FIGS. 7A and 7B. For example, a component ofsystem 2300 can include or execute on one or more processors 721, accessstorage 728 or memory 722, and communicate via network interface 718.The system 2300 can include one or more component or functionalitydepicted in FIGS. 1-15, including, for example, system 100, system 900,visual NSS 105, or auditory NSS 905. For example, at least one of thesignaling components 2330 a-n can include one or more component orfunctionality of visual signaling component 150 or audio signalingcomponent 950. At least one of the filtering components 2335 a-n caninclude one or more component or functionality of filtering component155 or filtering component 955. At least one of the feedback components2340 a-n can include one or more component or functionality of feedbackcomponent 230 or feedback component 960. At least one of the NSOS 2345a-n can include one or more component or functionality of visual NSS 105or auditory NSS 905.

Still referring to FIG. 23A, and in further detail, the NSOS 2305 caninclude at least stimuli orchestration component 2310. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can be designed and constructed to performneural stimulation using multiple modalities of stimulation. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 or NSOS 2305 can interface with at leastone of the signaling components 2330 a-n, at least one of the filteringcomponents 2335 a-n or at least one of the feedback components 2340 a-n.One or more of the signaling components 2330 a-n can be a same type ofsignaling component or a different type of signaling component. The typeof signaling component can correspond to a mode of stimulation. Forexample, multiple types of signaling components 2330 a-n can correspondto visual signaling components or auditory signaling components. In somecases, at least one of the signaling components 2330 a-n includes avisual signaling component 150 such as a light source, LED, laser,tablet computing device, or virtual reality headset. At least one of thesignaling components includes an audio signaling component 950, such asheadphones, speakers, cochlear implants, or air jets.

One or more of the filtering components 2335 a-n can be a same type offiltering component or a different type of filtering component. One ormore of the feedback components 2340 a-n can be a same type of feedbackcomponent or a different type of feedback component. For example, thefeedback components 2340 a-n can include an electrode, dry electrode,gel electrode, saline soaked electrode, adhesive-based electrodes, atemperature sensor, heart or pulse rate monitor, physiological sensor,ambient light sensor, ambient temperature sensor, sleep status viaactigraphy, blood pressure monitor, respiratory rate monitor, brain wavesensor, EEG probe, EOG probes configured measure the corneo-retinalstanding potential that exists between the front and the back of thehuman eye, accelerometer, gyroscope, motion detector, proximity sensor,camera, microphone, or photo detector.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can include or be configuredwith an interface to communicate with different types of signalingcomponents 2330 a-n, filtering components 2335 a-n or feedbackcomponents 2340 a-n. The NSOS 2305 or stimuli orchestration component2310 can interface with system intermediary to one of the signalingcomponents 2330 a-n, filtering components 2335 a-n, or feedbackcomponents 2340 a-n. For example, the stimuli orchestration component2310 can interface with the visual NSS 105 depicted in FIG. 1 orauditory NSS 905 depicted in FIG. 9. Thus, in some embodiments, thestimuli orchestration component 2310 or NSOS 2305 can indirectlyinterface with at least one of the signaling components 2330 a-n,filtering components 2335 a-n, or feedback components 2340 a-n.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 (e.g., via the interface) canping each of the signaling components 2330 a-n, filtering components2335 a-n, and feedback components 2340 a-n to determine informationabout the components. The information can include a type of thecomponent (e.g., visual, auditory, attenuator, optical filter,temperature sensor, or light sensor), configuration of the component(e.g., frequency range, amplitude range), or status information (e.g.,standby, ready, online, enabled, error, fault, offline, disabled,warning, service needed, availability, or battery level).

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can instruct or cause at leastone of the signaling components 2330 a-n to generate, transmit orotherwise provide a signal that can be perceived, received or observedby the brain and affect a frequency of neural oscillations in at leastone region or portion of a subject's brain. The signal can be perceivedvia various means, including, for example, optical nerves or cochlearcells.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can access the data repository2315 to retrieve profile information 2320 and a policy 2325. The profileinformation 2320 can include profile information 145 or profileinformation 945. The policy 2325 can include a multi-modal stimulationpolicy. The policy 2325 can indicate a multi-modal stimulation program.The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can apply the policy 2325 toprofile information to determine a type of stimulation (e.g., visual orauditory) and determine a value for a parameter for each type ofstimulation (e.g., amplitude, frequency, wavelength, color, etc.). Thestimuli orchestration component 2310 can apply the policy 2325 to theprofile information 2320 and feedback information received from one ormore feedback components 2340 a-n to determine or adjust the type ofstimulation (e.g., visual or auditory) and determine or adjust the valueparameter for each type of stimulation (e.g., amplitude, frequency,wavelength, color, etc.). The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canapply the policy 2325 to profile information to determine a type offilter to be applied by at least one of the filtering components 2335a-n (e.g., audio filter or visual filter) and determine a value for aparameter for the type of filter (e.g., frequency, wavelength, color,sound attenuation, etc.). The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canapply the policy 2325 to profile information and feedback informationreceived from one or more feedback components 2340 a-n to determine oradjust the type of filter to be applied by at least one of the filteringcomponents 2335 a-n (e.g., audio filter or visual filter) and determineor adjust the value for the parameter for filter (e.g., frequency,wavelength, color, sound attenuation, etc.).

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can synchronize signals sentvia the one or more signaling components 2330 a-n. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can use a policy to synchronize thestimulation signals. For example, the stimuli orchestration component2310 can identify two signaling components 2330 a-n (e.g., visualsignaling component and auditory signaling component). The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can determine to keep a phase of the visualstimulation pulse train constant, while varying the phase of theauditory stimulation pulse train. For example, the stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can apply a phase offset to one of the stimulationsignals so the output stimulation signals appear to be out ofsynchronization. However, due to the different modalities with which thestimulation signals effect neural stimulation, they neural stimulationin the brain itself may be synchronized, even though the output signalsat the respective output sources may be out of synchronization. Thus,the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can facilitate synchronizingneural stimulation, thereby facilitating entrainment, by phaseoffsetting one or more of the stimulation signals while keeping one ormore of the stimulation signals constant. The stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can apply further phase offsets to one or more of thestimulation signals during one or more subsequent time periods, therebyincrementally sweeping through the phases until the output stimulationsignals appear to be in-phase again. For example, the phase offset canrange from 0 to 180 degrees and increment by 1 degree increments, 2degree increments, 3 degree increments, 5 degree increments, 7 degreeincrements, 10 degree increments, or any other increment thatfacilitates performing a sweep and neural stimulation.

The NSOS 2305 can obtain the profile information 2320 via a subjectassessment module 2350. The subject assessment module 2350 can bedesigned and constructed to determine, for one or more subjects,information that can facilitate neural stimulation via one or more modesof stimulation. The subject assessment module 2350 can receive, obtain,detect, determine or otherwise identify the information via feedbackcomponents 2340 a-n, surveys, queries, questionnaires, prompts, remoteprofile information accessible via a network, diagnostic tests, orhistorical treatments.

The subject assessment module 2350 can receive the information prior toinitiating neural stimulation, during neural stimulation, or afterneural stimulation. For example, the subject assessment module 2350 canprovide a prompt with a request for information prior to initiating theneural stimulation session. The subject assessment module 2350 canprovide a prompt with a request for information during the neuralstimulation session. The subject assessment module 2350 can receivefeedback from feedback component 2340 a-n (e.g., an EEG probe) duringthe neural stimulation session. The subject assessment module 2350 canprovide a prompt with a request for information subsequent totermination of the neural stimulation session. The subject assessmentmodule 2350 can receive feedback from feedback component 2340 a-nsubsequent to termination of the neural stimulation session.

The subject assessment module 2350 can use the information to determinean effectiveness of a modality of stimulation (e.g., visual stimulationor auditory stimulation) or a type of signal (e.g., light pulse from alaser or LED source, ambient light flicker, or image pattern displayedby a tablet computing device). For example, the subject assessmentmodule 2350 can determine that the desired neural stimulation resultedfrom a first mode of stimulation or first type of signal, while thedesired neural stimulation did not occur or took longer to occur withthe second mode of stimulation or second type of signal. The subjectassessment module 2350 can determine that the desired neural stimulationwas less pronounced from the second mode of stimulation or second typeof signal relative to the first mode of stimulation or first type ofsignal based on feedback information from a feedback component 2340 a-n.

The subject assessment module 2350 can determine the level ofeffectiveness of each mode or type of stimulation independently, orbased on a combination of modes or types of stimulation. A combinationof modes of stimulation can refer to transmitting signals from differentmodes of stimulation at the same or substantially similar time. Acombination of modes of stimulation can refer to transmitting signalsfrom different modes of stimulation in an overlapping manner. Acombination of modes of stimulation can refer to transmitting signalsfrom different modes of stimulation in a non-overlapping manner, butwithin a time interval from one another (e.g., transmit a signal pulsetrain from a second mode of stimulation within 0.5 seconds, 1 second,1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 2.5 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 7 seconds, 10seconds, 12 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes 3 minutes 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or othertime interval where the effect on the frequency of neural oscillation bya first mode can overlap with the second mode).

The subject assessment module 2350 can aggregate or compile theinformation and update the profile data structure 2320 stored in datarepository 2315. In some cases, the subject assessment module 2350 canupdate or generate a policy 2325 based on the received information. Thepolicy 2325 or profile information 2320 can indicate which modes ortypes of stimulation are more likely to have a desired effect on neuralstimulation, while reducing side effects.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can instruct or cause multiplesignaling components 2330 a-n to generate, transmit or otherwise providedifferent types of stimulation or signals pursuant to the policy 2325,profile information 2320 or feedback information detected by feedbackcomponents 2340 a-n. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can causemultiple signaling components 2330 a-n to generate, transmit orotherwise provide different types of stimulation or signalssimultaneously or at substantially the same time. For example, a firstsignaling component 2330 a can transmit a first type of stimulation atthe same time as a second signaling component 2330 b transmits a secondtype of stimulation. The first signaling component 2330 a can transmitor provide a first set of signals, pulses or stimulation at the sametime the second signaling component 2330 b transmits or provides asecond set of signals, pulses or stimulation. For example, a first pulsefrom a first signaling component 2330 a can begin at the same time orsubstantially the same time (e.g., 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 10%, 15%,20%) as a second pulse from a second signaling component 2330 b. Firstand second pulses can end at the same time or substantially same time.In another example, a first pulse train can be transmitted by the firstsignaling component 2330 a at the same or substantially similar time asa second pulse train transmitted by the second signaling component 2330b.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can cause multiple signalingcomponents 2330 a-n to generate, transmit or otherwise provide differenttypes of stimulation or signals in an overlapping manner. The differentpulses or pulse trains may overlap one another, but may not necessarybeing or end at a same time. For example, at least one pulse in thefirst set of pulses from the first signaling component 2330 a can atleast partially overlap, in time, with at least one pulse from thesecond set of pulses from the second signaling component 2330 b. Forexample, the pulses can straddle one another. In some cases, a firstpulse train transmitted or provided by the first signaling component2330 a can at least partially overlap with a second pulse traintransmitted or provided by the second signaling component 2330 b. Thefirst pulse train can straddle the second pulse train.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can cause multiple signalingcomponents 2330 a-n to generate, transmit or otherwise provide differenttypes of stimulation or signals such that they are received, perceivedor otherwise observed by one or more regions or portions of the brain atthe same time, simultaneously or at substantially the same time. Thebrain can receive different modes of stimulation or types of signals atdifferent times. The duration of time between transmission of the signalby a signaling component 2330 a-n and reception or perception of thesignal by the brain can vary based on the type of signal (e.g., visual,auditory), parameter of the signal (e.g., velocity or speed of the wave,amplitude, frequency, wavelength), or distance between the signalingcomponent 2330 a-n and the nerves or cells of the subject configured toreceive the signal (e.g., eyes or ears). The stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can offset or delay the transmission of signals such thatthe brain perceives the different signals at the desired time. Thestimuli orchestration component 2310 can offset or delay thetransmission of a first signal transmitted by a first signalingcomponent 2330 a relative to transmission of a second signal transmittedby a second signaling component 2330 b. The stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can determine an amount of an offset for each type ofsignal or each signaling component 2330 a-n relative to a referenceclock or reference signal. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canbe preconfigured or calibrated with an offset for each signalingcomponent 2330 a-n.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can determine to enable ordisable the offset based on the policy 2325. For example, the policy2325 may indicate to transmit multiple signals at the same time, inwhich case the stimuli orchestration component 2310 may disable or notuse an offset. In another example, the policy 2325 may indicate totransmit multiple signals such that they are perceived by the brain atthe same time, in which case the stimuli orchestration component 2310may enable or use the offset.

In some embodiments, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 canstagger signals transmitted by different signaling components 2330 a-n.For example, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can stagger thesignals such that the pulses from different signaling components 2330a-n are non-overlapping. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canstagger pulse trains from different signaling components 2330 a-n suchthat they are non-overlapping. The stimuli orchestration component 2310can set parameters for each mode of stimulation or signaling component2330 a-n such that the signals they are non-overlapping.

Thus, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can set parameters forsignals transmitted by one or more signaling components 2330 a-n suchthat the signals are transmitted in a synchronously or asynchronously,or perceived by the brain synchronously or asynchronously. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can apply the policy 2325 to availablesignaling components 2330 a-n to determine the parameters to set foreach signaling component 2330 a-n for the synchronous or asynchronoustransmission. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can adjustparameters such as a time delay, phase offset, frequency, pulse rateinterval, or amplitude to synchronize the signals.

FIG. 23B is a diagram depicting waveforms used for neural stimulationvia visual stimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with anembodiment. FIG. 23B illustrates example sequences that the stimuliorchestration component 2310 can generate or cause to be generated byone or more signaling components 2330 a-n. The stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can retrieve the sequences from a data structure storedin data repository 2315 of NSOS 2305, or a data repository correspondingto an NSS 2345 a-n. The sequences can be stored in a table format, suchas Table 1 below. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can selectpredetermined sequences to generate a set of sequences for a treatmentsession or time period. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can obtain apredetermined or preconfigured set of sequences. In some embodiments,the NSOS 2305 can construct or generate the set of sequences or eachsequences based on information obtained from the subject assessmentmodule 2350. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can remove or deletesequences from the set of sequences based on feedback, such as adverseside effects. The NSOS 2305, via subject assessment module 2350, caninclude sequences that are more likely to stimulate neurons in apredetermined region of the brain to oscillate at a desired frequency.

TABLE 1 Multi-Modal Stimulation Sequences Timing Sequence SignalStimulation Sched- Identifier Mode Signal Type Parameter Frequency ule2355 Visual light pulses color: red; 40 Hz {t0:t8) from a laserintensity: light source low; PW: 2390a 2360 Periph- electrical location:40 Hz {t1:t4} eral current behind nerve knee; intensity: high; PW: 2390a2365 Visual light pulses color: red; 40 Hz {t2:t6} from a laserintensity: light source low; PW: 2390a 2370 Audio acoustic or PW: 2390a;40 Hz {t3:t5} audio bursts frequency provided by variation headphonesfrom M_(c) to or speakers M_(o); 2375 Audio acoustic or PW: 2390a; 39.8Hz   {t4:t7} audio bursts frequency provided by variation headphonesfrom M_(c) to or speakers M_(o); 2380 Audio acoustic or PW: 2390a; 40 Hz{t6:t8} audio bursts frequency provided by variation headphones fromM_(c) to or speakers M_(o);

As illustrated in Table 1, each waveform sequence can include one ormore characteristics, such as a sequence identifier, a mode, a signaltype, one or more signal parameters, a modulation or stimulationfrequency, and a timing schedule. As illustrated in FIG. 23B and Table1, the sequence identifiers are 2355, 2360, 2365, 2365, 2370, 2375, and2360.

As illustrated in Table 1, each waveform sequence can include one ormore characteristics, such as a sequence identifier, a mode, a signaltype, one or more signal parameters, a modulation or stimulationfrequency, and a timing schedule. As illustrated in FIG. 23B and Table1, the sequence identifiers are 2355, 2360, 2365, 2365, 2370, 2375, and2360.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can receive the characteristicsof each sequence. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can transmit,configure, load, instruct or otherwise provide the sequencecharacteristics to a signaling component 2330 a-n. In some embodiments,the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can provide the sequencecharacteristics to an NSS 2345 a-n, while in some cases the stimuliorchestration component 2310 can directly provide the sequencecharacteristics to a signaling component 2330 a. In some embodiments,the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can provide the sequencecharacteristics to the visual NSS 105, the auditory NSS 905, or otherNSS designed, constructed and configured for peripheral nervestimulation, while in some cases the stimuli orchestration component2310 can directly provide the sequence characteristics to a signalingcomponent, such as the visual signaling component 150, audio signalingcomponent 950, or other signaling component such as a peripheral nervestimulation signaling component.

The NSOS 2305 can retrieve the data structure storing Table 1 and parsethe data structure to determine a mode of stimulation for each sequence.The NSOS 2305 can determine, from the Table 1 data structure, that themode of stimulation of sequence 2355 is visual stimulation; sequence2360 is peripheral nerve stimulation; sequence 2365 is visualstimulation; sequence 2370 stimulation is audio stimulation; sequence2375 stimulation is audio stimulation and 2380 is also audiostimulation. The NSOS 2305, responsive to determining the mode ofstimulation, can provide the information or characteristics associatedwith sequences 2355, 2360 and 2365 to the corresponding NSS configuredfor providing the mode of stimulation. Each NSS (e.g., NSS 105 via thelight generation module 110) can parse the sequence characteristics andthen instruct a signaling component (e.g., visual signaling component150) to generate and transmit the corresponding signals. In someembodiments, the NSOS 2305 can directly instruct the signalingcomponents to generate and transmit signals corresponding to sequences2355, 2360 and 2365, 2370, 2375, and 2380. Thus, the NSOS 2305 can beconfigured to interface with various types of NSS's or various types ofsignaling components to provide neural stimulation via multiplemodalities of stimulation.

For example, the first sequence 2355 can include a visual signal. Thesignal type can include light pulses 2385 generated by a light source305 that includes a laser. The light pulses can include light waveshaving a wavelength corresponding to the color red in the visiblespectrum. The intensity of the light can be set to low. An intensitylevel of low can correspond to a low contrast ratio (e.g., relative tothe level of ambient light) or a low absolute intensity. The pulse widthfor the light burst can correspond to pulse width 2390 a (e.g., PW 230 adepicted in FIG. 2C). The stimulation frequency can be 40 Hz, orcorrespond to a pulse rate interval (“PRI”) of 0.025 seconds. The firstsequence 2355 can run from t₀ to t₈. The first sequence 2355 can run forthe duration of the session or treatment. The first sequence 2355 canrun while one or more other sequences are other running. The timeintervals can refer to absolute times, time periods, number of cycles,or other event. The time interval from t₀ to t₈ can be, for example, 1minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 7 minutes, 10minutes, 12 minutes, 15 minutes, 20 minutes or more or less. The timeinterval can be cut short or terminated by the subject or responsive tofeedback information. The time intervals can be adjusted based onprofile information or by the subject via an input device.

The second sequence 2360 can include peripheral nerve stimulation thatbegins at t₁ and ends at t₄. The second sequence 2360 can include asignal type that includes an electrical current. The signal type,parameters, frequency and other characteristics can correspond to anycharacteristic depicted in with respect to FIGS. 17A-17D. The signalparameters can include a location of the peripheral nerve, such asbehind the knee. The intensity can be set to high. The pulse width canbe set to 2390 a. The intensity can be high, which can correspond to ahigh current relative to a baseline current or nominal current. Thepulse width for the electrical current can be the same as the pulsewidth 2390 a as in sequence 2355. Sequence 2360 can begin and end at adifferent time than sequence 2355. For example, sequence 2360 can beginat t₁, which can be offset from to by 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds,20 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, ormore or less. The peripheral nerve signaling component of Appendix A caninitiate the second sequence 2360 at t₁, and terminate the secondsequence at t₄. Thus, the second sequence 2360 can overlap with thefirst sequence 2355.

While pulse trains or sequences 2355 and 2360 can overlap with oneanother, the pulses 2385 of the second sequence 2360 may not overlapwith the pulses 2385 of the first sequence 2355. For example, the pulses2385 of the second sequence 2360 can be offset from the pulses 2385 ofthe first sequence 2355 such that they are non-overlapping.

The third sequence 2365 c can be similar to the stimulation provided inthe first sequence 2365 a.

The fourth sequence 2370 and the fifth sequence 2375 can include anaudio stimulation mode. The fifth sequence 2375 can include acoustic oraudio bursts. The acoustic bursts can be provided by the headphones orspeakers 1205 of FIG. 12B. The sequence 2375 can include pulses 2385.The pulses 2385 can vary from one pulse to another pulse in thesequence. The fifth waveform 2375 can be configured to re-focus thesubject to increase the subject's attention level to the neuralstimulation. The fifth sequence 2375 can increase the subject'sattention level by varying parameters of the signal from one pulse tothe other pulse. The fifth sequence 2375 can vary the frequency from onepulse to the other pulse. For example, the first pulse 2385 in sequence2375 can have a higher frequency than the previous sequences. The secondpulse can be an upchirp pulse having a frequency that increases from alow frequency to a high frequency. The third pulse can be a sharperupchirp pulse that has frequency that increases from an even lowerfrequency to the same high frequency. The fifth pulse can have a lowstable frequency. The sixth pulse can be a downchirp pulse going from ahigh frequency to the lowest frequency. The seventh pulse can be a highfrequency pulse with a small pulsewidth. The fifth sequence 2375 canbegin at t₄ and end at t₇. The fifth sequence can overlap with sequence2355; and partially overlap with sequence 2365 and 2370. The fifthsequence may not overlap with sequence 2360. The stimulation frequencycan be 39.8 Hz. The sixth sequence 2380 can also include an audiostimulation mode.

The NSOS 2305 can adjust, change, or otherwise modify sequences orpulses based on feedback. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 candetermine, based on the profile information, policy, and availablecomponents, to provide neural stimulation using one or more of the modesdepicted in Table 1. The NSOS 2305 can determine to synchronize thetransmit times of the pulse trains 2355-2380, or offset the pulse trains2355-2380.

In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can transmit the first sequence 2355and the second sequence 2460 for a first duration (e.g., 1 minute, 2minutes, or 3 minutes). At the end of the first duration, the NSOS 2305can ping feedback sensor such as an EEG probe to determine a frequencyof neural oscillation in a region of the brain. If the frequency ofoscillation is not at the desired frequency of oscillation, the NSOS2305 can select an additional sequence out of order or change the timingschedule of a sequence.

For example, the NSOS 2305 can ping a feedback sensor at t₁. The NSOS2305 can determine, at t₁, that neurons of the primary visual cortex areoscillating at the desired frequency. Thus, the NSOS 2305 can determineto forego transmitting sequences 2360 and 2365 because there issatisfactory neural oscillation. The NSOS 2305 can determine to disablesequences 2360 and 2365. The NSOS 2305, responsive to the feedbackinformation, can disable the sequences 2360 and 2365. The NSOS 2305,responsive to the feedback information, can modify a flag in the datastructure corresponding to Table 1 to indicate that the sequences 2360and 2365 are disabled.

In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can determine, at t₁, that while theneurons of the primary visual cortex are oscillating at the desiredfrequency, the neurons of the sensory cortex are not oscillating at thedesired frequency. Responsive to this determination, the NSOS 2305 canenable sequence 2370 for peripheral nerve stimulation and sequence 2480for audio stimulation. The NSOS 2305 can determine to disable sequences2360, 2365 and 2375, but enable 2370 and 2380. The NSOS 2305, responsiveto the feedback information, can modify a flag in the data structurecorresponding to Table 1 to indicate that the sequences 2360, 2365 and2375 are disabled, and sequences 2370 and 2380 are enabled.

In another example, the NSOS 2305 can receive feedback information att₂. At t₂, the NSOS 2305 can determine that the frequency of neuraloscillation in the hypothalamus is different from frequency of neuraloscillation in the auditory cortex. Responsive to determining thedifference, the NSOS 2305 can adjust the stimulation frequency of theelectrical signal provided by the peripheral nerve stimulation insequence 2370 in order to synchronize the frequency of neuraloscillation of the hypothalamus with that of the auditory cortex orprimary visual cortex or sensory cortex.

Similarly, the NSOS 2305 can enable, disable, or adjust one or moresequences 2355-2380 based on feedback such that the resulting frequencyof neural oscillations of one or more portions of the brain satisfy apredetermined value, threshold, or range. In some cases, the NSOS 2305can determine to disable all modes of stimulation subsequent to sequence2355 if the visual sequence 2355 is successfully affecting the frequencyof neural oscillations in the brain at each time period t₁, t₂, t₃, t₄,t₅, t₆, t₇, and t₈. In some cases, the NSOS 2305 can determine todisable all modes of stimulation subsequent to sequence 2355 if thevisual sequence 2355 causes an adverse side effect, such as a migraineor fatigue.

In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can adjust or change the mode ofstimulation or a type of signal based on feedback received from afeedback component 2340 a-n. The stimuli orchestration component 2310can adjust the mode of stimulation or type of signal based on feedbackon the subject, feedback on the environment, or a combination offeedback on the subject and the environment. Feedback on the subject caninclude, for example, physiological information, temperature, attentionlevel, level of fatigue, activity (e.g., sitting, laying down, walking,biking, or driving), vision ability, hearing ability, side effects(e.g., pain, migraine, ringing in ear, or blindness), or frequency ofneural oscillation at a region or portion of the brain (e.g., EEGprobes). Feedback information on the environment can include, forexample, ambient temperature, ambient light, ambient sound, batteryinformation, or power source.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can determine to maintain orchange an aspect of the stimulation treatment based on the feedback. Forexample, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can determine that theneurons are not oscillating at the desired frequency in response to thefirst mode of stimulation. Responsive to determining that the neuronsare not oscillating at the desired frequency, the stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can disable the first mode of stimulation and enable asecond mode of stimulation. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canagain determine (e.g., via feedback component 2340 a) that the neuronsare not oscillating at the desired frequency in response to the secondmode of stimulation. Responsive to determining that the neurons arestill not oscillating at the desired frequency, the stimuliorchestration component 2310 can increase an amplitude of the signalcorresponding to the second mode of stimulation. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can determine that the neurons areoscillating at the desired frequency in response to increasing theamplitude of a signal corresponding to the second mode of stimulation.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can monitor the frequency ofneural oscillations at a region or portion of the brain. The stimuliorchestration component 2310 can determine that neurons in a firstregion of the brain are oscillating at the desired frequency, whereasneurons in a second region of the brain are not oscillating at thedesired frequency. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can performa lookup in the profile data structure 2320 to determine a mode ofstimulation or type of signal that maps to the second region of thebrain. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can compare the resultsof the lookup with the currently enabled mode of stimulation todetermine that a third mode of stimulation is more likely to cause theneurons in the second region of the brain to oscillate at the desiredfrequency. Responsive to the determination, the stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can identify a signaling component 2330 a-n configured togenerate and transmit signals corresponding to the selected third modeof stimulation, and instruct or cause the identified signaling component2330 a-n to transmit the signals.

In some embodiments, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 candetermine, based on feedback information, that a mode of stimulation islikely to affect the frequency of neural oscillation, or unlikely toaffect the frequency of neural oscillation. The stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can select a mode of stimulation from a plurality ofmodes of stimulation that is most likely to affect the frequency ofneural stimulation or result in a desired frequency of neuraloscillation. If the stimuli orchestration component 2310 determines,based on the feedback information, that a mode of stimulation isunlikely to affect the frequency of neural oscillation, the stimuliorchestration component 2310 can disable the mode of stimulation for apredetermined duration or until the feedback information indicates thatthe mode of stimulation would be effective.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can select one or more modes ofstimulation to conserve resources or minimize resource utilization. Forexample, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can select one or moremodes of stimulation to reduce or minimize power consumption if thepower source is a battery or if the battery level is low. In anotherexample, the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can select one or moremodes of stimulation to reduce heat generation if the ambienttemperature is above a threshold or the temperature of the subject isabove a threshold. In another example, the stimuli orchestrationcomponent 2310 can select one or more modes of stimulation to increasethe level of attention if the stimuli orchestration component 2310determines that the subject is not focusing on the stimulation (e.g.,based on eye tracking or an undesired frequency of neural oscillations).

P. Neural Stimulation Via Visual Stimulation and Auditory Stimulation

FIG. 24A is a block diagram depicting an embodiment of a system forneural stimulation via visual stimulation and auditory stimulation. Thesystem 2400 can include the NSOS 2305. The NSOS 2305 can interface withthe visual NSS 105 and the auditory NSS 905. The visual NSS 105 caninterface or communicate with the visual signaling component 150,filtering component 155, and feedback component 230. The auditory NSS905 can interface or communicate with the audio signaling component 950,filtering component 955, and feedback component 960.

To provide neural stimulation via visual stimulation and auditorystimulation, the NSOS 2305 can identify the types of availablecomponents for the neural stimulation session. The NSOS 2305 canidentify the types of visual signals the visual signaling component 150is configured to generate. The NSOS 2305 can also identify the type ofaudio signals the audio signaling component 950 is configured togenerate. The NSOS 2305 can be configured about the types of visualsignals and audio signals the components 150 and 950 are configured togenerate. The NSOS 2305 can ping the components 150 and 950 forinformation about the components 150 and 950. The NSOS 2305 can querythe components, send an SNMP request, broadcast a query, or otherwisedetermine information about the available visual signaling component 150and audio signaling component 950.

For example, the NSOS 2305 can determine that the following componentsare available for neural stimulation: the visual signaling component 150includes the virtual reality headset 401 depicted in FIG. 4C; the audiosignaling component 950 includes the speaker 1205 depicted in FIG. 12B;the feedback component 230 includes an ambient light sensor 605, an eyetracker 605 and an EEG probe depicted in FIG. 4C; the feedback component960 includes a microphone 1210 and feedback sensor 1225 depicted in FIG.12B; and the filtering component 955 includes a noise cancellationcomponent 1215. The NSOS 2305 can further determine an absence offiltering component 155 communicatively coupled to the visual NSS 105.The NSOS 2305 can determine the presence (available or online) orabsence (offline) of components via visual NSS 105 or auditory NSS 905.The NSOS 2305 can further obtain identifiers for each of the availableor online components.

The NSOS 2305 can perform a lookup in the profile data structure 2320using an identifier of the subject to identify one more types of visualsignals and audio signals to provide to the subject. The NSOS 2305 canperform a lookup in the profile data structure 2320 using identifiersfor the subject and each of the online components to identify one moretypes of visual signals and audio signals to provide to the subject. TheNSOS 2305 can perform a lookup up in the policy data structure 2325using an identifier of the subject to obtain a policy for the subject.The NSOS 2305 can perform a lookup in the policy data structure 2325using identifiers for the subject and each of the online components toidentify a policy for the types of visual signals and audio signals toprovide to the subject.

FIG. 24B is a diagram depicting waveforms used for neural stimulationvia visual stimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with anembodiment. FIG. 24B illustrates example sequences or a set of sequences2401 that the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can generate or causeto be generated by one or more visual signaling components 150 or audiosignal components 950. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 canretrieve the sequences from a data structure stored in data repository2315 of NSOS 2305, or a data repository corresponding to NSS 105 or NSS905. The sequences can be stored in a table format, such as Table 1below. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can select predeterminedsequences to generate a set of sequences for a treatment session or timeperiod, such as the set of sequences in Table 1. In some embodiments,the NSOS 2305 can obtain a predetermined or preconfigured set ofsequences. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can construct or generatethe set of sequences or each sequences based on information obtainedfrom the subject assessment module 2350. In some embodiments, the NSOS2305 can remove or delete sequences from the set of sequences based onfeedback, such as adverse side effects. The NSOS 2305, via subjectassessment module 2350, can include sequences that are more likely tostimulate neurons in a predetermined region of the brain to oscillate ata desired frequency.

The NSOS 2305 can determine, based on the profile information, policy,and available components, to use the following sequences illustrated inexample Table 1 provide neural stimulation using both visual signals andauditory signals.

TABLE 2 Audio and Video Stimulation Sequences Timing Sequence SignalStimulation Sched- Identifier Mode Signal Type Parameter Frequency ule1755 visual light pulses Color: red; 40 Hz {t0:t8) from a laserIntensity: light source low; PW: 230a 1760 visual checkerboard color: 40Hz {t1:t4} pattern black/white; image from a intensity: tablet displayhigh; screen light PW: 230a source 1765 visual modulated PW: 40 Hz{t2:t6} ambient light 230c/230a; by a frame with actuated shutters 1770audio music from amplitude 40 Hz {t3:t5} headphones variation orspeakers from M_(a) to connected to M_(c); an audio PW: 1030a player1775 audio acoustic or PW: 1030a; 39.8 Hz   {t4:t7} audio burstsfrequency provided by variation headphones from M_(c) to or speakersM_(o); 1780 audio air pressure PW: 1030a; 40 Hz {t6:t8} generated bypressure a cochlear air varies from jet M_(c) to M_(a)

As illustrated in Table 2, each waveform sequence can include one ormore characteristics, such as a sequence identifier, a mode, a signaltype, one or more signal parameters, a modulation or stimulationfrequency, and a timing schedule. As illustrated in FIG. 24B and Table2, the sequence identifiers are 2455, 2460, 2465, 2465, 2470, 2475, and2460.

The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can receive the characteristicsof each sequence. The stimuli orchestration component 2310 can transmit,configure, load, instruct or otherwise provide the sequencecharacteristics to a signaling component 2330 a-n. In some embodiments,the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can provide the sequencecharacteristics to the visual NSS 105 or the auditory NSS 905, while insome cases the stimuli orchestration component 2310 can directly providethe sequence characteristics to the visual signaling component 150 oraudio signaling component 950.

The NSOS 2305 can determine, from the Table 1 data structure, that themode of stimulation for sequences 2455, 2460 and 2465 is visual byparsing the table and identifying the mode. The NSOS 2305, responsive todetermine the mode is visual, can provide the information orcharacteristics associated with sequences 2455, 2460 and 2465 to thevisual NSS 105. The NSS 105 (e.g., via the light generation module 110)can parse the sequence characteristics and then instruct the visualsignaling component 150 to generate and transmit the correspondingvisual signals. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can directly instructthe visual signaling component 150 to generate and transmit visualsignals corresponding to sequences 2455, 2460 and 2465.

The NSOS 2305 can determine, from the Table 1 data structure, that themode of stimulation for sequences 2470, 2475 and 2480 is audio byparsing the table and identifying the mode. The NSOS 2305, responsive todetermine the mode is audio, can provide the information orcharacteristics associated with sequences 2470, 2475 and 2480 to theauditory NSS 905. The NSS 905 (e.g., via the light generation module110) can parse the sequence characteristics and then instruct the audiosignaling component 950 to generate and transmit the corresponding audiosignals. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 can directly instruct thevisual signaling component 150 to generate and transmit visual signalscorresponding to sequences 2470, 2475 and 2480.

For example, the first sequence 2455 can include a visual signal. Thesignal type can include light pulses 235 generated by a light source 305that includes a laser. The light pulses can include light waves having awavelength corresponding to the color red in the visible spectrum. Theintensity of the light can be set to low. An intensity level of low cancorrespond to a low contrast ratio (e.g., relative to the level ofambient light) or a low absolute intensity. The pulse width for thelight burst can correspond to pulsewidth 230 a depicted in FIG. 2C. Thestimulation frequency can be 40 Hz, or correspond to a pulse rateinterval (“PRI”) of 0.025 seconds. The first sequence 2355 can run fromt₀ to t₈. The first sequence 2355 can run for the duration of thesession or treatment. The first sequence 2355 can run while one or moreother sequences are other running. The time intervals can refer toabsolute times, time periods, number of cycles, or other event. The timeinterval from t₀ to t₈ can be, for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 7 minutes, 10 minutes, 12 minutes, 15minutes, 20 minutes or more or less. The time interval can be cut shortor terminated by the subject or responsive to feedback information. Thetime intervals can be adjusted based on profile information or by thesubject via an input device.

The second sequence 2460 can be another visual signal that begins at t₁and ends at t₄. The second sequence 2460 can include a signal type of acheckerboard image pattern that is provided by a display screen of atablet. The signal parameters can include the colors black and whitesuch that the checkerboard alternates black and white squares. Theintensity can be high, which can correspond to a high contrast ratiorelative to ambient light; or there can be a high contrast between theobjects in the checkerboard pattern. The pulse width for thecheckerboard pattern can be the same as the pulse width 230 a as insequence 2455. Sequence 2460 can begin and end at a different time thansequence 2455. For example, sequence 2460 can begin at t₁, which can beoffset from to by 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 20seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, or more or less.The visual signaling component 150 can initiate the second sequence 2460at t₁, and terminate the second sequence at t₄. Thus, the secondsequence 2460 can overlap with the first sequence 2455.

While pulse trains or sequences 2455 and 2460 can overlap with oneanother, the pulses 235 of the second sequence 2460 may not overlap withthe pulses 235 of the first sequence 2455. For example, the pulses 235of the second sequence 2460 can be offset from the pulses 235 of thefirst sequence 2455 such that they are non-overlapping.

The third sequence 2465 can include a visual signal. The signal type caninclude ambient light that is modulated by actuated shutters configuredon frames (e.g., frames 400 depicted in FIG. 4B). The pulse width canvary from 230 c to 230 a in the third sequence 2465. The stimulationfrequency can still be 40 Hz, such that the PRI is the same as the PRIin sequence 2460 and 2455. The pulses 235 of the third sequence 2465 canat least partially overlap with the pulses 235 of sequence 2455, but maynot overlap with the pulses 235 of the sequence 2460. Further, the pulse235 can refer to block ambient light or allowing ambient light to beperceived by the eyes. In some embodiments, pulse 235 can correspond toblocking ambient light, in which case the laser light pulses 2455 mayappear to have a higher contrast ratio. In some cases, the pulses 235 ofsequence 2465 can correspond to allowing ambient light to enter theeyes, in which case the contrast ratio for pulses 235 of sequence 2455may be lower, which may mitigate adverse side effects.

The fourth sequence 2470 can include an auditory stimulation mode. Thefourth sequence 2470 can include upchirp pulses 1035. The audio pulsescan be provided via headphones or speakers 1205 of FIG. 12B. Forexample, the pulses 1035 can correspond to modulating music played by anaudio player 1220 as depicted in FIG. 12B. The modulation can range fromM_(a) to M_(c). The modulation can refer to modulating the amplitude ofthe music. The amplitude can refer to the volume. Thus, the NSOS 2305can instruct the audio signaling component 950 to increase the volumefrom a volume level M_(a) to a volume level M_(c) during a duration PW1030 a, and then return the volume to a baseline level or muted level inbetween pulses 1035. The PRI 240 can be 0.025, or correspond to a 40 Hzstimulation frequency. The NSOS 2305 can instruct the fourth sequence2470 to begin at t₃, which overlaps with visual stimulation sequences2455, 2460 and 2465.

The fifth sequence 2475 can include another audio stimulation mode. Thefifth sequence 2475 can include acoustic bursts. The acoustic bursts canbe provided by the headphones or speakers 1205 of FIG. 12B. The sequence2475 can include pulses 1035. The pulses 1035 can vary from one pulse toanother pulse in the sequence. The fifth waveform 2475 can be configuredto re-focus the subject to increase the subject's attention level to theneural stimulation. The fifth sequence 2475 can increase the subject'sattention level by varying parameters of the signal from one pulse tothe other pulse. The fifth sequence 2475 can vary the frequency from onepulse to the other pulse. For example, the first pulse 1035 in sequence2475 can have a higher frequency than the previous sequences. The secondpulse can be an upchirp pulse having a frequency that increases from alow frequency to a high frequency. The third pulse can be a sharperupchirp pulse that has frequency that increases from an even lowerfrequency to the same high frequency. The fifth pulse can have a lowstable frequency. The sixth pulse can be a downchirp pulse going from ahigh frequency to the lowest frequency. The seventh pulse can be a highfrequency pulse with a small pulsewidth. The fifth sequence 2475 canbeing at t₄ and end at t₇. The fifth sequence can overlap with sequence2455; and partially overlap with sequence 2465 and 2470. The fifthsequence may not overlap with sequence 2460. The stimulation frequencycan be 39.8 Hz.

The sixth sequence 2480 can include an audio stimulation mode. Thesignal type can include pressure or air provided by an air jet. Thesixth sequence can begin at t₆ and end at t₈. The sixth sequence 2480can overlap with sequence 2455, and partially overlap with sequences2465 and 2475. The sixth sequence 2480 can end the neural stimulationsession along with the first sequence 2455. The air jet can providepulses 1035 with pressure ranging from a high pressure M_(c) to a lowpressure M_(a). The pulse width can be 1030 a, and the stimulationfrequency can be 40 Hz.

The NSOS 2305 can adjust, change, or otherwise modify sequences orpulses based on feedback. In some embodiments, the NSOS 2305 candetermine, based on the profile information, policy, and availablecomponents, to provide neural stimulation using both visual signals andauditory signals. The NSOS 2305 can determine to synchronize thetransmit time of the first visual pulse train and the first audio pulsetrain. The NSOS 2305 can transmit the first visual pulse train and thefirst audio pulse train for a first duration (e.g., 1 minute, 2 minutes,or 3 minutes). At the end of the first duration, the NSOS 2305 can pingan EEG probe to determine a frequency of neural oscillation in a regionof the brain. If the frequency of oscillation is not at the desiredfrequency of oscillation, the NSOS 2305 can select a sequence out oforder or change the timing schedule of a sequence.

For example, the NSOS 2305 can ping a feedback sensor at t₁. The NSOS2305 can determine, at t₁, that neurons of the primary visual cortex areoscillating at the desired frequency. Thus, the NSOS 2305 can determineto forego transmitting sequences 2460 and 2465 because neurons of theprimary visual cortex are already oscillating at the desired frequency.The NSOS 2305 can determine to disable sequences 2460 and 2465. The NSOS2305, responsive to the feedback information, can disable the sequences2460 and 2465. The NSOS 2305, responsive to the feedback information,can modify a flag in the data structure corresponding to Table 1 toindicate that the sequences 2460 and 2465 are disabled.

The NSOS 2305 can receive feedback information at t₂. At t₂, the NSOS2305 can determine that the frequency of neural oscillation in theprimary visual cortex is different from the desired frequency.Responsive to determining the difference, the NSOS 2305 can enable orre-enable sequence 2465 in order to stimulate the neurons in the primaryvisual cortex such that the neurons may oscillate at the desiredfrequency.

Similarly, the NSOS 2305 can enable or disable audio stimulationsequences 2470, 2475 and 2480 based on feedback related to the auditorycortex. In some cases, the NSOS 2305 can determine to disable all audiostimulation sequences if the visual sequence 2455 is successfullyaffecting the frequency of neural oscillations in the brain at each timeperiod t₁, t₂, t₃, t₄, t₅, t₆, t₇, and t₈. In some cases, the NSOS 2305can determine that the subject is not paying attention at t₄, and gofrom only enabling visual sequence 2455 directly to enabling audiosequence 2455 to re-focus the user using a different stimulation mode.

Q. Method for Neural Stimulation Via Visual Stimulation and AuditoryStimulation

FIG. 25 is a flow diagram of a method for neural stimulation via visualstimulation and auditory stimulation in accordance with an embodiment.The method 2500 can be performed by one or more system, component,module or element depicted in FIGS. 1-24B, including, for example, aneural stimulation orchestration component or neural stimulationssystem. In brief overview, the NSOS can identify an multiple modes ofsignals to provide at block 2505. At block 2510, the NSOS can generateand transmit the identified signals corresponding to the multiple modes.At 2515 the NSOS can receive or determine feedback associated withneural activity, physiological activity, environmental parameters, ordevice parameters. At 2520 the NSOS can manage, control, or adjust theone or more signals based on the feedback.

R. Selecting Dosing Parameters of Stimulation Signals to InduceSynchronized Neural Oscillations in the Brain of a Subject

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to selectingdosing parameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject. Multi-modal stimuli (e.g.,visual, auditory, etc.) can elicit brainwave effects or stimulation. Themulti-modal stimuli can adjust, control or otherwise manage thefrequency of the neural oscillations to provide beneficial effects toone or more cognitive states or cognitive functions of the brain or theimmune system, while mitigating or preventing adverse consequences on acognitive state or cognitive function.

The frequency of neural oscillations, as well as other factors that maybe relevant to the efficacy of treatment, also can be affected byvarious factors that may be specific to the subject. Subjects havingcertain physical characteristics (e.g., age, gender, dominant hand,cognitive function, mental illness, etc.) may respond differently tostimulation signals based on these characteristics or theircombinations. In addition, other non-inherent factors, such as thestimulus method, the subject's attention level, the time of day at whichthe therapy is administered, and various factors related to thesubject's diet (e.g., blood sugar, caffeine intake, nicotine intake,etc.) also may impact the efficacy of treatment. These and other factorsalso may impact the quality of therapy indirectly by affecting thesubject's adherence to a therapy regimen and by increasing or decreasingunpleasant side effects or otherwise rendering the therapy intolerablefor the subject.

In addition to the subject-specific factors described above, otherfactors also may impact the efficacy of treatment for certain subjects.Parameters related to stimulus signals may increase or decrease theefficacy of therapy for certain subjects. Such parameters may generallybe referred to as dosing parameters. For example, subjects may respondto therapies differently based on dosing parameters such as the modality(or the ordered combination of modalities) of deliverance for thestimulation signal, the duration of a stimulus signal, the intensity ofthe stimulus signal, and the brain region targeted by the stimulussignal. Monitoring conditions associated with the subject in real time,as well as over a longer period of time (e.g., days, weeks, months, oryears) can provide information that may be used to adjust a therapyregimen to make the therapy more effective and/or more tolerable for anindividual subject. In some instances, the therapy also may be adjustedbased in part of the subject-specific factors described above. Describedfurther below are systems and methods for selecting dosing parameters ofstimulation signals to induce synchronized neural oscillations in thebrain of the subject.

S. System for Selecting Dosing Parameters of Stimulation Signals toInduce Synchronized Neural Oscillations in the Brain of the Subject

FIG. 26 is a block diagram depicting a system 2600 for selecting dosingparameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject in accordance with an embodiment.The system 2600 includes components that are similar to the componentsof the system 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the system 900 shown in FIG. 9,and components having like reference numerals in these figures canperform similar functions. For example, the system 2600 includes aneural stimulation system (NSS) 2605 having a profile manager 2625, aside effects management module 2630, a feedback monitor 2635, a datarepository 2640 storing subject profiles 2645 a-2645 n (generallyreferred to as profiles 2645), and an unwanted frequency filteringmodule 2620, each of which can be configured to perform functionssimilar to those performed by the corresponding components havingsimilar names and identified with similar reference numerals in thesystems 100 and 900 shown in FIGS. 1 and 9, respectively.

The system 2600 differs from each of the systems 100 and 900 in that thesystem 2600 can be used to select dosing parameters and to provideneural stimulation signals using a variety of modalities. For example,while the system 100 is intended primarily for delivering visual signalsand the system 900 is intended primarily for delivering auditorysignals, the system 2600 can be configured to deliver neural stimulationsignals that may include any type and form of signal delivered viavarious mechanisms, such as visual signals and auditory signals. Thus,the system 2600 includes a signaling component 2650, which may beconfigured to deliver both audio and visual signals for neuralstimulation signal, rather than merely a visual signaling component suchas the visual signaling component 150 shown in FIG. 1 or merely an audiosignaling component such as the audio signaling component 950 shown inFIG. 9. It should be understood that in some implementations, thesignaling component 2650 can be implemented using a variety of hardwaredevices, such as devices capable of outputting light signals andauditory signals. In addition, the system 2600 also includes a filteringcomponent 2655 and a feedback component 2660, which may be similar tothe filtering components 155 and 955 and the feedback components 160 and960 shown in FIGS. 1 and 9, respectively.

The system 2600 also includes an intensity determination module 2665, aduration determination module 2670, a modality determination module2675, and a dosing management module 2680. Together, these componentsmay perform functionality similar to the functionality of the lightgeneration module 110 and the light adjustment module 115 shown in FIG.1, as well as the audio generation module 910 and the audio generationmodule 915 shown in FIG. 9. In addition, the intensity determinationmodule 2665, the duration determination module 2670, the modalitydetermination module 2675, and the dosing management module 2680 alsomay be configured to select appropriate dosing parameters for a therapyregimen based on a variety of factors. The intensity determinationmodule 2665, the duration determination module 2670, the modalitydetermination module 2675, and the dosing management module 2680 caneach include at least one processing unit or other logic device such asprogrammable logic array engine, or module configured to communicatewith the data repository 2640. The intensity determination module 2665,the duration determination module 2670, the modality determinationmodule 2675, and the dosing management module 2680 can be separatecomponents, a single component, or part of the NSS 2605. The system 2600and its components, such as the NSS 2605, may include hardware elements,such as one or more processors, logic devices, or circuits. The system2600 and its components, such as the NSS 2605, can include one or morehardware or interface components depicted in system 700 in FIGS. 7A and7B. For example, a component of system 2600 can include or execute onone or more processors 721, access storage 728 or memory 722, andcommunicate via network interface 718.

T. Subject Profile for Storing Subject-Specific Data

FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a subject profile 2645 that can beincluded in the system 2600 shown in FIG. 26 in accordance with anembodiment. It should be understood that the data repository 2640 shownin FIG. 26 can be configured to store one or more profiles 2645, andthat each profile may store information related to a respective subject.Referring now to FIGS. 26 and 27, each profile 2645 stored in the datarepository 2640 can include information relating to intrinsic subjectcharacteristics 2705, subject data 2710, subject cognitive function data2715, therapy history 2720, reported side effects 2725, and subjectresponse history 2730. Storing such subject-specific data in respectiveprofiles 2645 can allow each subject to receive therapy that makes useof dosing parameters that are personalized and tailored to the subject,based on the content of the subject's profile 2645. In someimplementations, such personalization can be beneficial because responseto a certain therapy regimen can vary widely from subject to subject. Inaddition, the same subject may respond differently to a given therapyregimen at different times depending on a variety of factors that may berelated to the information stored in the profile 2645. Thus,personalization can result in more effective treatment for eachindividual subject.

Each of the components of the subject profile 2645 can be stored, forexample, in a memory element of a computing system, such as a databasethat may be used to implement the data repository 2640. The componentsof the profile 2645 may be stored in any suitable format, includingtext-based and numerical data, and may be maintained in a variety ofdata structures, including character strings, arrays, linked-lists,vectors, and the like. In some implementations, the information storedin each profile 2645 may be accessible by the intensity determinationmodule 2665, the duration determination module 2670, the modalitydetermination module 2675, and the dosing management module 2680. Forexample, any one of the intensity determination module 2665, theduration determination module 2670, the modality determination module2675, and the dosing management module 2680 may retrieve informationcorresponding to the intrinsic subject characteristics 2705. Intrinsicsubject characteristics 2705 may include any characteristics that areinherent to the subject. Such information can include identificationinformation used to distinguish the subject from other subjects for whomprofiles 2645 exist.

The intrinsic subject characteristics 2705 may also include othersubject specific information such as the subject's age, gender,ethnicity, dominant hand, documented illnesses (including mentalillnesses), access to a caregiver, an assessment of the subject'ssenses, such as eyesight and hearing, information about the subject'smobility, information about the subject's cognitive state and functions,interests, daily routine, habits, traits, visual and auditory contentpreferences, among others.

The profile 2645 also can store subject data 2710. Such information mayinclude any information relating to non-inherent characteristics of thesubject. In some implementations, the subject data can includeinformation that pertains to the subject's current physical state orcondition or mental state or condition. In some implementations, thesubject data can include information that pertains to one morephysiological states of the subject. For instance, the subject data 2710may include blood sugar level, caffeine level, or nicotine level, asthese factors may impact the efficacy of a treatment session. Althoughthere may be a desire to measure actual levels of physiological markers,the levels may be presumed based on information received from thesubject, for instance, time since last meal or beverage, time since lastcaffeine intake, time since last nicotine intake, among others.

In one example, the dosing management module 2680 may determine that thesubject has a low caffeine level, for example based on informationreported by the subject, such as the last time the subject consumedcoffee. The dosing management module 2680 may therefore furtherdetermine that therapy should be delayed until after the subject hasconsumed additional caffeine, and thus may select a dosing parametercorresponding to the time at which therapy should be administered to beat a future time after the subject has had an opportunity to consumeadditional caffeine. For some subjects, caffeine may help to increasethe subject's attention level during a therapy session, which canimprove efficacy of the treatment session when the subject's attentionis required for effective treatment (e.g., when the subject must focushis or her eyes on a visual stimulation signal as part of the treatmentsession). Similarly, the subject's blood sugar and nicotine conditionsmay impact attentiveness, and the dosing management module 2680 maydetermine that a therapy session should be delayed based on suchinformation.

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can beconfigured to use subject cognitive function data to select dosingparameters. The profile 2645 can store this information as subjectcognitive function data 2715. Such data may be collected periodicallyover a long period of time (e.g., once every week or once every month).A cognitive function test may be administered to the subject, and thesubject's test results can be stored as the subject cognitive functiondata 2715. This information may be relevant to a determination ofappropriate dosing parameters for the subject, particularly if thesubject suffers from a disease that may impair his or her cognitivefunction over time, such as Alzheimer's disease.

In one example, the intensity determination module 2665 may retrieve thecognitive function data 2715 from the profile 2645, and may determinethat the subject's cognitive function has been trending downwards overtime. As a result, the intensity determination module 2665 may determinethat the intensity of stimulation signals delivered to the subjectduring therapy sessions should be increased, in order to combat thesubject's decreasing cognitive function. Similarly, the durationdetermination module 2670 may retrieve the cognitive function data 2715from the profile 2645, and may determine that the duration ofstimulation signals delivered to the subject during therapy sessionsshould be increased, in order to combat the subject's decreasingcognitive function.

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can beconfigured to use subject therapy history data to select dosingparameters. The profile 2645 can store such information in the subjecttherapy history 2720. Such data may include any information relating toprevious therapy sessions that have been administered to the subject.Therapy history 2720 may include an identification of the time at whichprevious therapy sessions took place, a location at which the therapytook place, the modalities used during those sessions, and theintensity, duration, frequency, and other characteristics of stimulationsignals that were delivered to the subject during those sessions. Inaddition, the subject therapy history can include information indicatingwhether the therapy was completed, whether the subject was attentiveduring the therapy as well as indications of times during which thesubject may not have been attentive. Moreover, the subject therapyhistory can include other subjective information pertaining to thetherapy, for instance, the subject can indicate that the therapy waseasy or hard, engaging or boring, enjoyable or unpleasant. Moreover, thesubject can quantify how the subject performed during the therapy,especially in therapies where the subject's undivided attention ispreferred.

The dosing management module 2680 may use such historical data to adjustthe dosing parameters of future therapy sessions, for example based on adetermination that the dosing parameters for previous sessions appear tobe ineffective for the subject. Thus, in some implementations,information from multiple components of the profile 2645 may be combinedby the dosing management module 2680 to select dosing parameters. Forexample, if the subject cognitive function data 2715 indicates that thesubject's cognitive function is deteriorating over time, the dosingmanagement module 2680 may then examine the therapy history 2720 and mayselect dosing parameters for future therapy sessions that differ fromthose represented in the therapy history 2720, based on a determinationthat the previous therapies do not appear to be helping to improve thesubject's cognitive function.

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can beconfigured to use side effects reported by the subject or otherwiseknown to select dosing parameters. The profile 2645 also stores reportedside effects 2725. In some implementations, side effects may beself-reported by the subject after one or more therapy sessions havebeen administered. Side effects can vary from subject to subject, andmay be based at least in part on the dosing parameters used in previoustherapy sessions. For example, some subjects may be sensitive to certainintensities, which may trigger unpleasant side effects such asmigraines. Thus, in an example, the intensity determination module 2665may determine that the subject should be subjected to visual signalshaving a relatively low intensity, based on a determination that thesubject has suffered from migraines after previous therapy sessions. Themodality for treatment also may impact subject side effects. Somesubjects may experience headaches as a result of being exposed toauditory signals. Thus, the modality determination module 2675 maydetermine that the subject should be treated with a different stimulusmodality (e.g., visual signals), based on a determination that thereported side effects 2725 indicate the subject has suffered fromheadaches or nausea after previous therapy sessions involving auditorysignals.

The profile 2645 also stores stimulation response history 2730.Stimulation response history 2730 may indicate how well a subjectresponded to previous therapy sessions (e.g., how well a desired patternof neural oscillation was induced in the subject as a result of theprevious therapy sessions). As described above, this information can becombined with other information included in the profile 2645 in order toselect dosing parameters for future therapy sessions. For example, insome implementations the dosing management module 2680 can retrieve boththerapy history 2720 and stimulation response history 2730 from theprofile 2645. The dosing management module 2680 can then determine acorrelation between the information included in the therapy history 2720and the information included in the stimulation response history 2730.In one example, the dosing management module 2680 can determine thatcertain previous therapy sessions appear to result in betterentrainment, and can therefore determine that future therapy sessionsshould make use of dosing parameters similar to those that wereeffective in the past. In contrast, if the dosing management module 2680instead determines that certain previous therapy sessions do not appearto be effective based on the subject's stimulation response history2730, the dosing management module 2680 can determine that futuretherapy sessions should make use of dosing parameters that differ fromthose that were effective in the past, such as by using differentmodalities than were used during the previous ineffective therapysessions.

The dosing management module 2680 can determine such information, forexample, by retrieving it from the stimulation response history 2730 ofthe subject profile 2645. In some implementations, the stimulationresponse history 2730 can be stored as entries in a database having oneor more associated data fields. For example, each individual therapysession may be recorded as one entry in the database, and may include anentrainment data field indicating how well the subject responded to thetherapy. In some implementations, such a data field may be formatted asan integer score (e.g., an integer between one and ten), with a highervalue indicating better entrainment. Thus, in this example, the dosingmanagement module 2680 can determine whether a particular therapysession resulted in good entrainment by comparing the value stored inthe entrainment data field to a minimum threshold value (e.g., a five ona scale of one to ten). The dosing management module 2680 can determinethat therapy sessions having an associated entrainment data field with avalue of five or greater were effective, and can therefore select dosingparameters for future therapy sessions to be similar to those of theeffective therapy sessions having entrainment data field values thatmeet or exceed the threshold value.

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can useadditional information included in the stimulation response history 2730to select dosing parameters for a future therapy session. For example,after a therapy session has been completed, the subject may be asked toanswer questions about the therapy session, and the subject's responsesto the questions can be recorded as entries in the stimulation responsehistory 2730. In some implementations, the subject may be asked whetherhe or she experienced any discomfort during the therapy session and, ifso, what level of discomfort was experienced. Similarly, the subject maybe asked whether he or she suffered from any side effects as a result ofthe therapy session, and also may be asked to rank the severity of theside effects.

In some implementations, such information may be recorded in thesimulation response history 2730 using data fields formatted in a mannersimilar to that described above in connection with the entrainment datafield. For example, a side effects data field may have an integer valuebetween one and ten, with a higher value indicating more severe sideeffects suffered after the therapy session. A comfort level data fieldmay have an integer value between one and ten, with a higher valueindicating more a greater comfort level for the subject during thetherapy session. In some implementations the dosing management module2680 can be configured to retrieve such entries from the simulationresponse history 2730 and to compare the values of the entries tothreshold values. If the value of the side effects data field exceedsthe threshold value, the dosing management module can be configured toselect different dosing parameters for future therapy sessions, in anattempt to avoid recreating the therapy that led to side effects for thesubject. Similarly, if the value of the comfort level data field exceedsthe threshold value, the dosing management module can be configured toselect similar dosing parameters for future therapy sessions, as suchparameters appear to be tolerable the subject.

U. Generation of a Personalized Therapy Regimen for a Subject

As described above, dosing parameters may include the modality (or theordered combination of modalities) of deliverance for a stimulationsignal, a duration of the stimulation signal, an intensity of thestimulation signal, or a brain region targeted by the stimulationsignal, as well as other factors. Generally, selecting appropriatedosing parameters can have a number of therapeutic benefits for asubject. For example, carefully selecting dosing parameters can reducethe likelihood of complications, unwanted side effects, or otherdiscomfort to the subject that may be caused by neural stimulationtherapy. Dosing parameters also may be selected in order to increase theefficacy of a therapy regimen.

In some implementations, dosing parameters may be selected in asubject-specific fashion based on information that is unique to thesubject. For example, dosing parameters for a subject having a first setof characteristics may be selected to be different from the dosingparameters for a subject having a second set of characteristics, basedon the differences between the first and second sets of characteristics.In some implementations, the dosing parameters for a therapy regimen canbe selected in a subject-specific fashion by using information includedin the profile 2645 as shown in FIG. 27.

A therapy regimen may include multiple individual therapy sessions, eachof which can be administered to the subject over a long period of time(e.g., days, weeks, months, or years). In some implementations, thefrequency of individual therapy sessions for a subject may be selectedbased on part on the disease stage or cognitive function level of thesubject. For example, a subject having a relatively advanced stage of adisease that impairs cognitive function may have more frequent therapysessions included in the regimen (e.g., three sessions per week, fivesessions per week, or seven sessions per week), while a subject whosecognitive function is stronger may require less frequent sessions (e.g.,one session per week or two sessions per week). In some implementations,the dosing parameters may differ across individual sessions over thecourse of a regimen as well. For example, a first therapy session mayinclude primarily visual stimulation signals, while a subsequent therapysession may include primarily auditory stimulation signals.

The dosing parameters for each therapy session can be selected based onthe information included in the subject profile 2645. In someimplementations, the dosing parameters may be selected based in part onthe results of previous therapy sessions. For example, in someimplementations, the subject may be monitored during a therapy sessionusing a variety of sensors, such as ECG sensors, heart rate sensors, orgalvanic skin response sensors, and the dosing parameters for thesession may be updated in real time based on the outputs of the sensors.Such a therapy session can be referred to as a closed loop therapysession. In some other implementations, the results of a therapy sessioncan be used to update the dosing parameters of a subsequent therapysession. For example, the subject may provide feedback on a therapysession (e.g., feedback related to the subject's comfort level duringthe therapy session or side effects suffered as a result of the therapysession), and this feedback can be used to adjust the dosing parametersof a future therapy session. This may be referred to as open looptherapy. These concepts are described more fully below.

i. Dosage Parameter Selection

To select dosing parameters for a given subject, the system 2600 canmake use of information relating to a variety of factors. For example,personalization factors (e.g., characteristics, habits, traits, andother subject-specific information) may be accounted for in selectingdosing parameters. In some implementations, information regarding theconditions that exist during the therapy session also may impact thedosing parameters selected for the therapy session. For example, if theenvironment in which the therapy session is to be conducted isrelatively loud, auditory signals for the therapy session may beselected to have higher amplitudes, in order to overcome the ambientnoise in the environment. In some implementations, other conditions,such as the weather outdoors and the habits or interests of the subjectmay be used to select dosage parameters. For example, if the weather ispleasant and the subject has indicated that he or she enjoys beingoutdoors, the therapy session may be administered in an outdoor setting,such as through the use of headphones that deliver auditory stimulationsignals to the subject while the subject takes a walk outdoors.

The use of real-time feedback also may inform decisions related todosing parameters. For example, in an open loop therapy regimen, dosingparameters may be selected prior to a treatment session and may not beadjusted, if at all, until after the session is complete and asubsequent session is desired. In contrast, in a closed loop treatmentregimen, subject conditions may be monitored during the course of atreatment session, and the dosing parameters may be adjusted in realtime during the session based on the monitored conditions. Selection ofdosing parameters based on these and other factors is described morefully below.

These factors may be relevant to the selection of dosing parameters forthe subject both individually and in combination.

ii. Selecting Dosage Parameters Based on Eyesight of Subject

For example, in some implementations the modules of the system 2600 canbe configured to determine whether a subject has poor eyesight. Suchinformation may be stored, for example, in the intrinsic subjectcharacteristics 2705 of the profile 2645. The modules of the system 2600can be configured to determine that that a subject having poor eyesightshould be treated with a therapy regimen that relies on modalities otherthan visual stimulation, because the subject may be less likely torespond well to visual stimulation as a result of poor eyesight. Thus,in this example, the modality determination module 2675 can beconfigured to select an alternative modality (e.g., auditorystimulation) for such a subject. However, it should be recognized thatin some cases, it may be desirable to provide visual stimulation to asubject having poor eyesight as the subject may not observe or recognizethe visual stimulation but may still reap from the effects of the neuralstimulation caused by the visual stimulation.

In another example, the modules of the system 2600 can be configured todetermine that the subject is particularly sensitive to light, such asby retrieving such information from the intrinsic subjectcharacteristics 2705 or the stimulation response history 2730 of thesubject profile 2645. Based on such a determination, the dosingmanagement module 2680 can select an alternative modality other thanvisual stimulation for the subject. Such a selection may help to avoiddiscomfort for the subject.

In a third example, the modules of the system 2600 may retrieveintrinsic subject characteristics 2705 from the profile 2645, and maydetermine that the subject has difficulty seeing blue light (e.g., lighthaving a wavelength of about 450-495 nm), but does not have troubleseeing yellow light (e.g., light having a wavelength of about 570-590nm). As a result, the dosing management module 2680 may determine thatany visual stimulation signals delivered to the subject should have afrequency in the yellow light range, rather than in the blue lightrange. In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 maydetermine that any visual stimulation signals delivered to the subjectshould have a frequency in the blue light range as it may not beperceptible to the subject but may still elicit a desired neuralresponse.

iii. Selecting Dosage Parameters Based on Hearing Ability of Subject

In some implementations, the intensity determination module 2665 may beconfigured to determine that the intensity of an auditory-based therapy(e.g., the amplitude of an audio stimulation signal delivered to thesubject) should be increased, based on a determination that the subjecthas relatively poor hearing. Poor hearing may prevent the subject fromresponding well to audio stimulation signals that are of low intensity,and therefore the intensity determination module 2665 can determine thata higher intensity auditory signal would be more beneficial for thesubject. It should be recognized that in some cases, it may be desirableto provide auditory signals at lower intensities (below what the subjectcan recognize) to a subject having poor hearing, as the subject may notperceive or recognize the auditory signals but may still reap from theeffects of the neural stimulation caused by the auditory stimulation.

In another example, the duration determination module 2670 may determinethat the duration of an auditory stimulation signal should be increasedto account for the subject's poor hearing. The intensity determinationmodule 2665, the duration determination module 2670, and the modalitydetermination module 2675 can each report information to the dosingmanagement module 2680. The dosing management module 2680 can thendetermine dosing parameters for the subject based in part on theinformation received from the intensity determination module 2665, theduration determination module 2670, and the modality determinationmodule 2675.

iv. Selecting Dosing Parameters Based on Combinations of Factors

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can beconfigured to select dosing parameters based on a combination of theinformation received from the intensity determination module 2665, theduration determination module 2670, and the modality determinationmodule 2675. For example, the modality determination module 2675 maydetermine that the subject should be subjected to a therapy thatincludes visual stimulation, based on a determination that the subjecthas impaired hearing and therefore would not respond well to auditorysignals. For the same subject, the intensity determination module 2665may determine that the subject also has relatively poor eyesight, andthat visual stimulation signals delivered to the subject should have arelatively high intensity. The dosing management module 2680 can thendetermine that the selected modality should be visual stimulation forthis subject, and that the visual stimulation signal should have a highintensity. As discussed in this example and other examples providedherein, there may be instances where the stimulation is selected to takeadvantage of the subject's compromised sense to effectuate treatmentwithout inconveniencing the subject.

V. Techniques for Generating and Utilizing a Predictive Model toGenerate a Therapy Regimen

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 also maydevelop a predictive model that can be used to treat subjects in thefuture, based on information included in the subject profiles 2645. Forexample, as described above, the dosing management module may determinecorrelations between certain forms of information included within aprofile 2645, such as a correlation between subject cognitive functiondata 2715 or stimulation response history 2730, and information includedin the intrinsic subject characteristics 2705, subject data 2710,therapy history 2720, or reported side effects 2725. In someimplementations, the dosing management module 2680 may aggregate suchinformation across multiple profiles 2645 to determine largercorrelations and patterns. In one example, the dosing management module2680 may determine that subjects in a certain age range tend to respondwell to particular stimulation modalities. As a result, the dosingmanagement module 2680 may select a similar modality for a new subjectwho also is in that age range, even if there is limited or no therapyhistory 2720, subject cognitive function data 2715, or stimulationresponse history 2730 for the new subject. Similarly, the dosingmanagement module 2680 may determine that subjects who share similarintrinsic characteristics 2705 tend to report similar side effects for aparticular stimulation modality, based on the information included inthe reported side effects 2725 and the therapy history 2720 across agiven set of profiles 2645. As a result, when selecting dosingparameters for a new subject having intrinsic subject characteristics2705 similar to those in the set of profiles 2645, the dosing managementmodule 2680 may select a modality different from the modality thatappears to be causing unpleasant side effects for the group of subjectswho share those intrinsic characteristics 2705.

W. Techniques for Promoting Subject Adherence to a Therapy Regimen

In some implementations, the dosing management module 2680 can selectdosing parameters in a manner that increases subject adherence to atherapy regimen for a subject. For example, the dosing management modulemay retrieve therapy history 2720 for the subject. In order to increasethe likelihood that the subject will adhere to a therapy regimen in thefuture, the dosing management module 2680 may select dosing parametersfor future therapy sessions that differ from those used in previoussessions, because repeated therapy sessions may become boring orannoying for the subject if the same dosing parameters are used forevery session, thereby making the subject less likely to participate infuture therapy sessions. This can be particularly useful inimplementations in which a therapy session may be self-administered bythe subject, for example in the subject's home without the supervisionof a caregiver or other medical professional.

In one example, the dosing management module 2680 may determine thatvisual stimulation is to be provided to the subject. In addition, thedosing management module 2680 may further determine that the visualstimulation is to be delivered to the subject while the subject viewsimages on a video display screen. To increase subject adherence, thedosing management module 2680 can be configured to select images thatare likely to keep the subject's interest. For example, in someimplementations, the subject may be asked to provide photographs ofloved ones, which may be stored in the subject profile 2645. The dosingmanagement module may retrieve such images from the profile 2645 anddisplay them to the subject during the therapy session, in order to helpthe subject focus on the video screen. Similarly, the subject may beasked to provide a number of topics that the subject finds interesting,and these topics may be stored in the subject profile 2645. The dosingmanagement module may be configured to select images related to thetopics provided by the subject in order to hold the subject's interestduring the therapy session.

In another example, the dosing management module 2680 may determine thatauditory stimulation is to be provided to the subject. To increasesubject adherence, the dosing management module 2680 can be configuredto select an audio file that is likely to keep the subject's interest,and such audio may be played during the therapy session (e.g., auditorystimulation pulses may be provided over the selected audio file, so thatthe subject can listen to the selected audio file while receivingtreatment). In some implementations, the subject may be asked to provideaudio files that interest the subject, which may be stored in thesubject profile 2645. The dosing management module may retrieve suchaudio files from the profile 2645, and the selected audio files may beplayed (e.g., via a loudspeaker) during the therapy session, in increasethe subject's enjoyment of the therapy session.

In some implementations, the modules of the system 2600 can beconfigured to incorporate elements of game playing in order to increasesubject engagement. Such a technique can be referred to as“gamification.” The dosing management module 2680 can be configured toselect dosing parameters that reward the subject for adhering to atherapy regimen. For example, the dosing management module 2680 candisplay a message to a subject indicating that if the subject continuesto focus on a display screen that is being used to administer a therapysession, then the subject can expect to see a series of images of thesubject's friends or family members. The attention level of the subjectcan be monitored and, if the subject is attentive, the dosing managementmodule 2680 can select a sequence of images showing friends and familymembers that are to be shown to the subject and updated at regularintervals while the subject remains attentive.

X. Open Loop Therapy Techniques

As described above, the intensity determination module 2665, theduration determination module 2670, the modality determination module2675, and the dosing management module 2680 may select dosing parametersin an open loop fashion based on a variety of factors. In general,dosing parameters selected in an open loop fashion are not adjusted inresponse to feedback received during the therapy session. For example,an open loop therapy session may include dosing parameters selectedbased on a modality determined by the modality determination module2675, a signal intensity determined by the intensity duration module2665, and a signal duration determined by the duration determinationmodule 2670, but these parameters may follow a static therapy regimenover the course of the therapy session. The static therapy regimen mayinclude the use of multiple stimulation modalities and may includewaveforms that vary such that there is a variation in the stimulationprovided to the subject during the therapy session. However, the therapyregimen remains unchanged during the entirety of the session.

In some implementations, the modules of the system 2600 can beconfigured to update dosing parameters for a subsequent therapy sessionbased on the results of a previous therapy session. For example, asdescribed above in Section U, the dosing management module 2680 canadjust the dosing parameters of subsequent therapy sessions in order torepeat dosing parameters that appear to result in a high level ofentrainment for the subject, or to avoid dosing parameters that appearto cause unwanted side effects or discomfort for the subject. Suchadjust of dosing parameters for subsequent therapy sessions based on theresults of previous therapy sessions also may be referred to as openloop therapy.

Y. Closed Loop Therapy Techniques

In some implementations, the intensity determination module 2665, theduration determination module 2670, the modality determination module2675, and the dosing management module 2680 may adjust or update thedosing parameters in the middle of a therapy session, based on real-timefeedback received from the subject during the session. Adjustment ofdosing parameters or in the therapy regimen more generally, based onsuch feedback can be referred to as closed loop therapy.

FIG. 28 is a graphical representation of adjusting a therapy sessionbased on feedback collected during the therapy session. A graph 2805shows a series of scheduled stimulation pulses included in a singletherapy session along a time axis. As shown, the pulses occur duringintervals labeled as T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, and T6. In this example, theintervals T5 and T6 do not include any scheduled stimulation pulses. Itshould be understood that the graph 2805 may represent pulses of anymodality (e.g., visual stimulation pulses or auditory stimulationpulses). It should also be understood that the amplitude of the pulses,the duration of the pulse intervals, and the frequency of the pulses isillustrative only, and that in some implementations, these factors maybe varied without departing from the scope of this disclosure.

A graph 2810 shows the attention level of the subject over time. Highervalues indicate that the subject is more attentive, and lower valuesindicate that the subject is less attentive. In some implementations,subject attention level may be correlated with quality of a therapysession, such as when the subject's attention is required for thestimulation pulses to be delivered effectively. For example, if thestimulation pulses are delivered via a video display screen, it may benecessary for the subject to focus his or her attention on the videodisplay screen in order to receive the benefit of the stimulationpulses. Thus, the graph 2810 includes a threshold L for user attentionlevel. In this example, it can be assumed that the user's attentionlevel must be greater than or equal to the threshold L in order for thetherapy to be effectively delivered. As shown in the graph 2810, thesubject's attention level varies over time, and is sometimes below thethreshold L. If the subject's attention level is below the threshold Lduring any of the pulse intervals, the subject may not receive thebenefit of the pulses delivered during those intervals.

In some implementations, the subject's attention level can be monitoredby a sensor. For example, one or more camera sensors can be configuredto track the subject's eyes to determine whether they are aligned in aparticular orientation that allows the subject to perceive thestimulation pulses (e.g., whether the subject's eyes are focused on avideo screen that delivers the stimulation pulses). During time periodsin which the subject's eyes are appropriately focused, the subject'sattention level may be recorded as relatively high (e.g., above thethreshold L). During time periods in which the subject's eyes are notappropriately focused, the subject's attention level may be recorded asrelatively low (e.g., below the threshold L).

The graphs 2815, 2820, and 2825 show adjusted stimulation pulses thatmay be delivered to the subject based on the attention level of thesubject over time. Referring now to the graph 2815, two additionalstimulation pulses are delivered to the subject during intervals T5 andT6, which originally did not include any schedule pulses as shown in thegraph 2805. In some implementations, the additional pulses deliveredduring the intervals T5 and T6 can be useful because the subject'sattention level was below the threshold L for portions of the timeperiods during which the scheduled pulses were delivered (i.e.,intervals T2 and T4). Because the subject may not receive the benefitsof the pulses delivered during the intervals T2 and T4 as a result ofthe relatively low attention level during portions of these intervals,the overall effect of the therapy session may be reduced. Thus, theadditional pulses delivered during the intervals T5 and T6 can beadministered to compensate for the subjects low attention level duringsome of the scheduled pulses.

The graph 2820 shows stimulation pulses that are intended to refocus thesubject's attention when it appears that the subject's attention levelmay be below the threshold L during certain time intervals. For example,the subject's attention level falls at the end of the interval T2. Thus,the graph 2820 includes a pulse that occurs just before the beginning ofthe interval T3, which is intended to recapture the subject's attentionso that the subject's attention level will be above the threshold Lduring the interval T3. As shown in the graph 2810, the subject'sattention level increases just before the beginning of the interval T3as a result of the pulse shown on the left-hand side of the graph 2820.Before the time period T4, the subject's attention level again dropsbelow the threshold L. As a result, the graph 2820 shows a second pulsethat occurs before the interval T4 in order to refocus the subject'sattention. However, the second pulse shown in the graph 2820 appears tobe ineffective, as the subject's attention level does not rise above thethreshold L for the beginning of the interval T4. It should beunderstood that the modality associated with the graph 2820 need not bethe same as the modality associated with the graph 2805. For example,the scheduled pulses shown in the graph 2805 may be visual stimulationpulses, and the pulses shown in the graph 2820 may be auditory pulsesthat are intended to remind the subject to refocus his attentionappropriately.

The graph 2825 shows adjusted stimulation pulses that are intended tocombat the subject's inattention during certain time intervals. Forexample, the subject's attention level drops at the end of the intervalT2. As a result, the graph 2825 includes a pulse that occurssimultaneous with the subject's attention dropping during the intervalT2, and continues until the end of the interval T2. It should be notedthat the amplitude of the adjusted pulses shown in the graph 2825 islarger than the amplitude of the scheduled pulses shown in the graph2805. Such a larger amplitude can serve to refocus the subject'sattention, or can be used to increase the effectiveness of pulses thatthe user is not sufficiently focused on. In some implementations, thelarger amplitude of the pulses shown in the graph 2825 may correspond toa brighter visual stimulation signal or a louder auditory stimulationsignal, relative to the signals used to generate the scheduled pulsesshown in the graph 2805. As shown in the graph 2825, a second adjustedpulse having a high amplitude occurs during the beginning of theinterval T4, when the subject's attention level is relatively low.However, when the subject's attention level changes to exceed thethreshold level L towards the end of the time interval T4, the adjustedpulse is terminated, as it is no longer necessary.

In some implementations, adjusted pulses different from those shown inFIG. 28 may be used. Furthermore, adjusted pulses may be delivered tothe subject in other scenarios not illustrated in FIG. 28. In someimplementations, adjusted pulses may be delivered in order to increasethe subject's comfort level during a therapy session. For example, ifsensor data (e.g., heart rate sensor data or galvanic skin responsesensor data) indicates that the subject is experiencing stress during atherapy session, and adjusted pulse having an amplitude lower than thatof a scheduled pulse may be delivered to the subject, in order to reducethe discomforting effect that the scheduled pulses may have on thesubject.

Z. Method for Selecting Dosing Parameters of Stimulation Signals toInduce Synchronized Neural Oscillations in the Brain of the Subject

FIG. 29A is a flow diagram of a method 2900 for selecting dosingparameters of stimulation signals to induce synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject in accordance with an embodiment.In some implementations, the method 2900 can be performed by and NSSsuch as the NSS 2605 shown in FIG. 26. In brief overview, the NSS candetermine subject personalization factors (step 2905). The NSS canidentify dosing parameters for a neural stimulation signal based on thepersonalization factors (step 29280). The NSS can generate and transmitthe signal to the subject (step 29285). The NSS can receive feedbackfrom one or more sensors (Step 2920). The NSS can manage the dosingparameters for the neural stimulation signal, based on the feedback(step 2925).

Referring again to FIG. 29A, and in greater detail, the NSS candetermine subject personalization factors (step 2905). In someimplementations, subject personalization factors may include any of theinformation included in a subject profile, such as the profile 2645shown in FIGS. 26 and 27. For example, the personalization factors caninclude intrinsic subject characteristics, subject data, subjectcognitive function data, therapy history, reported side effects, andstimulation response history, as shown in FIG. 27. In someimplementations, the personalization factors can be determined by one ormore of an intensity determination module, a duration determinationmodule, a modality determination module, and a dosing management module,similar to those shown in FIG. 26. In some implementations, suchpersonalization factors can be taken into account because response to acertain therapy regimen can vary widely from subject to subject based onthese factors. In addition, the same subject may respond differently toa given therapy regimen at different times depending on these factors.Thus, tailoring a therapy regimen according to these personalizationfactors can result in more effective treatment for each individualsubject.

The NSS can identify dosing parameters for a neural stimulation signalbased on the personalization factors (step 29280). As described above,personalization factors may inform the choice of dosing parameters for aneural stimulation signal. For example, the NSS can select dosingparameters that are likely to be more effective for entraining the brainof a subject, or that help to reduce the likelihood of unpleasant sideeffects for the subject, as described above. For example, certainsubjects may respond better to visual stimulation signals than auditorystimulation signals, and the NSS can make such a choice based at leastin part on the personalization factors.

The NSS can generate and transmit the signal to the subject (step29285). In some implementations, the NSS may include hardware configuredto generate a variety of neural stimulation signals, such as visualsignals, auditory signals, and electrical signals. The NSS can generatethe desired signal in accordance with the dosing parameters selected instep 2810. After the NSS has generated the signal, the NSS can transmitthe signal to the subject. For example, a visual signal can betransmitted to a subject using a light source such as an LED, a auditorysignal can be transmitted to the subject using a loudspeaker, and anelectrical signal can be transmitted to the subject using an electrode.

The NSS can receive feedback from one or more sensors (Step 2920). Insome implementations, a sensor can be configured to monitor conditionsrelated to the efficacy of the therapy. For example, the sensor may bean electroencephalography (EEG) sensor that monitors the subject'sneural oscillations. The NSS can receive the EEG sensor output, and candetermine whether entrainment is occurring in the subject as a result ofthe neural stimulation signal transmitted to the subject in step 29285.In some other implementations, the sensors can relate to the comfort ortolerance level of the subject. For example, the sensors may be or mayinclude any combination of electrocardiogram (ECG) sensors, heart ratevariability (HRV) sensors, galvanic skin response sensors, respiratoryrate sensors, or other sensors that monitor subject conditions. The NSSmay be communicatively coupled to the sensors and may receive outputsignals from the sensors.

The NSS can manage the dosing parameters of the neural stimulationsignal, based on the feedback (step 2925). Such feedback can be used todetermine whether the subject is experiencing stress. For example, theNSS can determine that the subject's respiratory rate or heart rate isincreasing based on feedback received from a respiratory rate sensor oran ECG sensor, respectively. This may be an indication that the subjectis experiencing stress caused by the neural stimulation signal. As aresult, the NSS may adjust the dosing parameters in a manner intended toreduce the stress level of the subject, such as by selecting a lowerintensity for the signal, a lower duration for the signal, or adifferent modality for delivering the signal. The output from a galvanicskin response sensor also may indicate that the subject is under stress,and the NSS can respond by adjusting the dosing parameters for theneural stimulation signal to reduce the subject's stress level, asdescribed above. In some implementations, the output of an EEG sensorcan be used to determine whether brain entrainment is occurring in thesubject, for example by determining that the brain exhibits neuraloscillations at a desired frequency during the therapy session. If theNSS determines that brain entrainment is not occurring (or is notoccurring at a sufficiently high level), the NSS can respond byadjusting the dosing parameters in a manner intended to increase brainentrainment for the subject. For example, the NSS can increase thesignal intensity or duration, or can select a different modality fordelivering the neural stimulation signal, to which the subject may bemore responsive.

It should be noted that the method 2900 describes a closed loop therapytechnique. In some implementations, some of the steps of the method 2900can be used for open loop therapy. For example, steps 2905, 29280, and29285 can be identical in an open loop therapy technique. However, openloop therapy does not make use of real-time feedback, nor does it adjustdosing parameters based on such feedback during a therapy session. Thus,steps 2920 and 2925 of the method 2900 would not be performed in an openloop therapy session.

FIG. 29B is a flow diagram of a method 2930 for conducting therapysessions, including therapy sessions for inducing synchronized neuraloscillations in the brain of a subject, in accordance with anembodiment. In some implementations, the method 2930 can be performed byan NSS such as the NSS 2605 shown in FIG. 26. In brief overview, the NSScan select a frequency for applying neural stimulations (step 2935). TheNSS can provide a first neural stimulation to the subject as a pluralityof pulses for a duration (step 2940). The NSS can provide a secondneural stimulation as a plurality of second pulses using a first offset(step 2945). The NSS can terminate the second stimulation (step 2950).The NSS can provide a third neural stimulation as a plurality of thirdpulses using a second offset (step 2955).

Referring again to FIG. 29B, and in greater detail, the NSS can select afrequency at which to provide a first neural stimulation having a firststimulation modality, a second neural stimulation having a secondstimulation modality, and a third neural stimulation having the secondstimulation modality. The stimulation modalities may be of an auditorystimulation modality, a visual stimulation modality, or a peripheralnerve stimulation modality. In some embodiments, the first stimulationmodality is one of auditory, visual, or peripheral nerve, and the secondand third stimulation modalities are an other of auditory, visual, orperipheral nerve (e.g., first stimulation modality is audio, second andthird stimulation modalities are visual). As such, even where thestimulation modalities are of different types, the stimulationmodalities may be provided at the same frequency.

The NSS can provide to the subject, for a duration, the first neuralstimulation (step 2940). The first neural stimulation can be provided asa plurality of first pulses at the frequency, during the duration. TheNSS can generate and modulate pulses (or control signals used to controla stimulation generator for delivering neural stimulation) in a manneras described with reference to FIGS. 2C-2F, 10F-10I, 17A-17D, 23B, 24B,28, or other pulse generation methods described herein.

The NSS can provide to the subject, during a first portion of theduration, the second neural stimulation as a plurality of second pulsesat the frequency (step 2945). The plurality of second pulses can beoffset from the plurality of first pulses by a first offset. Forexample, during the first portion, each second pulse can be initiated(e.g., ramped up) at a time which is subsequent to an initiation of acorresponding first pulse by the first offset. In some embodiments,offsetting the plurality of second pulses relative to the plurality offirst pulses can improve operation of the NSS by expanding or varying aduty cycle of the neural stimulation, which may help target regions ofthe brain of the subject which may not necessarily be responsive to asingle pulse train.

The NSS can terminate the second neural stimulation (step 2950). Forexample, the NSS can terminate the second neural stimulation responsiveto detecting an expiration of the first portion of the duration.

The NSS can provide a third neural stimulation to the subject as aplurality of third pulses using a second offset (step 2955). The thirdneural stimulation can be provided during a second portion of theduration, subsequent to the first portion of the duration. The secondoffset can be different from the first offset, which can further expandor vary the duty cycle of the neural stimulation. In some embodiments,the first offset and the second offset are selected as random values.For example, the offsets can be selected as random values which aregreater than zero and less than a time constant equal to an inverse ofthe frequency (e.g., a random value greater than a minimum value atwhich the second or third pulses would coincide with an earlier pulseamong a pair of the first pulses and less than a maximum value at whichthe second or third pulses would coincide with a later pulse among apair of the first pulses).

FIG. 29C is a flow diagram of a method 2960 for counteractingdistraction while applying a neural stimulus, in accordance with anembodiment. In some implementations, the method 2960 can be performed byan NSS such as the NSS 2605 shown in FIG. 26. In brief overview, the NSScan apply a first neural stimulus to a subject (step 2962). The NSS canapply a plurality of first counter-distraction measures at a pluralityof first time points (step 2964). The NSS can measure an attentivenessparameter (step 2966). The NSS can identify a distraction of the subjectbased on the attentiveness parameter (step 2968). The NSS can determinean effectiveness of each of the first counter-distraction measures (step2970). The NSS can include effectiveness counter-distraction measures ina second plurality of counter-distraction measures (step 2972). The NSScan select a plurality of second time points which are closer to timesof the distractions than the first time points (step 2974). The NSS canapply a second neural stimulus while applying the plurality of secondcounter-distraction measures at the second time points (step 2976).

Referring again to FIG. 29C, and in greater detail, the NSS can apply afirst neural stimulus to a subject (step 2962). The first neuralstimulus can include at least one of an auditory stimulus, a visualstimulus, or peripheral nerve stimulus. The first neural stimulus may becharacterized by a plurality of pulses at a predetermined frequency.

The NSS can apply a plurality of first counter-distraction measures at aplurality of first time points during the first neural stimulus (step2964). The plurality of first counter-distraction measures can includeat least one of an audible alert or a visible alert. The audible alertmay be a tone, or a spoken message indicating instructions to returnattention to the first neural stimulus. The visible alert may be anoutput of light at a specific intensity and/or color, or may be aspecific image, such as an image of a family member.

The NSS can measure an attentiveness parameter during the first neuralstimulus (step 2966). The attentiveness parameter can include at leastone of an eye direction, a head position, a heart rate, or a respirationrate of the subject. For example, the attentiveness parameter canindicate whether a change in behavior of the subject may be occurringduring the first neural stimulus.

The NSS can compare the attentiveness parameter to a corresponding firstthreshold to identify a distraction and a corresponding time ofdistraction (step 2968). For example, if the attentiveness parameterincludes an eye direction, the NSS can compare the eye direction to athreshold indicating eyes of the subject are looking in a directionoutside of an expected direction for paying attention to the firstneural stimulus. In some embodiments, the threshold is adaptivelyupdated during the first neural stimulus (e.g., the threshold may beassociated with a moving average of the attentiveness parameter, suchthat if the attentiveness parameter differs from the moving average bythe threshold amount, the distraction may be identified).

The NSS can determine an effectiveness of each of the firstcounter-distraction measures by comparing a change in the attentivenessparameter before and after each counter-distraction measure to acorresponding second threshold (step 2970). For example, if thedifference between the attentiveness parameter before and after eachcounter-distraction measure indicates an increase in attentiveness (or arestoration from a distracted state to an attentive state), then thecounter-distraction measure can be determined to be effective for thesubject.

The NSS can include effectiveness counter-distraction measures in asecond plurality of counter-distraction measures (step 2972). In someembodiments, including the effectiveness counter-distraction measuresincludes ranking the counter-distraction measures based on the change inthe attentiveness parameter, and preferentially includingcounter-distraction measures which are ranked higher.

The NSS can select a plurality of second time points which are closer tothe identified times of distraction than the plurality of first timepoints (step 2974). For example, the NSS can compare each first timepoint to a closest time of distraction, and decrease a differencebetween each first time point and the closest time of distraction toshift first time point(s). It will be appreciated that there may befewer times of distraction than first time points, in which case theclosest first time point to each time of distraction may be shifted; orthere may be greater times of distraction than first time points, inwhich case additional second time points may be introduced in additionto the first time points. In some embodiments, first time points areonly shifted to be earlier than corresponding times of distraction,which may ensure that the second time points anticipate the times ofdistraction.

The NSS can apply a second neural stimulus to the subject while applyingthe plurality of second counter-distraction measures at the second timepoints (step 2976). In various such embodiments, the NSS can improveoperation by anticipating times of distraction and executingcounter-distraction measures before distraction occurs.

In some embodiments, the NSS can increment a count of distractions inresponse to identifying each distraction. The NSS can reset the count ofdistractions subsequent to each effective first counter-distractionmeasure (e.g., if distractions are identified at times a, b, c, d, ande, and an effective first counter-distraction measure took place betweentimes c and d, the NSS can count five total distractions, with a firstcount of distractions before the effective first counter-distractionmeasure being equal to three, and a second count after the effectivefirst counter-distraction measure equal to two). The count ofdistractions may thus provide an additional measure of effectiveness, byindicating which counter-distraction measures were effectiveness whenothers were not. The NSS can rank the plurality of effective firstcounter-distraction measures based on magnitude of the correspondingcounts of distractions.

AA. Environment for Modifying an External Stimulus Based on Feedbackfrom a Subject Performing an Assessment Task

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to providingassessments for neural stimulation on subjects in response to externalstimuli. The external stimuli may adjust, control, or otherwise managethe frequency of the neural oscillations of the brain. When the neuraloscillations of the brain are entrained to a particular frequency, theremay be beneficial effects to the cognitive states or functions of thebrain, while mitigating or preventing adverse consequence to thecognitive state or functions. To determine whether the application ofthe external stimuli entrains the brain of a subject to the particularfrequency and affects the cognitive states or functions of the brain,cognitive assessments may be performed on the subject.

To determine which type of external stimuli is to be applied to thenervous system of a subject, a cognitive and physiological assessmentmay be performed on the subject. Certain types of external stimuli maynot be as effective in inducing neural oscillations of the brain at theparticular frequency. For example, applying an auditory stimulus to asubject with severe hearing loss may not result in inducing neuraloscillations of the brain at the particular frequency, as the auditorycortex and other related cortices of the brain may not pick up theexternal auditory stimuli due to hearing loss. Based on the results ofthe cognitive and physiological assessments, the type of externalstimuli to apply to the nervous system of the subject may be identified.

By applying the external stimuli to the nervous system of the subject,neural oscillations may be induced in the brain of the subject. Theexternal stimuli may be delivered to the nervous system of the subjectvia the visual system of the subject using visual stimuli, auditorysystem of the subject using auditory stimuli, or peripheral nervestimuli. The neural oscillations of the brain of the subject may bemonitored using brain wave sensors, electroencephalography (EEG)devices, electrooculography (EOG) devices, and magnetoencephalography(MEG) devices. Various other signs and indications (e.g., attentiveness,physiology, etc.) from the subject may also be monitored usingaccelerometers, microphones, videos, cameras, gyroscopes, motiondetectors, proximity sensors, photo sensors, photo detectors,physiological sensors, ambient light sensors, ambient temperaturesensors, and actimetry sensors, among others. After having applied theexternal stimuli to the nervous system of the subject, additionalcognitive and physiological assessments may be repeatedly performed overtime to determine whether the external stimuli were effective inentraining the brain of the subject to the particular frequency and inimproving the cognitive states or functions of the brain.

Neural oscillation occurs in humans or animals and includes rhythmic orrepetitive neural activity in the central nervous system. Neural tissuecan generate oscillatory activity by mechanisms within individualneurons or by interactions between neurons. Oscillations can appear aseither oscillations in membrane potential or as rhythmic patterns ofaction potentials, which can produce oscillatory activation ofpost-synaptic neurons. Synchronized activity of a group of neurons cangive rise to macroscopic oscillations, which can be observed byelectroencephalography (“EEG”). Neural oscillations can be characterizedby their frequency, amplitude, and phase. These signal properties can beobserved from neural recordings using time-frequency analysis.

For example, electrodes for an EEG device can measure voltagefluctuations (in the magnitude of microvolts) from currents within theneurons along the epidermis of the subject. The voltage fluctuationsmeasured by the EEG device may correspond to oscillatory activity amonga group of neurons, and the measured oscillatory activity can becategorized into frequency bands as follows: delta activity correspondsto a frequency band from 1-4 Hz; theta activity corresponds to afrequency band from 4-8 Hz; alpha activity corresponds to a frequencyband from 8-12 Hz; beta activity corresponds to a frequency band from13-30 Hz; and gamma activity corresponds to a frequency band from 30-60Hz. The EEG device may then sample voltage fluctuations picked up by theelectrodes (e.g., at 50 Hz-2000 Hz or randomly using compressed sensingtechniques) and convert to a digital signal for further processing.

The frequency of neural oscillations can be associated with cognitivestates or cognitive functions such as information transfer, perception,motor control, and memory. Based on the cognitive state or cognitivefunction, the frequency of neural oscillations can vary. Further,certain frequencies of neural oscillations can have beneficial effectsor adverse consequences on one or more cognitive states or functions.However, it may be challenging to synchronize neural oscillations usingexternal stimulus to provide such beneficial effects or reduce orprevent such adverse consequences.

Brainwave entrainment (e.g., neural entrainment or brain entrainment)occurs when an external stimulation of a particular frequency isperceived by the brain and triggers neural activity in the brain thatresults in neurons oscillating at a frequency corresponding to theparticular frequency of the external stimulation. Thus, brainentrainment can refer to synchronizing neural oscillations in the brainusing external stimulation such that the neural oscillations occur atfrequency that corresponds to the particular frequency of the externalstimulation.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram depicting an environment 3000 for modifyingan external stimulus 3025 based on a response by a subject 3005 to anassessment 3015, in accordance to an embodiment. In overview, theenvironment 3000 can include a subject 3005, a nervous system 3010(e.g., brain), a result 3020, and a response 3030. The assessment 3015may be administered to the subject 3005 using an input/output interface(e.g., mouse, keyboard, or display, etc.) of a computing device (e.g.,desktop, laptop, tablet, smartphone, etc.). The assessment 3015 may bedesigned to test at least one of a cognitive function, a reaction, or aphysiological response of the subject 3005. The assessment 3015 may bedelivered to the subject 3005 via the auditory system, the visualsystem, and/or the, or peripheral nerve stimulation system of thesubject 3005. The assessment 3015 may be one of, for example, an N-backtask, a serial reaction time test, a visual coordination test, avoluntary movement test, or a force production test, among others. Inthe example depicted in FIG. 30, the assessment 3015 may include avisual n-back test. While the assessment 3015 is performed, the result3020 to the assessment 3015 by the subject 3005 may be recorded orlogged by the computing device administering the assessment 3015. Usingthe result 3020, which type of assessment 3015 to administer next andwhich type of external stimulus 3025 may be identified.

The external stimulus 3025 may be applied to excite or stimulate thenervous system 3010 of the subject 3005. In some embodiments, theexternal stimulus 3025 may be applied to the subject 3005 simultaneouslyas the assessment 3015. The external stimulus 3025 may be delivered tothe nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 via the visual system of thesubject using visual stimuli, auditory system of the subject usingauditory stimuli, or peripheral nerve system of the subject usingphysical stimuli, among other techniques. The external stimulus 3025 maybe generated by a stimulus generator and/or a stimulus output device.The modulation or a pulse scheme of the external stimulus 3025 may beset and dynamically modified, so as to entrain the neural oscillationsof the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 to a particular orspecified frequency. Upon the application of the external stimulus 3025to the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005, the neural response ofthe subject 3005 may be measured in the form of the response 3030. Theresponse 3030 may be of the neural response (or evoked response) of thenervous system 3010 of the subject 3005, and may be measured using EEGor MEG, among other techniques.

Upon measurement, the result 3020 and/or the response 3030 of thesubject 3005 may be used to generate the feedback signal 3035. Theresult 3020 and/or the response 3030 may indicate where cognitivefunctions or states of the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 haschanged (e.g., improved, deteriorated, or unaffected) in response to theapplication of the external stimulus 3025. The feedback signal 3035 mayindicate to the computing device administering the assessment 3015 toalter the administration of the assessment. Modifications of theassessment 3015 may include changing the stimulus used in the assessment3015 and/or selecting a different type of assessment 3015, among others.The feedback signal 3035 may also specify the stimulus generator and/orthe stimulus output device applying the stimulus 3025 to modify theexternal stimulus 3025. Modifications of the external stimulus 3025 mayinclude increasing or decreasing the intensity of the stimulus 3025,increasing or decreasing the intervals of the modulation or pulse schemeof the stimulus 3025, altering the pulse shape of the stimulus 3025,changing a type of stimulus 3025 (e.g., from visual to auditory), and/orterminating the application of the stimulus 3025, among others.

BB. Overview of Systems for Performing Assessments to Measure Effects ofNeural Stimulation

Referring now to FIG. 31, FIG. 31 is a block diagram depicting a system3100 for providing assessments for neural stimulation, in accordance toan embodiment. The system 3100 can include a cognitive assessment system(“CAS”) 3105. The (“CAS”) can be part of or can be communicativelycoupled to any of one or more of the NSS 105, 905, 1605, or the NSOS2305 or any other system described herein. In brief overview, thecognitive assessment system 3105 can include, access, interface with, orotherwise communicate with one or more of an assessment administrationmodule 3110, a subject assessment monitor 3115, a subject physiologicalmonitor 3120, a stimulus generator module 3125, a neural oscillationmonitor 3130, a subject profile database 3135, an assessment applicationpolicy database 3140, a stimulus generation policy database 3145, anassessment results log 3150, one or more assessment application devices3150A-N, one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N, and/or one or moremeasurement devices 3160A-N. The assessment administration module 3110,the subject assessment monitor 3115, the subject physiological monitor3120, the stimulus generator module 3125, and the neural oscillationmonitor 3130 can each include at least one processing unit or otherlogic device such as programmable logic array engine, or moduleconfigured to communicate with the subject profile database 3135, theassessment application policy database 3140, a stimulus generationpolicy database 3145, the assessment results log 3150, the one or moreassessment application devices 3150A-N, the one or more stimulus outputdevices 3155A-N, and the one or more measurement devices 3160A-N. Theassessment administration module 3110, the subject assessment monitor3115, the subject physiological monitor 3120, the stimulus generatormodule 3125, and the neural oscillation monitor 3130 can each beseparate components, a single component, or a part of the CAS 3105.

The system 3100 and the components therein, such as the CAS 3105, mayinclude hardware elements, such as one or more processors, logicdevices, or circuits.

The system 3100 and the components therein, such as the CAS 3105, caninclude one or more hardware or interface component depicted in system700 in FIGS. 7A and 7B. The system 3100 and the components therein, suchas the CAS 3105, the one or more stimulus generators 3150A-N, the one ormore stimulus output devices 3155A-N, and/or the one or more measurementdevices 3160A-N can be communicatively coupled to one another, using oneor more wireless protocols such as Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy,ZigBee, Z-Wave, IEEE 802, Wi-Fi, 3G, 4G, LTE, near field communications(“NFC”), or other short, medium or long range communication protocols,etc.

In further detail, the CAS 3105 can include at least one assessmentadministration module 3110. The assessment administration module 3110can be communicatively coupled to the subject profile database 3135, theassessment application policy database 3140, the one or more assessmentapplication devices 3150A-N, and/or the assessment administration module3110. The assessment administration module 3110 can be designed andconstructed to interface with the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N to provide a control signal, a command, instructions, orotherwise cause or facilitate the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N to run or execute the assessment 3015. The assessment3015 run on or be administered to the subject 3005 may be, for example,an N-back task, a serial reaction time test, a visual coordination test,a voluntary movement test, or a force production test, among others.Additional details of the functionalities of the assessmentadministration module 3110 in operation in conjunction with the othercomponents of the CAS 3105 are described herein in reference to FIG. 3.

The one or more assessment application devices 3150A-N may include avisual display, such as one or more cathode ray tubes (CRT), liquidcrystal displays (LCD), a plasma display panels (PDP), incandescentlight bulbs, and light emitting diodes (LED), or any other device, amongothers, designed to generate light within the visual spectrum toadminister the assessment 3015 to the visual system of the subject 3005.The one or more assessment application devices 3150A-N may include anauditory source, such as a loudspeaker, dynamic speaker, headphones,temple transducer, or any type of electroacoustic transducer, amongothers, designed or configured to generate soundwaves to administer theassessment 3015 to the auditory system of the subject 3005. The one ormore assessment application devices 3150A-N may include a peripheralnerve stimulation source upon the subject 3005 to administer theassessment 3015 based on the inputs from the assessment administrationmodule 3110.

The CAS 3105 can include at least one subject assessment monitor 3115.The subject assessment monitor 3115 can be communicatively coupled tothe assessment results log 3150, the one or more measurement devices3160A-N, and/or the assessment administration module 3110. Additionaldetails of the functionalities of the subject assessment monitor 3115 inoperation in conjunction with the other components of the CAS 3105 aredescribed herein in reference to FIG. 3.

The CAS 3105 can include at least one subject physiological monitor3120.

The subject physiological monitor 3120 can be communicatively coupled tothe assessment results log 3150, the one or more measurement devices3160A-N, and/or the assessment administration module 3110. The subjectphysiological monitor 3120 can measure a physiological status (e.g.,heartrate, blood pressure, breathing rate, perspiration, etc.) of thesubject 3005 in response to the stimulus 3025. Additional details of thefunctionalities of the subject physiological monitor 3120 in operationin conjunction with the other components of the CAS 3105 are describedherein in reference to FIG. 3.

The CAS 3105 can include at least one stimulus generator module 3125.The stimulus generator module 3125 can be communicatively coupled to thesubject profile database 3135, the stimulus generation policy database3145, the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N, and/or the neuraloscillation monitor 3130. The stimulus generator module 3125 can bedesigned and constructed to interface with the one or more stimulusoutput devices 3155A-N to provide a control signal, a command,instructions, or otherwise cause or facilitate the one or more stimulusoutput devices 3155A-N to generate the stimulus 3025, such as a visualstimulus, an auditory stimulus, or peripheral nerve stimuli amongothers. The stimulus 3025 may be controlled or modulated as a burst, apulse, a chirp, a sweep, or other modulated fields having one or morepredetermined parameters. The one or more predetermined parameters maydefine the pulse schema or the modulation of the stimulus 3025. Thestimulus generator module 3125 can control the stimulus 3025 outputtedby the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N according to the oneor more defined characteristics, such as magnitude, type (e.g.,auditory, visual, etc.), direction, frequency (or wavelength) of theoscillations of the stimulus 3025. Additional details of thefunctionalities of the stimulus generator module 3125 in operation inconjunction with the other components of the CAS 3105 are describedherein in reference to FIG. 3.

The one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N may include a visualsource, such as one or more cathode ray tubes (CRT), liquid crystaldisplays (LCD), a plasma display panels (PDP), incandescent light bulbs,and light emitting diodes (LED), or any other device, among others,designed to generate light within the visual spectrum to apply to thevisual system of the subject 3005. The one or more stimulus outputdevices 3155A-N may include an auditory source, such as a loudspeaker,dynamic speaker, headphones, temple transducer, or any type ofelectroacoustic transducer, among others, designed or configured togenerate soundwaves to apply to the auditory system of the subject 3005.The one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N may include an electriccurrent source, such as an electroconvulsive device or machine designedor configured to apply an electric current to the subject 3005.

The CAS 3105 can include at least one neural oscillation monitor 3130.The neural oscillation monitor 3130 can be communicatively coupled tothe one or more measurement devices 3160A-N and/or to the stimulusgenerator module 3125. The neural oscillation monitor 3130 can measure aneural response of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025. The neuraloscillation monitor 3130 can receive a measurement of the subject 3005from the one or more measurement devices 3160A-N. The measurement of thesubject 3005 may represent or may be indicative of a response (or lackof response) of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025 applied to thesubject 3005.

The one or more measurement devices 3160A-N may include EEG monitoringdevices, MEG monitoring devices, EOG monitoring devices, accelerometers,microphones, videos, cameras, gyroscopes, among others, to measure theresponse of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025 and the effect ofambient noise on the stimulus 3025. Each of the one or more measurementdevices 3160A-N can sample the neural response measurement of thesubject 3005 at any sample rate (e.g., 310 Hz to 310,000 Hz). In someembodiments, each of the one or more measurement devices 3160A-N cansample at randomly in accordance to compressed sensing techniques. Theneural oscillation monitor 3130 can send a feedback signal to thestimulus generator module 3125 to adjust the control signal, command, orinstructions used by the stimulus generator module 3125 to cause orfacilitate the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N to modify thestimulus 3025. Additional details of the functionalities of the neuraloscillation monitor 3130 in operation in conjunction with the othercomponents of the CAS 3105 are described herein in reference to FIG. 3.

Referring now to FIG. 3, FIG. 32 is block diagram a system 300 forsensing neural oscillations induced by the external stimulus 3025, inaccordance to an embodiment. In brief overview, the system 300 caninclude the assessment administration module 3110, the subjectassessment monitor 3115, the subject physiological module 3120, thestimulus generator module 3125, the neural oscillation monitor 3130, thesubject profile database 3135, the assessment application policydatabase 3140, the stimulus generation policy database 3145, theassessment results log 3150, the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N, the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N, and/orthe one or more measurement devices 3160A-N. The one or more componentsof the system 300 may be in any environment or across multipleenvironments, such as in a treatment center, a clinic, a residence, anoffice, a pharmacy, or any other suitable location.

CC. Modules in Administering Assessments and Applying Stimulus on theSubject

In the context of FIG. 32, the assessment administration module 3110 cantransmit or relay a control signal to the one or more assessmentapplication devices 3150A-N to administer or execute an assessment 3015on the subject 3005. The assessment administration module 3110 canidentify a type of assessment for the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N to administer on the subject 3005. The assessmentadministration module 3110 can access a profile of the subject 3005 fromthe subject profile database 3135. The profile of the subject 3005 mayspecify or indicate one or more physical characteristics of the subject3005, such as height, weight, age, sensory-related disabilities (e.g.,sight, hearing, etc.), blood pressure, insulin levels, and demographics,among others. The assessment administration module 3110 can access oneor more assessment policies from the assessment application policydatabase 3140. The one or more assessment policies may specify a type ofassessment (e.g., n-back testing, serial reaction time task, forceproduction, etc.). The one or more assessment policies may specify asensory system to be assessed (e.g., visual, auditory, or peripheralnerve). The one or more assessment policies may specify a time durationassessment (e.g., 30 seconds to 4 hours). The one or more assessmentpolicies may specify an intensity of cue in the assessment 3015 to beadministered to the subject 3005.

The assessment administration module 3110 can select or identify anassessment policy from the assessment application policy database 3140based on the profile of the subject 3005. For example, if the profile ofthe subject 3005 indicates that the subject 3005 is visually impaired,the assessment administration module 3110 can select the assessmentpolicy specifying that visual assessments are to be first administeredto verify whether there is a neural response to the assessment 3015. Inthis scenario, the assessment policy can further specify that auditoryassessments is to be administered to the subject 3005 if there is noneural response. Based on the identified assessment policy, theassessment administration module 3110 can generate the control signalcorresponding to the identified assessment policy. The control signalmay specify to the one or more assessment application devices 3150A-Nwhich type of assessment, time duration assessment, and/or intensity ofstimuli used in the assessment 3015 is to be executed. Once the controlsignal is generated, the assessment administration module 3110 can send,relay, or otherwise transmit the control signal to the one or moreassessment application devices 3150A-N. Upon receiving the controlsignal from the assessment administration module 3110, the one or moreassessment application devices 3150A-N may execute the assessment 3015based on the specifications of the control signal. For example, thecontrol signal may specify that the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N is to run an n-back test. In this example, the one ormore assessment application devices 3150A-N may include a computer withtouch-screen display to run and present the n-back test to the subject3005. In some embodiments, the assessment administration module 3110 canselect or identify a subset of the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N based on the one or more assessment policies. Responsiveto identifying the subset, the assessment administration module 3110 cantransmit or relay the control signal to the respective subset of the oneor more assessment application devices 3150A-N.

The stimulus generator module 3125 can transmit or relay a controlsignal to the stimulus output devices 3155A-N to generate the stimulus3025 to apply to the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005. Thestimulus generator module 3125 can access the profile of the subject3005 from the subject profile database 3135. The stimulus generatormodule 3125 can access one or more stimulus generation policies from thestimulus generation database 3145. The one or more stimulus generationpolicies may specify a type of stimulus (e.g., visual, auditory, etc.),a magnitude of stimulus, a specified frequency or wavelength, and/or apulse schema or the modulation, among others, for the stimulus 3025 tobe applied to the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005. Based on theone or more stimulus generation policies from the stimulus generationpolicy database 3145, the stimulus generator module 3125 can generatethe control signal. The control signal may be a continuous-time signalor a periodic discrete signal. The control signal can specify one ormore defined characteristics based on the one or more stimulusgeneration policies. In some embodiments, the stimulus generator module3125 can identify a subset of the one or more stimulus output devices3155A-N based on the one or more defined characteristics. For example,if the one or more defined characteristics specify the type of stimulus3025 as visual, the stimulus generator module 3125 can identify thesubset of the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N correspondingto an electronic display. Responsive to identifying the subset, thestimulus generator module 3125 can transmit or relay the control signalto the subset of the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N.

In response to receiving the control signal from the stimulus generatormodule 3125, the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N cangenerate the stimulus 3025 to apply to the subject 3005. The one or morestimulus output devices 3155A-N may include a visual source, an auditorysource, among others. The stimulus 3025 applied to the subject 3005 maybe at least one of a visual stimulus originating from the visual sourceor an auditory stimulus originating from the auditory source The one ormore stimulus output devices 3155A-N each can receive the control signalfrom the stimulus generator module 3125. The one or more stimulus outputdevices 3155A-N each can identify or access the one or more definedcharacteristics from the received control signal. The one or morestimulus output devices 3155A-N each can determine whether the stimulus3025 is to be outputted or applied to the subject 3005 based on the oneor more defined characteristics. For example, the control signal mayspecify that the stimulus 3025 is to be an auditory stimulus. In such acase, a subset of the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-Ncorresponding to visual sources may determine that the responsivestimulus output devices 3155A-N are not to output the stimulus 3025.Each of the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N can determinethe stimulus 3025 to apply to the subject 3005 based on the one or moredefined characteristics of the control signal. Each of the one or morestimulus output devices 3155A-N can convert the control signal to thestimulus 3025 based on the control signal. For example, the controlsignal may be an electrical signal and upon receipt of the controlsignal, each of the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N canconvert the electrical signal corresponding to the control signal to ananalog, physical signal corresponding to the stimulus 3025.

DD. Modules in Measuring Data from Subject During Assessment

While administering the assessment 3015 and/or the stimulus 3025 to thesubject 3005, the subject physiological monitor 3120 can determine thephysiological status (e.g., heartrate, blood pressure, breathing rate,perspiration, etc.) of the subject 3005. In response to receivingmeasurements from the first measurement device(s) 3160A, the subjectphysiological monitor 3120 can monitor the physiological status of thesubject 3005 with the administering of the assessment 3015 via the oneor more assessment application devices 3150A-N and/or the application ofthe stimulus 3025 via the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N.The first measurement device(s) 3160A can measure data related to aphysiological status of the subject 3005. The physiological status ofthe subject 3005 may include vital signs of the subject 3005, such asheartrate, blood pressure, breathing rate, and perspiration, amongothers. The first measurement device(s) 3160A can include a heart ratemonitor, a blood pressure monitor, a breathing rate monitor, aperspiration detector, a camera, and an eye tracker, or any othersuitable device to monitor the physiological status of the subject 3005.

The subject physiological monitor 3120 can apply any number of signalprocessing techniques to the measurements from the first measurementdevice(s) 3160A. The subject physiological monitor 3120 can apply signalreconstruction techniques to the equally spaced sampled measurementsreceived from the first measurement device(s) 3160A to determine thephysiological status of the subject 3005. The subject physiologicalmonitor 3120 can apply compressed sensing techniques to the randomlysampled measurements received from the first measurement device(s) 3160Ato determine the physiological status of the subject 3005. The subjectphysiological monitor 3120 can apply pattern recognition algorithms fromthe measurements received from the first measurement device(s) 3160A toidentify one or more cues from the subject 3005. For example, if themeasurement device(s) is a heartrate monitor to measure the heartrate ofthe subject 3005, the subject physiological monitor 3120 can applyfiltering techniques to identify an increase or decrease in theheartrate of the subject 3005. Based on the one or more cues, thesubject physiological monitor 3120 can identify or determine thephysiological status of the subject 3005. The subject physiologicalmonitor 3120 can transmit or relay the identified physiological statusof the subject 3005 to the assessment administration module 3110 and/orthe stimulus generator module 3125 as feedback data.

While administering the assessment 3015 and/or the stimulus 3025 on thesubject 3005, the subject assessment monitor 3115 can identify a taskresponse (e.g., result 3020) to the assessment 3015 administered to thesubject 3005. In response to receiving measurements from the secondmeasurement device(s) 3160B, the subject assessment monitor 3115 canidentify the task response to the assessment 3015 administered to thesubject 3005 via the one or more assessment application devices 3150A-N.The second measurement device(s) 3160B can measure data related to atask response of the subject 3005 to the administered assessment 3015.The task response of the subject 3005 may include one or more parametersof user interactions with the one or more assessment application devices3150A-N during the administration of the assessment 3015. For example,if the assessment 3015 is a serial reaction time test, the task responseof the subject 3005 may include a time interval between an onset of thecue and the response by the subject 3005. The second measurementdevice(s) 3160B can include a mouse, a keyboard, a microphone, a touchscreen, a touchpad, or any other suitable device to monitor the taskresponse of the subject 3005, during the administration of theassessment 3015. In some embodiments, the second measurement device(s)3160B may be the same or share the same devices or components as the oneor more assessment application devices 3160A-N. The subject assessmentmonitor 3115 can record the measurements from the second measurementdevice(s) 3160B to the assessment results log database 3150. The subjectassessment monitor 3115 can index each stored measurement from thesecond measurement device(s) 3160B by the sensory system to be assessed,time duration assessment, and/or intensity of cue in the assessment3015. The subject assessment monitor 3115 can transmit or relay themeasurements to the assessment administration module 3110 and/or thestimulus generator module 3125 as feedback data.

While administering the assessment 3015 and/or the stimulus 3025 on thesubject 3005, the neural oscillation monitor 3130 can measure a neuralresponse of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025 applied by the one ormore stimulus devices 3155A-N. In response to receiving the measurementsfrom the third measurement device(s) 3160C, the neural oscillationmonitor 3110 can monitor neural oscillations of the nervous system 3010of the subject 3005 in response to the stimulus 3025. The thirdmeasurement device(s) 3160C can measure the neural response of thenervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025. The thirdmeasurement device(s) 3160C can include an EEG device or an MEG device,or any suitable device, to measure the neural response of the nervoussystem 3010 of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025. The thirdmeasurement device(s) 3160C can transmit the neural response of thenervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 to the stimulus 3025 to theneural oscillation monitor 3130. The neural oscillation monitor 3130 canalso apply signal reconstruction techniques to the equally spacedsampled measurements received from the third measurement device(s) 3160Cto calculate the neural response of the nervous system 3010 of thesubject 3005. The neural oscillation monitor 3130 can also applycompressed sensing techniques to the randomly sampled measurementsreceived from the third measurement device(s) 3160C to calculate theneural response of the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005. Theneural oscillation monitor 3130 can transmit or send the monitoredneural oscillations of the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 tothe stimulus generator module 3125 as feedback data.

EE. Modules in Modifying the Assessment Using Feedback Data

Using the feedback data from the subject physiological monitor 3120, thesubject assessment monitor 3115, and/or the neural oscillation monitor3130, the stimulus generator module 3125 can modify the control signalsent to the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N. Based on thefeedback data, the stimulus generator module 3125 can modify the one ormore predefined characteristics, such as the magnitude, the type (e.g.,auditory, visual, etc.), the direction, the pulse modulation scheme, orthe frequency (or wavelength) of the oscillations of the stimulus 3025.The stimulus generator module 3125 can identify the one or more stimulusgeneration policies of the stimulus generation policy database 3145based on the feedback data. The one or more stimulus generation policiescan also specify a modification to the one or more predefinedcharacteristics for the control signal sent to the one or more stimulusoutput devices 3155A-N. Modifications to the stimulus 3025 may includeincreasing or decreasing the intensity of the stimulus 3025, increasingor decreasing the intervals of the modulation or pulse scheme of thestimulus 3025, altering the pulse shape of the stimulus 3025, changing atype of stimulus 3025 (e.g., from visual to auditory), and/orterminating the application of the stimulus 3025.

In some embodiments, based on the feedback data from the neuraloscillation monitor 3130, the stimulus generator module 3125 cancalculate a frequency response (e.g., power spectrum) of the neuralresponse of the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 using Fouriertransform techniques (e.g., Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)). Based on thecalculated frequency response, the stimulus generator module 3125 canidentify a global maximum frequency corresponding to a global maximum ofthe frequency response of the neural response of the nervous system 3010of the subject 3005. The stimulus generator module 3125 can compare theglobal maximum frequency to the pre-specified frequency to determine alevel of entrainment relative to the pre-specified frequency of thecontrol signal. The level of entrainment may be a measure (e.g.,percentage) at the pre-specified frequency versus other frequencies inthe power spectrum the neural response of the nervous system 3010. Thestimulus generator module 3125 can determine whether the nervous system3010 of the subject 3005 is entrained to the pre-specified frequency ofthe control signal by comparing the level of entrainment to a threshold.Responsive to determining that the level of entrainment is less than thethreshold, the stimulus generator module 3125 can modify the controlsignal sent to the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N. Thestimulus generator module 3125 can also identify the one or morestimulus generation policies of the stimulus generation policy database3145 based on the determination (e.g., a difference between the globalmaximum frequency and the pre-specified frequency). In addition,responsive to determining that the level of entrainment is greater thanor equal to the threshold, the stimulus generator module 3125 canterminate the application of the stimulus 3025 on the subject 3005 bythe one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N. The stimulus generatormodule 3125 can store, write, or otherwise update the profile of thesubject 3005 in the subject profile database 3135 with the one or morepredefined characteristics of the control signal corresponding to thedetermination of the level of entrainment being greater than or equal tothe threshold.

Using the feedback data, the assessment administration module 3110 canmodify the control signal sent to the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N. At this point, the feedback data may indicate that thenervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 may or may not have reached adesired level (e.g., threshold) of entrainment to the pre-specifiedfrequency. The assessment administration module 3110 can write or storethe feedback indicating that the nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005has reached the desired level of entrainment onto the subject profiledatabase 3135. The profile of the subject 3005 may be also updated toindicate the task response to the assessment 3015 administered to thesubject.

Based on the feedback data indicating that the nervous system 3010 hasreached the desired level of entrainment, the assessment administrationmodule 3110 can select or identify the one or more assessment policiesof the assessment application policy database 3140. The one or moreassessment policies may specify a modification to the type ofassessment, the sensory system to be assessed, time duration ofassessment, and/or intensity of the cue (or stimuli) in the assessment3015 to be administered to the subject 3005, given that the nervoussystem 3010 has reached the desired level of entrainment in response tothe application of the stimulus 3025. For example, the assessment 3015administered may be an n-back test. If the feedback data indicates thatthe nervous system 3010 of the subject 3005 has reached the desiredlevel of entrainment, the speed at which the stimuli of the assessment3015 in the n-back test is to be delivered to the subject 3005 may beincreased. The assessment administration module 3110 can generate a newcontrol signal based on the one or more assessment policies identifiedbased on the feedback data. The assessment administration module 3110can transmit the new control signal, and can continue to send ortransmit the control signal to the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N, while receiving the feedback data from the subjectassessment monitor 3115.

In some embodiments, the assessment administration module 3110 candetermine a termination condition for the assessment 3015 based on thefeedback data from the subject assessment monitor 3115. The terminationcondition may correspond to a termination of the assessment 3015administered to the subject 3005 via the one or more assessmentadministration devices 3150A-N. The termination condition may correspondto sending of a control signal specifying the termination of theassessment 3015 administered via the one or more assessment applicationdevices 3150A-N. Using the feedback data from the subject assessmentmonitor 3115, the assessment administration module 3110 can determinewhether the task response of the subject 3005 to the assessment 3015satisfies an assessment effectiveness policy. The assessmenteffectiveness policy may indicate or specify a change in the taskresponse by a predefined percentage or score in the feedback data fromthe subject assessment monitor 3115. The feedback data, for example, mayindicate that the subject 3005 has improved in performance i (e.g.,assessment score increased by 5%) than previously to the assessment 3015administered to the subject 3005, and as a result may satisfy theassessment policy. If the assessment policy is satisfied, the assessmentadministration module 3110 can determine the termination condition.

In some embodiments, responsive to the termination of the stimulus 3025on the subject 3005, the assessment administration module 3110 candetermine an initiation condition for the assessment 3025. Theinitiation condition may correspond to an initiation or commencement ofthe assessment 3015 administered to the subject 3005 via the one or moreassessment administration devices 3150A-N. The initiation condition maycorrespond to sending of a control signal specifying the initiation ofthe assessment 3025 administered via the one or more assessmentapplication devices 3150A-N. In some embodiments, the assessmentadministration module 3110 can maintain a timer to identify a timeelapsed since the termination of the stimulus 3025 applied to thesubject 3005 via the one or more stimulus output devices 3155A-N. Theassessment administration module 3110 can determine whether the timeelapsed since the termination of the stimulus 3025 is greater than atime threshold. The time threshold may correspond to the time durationat which neural oscillations of the nervous system 3010 of the subject3005 are restored to a non-excited state or normal state (e.g., withoutapplication of the stimulus 3025). If the time elapsed since thetermination of the stimulus 3025 is greater than the time threshold, theassessment administration module 3110 can identify the initiationcondition and can generate a new control signal to send to the one ormore assessment administration devices 3150A-N to initiateadministration of the assessment 3015.

FF. Methods of Performing Assessments on a Subject in Response to NeuralStimulation

Referring now to FIG. 33, FIG. 33 is a flow diagram depicting a method3300 of performing assessments on a subject in response to stimulation,in accordance to an embodiment. The method 3300 can be performed by oneor more of the systems, components, modules, or elements depicted inFIGS. 31 and 32, including the CAS 3105. In brief overview, at block3305, the CAS can access a subject profile for a subject. At block 3310,the CAS can administer an assessment to the subject. At block 3315, theCAS can measure an assessment result of the subject. At block 3320, theCAS can determine whether a type of stimulus applied to the subject iseffective. At block 3325, if the stimulus type is determined not to beeffective, the CAS can select a different type of stimulus to apply tothe subject. At block 3330, if the stimulus type is determined to beeffective, the CAS can select the same type of stimulus to apply to thesubject. At block 3335, the CAS can apply the selected stimulus to thesubject. At block 3340, the CAS can monitor a neural response of thesubject. At block 3345, the CAS can determine whether a maximumfrequency of the neural response is approximately equal to the specifiedfrequency. At block 3350, if the maximum frequency of the neuralresponse is not approximately equal to the specified frequency, CAS canmodify the stimulus, and the CAS can repeat the functionalities ofblocks 3335-3345. At block 3355, if the maximum frequency of the neuralresponse is approximately equal to the specified frequency, the CAS canterminate the application of the stimulus on the subject. At block 3360,the CAS can determine whether the time elapsed since the termination ofthe stimulus is greater than a threshold. If the time elapsed since thetermination of the stimulus is greater than the threshold, the CAS canrepeat the functionalities of blocks 3305-3360. If the time elapsedsince the termination of the stimulus is less than or equal to thethreshold, the CAS can repeat the functionality of block 3355 untilotherwise. The CAS can repeat blocks 3305-3360 any number of times andexecute the functionalities of blocks 3305-3360 in any sequence.

At block 3305, the CAS can access a subject profile for a subject. Tobuild the subject profile, the CAS may, for example, prompt the subjectto complete an evaluation intake form. The form may have questionnairesconcerning health, physical activities, habits, traits, allergies, andmedical conditions, among others. The form may have questions aboutrecent physiological status of the subject (e.g., body temperature,pulse rate, stress, etc.) The form may have questionnaires regardingsubstance intake by the subject (e.g., smoking, drinking, coffee,pharmacological agents, etc.) In some embodiments, the subject using theCAS may be using or under the effect of one or more pharmacologicalagents. The pharmacological agents may reduce side effects, such asmigraines and pain, from the administration of the assessment to thesubject or the application of the stimulus on the subject. Thepharmacological agents may include topical ointments, analgesics, andother stimulants, such as caffeine. The evaluation intake form may beused to identify the state of the subject at which the stimulus is mosteffective in changing a cognitive function or state of the subject.

At block 3310, the CAS can administer an assessment to the subject. TheCAS may determine which type of assessment to administer based on theevaluation intake form completed by the subject. In accordance with thedetermined type of assessment, the CAS may administer the assessmentusing assessment application devices, such as displays, loudspeakers, ormechanical devices. The CAS can administer various types of assessmentsin any sequence. For example, the CAS may administer an auditoryassessment, then a visual assessment, then a peripheral nerveassessment, etc.

At block 3315, the CAS can measure an assessment result of the subject.The subject may actively respond to the administered assessment. The CAScan measure the assessment response by the subject with variousmeasurement devices, such as EEG monitoring devices, MEG monitoringdevices, EOG monitoring devices, accelerometers, microphones, videos,cameras, gyroscopes, among others. The CAS can determine an assessmentscore based on the measurements by the various measurement devices.

At block 3320, the CAS can determine whether a type or modality ofstimulus applied to the subject is effective. In some instances, astimulus (e.g., auditory, visual, etc.) may have been applied to thesubject, prior to the assessment. Furthermore, the subject may havetaken various assessments multiple times. The CAS can identify apreviously applied stimulus to the subject from the subject profiledatabase. Using the measurements, the CAS can determine whether a changein assessment score for the subject is greater than or equal to athreshold. If the change in assessment score is greater than or equal tothe threshold, the CAS can determine that the type of stimulus appliedto the subject is effective. If the change in the assessment score isless than the threshold, the CAS can determine that the type of stimulusapplied to the subject is ineffective.

At block 3325, after determining whether or not the stimulus typeadministered for assessment is effective in inducing neural oscillationsat the target frequency, the CAS can select a different type of stimulusto apply to the subject to determine whether or not the different typeof stimulus is effective. For example, if the first stimulus applied onthe subject is an auditory stimulus and was determined to be noteffective, the CAS can select a visual stimulus for the next stimulus toapply. The CAS can select the different type of stimulus to apply basedon a stimulus generation policy. The stimulus generation policy mayspecify a sequence of types of stimuli to apply. For example, thestimulus generation policy may specify that an auditory stimulus is tobe applied first, then peripheral nerve stimulus, then visualstimulation At block 3330, if the stimulus type is determined to beeffective, the CAS can select the same type of stimulus to apply to thesubject. For example, the CAS can identify the previously appliedstimulus from the subject profile database. In this manner, varioustypes of stimuli may be applied in any sequence on the nervous system ofthe subject.

At block 3335, the CAS can apply the selected stimulus to the subject.For example, the CAS can apply the stimulus via a stimulus outputdevice, such as displays, loudspeakers, or mechanical devices. The CAScan identify a particular type of stimulus output device to apply thestimulus to the subject. The stimulus may excite a part of the nervoussystem of the subject.

At block 3340, the CAS can monitor a neural response of the subject. TheCAS can measure the neural response by the subject to the stimulus withvarious measurement devices, such as EEG monitoring devices, MEGmonitoring devices, EOG monitoring devices, among others.

At block 3345, the CAS can determine whether a maximum frequency of theneural response is approximately equal to the specified frequency. TheCAS can sample the neural response received from the measurement devicesand convert the neural response from a time domain signal to a frequencydomain signal.

At block 3350, if the maximum frequency of the neural response is notapproximately equal to the specified frequency, the CAS can modify thestimulus, and the CAS can repeat the functionalities of blocks 3335-445.In this manner, the CAS can stimulate the nervous system of the subjectat the pre-specified frequency. The CAS can also identify a time elapsedbetween the first stimulus and the stimulus to result in the stimulationof the nervous system at the pre-specified frequency.

At block 3355, if the maximum frequency of the neural response isapproximately equal to the specified frequency, the CAS can terminatethe application of the stimulus on the subject. The application of thestimulus may be terminated to measure how long and how much thecognitive functions and state of the nervous system of the subject haschanged.

At block 3360, the CAS can determine whether the time elapsed since thetermination of the stimulus is greater than a threshold. The thresholdmay correspond to pause between the application of the stimulus and thenext administration of the assessment. In this manner, the CAS mayverify whether the effects of the stimulus on the nervous system of thesubject are long-lasting. If the time elapsed since the termination ofthe stimulus is less than or equal to the threshold, the CAS can repeatthe functionality of block 3355 until otherwise. If the time elapsedsince the termination of the stimulus is greater than the threshold, theCAS can repeat the functionalities of blocks 3305-3360. In this manner,each time the brain is stimulated, the CAS can measure and assess theeffect of the stimulation on the cognitive functioning and state of thenervous system of the subject, by administering assessments. Frommeasuring the responses to the assessments, the CAS can also determine atimespan in which the application of the stimulus is most effective. Inaddition, the effect of each type of stimulus on the cognitivefunctioning and the state of the nervous system of the subject may beassessed.

Referring now to FIG. 34, the method 3400 can be performed by one ormore of the systems, components, modules, or elements depicted in FIGS.31 and 32, including the CAS 3105. In brief overview, at block 3405, theCAS can apply a stimulus for the selected modality. At block 3410, theCAS can pause the stimulus. At block 3415, the CAS can administer anassessment. At block 3420, the CAS can measure assessment result. Atblock 3425, the CAS can determine whether there are more modalities totest. At block 3430, if there are no more modalities to test, the CAScan identify an optimal stimulus and modality. At block 3435, if thereare more modalities to test, the CAS can select another modality. TheCAS 3105 can repeat blocks 3405-3435 any number of times and execute thefunctionalities of blocks 3405-3435 in any sequence.

In further detail, at block 3405, the CAS can apply a stimulus for theselected modality (e.g., visual, auditory, or peripheral nerve, etc.).The CAS can apply the stimulus based on a stimulus generation policy.The stimulus generation policy may specify a type of stimulus (e.g.,visual, auditory, etc.), a magnitude of stimulus, a specified frequencyor wavelength, and/or a pulse schema or the modulation, among others,for the stimulus to be applied to the nervous system of the subject. Thestimulus may cause neurons from one or more portions of the nervoussystem of the subject to oscillate at a target frequency.

At block 3410, the CAS can pause the stimulus. The CAS can determinewhether the nervous system of the subject is sufficiently entrained to atarget frequency. In response to determining that the subject issufficient entrained, the CAS can terminate the application of thestimulus for a predefined period of time. The predefined period of timemay correspond to an amount of time that the nervous system takes toreturn to a natural state (e.g., prior to application of the stimulus).In this manner, the CAS can assess whether the effects of the stimuluson the cognitive functioning and state of the subject is long-lasting.In some implementations, the CAS can be configured to provide a stimulusthat is designed to cause the nervous system to return to a naturalstate, for instance, by stimulating the subject with signals at variousrandom, pseudo random or controlled different frequencies.

At block 3415, the CAS can administer an assessment. The assessment maytest or evaluate a cognitive function or state of the subject. Theassessment may be one of, for example, an N-back task, a serial reactiontime test, a visual coordination test, a voluntary movement test, or aforce production test, among others.

At block 3420, the CAS can measure the assessment result. Whileadministering the assessment, the CAS can record the result of theassessment (e.g., task response) from the subject. The assessment resultmay include an assessment score. The assessment score may indicate aperformance rate of the subject taking the assessment. By administeringthe assessment multiple times, the CAS may determine a change in theassessment score through multiple assessments.

At block 3425, the CAS can determine whether there are more modalitiesto test. The CAS can identify a number of modalities previouslyassessed. By assessing multiple modalities of the subject, the CAS canadminister various assessments and can aggregate assessment resultsacross different modalities.

At block 3430, if there are no more modalities to test, the CAS canidentify an optimal stimulus and modality. Using aggregating assessmentresults, the CAS can identify an optimal stimulus and modality. The CAScan also identify parameters used to generate the stimulus, such asintensity, content, duration, and pulse modulation, among others. TheCAS can also identify which parameters correspond to a shortest time toachieve sufficient entrainment in the nervous system of the subject. Atblock 3435, if there are more modalities to test, the CAS can selectanother modality. The CAS can repeat blocks 3405-3435 any number oftimes and execute the functionalities of blocks 3405-3435 in anysequence.

Referring now to FIG. 35A, the method 3500 can be performed by one ormore of the systems, components, modules, or elements depicted in FIGS.31 and 32, including the CAS 3105. In relation to FIG. 34, the method3500 may be the functionalities of each block 3405-3435 of method 3400in further detail. In brief overview, at block 3502, the CAS can apply astimulus to a region. At block 3504, the CAS can measure a neuralresponse. At block 3506, the CAS can determine whether a level ofentrainment is greater than a threshold. At block 3508, if the level ofentrainment is less than or equal to the threshold, the CAS candetermine whether content of the stimulus was previously adjusted. Atblock 3510, if the content of the stimulus was not previously adjusted,the CAS can adjust the content of the stimulus. At block 3512, if thecontent of the stimulus was previously adjusted, the CAS can determinewhether an intensity of the stimulus was previously adjusted. At block3514, if the intensity of the stimulus was not previously adjusted, theCAS can determine adjust the intensity. At block 3516, if the intensityof the stimulus was previously adjusted, the CAS can adjust a pulsemodulation of the stimulus. At block 3518, if the pulse modulation ofthe stimulus was previously adjusted, the CAS can adjust the pulsemodulation of the stimulus. At block 3520, if the level of entrainmentis greater than the threshold, the CAS can identify parameters of thestimulus. At block 3522, the CAS can terminate the application of thestimulus on the subject. At block 3524, the CAS can determine whether anelapsed time since termination is greater than a threshold. At block3526, if the elapsed time since termination is greater than thethreshold, the CAS can administer an assessment to the subject. At block3528, the CAS can measure assessment results. At block 3530, the CAS candetermine whether there are more regions to test. At block 3532, ifthere are no more regions to test, the CAS can determine whether thereare more modalities to test. At block 3534, if there are more modalitiesto test, the CAS can select a next modality. At block 3536, the CAS canselect a next region. At block 3538, the CAS can identify an initialstimulus generation policy. At block 3540, if there are no moremodalities to test, the CAS can identify an optimal modality. At block3542, the CAS can identify an optimal region. At block 3544, the CAS canidentify optimal stimulus parameters.

In further detail, at block 3502, the CAS can apply a stimulus to aregion of a subject. The region may correspond to any portion of thebody of the subject. The stimulus may be one of a visual stimulus, anauditory stimulus, among others. For example, the CAS can apply a lightof a particular color in the visible spectrum to the left eye of thesubject. The stimulus may be configured to excite the nervous system ofthe subject at the region to a target frequency.

At block 3504, the CAS can measure a neural response of the subject atthe region. The neural response may correspond neurons of the regionsfiring or oscillating in response to the application of the stimulus.The CAS may measure the neural response of the subject at the region,using EEG or MEG devices, among others, attached or aimed at the regionof focus. For example, if a colored light was applied to the left eye ofthe subject, the CAS can measure the neural response from the visualcortex corresponding to the left eye of the subject.

At block 3506, the CAS can determine whether a level of entrainment isgreater than a threshold. Using the measurements from the neuralresponse of the subject at the region, the CAS can determine a powerspectrum by calculating the frequency domain of the neural response overa sample window. The CAS can then identify the level of entrainmentusing the power spectrum of the neural response. The level ofentrainment may indicate a number of samples in the frequency domainaround the target frequency versus a number of samples at otherfrequencies. The threshold, to which the level of entrainment may becompared, may represent a threshold number of samples in the powerspectrum about and including the target frequency of the stimulus.

In blocks 3508-618, if the level of entrainment is less than thethreshold, the CAS can adjust various parameters to adjust or modify thestimulus. The parameters may include content (or type), an intensity,and/or a pulse modulation of the stimulus. At block 3508, the CAS candetermine whether content of the stimulus was previously adjusted. For avisual stimulus, for example, the adjusting of the content can includechange of color and/or change of shape of the stimulus, among others.For an auditory stimulus, for example, the adjusting of the content caninclude change of pitch and speech cue, among others. At block 3510, ifthe content of the stimulus was not previously adjusted, the CAS canadjust the content of the stimulus. At block 3512, if the content of thestimulus was previously adjusted, the CAS can determine whether anintensity of the stimulus was previously adjusted. At block 3514, if theintensity of the stimulus was not previously adjusted, the CAS candetermine adjust the intensity. At block 3516, if the intensity of thestimulus was previously adjusted, the CAS can adjust a pulse modulationof the stimulus. At block 3518, if the pulse modulation of the stimuluswas previously adjusted, the CAS can adjust the pulse modulation of thestimulus. By iteratively adjusting the parameters used to generate thestimulus, the CAS can later identify the set of parameters to cause thelevel of entrainment of the subject to increase.

At block 3520, if the level of entrainment is greater than thethreshold, the CAS can identify parameters of the stimulus. Theparameters may correspond to those that caused the nervous system of thesubject to reach sufficient entrainment. The CAS may also identify theregion of the subject to which the stimulus was applied. At block 3522,the CAS can terminate the application of the stimulus on the subject. Atblock 3524, the CAS can determine whether an elapsed time sincetermination is greater than a threshold. Once the nervous system of thesubject is sufficiently entrained to the target frequency, the CAS canthen commence assessing the effectives of the stimulation to thecognitive functions and state of the subject. The application of thestimulus may be terminated to measure how long and how much thecognitive functions and state of the nervous system of the subjectremain changed thereafter.

At block 3526, if the elapsed time since termination is greater than thethreshold, the CAS can administer an assessment to the subject. The CAScan administer any variety of tests or assessments to evaluate changesto the cognitive functioning and state of the subject. The CAS canidentify the assessment to administer based on the stimulus appliedpreviously to the subject. The assessment may be configured toparticular to the region the stimulus was applied. At block 3528, theCAS can measure assessment results. While administering the assessment,the CAS can receive input from the subject via a measurement device tomeasure the assessment result. Using the assessment results, the CAS cancalculate an assessment score for the subject. In some embodiments, theCAS can skip blocks 3526-628 and may omit the administering of theassessment. In some embodiments, the CAS can analyze the neural responseof the subject after the termination of the application of the stimulusas part of the assessment.

At block 3530, the CAS can determine whether there are more regions totest. The CAS can identify which regions of the subject the stimulus hasbeen applied. The CAS can also identify which regions of the subject theassessment has been ministered. At block 3532, if there are no moreregions to test, the CAS can determine whether there are more modalitiesto test. The CAS can identify which modalities or sensory organs (e.g.,visual, auditory, etc.) to which the stimulus has been applied. The CAScan identify which modalities or sensory organs (e.g., visual, auditory,etc.) to which the assessment has been applied. At block 3534, if thereare more modalities to test, the CAS can select a next modality. Atblock 3536, the CAS can select a next region. At block 3538, the CAS canidentify an initial stimulus generation policy. The initial stimulusgeneration policy can specify parameters for generating the stimulus toapply to the subject. In this manner, the CAS can apply various stimuliand administer various assessments to different regions of the subject.The CAS can also aggregate assessment measurements from the differentmodalities and different regions of the subject.

At block 3540, if there are no more modalities to test, the CAS canidentify an optimal modality. At block 3542, the CAS can identify anoptimal region. At block 3544, the CAS can identify optimal stimulusparameters (e.g., content, intensity, pulse modulation, etc.). Byaggregating the assessment measurements from the different modalitiesand different regions of the subject, the CAS can identify the optimalmodality, the optimal region, and the optimal stimulus parameters. Theoptimal modality, the optimal region, and the optimal stimulusparameters may correspond to those that lead to the optimal (e.g.,greatest) increase in the assessment score of the score. In someembodiments, the CAS may determine an optimal sequence of the stimulus.For example, the CAS may determine the optimal sequence of the stimulusto be a visual stimulus to the right eye of the subject, followed by anauditory stimulus to the left ear of the subject, and followed by anelectrical current applied to a neck of the subject. In this manner, theCAS may increase or improve the cognitive functions or state of thesubject.

Referring now to FIG. 35B, a method 3550 for generating therapy regimensbased on comparisons of assessments for different stimulation modalitiesis shown according to an embodiment. The method 3550 can be performed byone or more of the systems, components, modules, or elements depicted inFIGS. 31 and 32, including the CAS 3105. In brief overview, at block3552, the CAS can select a first stimulation modality. At block 3554,the CAS can provide a first assessment to the subject. At block 3556,the CAS can determine a first task response. At block 3558, the CAS canapply a first neural stimulus. At block 3560, the CAS can provide asecond assessment. At block 3562, the CAS can determine a second taskresponse. At block 3564, the CAS can compare the first and second taskresponses. At block 3566, the CAS can determine if each modality hasbeen completed, returning to block 3554 if additional modalities are tobe executed. At block 3568, the CAS can select a candidate stimulationmodality. At block 3570, the CAS can generate a therapy regimen usingthe candidate stimulation modality.

At block 3552, the CAS can select a stimulation modality. Thestimulation modality can be at least one of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality and a peripheral nervestimulation modality.

At block 3554, the CAS can provide a first assessment to the subject.The first assessment may include at least one of an N-back test, aserial reaction time test, a visual coordination test, a voluntarymovement test, or a force production test.

At block 3556, the CAS can determine a first task response. The firsttask response may be determined based on the first assessment. The firsttask response may be a first score of the first assessment.

At block 3558, the CAS can apply a first neural stimulus. The firstneural stimulus can be applied using the selected stimulation modality.The first neural stimulus may be applied at a predetermined frequency.

At block 3560, the CAS can provide a second assessment. The secondassessment may be of a same type as the first assessment (e.g., a sameat least one of an N-back test, a serial reaction time test, a visualcoordination test, a voluntary movement test, or a force productiontest). The second assessment may be provided subsequent to terminationof the first neural stimulus.

At block 3565, the CAS can determine a second task response. The secondtask response may be determined based on the second assessment. Thesecond task response may be a second score of the first assessment. Thesecond task response may be indicative of a change in neural activity ofthe subject. At 3570, the CAS can compared the first task response tothe second task response, such as to determine whether the second taskresponse indicates a particular neural activity response of the subject.

At block 3566, the CAS can determine whether each desired stimulationmodality has been executed (e.g., by providing the first assessment,determining the first task response, applying the first neural stimulus,providing the second assessment, determining the second task response,and comparing the task responses for the modality). If each desiredstimulation modality has not been executed, then the providing the firstassessment, determining the first task response, applying the firstneural stimulus, providing the second assessment, determining the secondtask response, and comparing the task responses can be executed for theremaining desired stimulation modalities.

If each desired stimulation modality has been executed, then at block3568, the CAS can select a candidate stimulation modality. For example,the candidate stimulation modality can be selected from amongst theauditory stimulation modality, the visual stimulation modality, and theperipheral nerve stimulation modality, based on the comparisons of thefirst and second task responses. In some embodiments, the CAS selectsthe candidate stimulation modality by selecting the modality associatedwith at least one of a highest increase in score of the secondassessment relative to the first assessment, or a highest score of thesecond assessment. In some embodiments, the CAS selects the candidatestimulation modality by selecting at least one modality associated withat least one of an increase in score of the second assessment which isgreater than an increase threshold, or a score of the second assessmentbeing greater than a score threshold; as such, multiple candidatestimulation modalities may be selected, as long as their scores satisfythe associated thresholds.

At block 3570, the CAS can generate a therapy regimen using thecandidate stimulation modality. The therapy regimen may include applyingone or more neural stimuli based on parameters of the candidatestimulation modality.

In some embodiments, the CAS can apply a placebo stimulation todetermine whether one or more of the candidate neural stimuli should notbe used to generate the therapy regimen (e.g., if the candidate neuralstimuli were selected for the therapy regimen based on a falsepositive). The placebo stimulation can be at least one of the auditory,visual, or peripheral nerve stimulation (e.g., corresponding to themodalities of the first neural stimuli). The CAS can select a thirdneural stimulus including at least one of an auditory stimulationmodality, a visual stimulation modality, or a peripheral stimulationmodality for the third neural stimulus. The CAS can set an amplitude ofthe third neural stimulus to be less than a placebo threshold amplitude.The CAS can provide a third assessment to the subject, and determine athird task response based on the third assessment. The CAS can apply thethird neural stimulus, and subsequent to applying the third neuralstimulus, provide a fourth assessment to the subject. The CAS candetermine a fourth task response based on the fourth assessment. The CAScan compare the fourth task response to the third task response todetermine whether the fourth task response indicates the particularneural activity response of the subject. Responsive to the fourth taskresponse indicating the particular neural activity response, the CAS candeselect any candidate stimulation modality being of the same modalityas the third neural stimulus prior to generating the therapy regimenusing the candidate stimulation modality. For example, if the thirdneural stimulus is an auditory stimulus, the fourth task responseindicates the particular neural activity response, and one of the selectcandidate neural stimuli is an auditory stimulus, the CAS can deselectthe auditory stimulus candidate neural stimulus prior to generating thetherapy regimen.

GG. Adjusting an External Stimulus to Induce Neural Oscillations Basedon Subject Monitoring and Feedback

Systems and methods of the present disclosure are directed to adjustingan external stimulus to induce neural oscillations based on subjectmonitoring and feedback. When the neural oscillations of the brain occurat or around a particular frequency, there may be beneficial effects toone or more cognitive states or functions of the brain of the subject.To ensure that the neural oscillations of the brain occur at or around aparticular frequency, the external stimuli provided to, perceived orexperienced by the subject may be adjusted, modified, or changed basedon measurements of the neural oscillations of the brain as well as otherphysiological traits of the subject.

To induce neural oscillations in the brain of a subject, externalstimuli may be applied to the subject. The external stimuli may bedelivered to the nervous system of the subject via the visual system ofthe subject using visual stimuli, auditory system of the subject usingauditory stimuli, among others. The neural oscillations of the brain ofthe subject may be monitored using electroencephalography (EEG) andmagnetoencephalography (MEG) readings. Various other signs andindications (e.g., attentiveness, physiology, etc.) from the subject mayalso be monitored while applying the external stimuli. Thesemeasurements may then be used to adjust, modify, or change the externalstimuli to ensure that the neural oscillations are entrained to thespecified frequency. The measurements may also be used to determinewhether the subject is receiving the external stimuli.

Neural oscillations occur in humans or animals and includes rhythmic orrepetitive neural activity in the central nervous system. Neural tissuecan generate oscillatory activity by mechanisms within individualneurons or by interactions between neurons. Oscillations can appear aseither oscillations in membrane potential or as rhythmic patterns ofaction potentials, which can produce oscillatory activation ofpost-synaptic neurons. Synchronized activity of a group of neurons cangive rise to macroscopic oscillations, which can be observed byelectroencephalography (“EEG”). Neural oscillations can be characterizedby their frequency, amplitude, and phase. These signal properties can beobserved from neural recordings using time-frequency analysis.

For example, electrodes for an EEG device can measure voltagefluctuations (in the magnitude of microvolts) from currents or otherelectrical signals within the neurons along the epidermis of thesubject. The voltage fluctuations measured by the EEG device maycorrespond to oscillatory activity among a group of neurons, and themeasured oscillatory activity can be categorized into frequency bands asfollows: delta activity corresponds to a frequency band from 1-4 Hz;theta activity corresponds to a frequency band from 4-8 Hz; alphaactivity corresponds to a frequency band from 8-12 Hz; beta activitycorresponds to a frequency band from 13-30 Hz; and gamma activitycorresponds to a frequency band from 30-60 Hz. The EEG device may thensample voltage fluctuations picked up by the electrodes (e.g., at 120Hz-2000 Hz or randomly using compressed sensing techniques) and convertto a digital signal for further processing.

The frequency of neural oscillations can be associated with cognitivestates or cognitive functions such as information transfer, perception,motor control, and memory. Based on the cognitive state or cognitivefunction, the frequency of neural oscillations can vary. Further,certain frequencies of neural oscillations can have beneficial effectsor adverse consequences on one or more cognitive states or functions.However, it may be challenging to synchronize neural oscillations at oneor more desired frequencies using external stimulus to provide suchbeneficial effects or reduce or prevent such adverse consequences.

Brainwave stimulation (e.g., neural stimulation or neural stimulation)occurs when an external stimulus of a particular frequency is perceivedby the brain and triggers neural activity in the brain that results inneurons oscillating at a frequency corresponding to the particularfrequency of the external stimulation. Thus, neural stimulation canrefer to synchronizing neural oscillations in the brain using externalstimulation such that the neural oscillations occur at frequency thatcorresponds to the particular frequency of the external stimulation.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram depicting an environment 3600 for adjustingan external stimulus to induce synchronized neural oscillations based onmeasurements on a subject, in accordance to an embodiment. In overview,the environment 3600 can include a subject 3605, a nervous system 3610(e.g., brain), an external stimulus 3615, a reading 3620, and a feedback3625. The external stimulus 3615 may be applied by a system to excite orstimulate the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. The externalstimulus 3615 may be delivered to the nervous system 3610 of the subject3605 via the visual system of the subject using visual stimuli, auditorysystem of the subject using auditory stimuli to the subject 3605. Theexternal stimulus 3615 may be generated by a stimulus generator and/or astimulus output device of the system. The modulation or a pulse schemeof the external stimulus 3615 may be set and dynamically adjusted, so asto cause the neural oscillations of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605 to occur at a particular or specified frequency.

Upon applying the stimulus 3615 to induce neural activity at the centralnervous system 3610 of the subject 3605, the subject response may bemeasured or captured in the form of the reading 3620. The reading 3620may be of the neural response (or evoked response) of the nervous system3610 of the subject 3605, and may be measured using EEG or MEG, amongother devices. The reading 3620 may also be of the subject attentivenessor of the subject physiological status of the subject 3605, and may bedetected using electrooculography (EOG), accelerometer, gyroscope,cameras, among other devices. Other responses, characteristics, andtraits of the subject 3605 may be monitored in the environment 3600.

From the reading 3620, the system may determine that the nervous system3610 of the subject 3605 is not stimulated to the specified frequency.From the reading 3620, the system may determine that the subject 3605 isnot attentive or otherwise not responding to the stimulus 3615 appliedto the subject 3605. In either event, the reading 3620 may then be usedby the system to generate the feedback signal 3625 to adjust, change, ormodify the stimulus 3615, so as to entrain the nervous system 3610 ofthe subject 3605 to the specified frequency. Adjustments to the stimulus3615 may include increasing or decreasing the intensity of the stimulus3615, increasing or decreasing the intervals of the modulation or pulsescheme of the stimulus 3615, altering the pulse shape of the stimulus3615, changing a type of stimulus 3615 (e.g., from visual to auditory),and/or terminating the application of the stimulus 3615.

Referring now to FIG. 37, FIG. 37 is a block diagram depicting a system3700 for neural stimulation sensing, in accordance to an embodiment. Thesystem 3700 can include a neural stimulation sensing system 3705. Inbrief overview, the neural stimulation sensing system (“NSSS”) 3705 caninclude, access, interface with, or otherwise communicate with one ormore of a neural oscillation monitor 3710, a subject attentivenessmonitor 3715, a subject physiological monitor 3720, a stimulus generatormodule 3725, a stimulus control module 3730, a simulated response module3735, a stimulus generation policy database 3740, a sensor log 3745, amulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750, one or more stimulus outputdevices 3755A-N, and one or more measurement devices 3760A-N. The neuraloscillation monitor 3710, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715, thesubject physiological monitor 3720, the stimulus generator module 3725,the stimulus control module 3730, the simulated response module 3735,the multi-stimuli synchronization module 3750 can each include at leastone processing unit or other logic device such as programmable logicarray engine, or module configured to communicate with the stimulusgeneration policy database 3740 and/or the sensor log 3745. The neuraloscillation monitor 3710, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715, thesubject physiological monitor 3720, the stimulus generator module 3725,the stimulus control module 3730, the simulated response module 3735,the multi-stimuli synchronization module 3750 can be separatecomponents, a single component, or a part of the NSSS 3705. The system3700 and the components therein, such as the NSSS 3705, may includehardware elements, such as one or more processors, logic devices, orcircuits. The system 3700 and the components therein, such as the NSSS3705, can include one or more hardware or interface component depictedin system 3700 in FIGS. 7A and 7B. The system 3700 and the componentstherein, such as the NSSS 3705, the one or more stimulus generators3755A-N, and the one or more measurement devices 3760A-N can becommunicatively coupled to one another, using one or more wirelessprotocols such as Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy, ZigBee, Z-Wave, IEEE802, Wi-Fi, 3G, 4G, LTE, near field communications (“NFC”), or othershort, medium or long range communication protocols, etc.

In further detail, the NSSS 3705 can include at least one stimulusgenerator module 3725. The stimulus generator module 3725 can becommunicatively coupled to the one or more stimulus output devices3755A-N and to the stimulus control module 3730. The stimulus generatormodule 3725 can be designed and constructed to interface with the one ormore stimulus output devices 3725A-N to provide a control signal, acommand, instructions, or otherwise cause or facilitate the one or morestimulus output devices 3725A-N to generate the stimulus 3615, such as avisual stimulus, an auditory stimulus, among others. The stimulus 3615may be controlled or modulated as a burst, a pulse, a chirp, a sweep, orother modulated fields having one or more predetermined parameters. Theone or more predetermined parameters may define the pulse schema or themodulation of the stimulus 3615. The stimulus generator module 3725 cancontrol the stimulus 3615 outputted by the one or more stimulus outputdevices 3755A-N according to the one or more defined characteristics,such as magnitude, type (e.g., auditory, visual, etc.), direction,frequency (or wavelength) of the oscillations of the stimulus 3615.

The one or more stimulus output devices 3755A-N may include a visualsource, such as one or more cathode ray tubes (CRT), liquid crystaldisplays (LCD), a plasma display panels (PDP), incandescent light bulbs,and light emitting diodes (LED), or any other device, among others,designed to generate light within the visual spectrum to apply to thevisual system of the subject 3605. The one or more stimulus outputdevices 3755A-N may include an auditory source, such as a loudspeaker,dynamic speaker, headphones, temple transducer, or any type ofelectroacoustic transducer, among others, designed or configured togenerate soundwaves to apply to the auditory system of the subject 3605.The one or more stimulus output devices 3755A-N may include an electriccurrent source, such as an electroconvulsive device or machine designedor configured to apply an electric current to the subject 3605.

The NSSS 3705 can include at least one neural oscillation monitor 3710,at least one subject attentiveness monitor 3715, and/or at least onesubject physiological monitor 3720. In overview, the neural oscillationmonitor 3710 can measure a neural response of the subject 3605 to thestimulus 3615. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can detect whetherthe subject 3605 is attentive while the stimulus 3615 is applied to thesubject 3605. The subject physiological monitor 3720 can measure aphysiological status (e.g., heartrate, blood pressure, breathing rate,perspiration, etc.) of the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. One ormore of the neural oscillation monitor 3710, the at least one subjectattentiveness monitor 3715, and/or the at least one subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can be communicatively coupled to thestimulus control module 3730, the simulated response module 3735, themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750, and/or the one or moremeasurement devices 3760A-N. One or more of neural oscillation monitor3710, the at least one subject attentiveness monitor 3715, and/or the atleast one subject physiological monitor 3720 receive a measurement ofthe subject 3605 from the one or more measurement devices 3760A-N. Themeasurement of the subject 3605 may represent or may be indicative of aresponse (or lack of response) of the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615applied to the subject 3605. The one or more measurement devices 3760A-Nmay include a brain wave sensors, EEG monitoring devices, MEG monitoringdevices, EOG monitoring devices, accelerometers, microphones, videos,cameras, gyroscopes, motion detectors, proximity sensors, photodetectors, temperature sensors, heart or pulse rate monitors,physiological sensors, ambient light sensors, ambient temperaturesensors, actimetry sensors, among others, to measure the response of thesubject 3605 to the stimulus 3725 and the effect of ambient noise on thestimulus 3725. Each of the one or more measurement devices 3760A-N cansample the measurement of the subject 3605 at any sample rate (e.g., 370Hz to 370,000 Hz). In some embodiments, each of the one or moremeasurement devices 3760A-N can sample at randomly in accordance tocompressed sensing techniques. One or more of neural oscillation monitor3710, the at least one subject attentiveness monitor 3715, and/or the atleast one subject physiological monitor 3720 can send or relay themeasurement of the subject 3605 to the stimulus control module 3730.Additional details of the functionalities of the neural oscillationmonitor 3710 in conjunction with the other modules of the NSSS 3705 arediscussed herein in Sections BB-DD and GG. Additional details of thefunctionalities of the subject attentive monitor 3715 are discussedherein in Section EE. Additional details of the functionalities of thesubject physiological monitor 3720 are discussed herein in Section FF.

The NSSS 3705 can include a simulated response module 3735. Thesimulated response module 3735 can receive an input from one or moremeasurement devices 3760A-N. The simulated response module 3735 canmaintain a model to generate a simulated response of the subject 3605 tothe stimulus 3615 based on the stimulus 3615 and any ambient noisemeasured by the one or more measurement devices 3760A-N. The stimulatedresponse may represent or may be indicative of a predicted or simulatedresponse of the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. The simulatedresponse may be at least one of a simulated neural response, simulatedattentiveness, or simulated physiological response. The simulatedresponse module 3735 can send or relay the simulated response to atleast one of the neural oscillation monitor 3710, the subjectattentiveness monitor 3715, and the subject physiological monitor 3720.Additional details of the functionalities of the simulated responsemodule 3735 in operation with the other components of NSSS 3705 aredescribed herein in reference to FIGS. 3-11.

The NSSS 3705 can include at least one stimulus control module 3730. Thestimulus control module 3730 can be communicatively coupled to thestimulus generator module 3725, to the stimulus generation policydatabase 3740, and to at least one of the neural oscillation monitor3710, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715, and the subjectphysiological monitor 3720. The stimulus control module 3730 can receiveinputs from at least one of the neural oscillation monitor 3710, thesubject attentiveness monitor 3715, and the subject physiologicalmonitor 3720. Using the received inputs, the stimulus control module3730 can adjust the control signal, command, or instructions used by thestimulus generator module 3725 to cause or facilitate the one or morestimulus output devices 3725A-N to adjust the stimulus 3615. Additionaldetails of the functionalities of the stimulus control module 3730 inoperation in conjunction with the other components of NSSS 3705 aredescribed herein in reference to FIGS. 3-11.

HH. Systems for Sensing Neural Oscillations Induced by External Stimuli

Referring now to FIG. 38, FIG. 38 is block diagram a system 3800 forsensing neural oscillations induced by the external stimulus 3615, inaccordance to an embodiment. In brief overview, the system 3800 caninclude the stimulus generator module 3725, the one or more stimulusoutput devices 3755A-N, the input measurement device 315 (e.g., one ormore measurement devices 3760A-N), the response measurement device 320(e.g., one or more measurement devices 3760A-N), the simulated responsemodule 3735, the neural oscillation monitor 3710, the sensor log 3745,the stimulus control module 3730, and the stimulus generation policydatabase 3740. The one or more components of the system 3800 may be inany environment or across multiple environments, such as in a treatmentcenter, a clinic, a residence, an office, a pharmacy, or any othersuitable location. In addition to the stimulus 3615, the subject 3605may be exposed to or be affected by ambient noise 3805 originatingoutside the sensory system of the subject 3605. There may also beinternal noise 310 originally within the sensory system of subject 3605that may also affect the nervous system 3610 (e.g., any visual,auditory, or peripheral nerve stimulation originating within the subject3605).

In context of FIG. 38, the stimulus generator module 3725 can transmitor relay a control signal to the stimulus output devices 3755A-N togenerate the stimulus 3615 to apply to the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605. The stimulus generator module 3725 can generate thecontrol signal. The control signal may be a continuous-time signal or aperiodic discrete signal. The control signal can specify one or moredefined characteristics. The stimulus generator module 3725 can set ordefine the one or more defined characteristics for the control signal.The one or more defined characteristics may be set to excite orstimulate the nervous system 3610 (or in some implementations, thebrain) of the subject 3605 to a specified frequency. The one or moredefined characteristics can include a magnitude, a type (e.g., auditory,visual, etc.), a direction, a pulse modulation scheme, a frequency (orwavelength) of the oscillations of the stimulus 3615. In someembodiments, the stimulus generator module 3725 can identify a subset ofthe one or more stimulus output devices 3755A-N based on the one or moredefined characteristics. For example, if the one or more definedcharacteristics specify the type of stimulus 3615 as visual, thestimulus generator module 3725 can identify the subset of the one ormore stimulus output devices 3755A-N corresponding to an electronicdisplay. Responsive to identifying the subset, the stimulus generatormodule 3725 can transmit or relay the control signal to the subset ofthe one or more stimulus output devices 3755A-N.

In response to receiving the control signal from the stimulus generatormodule 3725, the stimulus output devices 3755A-N can generate thestimulus 3615 to apply to the subject 3605. The stimulus output devices3755A-N may include a visual source, an auditory source, among others.The stimulus 3615 applied to the subject 3605 may be at least one of avisual stimulus originating from the visual source or an auditorystimulus originating from the auditory source.

The stimulus output devices 3725A-N each can receive the control signalfrom the stimulus generator module 3725. The stimulus output devices3725A-N each can identify or access the defined characteristics from thereceived control signal. The stimulus output devices 3725A-N each candetermine whether the stimulus 3615 is to be outputted or applied to thesubject 3605 based on the defined characteristics. For example, thecontrol signal may specify that the stimulus 3615 is to be an auditorystimulus. In such a case, stimulus output devices 3725 corresponding toauditory stimulation will use the control signal to output the audiostimulation based on the defined characteristics included in the controlsignal while other stimulation output devices corresponding to otherstimulation modalities (e.g., visual) may be configured to not generatean output.

The input measurement device 315 can measure the stimulus 3615 and theambient noise 3805. The first measurement device(s) 3760 can include acamera, a microphone, a force meter, gyroscope, accelerometer, or anysuitable device, to measure the effect of the ambient noise 3805 on thestimulus 3615. The input measurement device 315 can transmit themeasurement of the stimulus 3615 applied to the subject 3605 and theambient noise 3805 to the simulated response module 3735. In someembodiments, the input measurement device 315 can transmit themeasurements of the stimulus 3615 and the ambient noise 3805 to theneural oscillation monitor 3710.

In some implementations, ambient noise or signals in the environment canbe captured or collected via sensors positioned on or around thesubject. Depending on the type and/or characteristics of stimulationbeing provided to the subject, different sensors may be utilized todetect ambient noise. For instance, in implementations where audiostimulation is provided to the subject, the subject may wear a device ora component that includes one or more microphones to record ambientsounds. The microphones can be mounted on a wearable device, such as earmuffs, a headset, etc. The microphones can be strategically positionedat or near a subject's ears to pick up ambient audio signals that may beperceived by the subject. In some implementations, one or moremicrophones can be positioned on the front, center, back or sides of thehead to pick up ambient audio signals that can be used as an input inthe system 3800.

In some implementations where the stimulation provided is in the form ofvisual stimulation, there may be a desire to determine the ambient lightto which the subject is exposed. An ambient light sensor can beconfigured to determine the intensity, brightness or other visualcharacteristics of the ambient light. The sensor measurements can beprovided as input into the system 3800. In some implementations, thesensor can be positioned on glasses or eyewear that the subject may wearduring the visual stimulation. In some implementations, the sensor maybe positioned on the device that is delivering the visual stimulation tothe subject. In some implementations, the system 3800 can be configuredto receive the sensor measurements of multiple sensors to determine theamount of ambient light and the impact the ambient light may have on thestimulation being provided.

As further shown in FIG. 38, the simulated response module 3735 canreceive the stimulus 3615 and the ambient noise. The simulated responsemodule 3735 can determine a predicted or simulated neural response ofthe subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615 with the ambient noise 3805. Thesimulated response module 3735 can maintain a model for the subject 3605based on historical response data for one or more subjects, includingthe subject 3605. The model for the subject 3605 may be a simulatedneural response to the type of stimuli (e.g., auditory, visual, etc.).For example, the model for the subject 3605 may specify the neuralresponse of the nervous system 3610 corresponding to the visual cortexmay be minimal or otherwise indicate a lack of response to an auditorystimulus. In this example, the model may also specify that the visualcortex of the nervous system 3610 may respond in one manner to one typeof visual stimulus character (e.g., color and intensity, duration, etc.)and another manner to another type of visual stimulus character.

In some embodiments, the model for the subject 3605 may be based on oneor more parameters of a model generated for the subject or for a groupof subjects. The one or more parameters may include any physicalcharacteristic of the subject 3605, such as age, height, weight, heartrate, etc. The one or more parameters may be received from the subject3605 via a prompt or from the NSSS 3705. In some embodiments, the one ormore parameters may be measured, determined, or updated by the one ormore measurement devices 3760A-N, prior to application of the stimulus3615 on the subject 3605. The simulated response module 3735 cancontinuously determine the predicted or simulated neural response of thesubject 3605, as the stimulus 3615 is applied on the subject 3605. Thesimulated response module 3735 can feed forward or otherwise transmitthe predicted or simulated neural response of the subject 3605 to theneural oscillator monitor 3710.

Referring again to FIG. 38, as simulated response module 3735 isgenerating the predicted or simulated response, the response measurementdevice 320 can measure the neural response of the nervous system 3610 ofthe subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. The response measurement device320 can also measure any internal noise 310 to the neural response ofthe nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. The response measurementdevice 320 can include an EEG device or an MEG device, or any suitabledevice, to measure the neural response of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. The second measurement device (s)3760B can transmit the neural response of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605 to the stimulus 3615 to the neural oscillation monitor 3710and/or to the stimulus control module 3730.

In response to receiving the measurements from the response measurementdevice 320, the neural oscillation monitor 3710 as shown in FIG. 38 canmonitor neural response of the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605in response to the stimulus 3615. The neural oscillation monitor 3710can apply any number of signal processing techniques to the measurementsfrom the response measurement device 320 to isolate the neural responseof the nervous system 3610 to the stimulus 3615 from neural activitycorresponding to ambient signals. The neural oscillation monitor 3710can also apply signal reconstruction techniques to the equally spacedsampled measurements received from the response measurement device 320to measure or determine the neural response of the nervous system 3610of the subject 3605. The neural response of the nervous system 3610 maycorrespond to a combination (e.g., weighted average) of responses by theindividual neurons to the stimulus 3615. The neural oscillation monitor3710 can also apply compressed sensing techniques to the randomlysampled measurements received from the response measurement device 320to determine the neural response of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605.

The neural oscillation monitor 3710 can store, save, or write to thesensor log 3745, while receiving measurements from the responsemeasurement device 320. The neural oscillation monitor 3710 can indexeach stored measurement response measurement device 320 by which theresponse measurement device 320. The neural oscillation monitor 3710 canindex each stored measurement by each region measured by the responsemeasurement device 320. For example, for each stimulation modalities,different cortices may be more active than others. As further describedin FIG. 40, different electrodes may measure different regions of thebrain, and the measurements may be indexed by the different regions. Theneural oscillation monitor 3710 can index each stored measurement by theone or more defined characteristics used to generate the stimulus 3615applied to the subject 3605. The storing of the neural response of thesubject 3605 onto the sensor log 3745 may be to build a profile of thesubject 3605. The sensor log 3745 can log measurement data from theneural oscillation monitor 3710. The sensor log 3745 can include a datastructure to keep track of measurement data. For example, the datastructure in the sensor log 3745 may be a table. Each entry of the tablemay include the stimulation modality of the stimulus 3615 (e.g., visual,auditory, etc.), a duration of the stimulus 3615, an intensity of thestimulus 3615, a region of the application of the stimulus 3615 on thebody of the subject, a pulse modulation of the stimulus 3615, a neuralresponse reading from the response measurement device 310, and a powerspectrum of the neural response of the subject 3605, among others. Inaddition, the table can include information elicited from the subjectabout the stimulation, including but not limited to self-reported data.For example, the table can store data regarding subject satisfaction,subject comfort, as well as any side effects experienced, etc. The tablecan also store information relating to the subject's attentivenessduring the stimulation, among others.

The neural oscillation monitor 3710 can determine feedback data to sendto the stimulus control module 3730 to adjust the stimulus based on themeasurements from the response measurement device 320 and/or thesimulated neural response from the simulated response module 3735. Usingthe measurements from the response measurement device 320 and/or thesimulated neural response from the simulated response module 3735, theneural oscillation monitor 3710 can identify one or more artefacts fromthe measurements of the response measurement device 320. The neuraloscillation monitor 3710 can utilize any number of signal processingtechniques to identify the one or more artefacts from the measurementsof the response measurement device 320. In some embodiments, neuraloscillation monitor 3710 can subtract the simulated neural response fromthe simulated response module 3735 from the measurements from theresponse measurement device 320. In some embodiments, the neuraloscillation monitor 3710 can use blind signal separation techniques(e.g., principal component analysis, independent component analysis,singular value decomposition, etc.) to separate the ambient noise 3805and the internal noise 310 from the response of the nervous system 3610to identify the one or more artefacts from the measurements of theresponse measurement device 320. In some embodiments, the neuraloscillation monitor 3710 can apply a filtering technique (e.g.,low-pass, band-pass, high-pass, or adaptive filter, etc.) to suppressthe effect of internal noise 310 and the ambient noise 3805 in themeasurements from the response measurement device 320 to identify theone or more artefacts. The neural oscillation monitor 3710 can transmitthe feedback data to the stimulus control module 3730. In someembodiments, the feedback data can include identified one or moreartefacts.

Referring again to FIG. 38, responsive to feedback data received fromthe neural oscillation monitor 3710 and/or measurements from theresponse measurement device 320, the stimulus control module 3730 candetermine an adjustment to the control signal to be generated by thestimulus generator module 3725. The adjustment to the control signal maybe a change or a modification to the one or more predefinedcharacteristics, such as the magnitude, the type (e.g., auditory,visual, etc.), the direction, the pulse modulation scheme, the frequency(or wavelength) of the oscillations of the stimulus 3615. The stimuluscontrol module 3730 can determine the adjustment to the control signalbased on the stimulus generation policy database 3740. The stimulusgeneration policy database 3740 can specify the adjustment to thecontrol signal based on the feedback data from the neural oscillationmonitor 3710. For example, if the feedback data indicates that thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is firing at a frequency higherthan the specific frequency, the stimulus generation policy database3740 can specify that the stimulus control module 3730 is to set the oneor more predefined characteristics such that the stimulus 3615 is at aset of different frequencies. In another example, if the feedbackindicates that the neural response of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605 to a visual stimuli is null, the stimulus generation policydatabase 3740 can specify that the stimulus control module 3730 is toset the one or more predefined characteristics such that application ofthe visual stimuli is terminated and the peripheral nerve stimulus forthe stimulus 3615 is to be applied. The stimulus control module 3730 cantransmit the adjustment to the stimulus generator module 3725.

Continuing on FIG. 38, upon receipt of the adjustment to control signalfrom the stimulus control module 3730, the stimulus generator module3725 can in turn apply the adjustment to the control signal sent to theone or more stimulus output devices 3755A-N. The stimulus generatormodule 3725 can adjust the one or more predefined characteristicsspecified in the control signal based on the adjustment received fromthe stimulus control module 3730. It should be appreciated that thefunctionalities of the components and modules in system 3800 may berepeated until the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is entrainedto the specified frequency.

II. Adjusting Stimulus to Further Induce Neural Oscillations to a TargetFrequency

Referring now to FIG. 39, FIG. 39 illustrates graphs 3900 depictingfrequency-domain measurements of various states 3905-3915 of neuralstimulation, in accordance to an embodiment. The graphs 3900 may beindicative of the frequencies at which the neurons of the brain of thesubject 3605 are oscillating. The frequencies at which the neurons ofthe brain of the subject 3605 are oscillating may be measured using theresponse measurement device 320 and the neural oscillation monitor 3710as detailed herein. In the non-entrained state 405, the neurons of thebrain of the subject 3605 may be oscillating at a natural state (e.g.,no stimulus 3615). In the example depicted in FIG. 39, some of theneurons of the brain of the subject 3605 may be oscillating at one ormore rest or natural oscillation frequencies.

The stimulus 3615 may be applied by the stimulus output device 3755A-Nto the subject 3605 to induce neural oscillations to oscillate at atarget frequency 3912 (e.g., 40 Hz). Subsequent to the stimulus 3615being applied to the subject 3605, some of the neurons of the brain ofthe subject 3605 may begin to oscillate at frequencies different fromthe non-entrained state 405. In the partially entrained state 3910, aplurality of neurons of the brain of the subject 3605 may be oscillatingat the target frequency 3912 of 40 Hz. In this state, however, many ofthe neurons may still be oscillating at frequencies different from thetarget frequency 3912.

As shown in FIG. 39, using feedback data determined by the neuraloscillation monitor 3710, the stimulus 3615 may be adjusted by thestimulus control module 3730 and the stimulus generator module 3725 overtime, such that the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is furtherentrained such that a majority of the neurons oscillate at the targetfrequency 3912. In the further entrained state 3915, a greater number ofneurons may oscillate at the target frequency 3912 of 40 Hz, with asmaller number of neurons oscillating at frequencies different from thetarget frequency 3912. When the brain reaches the further entrainedstate such that a majority of neurons oscillate at the target frequency,there may be beneficial effects to the cognitive states or functions ofthe brain while mitigating or preventing adverse consequence to thecognitive state or functions. To this end, the components and modules ofsystem 3800 may adjust the stimulations provided to the subject to causeneurons in the brain to oscillate at the target frequency.

JJ. Measurement Devices for Measuring Neural Oscillations

Referring now to FIG. 40, FIG. 40 illustrates an EEG device 4000 formeasuring stimulation, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment. TheEEG device 4000 can include six electrode pads 3760A-F as themeasurement devices. Each of the electrode pads 3760A-F may measurevoltage fluctuations from current across the neurons within sixdifferent areas 4005A-F of the brain of the subject 3605. The voltagefluctuations may be indicative of the neural response to the stimulus3615 as well as internal noise 310. At least one of the electrode pads3760A-F can function as a ground lead. At least one other of theelectrode pads 3760A-F can function as a positive reference lead. Atleast one of the other electrode pads 3760A-F can function as a negativereference lead. The voltage fluctuations from the brain may be measuredon the epidermis of the cranium of the subject 3605 via the positivereference lead and the negative reference lead. The measurements of eachof the electrode pads 3760A-F may be fed to the neural oscillationmonitor 3710. The neural oscillation monitor 3710 in turn can executeadditional signal processing as detailed herein.

Referring now to FIG. 41, FIG. 41 illustrates an MEG device 4100 formeasuring stimulation, in accordance to an illustrative embodiment. TheMEG device 4100 can include an MEG apparatus 4105 to hold six inductivecoils 3760A-3760F as the measurement devices. Each of the inductivecoils 3760A-3760F may measure the magnetic field of current fluctuationsfrom the neurons within the brain of the subject 3605. The magneticfield may be indicative of the neural response to the stimulus 3615 aswell as internal noise 310. Upon reacting with the magnetic fieldgenerated from the brain of the subject 3605, the inductive coils3760A-3760F may generate a current. Relative to the EEG device 4000, theMEG device 4100 may measure the neural response of the brain of thesubject 3605 to the stimulus 3615 with higher temporal and spatialresolution. The measurements of each of the inductive coils 3760A-F maybe fed to the neural oscillation monitor 3710. The neural oscillationmonitor 3710 can analyze the distribution of magnetic field readingsfrom each of the inductive coils 3760A-3760F. The neural oscillationmonitor 3710 in turn can execute additional signal processing asdetailed herein.

In addition, there may be other types of measuring devices that may beused to measure the neural response of the subject 3605 as the stimulus3615 is applied. For example, the one or more measurement devices3760A-3760N may be a magnetic resonance imaging (MM) scanning device andthe neural oscillation monitor 3710 can generate a functional magneticresonance imaging (fMRI) scan from the readings of the measurementdevices 3760A-3760N. The one or more measurement devices 3760A-3760N maybe any suitable device for measuring the neural response of the nervoussystem 3610 of the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615.

KK. Systems for Monitoring Subject Attentiveness During Application ofan External Stimulus to Induce Neural Oscillations

Referring now to FIG. 42, FIG. 42 is a block diagram depicting a system4200 for monitoring subject attentiveness during application of anexternal stimulus to induce neural oscillations, in accordance to anillustrative embodiment. Whether the subject 3605 is attentive maycorrelate to how effective the stimulus 3615 is in entraining thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 to the specified frequency or ininducing neural oscillations at a desired target frequency. For example,if the subject 3605 is focused on the stimulus 3615, the nervous system3610 of the subject 3605 may be more likely to be entrained to thespecified frequency resulting in more neurons oscillating at the targetfrequency. The system 4200 may be similar to system 3800 as detailedherein in reference to FIGS. 37-41, with the exception of the neuraloscillator monitor 3710 being replaced by the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715. In addition, the ambient noise 4205 may be different orthe same type as the ambient noise 3805 and the input measurement device4210 (e.g., one or more measurement devices 3760A-N) and theattentiveness measurement device 4215 (e.g., one or more measurementdevices 3760A-N) used in system 4200 may be different or the same typeas the input measurement device 315 and the response measurement device320 of system 3800. By replacing the neural oscillation monitor 3710with the subject attentiveness monitor 3715, the functionalities of theother components and modules in system 4200 may also change.

The attentiveness measurement device 4210 can measure an action responseof the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. The action response of thesubject 3605 may include, for example, involuntary, autonomic, reflex,and voluntary, responses to the stimulus, depending on whether thesubject 3605 is aware or attentive of the application of the stimulus3615. The attentiveness measurement device 4210 can include a camera, amicrophone, a force meter, gyroscope, accelerometer, or any suitabledevice, to measure the action response of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605 to the stimulus 3615. In some embodiments, theattentiveness measurement device 4210 may be set on the subject 3605.The second measurement device (s) 3760B can transmit the action responseof the subject 3605 to the stimulus 3615 to the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715 and to the stimulus control module 3730.

Continuing in reference to FIG. 42, in response to receiving themeasurements from the attentiveness measurement device 4210, the subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can monitor the action response of thesubject 3605 with the application of the stimulus 3615. The subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can apply any number of signal processingtechniques to the measurements from the attentiveness measurement device4210. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can apply signalreconstruction techniques to the equally spaced sampled measurementsreceived from the attentiveness measurement device 4210 to determine theaction response of the subject 3605. The subject attentiveness monitor3715 can apply compressed sensing techniques to the randomly sampledmeasurements received from the attentiveness measurement device 4210 todetermine the action response of the subject 3605. The subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can apply pattern recognition algorithms fromthe measurements received from the attentiveness measurement device 4210to identify one or more cues from the subject 3605. For example, if themeasurement device(s) 3760B is a camera aimed at the full body of thesubject 3605, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can apply objectrecognition techniques from the images taken by the measurementdevice(s) 3760B to detect the action response of the subject 3605 (e.g.,posture, motion, etc.).

The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can store, save, or write to thesensor log 3745, while receiving measurements from the attentivenessmeasurement device 4210. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 canindex each stored measurement by which of the attentiveness measurementdevice 4210. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can index eachstored measurement by each modality of the stimulus 3615 (e.g., visual,auditory, etc.). The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can index eachstored measurement by the one or more defined characteristics used togenerate the stimulus 3615 applied to the subject 3605. The storing ofthe action response of the subject 3605 onto the sensor log 3745 may beto build or update a profile of the subject 3605. The sensor log 3745can log measurement data from the subject attentiveness monitor 3715.The sensor log 3745 can include a data structure to keep track ofmeasurement data. For example, the data structure in the sensor log 3745may be a table. Each entry of the table may include the stimulationmodality of the stimulus 3615 (e.g., visual, auditory, etc.), a durationof the stimulus 3615, an intensity of the stimulus 3615, an region ofthe application of the stimulus 3615 on the body of the subject, a pulsemodulation of the stimulus 3615, the measurements from the attentivenessmeasurement device 4215, among others.

The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can determine feedback data tosend to the stimulus control module 3730 to adjust the stimulus 3615based on the measurements from the attentiveness measurement device 4210and/or the simulated action response from the simulated response module3735. Using the measurements from the attentiveness measurement device4210 and/or the simulated action response from the simulated responsemodule 3735, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can determinewhether the subject 3605 is attentive, during the application of thestimulus 3615. In some embodiments, the subject attentiveness monitor3715 can determine a difference between the simulated action responsefrom the simulated response module 3735 and the measurements from theattentiveness measurement device 4210. The difference may be indicativeof a disparity between the action response of the subject 3605 while thesubject is attentive and the action response of the subject 3605 whilethe subject is not attentive to the stimulus or the application of thestimulus 3615. Using the determined difference, the subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can determine whether the subject 3605 isattentive during the application of the stimulus 3615.

In some embodiments, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can use theone or more cues identified using pattern recognition algorithms appliedon the measurements from the attentiveness measurement device 4210 todetermine whether the subject 3605 is attentive. A subset of the one ormore cues may be indicative of the subject 3605 being attentive duringthe application of the stimulus 3615. Another subset of the one or morecues may be indicative of the subject 3605 not being attentive duringthe application of the stimulus 3615. The subject attentiveness monitor3715 can send the determination of whether the subject 3605 is attentiveduring the application of the stimulus 3615 as the feedback data to thestimulus control module 3730.

Still referring to FIG. 42, responsive to feedback data received fromthe subject attentiveness monitor 3715 and/or measurements from theattentiveness measurement device 4210, the stimulus control module 3730can determine an adjustment to the control signal to be generated by thestimulus generator module 3725. The adjustment to the control signal maybe a change or a modification to the one or more predefinedcharacteristics, such as the magnitude, the stimulation modality (e.g.,auditory, visual, etc.), characteristics of the stimulation modality,the direction, the pulse modulation scheme, the frequency (orwavelength) of the oscillations of the stimulus 3615. The stimuluscontrol module 3730 can determine the adjustment to the control signalbased on the stimulus generation policy database 3740. The stimulusgeneration policy database 3740 can specify the adjustment to thecontrol signal based on the feedback data from the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715. For example, if the feedback data indicates that thesubject 3605 is not attentive during the application of the stimulus3615, the stimulus generation policy database 3740 can specify that thestimulus control module 3730 is to set the one or more predefinedcharacteristics such that the stimulus 3615 is of a different type(e.g., auditory stimulus to current stimulus). The stimulus controlmodule 3730 can transmit the adjustment to the stimulus generator module3725.

Upon receipt of the adjustment to control signal from the stimuluscontrol module 3730, the stimulus generator module 3725 can in turnapply the adjustment to the control signal sent to the one or morestimulus output devices 3755A-N. The stimulus generator module 3725 canadjust the one or more predefined characteristics specified in thecontrol signal based on the adjustment received from the stimuluscontrol module 3730. It should be appreciated that the functionalitiesof the components and modules in system 3800 may be repeated until thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is entrained to the specifiedfrequency or until the subject 3605 is attentive to the application ofthe stimulus 3615.

Referring now to FIG. 43, FIG. 43 is a block diagram depicting anenvironment 4300 for adjusting an external stimulus to induce neuraloscillation based on subject attentiveness, in connection with thesystems and methods described herein. The environment 4300 may besimilar to or the same as environment 3600 as detailed in reference toFIG. 36. In the example depicted in FIG. 43, the stimulus 3615 appliedto excite or stimulate the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 maybe a visual stimulus. The stimulus output device 3755A-N outputting thestimulus 3615 may be directed to the eyes 4305 of the subject 3605. Tomeasure the subject action response from the eyes 4305, theattentiveness measurement device 4210 may be an eye tracker with acamera, an accelerometer, and a gyroscope. The attentiveness measurementdevice 4210 may also be an EOG device to measure the differentialbetween the front and back of the eyes 4305.

In the context of FIG. 42, while applying the stimulus 3615 to thesubject 3605, the attentiveness measurement device 4210 can record theaction response of the eyes 4305 of the subject 3605. In someembodiments, the attentiveness measurement device 4210 may be an eyetracking or gazing tracking device, and the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715 may use the reading from the attentiveness measurementdevice 4210 to determine the level of attention the user is providing tothe light pulses based on the gaze direction of the retina or pupil. Theattentiveness measurement device 4210 can measure eye movement todetermine the level of attention the user is paying to the light pulses.Responsive to determining that the subject 3605 is not paying asatisfactory amount of attention to the light pulses (e.g., a level ofeye movement that is greater than a threshold or a gaze direction thatis outside the direct visual field of the light source), feedback fromthe subject attentiveness monitor 3715 may be used to change a parameterof the light source to gain the user's attention. For example, thestimulus output devices 3755A-N can increase the intensity of the lightpulse, adjust the color of the light pulse, or change the duration ofthe light pulse. The stimulus output devices 3755A-N can randomly varyone or more parameters of the light pulse. The stimulus output devices3755A-N can initiate an attention seeking light sequence configured toregain the attention of the subject 3605. For example, the lightsequence can include a change in color or intensity of the light pulsesin a predetermined, random, or pseudo-random pattern. The attentionseeking light sequence can enable or disable different light sources ifthe visual signaling component includes multiple light sources. Thus,the stimulus output devices 3755A-N and the attentiveness measurementdevice 4210 can interact with the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 todetermine a level of attention the user is providing to the lightpulses, and adjust the light pulses to regain the user's attention ifthe level of attention falls below a threshold. In some embodiments, thestimulus output devices 3755A-N can change or adjust one or moreparameter of the light pulse or light wave at predetermined timeintervals (e.g., every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 370minutes) to regain or maintain the user's attention level.

During the application of the stimulus 3615, the eyes 4305 of thesubject 3605 may involuntarily respond (e.g., twitch or other movement).Some of the tracked movements by the eyes 4305 of the subject 3605 maybe part of a natural or involuntary fluctuation (e.g., retinal jittersor other movement that occur with or without stimulus 3615), and may notcorrespond to that the subject 3605 being non-attentive. Other trackedmovements by the eyes 4305 of the subject may be part of a voluntaryresponse to the application of the stimulus 3615, and may indicate thatthe subject 3605 is not attentive or is in discomfort. The subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can store known movements corresponding tothe natural fluctuations of the eyes 4305 (e.g., a threshold change inpupil position by few micrometers). The reading 3620 or the measurementsof the eyes 4305 of the subject 3605 may be taken by the attentivenessmeasurement device 4210, and may be fed to the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715.

Still referring to FIG. 42 in context of FIG. 43, the subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can in turn process the reading 3620 from theattentiveness measurement device 4210 to determine whether the subject3605 is attentive during the application of the stimulus 3615. Thesubject attentiveness monitor 3715 can calculate a rate of change in eyepupil position from the measurements of the attentiveness measurementdevice 4210 from one sample time to the next sample time. The subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can also calculate a frequency of change ineye pupil position from the measurements of the attentivenessmeasurement device 4210 across multiple samples. The subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can also calculate a timing of change in eyepupil position from the measurements of the attentiveness measurementdevice 4210 relative to the initial application of the stimulus 3615.The threshold change may be pre-set as a cutoff indication todistinguish between involuntary and voluntary movement of the eye pupil.The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can compare the calculated rateof change or the frequency of change to the threshold change todetermine whether the subject 3605 is attentive during the applicationof the stimulus 3615. The threshold change may be indicative of whetherthe eye pupil movement is involuntary or voluntary.

Upon determining that the calculated rate of change is less than thethreshold change, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can determinethat the eye pupil movement was involuntary (or natural) and determinethat the subject 3605 is attentive to the application of the stimulus3615. Responsive to the determination that the calculated frequency ofchange is less than the threshold change, the subject attentivenessmonitor 3715 can also determine that the eye pupil movement wasinvoluntary (or natural) and determine that the subject 3605 isattentive to the application of the stimulus 3615. In response todetermining that the calculated timing of change is less than thethreshold change, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can alsodetermine that the eye pupil movement was involuntary (or natural) anddetermine that the subject 3605 is attentive to the application of thestimulus 3615.

The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can determine that the subject3605 is attentive to the application of the stimulus 3615 based onvarious measurements from the attentiveness measurement device 4210. Thesubject attentiveness monitor 3715 may use other cues from the readingsto determine whether the subject 3605 is attentive while the stimulus3615 is being applied, such as head position, body position, bodyorientation, etc. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can then feedthe determination of whether the subject 3605 is attentive during theapplication of the stimulus 3615 back to the stimulus control module3730, the stimulus generator module 3725, and the stimulus output device3755A-N. The stimulus 3615 may in turn be adjusted based on the feedbackfrom the subject attentiveness monitor 3715.

On the other hand, upon determining that the calculated rate of changeis greater than the threshold change, the subject attentiveness monitor3715 can determine that the eye pupil movement was voluntary anddetermine that the subject 3605 is non-attentive to the application ofthe stimulus 3615. Responsive to the determination that the calculatedfrequency of change is less than the threshold change, the subjectattentiveness monitor 3715 can also determine that the eye pupilmovement was voluntary and determine that the subject 3605 isnon-attentive to the application of the stimulus 3615. In response todetermining that the calculated timing of change is less than thethreshold change, the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can alsodetermine that the eye pupil movement was voluntary and determine thatthe subject 3605 is non-attentive to the application of the stimulus3615. The subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can determine that thesubject 3605 is non-attentive to the application of the stimulus 3615based on various measurements from the attentiveness measurement device4210. In continuing with FIG. 42, Responsive to determining that thesubject 3615 is non-attentive to the application of the stimulus 3615,the subject attentiveness monitor 3715 can transmit feedback data to thestimulus control module 3730. The stimulus control module 3730 in turncan access the stimulus generation policy database 3740 to identify oneor more stimulus generation policies to get the subject 3605 to beattentive to the stimulus 3615. Examples of the one or more stimulusgeneration policies may include: change in color, intensity of color, orduration of the light pulse for a visual stimulus; change in volume,change in tone, or change in duration of the sound wave for an auditorystimulus; change in intensity, duration of intensity for a peripheralnerve stimulus; change in amplitude, change in pulse modulation, amongothers.

Once the one or more stimulus generation policies to get the subject3605 to be attentive to the stimulus 3615 is identified, the stimuluscontrol module 3730 can transmit or relay the one or more stimulusgeneration policies to the stimulus generator module 3725. Similartechniques may be applied to determine whether the subject 3605 isattentive to the application of the stimulus 3615 for other types ofstimuli (e.g., auditory, etc.) and to make the subject 3605 be attentiveto the stimulus 3615 based on the feedback data.

In some embodiments, with receipt of the feedback data indicating thatthe subject 3605 is non-attentive, the stimulus generator module 3725can send a control signal to the stimulus output device to prompt thesubject 3605. The prompt may be displayed on an electric display of thestimulus output device 3755. The prompt may, for example, include aquestionnaire asking the subject 3605 for input as to why the subject3605 is non-attentive. The input from the subject 3605 taken by thestimulus output device 3755 may be the stimulus generator module 3725and/or the stimulus control module 3730 to select one or more stimulusgeneration policies from the stimulus generation policy database 3740.

LL. Systems for Monitoring Physiological Status of the Subject DuringApplication of an External Stimulus to Induce Neural Oscillations

Referring now to FIG. 44, FIG. 44 is a block diagram depicting a system4400 for monitoring subject physiology during application of an externalstimulus to induce neural oscillations, in accordance to an embodiment.Certain physiological responses may indicate that the nervous system3610 of the subject 3605 is responsive to the stimulus 3615. How thesubject 3605 reacts physiologically may correlate to how effective thestimulus 3615 is in entraining the nervous system 3610 of the subject3605 to the specified frequency. For example, if the subject 3605exhibits pain or another distressing feeling in response to the stimulus3615, the stimulus 3615 may not be effective in entraining the nervoussystem 3610 of the subject 3605 to the specified frequency. The system4400 may be similar to system 3800 as detailed herein in reference toFIGS. 3-6, with the exception of the neural oscillator monitor 3710being replaced by the subject physiological monitor 3720. In addition,the ambient noise 4405 may be different or the same type as the ambientnoise 3805 and input measurement device 4410 (e.g., one or moremeasurement devices 3760A-N) and the physiological measurement device4415 (e.g., one or more measurement devices 3760A-N) used in system 4400may be different or the same type as input measurement device 310 andthe response measurement device 320 of system 3800. By replacing theneural oscillation monitor 3710 with the subject physiological monitor3720, the functionalities of the other components and modules in system4400 may also change.

In response to receiving the measurements from the physiologicalmeasurement device 4415, the subject physiological monitor 3720 canmonitor the physiological response of the subject 3605 with theapplication of the stimulus 3615. The subject physiological monitor 3720can apply any number of signal processing techniques to the measurementsfrom the physiological measurement device 4415. The subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can apply signal reconstruction techniques tothe equally spaced sampled measurements received from the physiologicalmeasurement device 4415 to determine the physiological response of thesubject 3605. The subject physiological monitor 3720 can applycompressed sensing techniques to the randomly sampled measurementsreceived from the physiological measurement device 4415 to determine thephysiological response of the subject 3605.

As illustrated in FIG. 44, the subject physiological monitor 3720 canapply pattern recognition algorithms from the measurements received fromthe physiological measurement device 4415 to identify one or more cuesfrom the subject 3605. In some embodiments, the physiologicalmeasurement device 4415 may be a heartrate monitor to measure theheartrate of the subject 3605. The subject physiological monitor 3720can apply filtering techniques to identify an increase or decrease inthe heartrate of the subject 3605. In some embodiments, thephysiological measurement device 4415 may be a body temperaturethermometer. The subject physiological monitor 3720 can apply filteringtechniques to identify an increase or decrease in the body temperatureof the subject 3605. In some embodiments, the physiological measurementdevice 4415 may be a blood pressure meter. The subject physiologicalmonitor 3720 can apply filtering techniques to identify an increase ordecrease in the blood pressure of the subject 3605. In some embodiments,the physiological measurement device 4415 may be a breathing rate meterto measure a respiration rate of the subject 3605. The subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can apply filtering techniques to identify anincrease or decrease in the respiration rate the subject 3605. In someembodiments, the physiological measurement device 4415 may be anelectrodermal measurement device, similar to EEG device 4000 but appliedto other portions of the body of the subject 3605, to measure thegalvanic skin response of the subject 3605. The subject physiologicalmonitor 3720 can apply filtering techniques to identify an increase ordecrease in the galvanic skin response of the subject 3605. Thephysiological measurement device 4415 may be any device to measure thephysiological state of the subject 3605, during the application of thestimulus 3615.

The subject physiological monitor 3720 can store, save, or write to thesensor log 3745 while receiving measurements from the physiologicalmeasurement device 4415. The subject physiological monitor 3720 canindex each stored measurement from the physiological measurement device4415. The subject physiological monitor 3720 can index each storedmeasurement by each modality of the stimulus 3615 (e.g., visual,auditory, etc.). The subject physiological monitor 3720 can index thestored data by the physiological measurement device 4415. The subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can index the stored data by the one or moredefined characteristics used to generate the stimulus 3615 applied tothe subject 3605. The storing of the physiological state or response ofthe subject 3605 onto the sensor log 3745 may be to build a profile ofthe subject 015. The sensor log 3745 can log measurement data from thesubject physiological monitor 3720. The sensor log 3745 can include adata structure to keep track of measurement data. For example, the datastructure in the sensor log 3745 may be a table. Each entry of the tablemay include the stimulation modality of the stimulus 3615 (e.g., visual,auditory, etc.), a duration of the stimulus 3615, an intensity of thestimulus 3615, an region of the application of the stimulus 3615 on thebody of the subject, a pulse modulation of the stimulus 3615, and/or aphysiological reading from the subject physiological monitor 3720, amongothers.

The subject physiological monitor 3720 can determine feedback data tosend to the stimulus control module 3730 to adjust the stimulus 3615based on the measurements from the physiological measurement device 4415and/or the simulated physiological response from the simulated responsemodule 3735. Using the measurements from the physiological measurementdevice 4415 and/or the simulated physiological response from thesimulated response module 3735, the subject physiological monitor 3720can determine whether the subject 3605 is responsive to the applicationof the stimulus 3615. In some embodiments, the subject physiologicalmonitor 3720 can determine a difference between the simulatedphysiological response from the simulated response module 3735 and themeasurements from the physiological measurement device 4415. Thedifference may be indicative of disparity between the physiologicalresponses of the subject 3605 while responsive and physiologicalresponse of the subject 3605 while not responsive to the application ofthe stimulus 3615. Using the determined difference, the subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can determine whether the subject 3605 isresponsive to the application of the stimulus 3615. In some embodiments,the subject physiological monitor 3720 can use the one or more cuesidentified using pattern recognition algorithms applied to themeasurements from the physiological measurement device 4415 to determinewhether the subject 3605 is responsive. A subset of the one or more cuesmay be indicative of the stimulus 3615 having an effect on the subject3605. Another subset of the one or more cues may be indicative of thestimulus 3615 not having an effect on the subject 3605. The subjectphysiological monitor 3720 can send the determination of whether thesubject 3605 is responsive to the application of the stimulus 3615 asthe feedback data to the stimulus control module 3730.

Responsive to feedback data received from the subject physiologicalmonitor 3720, the stimulus control module 3730 can determine anadjustment to the control signal to be generated by the stimulusgenerator module 3725. The adjustment to the control signal may be achange or a modification to the one or more predefined characteristics,such as the magnitude, the type (e.g., auditory, visual, etc.), thedirection, the pulse modulation scheme, or the frequency (or wavelength)of the oscillations of the stimulus 3615. The stimulus control module3730 can determine the adjustment to the control signal based on thestimulus generation policy database 3740. The stimulus generation policydatabase 3740 can specify the adjustment to the control signal based onthe feedback data from the subject physiological monitor 3720. Certainfeedback data may indicate that the subject 3605 is reacting to thestimulus 3615 in an undesirable manner. For example, the feedback datamay specify that the blood pressure of the subject 3605 is increasingresponsive to the application of the stimulus 3615, indicating that thesubject 3605 may be in pain. The stimulus generation policy database3740 can specify that the stimulus control module 3730 is to set the oneor more predefined characteristics such that the stimulus 3615 is to beof a lower intensity (e.g., decreasing the volume of an auditorystimulus or decrease amps for an electrical current stimulus) todecrease the pain or any other discomfort of the subject 3605. Inanother example, the feedback data may indicate that the galvanic skinresponse of the subject 3605 has increased, corresponding to anincreasing of sweat from the sweat glands of the subject and possiblydiscomfort. The stimulus generation policy data 3740 can specify thatthe stimulus control module 3730 is to set the one or more predefinedcharacteristics such that the stimulus 3615 is to be turned off untilthe galvanic skin response of the subject 3605 has decreased to normal.The stimulus control module 3730 can transmit the adjustment to thestimulus generator module 3725.

Upon receipt of the adjustment to control signal from the stimuluscontrol module 3730, the stimulus generator module 3725 can in turnapply the adjustment to the control signal sent to the one or morestimulus output devices 3755A-N. The stimulus generator module 3725 canadjust the one or more predefined characteristics specified in thecontrol signal based on the adjustment received from the stimuluscontrol module 3730. It should be appreciated that the functionalitiesof the components and modules in system 3800 may be repeated until thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is entrained to the specifiedfrequency or until the subject 3605 is attentive to the application ofthe stimulus 3615.

MM. Systems for Synchronizing Multiple Stimuli During Application of anExternal Stimulus to Induce Neural Oscillations

Referring now to FIG. 45, FIG. 45 is a block diagram depicting a system4500 for synchronizing multiple stimuli to induce neural oscillation, inaccordance to an illustrative embodiment. The system 4500 may be similarto system 3800 as detailed herein in reference to FIGS. 38-41, with theaddition of a plurality of stimulus output devices 3755A-N and themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750. The plurality of stimuli fromthe corresponding plurality of stimulus output devices 3755A-N may beapplied to the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. The nervoussystem 3610 of the subject 3605 in turn may be partially or furtherentrained (e.g., partially entrained state 3910 and further entrainedstate 3915 in FIG. 39) to the specified frequency of the stimulus 3615,but the neural oscillations in different regions of the nervous system3610 may not be in phase (e.g., not firing around the same time). Inaddition, there may be a desire to have different parts of the nervoussystem 3610 slightly out of phase to prolong the effect of the stimulus3615 upon the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. The multi-stimulisynchronization module 3750 in conjunction with the stimulus controlmodule 3730 may be configured to align the phases of the neuraloscillations in the different regions of the nervous system 3610 of thesubject 3605.

In system 4500, the response measurement device 320 can measure theneural response of the nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 inresponse to the plurality of stimuli 3615 for each measured region ofthe nervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. The neural oscillationmonitor 3710 can process the measurements from the response measurementdevice 320 at each of the measurement regions of the nervous system 3610of the subject to generate feedback data. The response measurementdevice 320 can send the measurements to the multi-stimulisynchronization module 3750 for each of the measured regions. The neuraloscillation monitor 3710 can also send the feedback data to themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750 for each of the measurementregions.

As illustrated in FIG. 45, using the measurements from the responsemeasurement device 320 and/or the neural oscillation monitor 3710, themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750 can determine whether thenervous system 3610 is inducing neural oscillations at the specifiedfrequency. If the nervous system 3610 is not sufficiently entrained tothe specified frequency, the multi-stimuli synchronization module 3750can pass the measurements from the response measurement device 320and/or the neural oscillation monitor 3710 to the stimulus controlmodule 3730. If the nervous system 3610 appears to be sufficientlyentrained to the specified frequency based on the frequencies of thedetected neural oscillations, the multi-stimuli synchronization module3750 can determine a phase difference between the measurements of eachtwo measured regions of the nervous system 3610, using any number ofsignal processing techniques. The phase difference may be indicative ofa time delay between the firing of neurons in various regions of thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605. In some embodiments, themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750 can calculate a correlation(or cross-correlation) between the measurements between the two regionsof the nervous system 3610. Based on the calculated correlation, themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750 can determine the phasedifference between the measurements of each two measured regions of thenervous system 3610. The multi-stimuli synchronization module 3750 cansend or transmit the determined phase difference to the stimulus controlmodule 3730 to entrain the neural oscillations in the nervous system3610 to the specified frequency with minimal phase differences among themeasured regions. In some implementations, there may be desire to reducethe phase offset between various stimulations to reduce any offsets inthe timing of the detected neural response. In some otherimplementations, there may be a desire to maintain a slight phase offsetin the neural response across different regions of the brain such thatthe duration of time over which neurons are oscillating the desiredfrequency is extended, which can result in an improvement in one or morecognitive functions of the brain.

Responsive to receiving the determined phase difference from themulti-stimuli synchronization module 3750, the stimulus control module3730 can determine a phase adjustment to the control signal to begenerated by the stimulus generator module 3725. The phase adjustment tothe control signal may be a change or a modification to the pulsemodulation scheme of the one or more predefined characteristics in thecontrol signal. The stimulus control module 3730 can determine the phaseadjustment to the control signal based on the stimulus generation policydatabase 3740. The stimulus generation policy database 3740 can specifythe phase adjustment to the control signal based on the phase differencedetermined by the multi-stimuli synchronization module 3750. Forexample, if the neural oscillations at a first measured region of thenervous system 3600 is 15 degrees (or a corresponding amount of time)out of phase with the neural oscillations at a second measured region,the stimulus generation policy database 3740 can specify that thestimulus output device 3755A-N corresponding to the first measuredregion is to delay the outputting of the stimulus 3615 by a predefinedtime delay. The stimulus control module 3730 can transmit the phaseadjustment to the stimulus generator module 3725. In someimplementations, there may be desire to reduce the phase offset betweenvarious stimulations to reduce any offsets in the timing of the detectedneural response. In some other implementations, there may be a desire tomaintain a slight phase offset in the neural response across differentregions of the brain such that the duration of time over which neuronsare oscillating the desired frequency is extended, which can result inan improvement in one or more cognitive functions of the brain.

Upon receipt of the phase adjustment to control signal from the stimuluscontrol module 3730, the stimulus generator module 3725 can in turnapply the phase adjustment to the control signal sent to the one or morestimulus output devices 3755A-N. The stimulus generator module 3725 canadjust the one or more predefined characteristics specified in thecontrol signal based on the phase adjustment received from the stimuluscontrol module 3730. It should be appreciated that the functionalitiesof the components and modules in system 4500 may be repeated until thenervous system 3610 of the subject 3605 is entrained to the specifiedfrequency with minimal difference in phase.

NN. Method of Adjusting an External Stimulus to Induce NeuralOscillations Based on Measurement on a Subject

Referring now to FIG. 46A, FIG. 46A is a flow diagram depicting a method4600 of adjusting an external stimulus to induce neural oscillationsbased on measurement of a subject, in accordance with an embodiment. Themethod 4600 can be performed by one or more of the systems, components,modules, or elements depicted in FIGS. 36-45, including the neuralstimulation sensing system (NSSS). In brief overview, at block 4605, theNSSS can generate a stimulus to apply to the subject. At block 4610, theNSSS can measure the external noise affecting the subject. At block4615, the NSSS can measure subject response while applying the stimulus.At block 4620, the NSSS can modify the stimulus based on the measuredexternal noise and the subject response. The NSSS can repeat blocks4605-4620 any number of times and execute the functionality of blocks4605-4620 in any sequence.

Referring now to FIG. 46B, FIG. 46B is a flow diagram depicting a method4630 for evaluating neural responses to different stimulationmodalities, in accordance with an embodiment. The method 4630 can beperformed by one or more of the systems, components, modules, orelements depicted in FIGS. 36-45, including the neural stimulationsensing system (NSSS). In brief overview, the NSSS can apply a pluralityof first neural stimuli (step 4635). The NSSS can sense first EEGresponses to the first neural stimuli (step 4640). The NSSS can generatefirst simulated EEG responses (step 4645). The NSSS can compare eachfirst EEG response to a corresponding first simulated EEG response (step4650). The NSSS can select one or more candidate first neural stimuliassociated with a particular response based on the comparisons (step4655). The NSSS can apply a plurality of second neural stimuli for thecandidate neural stimulus, the plurality of second neural stimuli havingvarying values of amplitude (step 4660). The NSSS can sense a second EEGresponse (step 4665). The NSSS can generate a second simulated EEGresponse (step 4670). The NSSS can compare each second EEG response to acorresponding second simulated EEG response (step 4675). The NSSS canselect a therapy amplitude for a therapy neural stimulus based on thecomparison (step 4680). The NSSS can apply the therapy neural stimulusto the subject (step 4685).

Referring again to FIG. 46B, and in greater detail, the NSSS cansequentially apply a plurality of first neural stimuli to the subject(step 4635). Each first neural stimulus can be defined by apredetermined amplitude. Each first neural stimulus can be associatedwith a different modality of neural stimulus including an auditorystimulation modality, a visual stimulation modality, and a peripheralnerve stimulation modality. In some embodiments, at least one firstneural stimulus includes a plurality of stimulation modalities to beapplied simultaneously (e.g., auditory stimulation simultaneous withvisual stimulation).

The NSSS can sense, while applying each first neural stimulus to thesubject, a first EEG response to the corresponding first neural stimulus(step 4640). The NSSS can associate the first EEG response with thefirst neural stimulus, including parameters of the first neural stimulussuch as the predetermined amplitude.

In some embodiments, the NSSS senses the first EEG response for apredetermined period of time. The predetermined period of time maycorrespond to a signal to noise ratio (SNR) of the first EEG response.For example, the predetermined period of time may correspond to aminimum time required to capture sufficient EEG data so that the SNR ofthe first EEG response is greater than an SNR threshold. In someembodiments, the NSSS calculates the predetermined period of time basedon the first neural stimulus (e.g., using a response model as describedbelow). In some embodiments, the NSSS dynamically adjusts thepredetermined period of time while applying the first neural stimulus.For example, while applying the first neural stimulus and sensing thefirst EEG response for a first period of time, the NSSS can calculate afirst SNR of the first EEG response, and compare the first SNR to theSNR threshold. Responsive to the first SNR being less than the SNRthreshold the NSSS can extend the application of the first neuralstimulus and the sensing of the first EEG response, such as by applyingthe first neural stimulus and sensing the first EEG response for asecond period of time subsequent to the first period of time. The secondperiod of time may be calculated based on a difference between the firstSNR and the SNR threshold (e.g., as the difference increases, the secondperiod of time can be increased as well). In some embodiments, the NSSSapplies the first neural response and senses the first EEG responseuntil the first SNR of the first EEG response is greater than or equalto the SNR threshold.

The NSSS can generate a first simulated EEG response based on each firstneural stimulus (step 4645). The NSSS can execute a response modelmapping stimulus parameters to simulated EEG responses. In someembodiments, the response model is generated based on a historicalresponse for the subject. The NSSS can generate each simulated responseby maintaining the response model for the subject based on historicalresponse data for one or more subjects, the historical response dataassociated prior physiological responses with corresponding neuralstimuli, the model based on at least one of an age parameter, a heightparameter, a weight parameter, or a heart rate parameter of the subject.

The NSSS can compare each first EEG response to each corresponding firstsimulated EEG response to determine if the first EEG response indicatesa particular neural activity response of the subject (step 4650). Forexample, if a difference between the first EEG response and thesimulated EEG response is less than a threshold difference, the firstEEG response may indicate the particular neural activity response.

The NSSS can select, based on the comparison, a candidate first neuralstimulus associated with an EEG response associated with the particularneural activity response of the subject (step 4655). For example, theNSSS can select one or more candidate first neural stimuli for which thedifference between the first EEG response and the simulated EEG responseis less than the threshold difference.

The NSSS can apply, for each candidate first neural stimulus, aplurality of second neural stimuli to the subject (step 4660). Theplurality of second neural stimuli can have varying amplitudes (e.g.,varying in a linear, Gaussian, or other distribution relative to thepredetermined amplitude).

The NSSS can sense, while applying each second neural stimulus to thesubject, a second EEG response of the subject (step 4665). The NSSS cangenerate, based on each second neural stimulus, a corresponding secondsimulated EEG response to the second neural stimulus, such as by usingthe response model (step 4670).

The NSSS can compare each second EEG response to the correspondingsecond simulated EEG response to determine if the second EEG responseindicates the particular neural activity response of the subject (step4675). As such, the NSSS can identify magnitudes of the second neuralstimuli which may be associated with the particular neural activityresponse.

The NSSS can select, based on the comparison, a therapy amplitude for atherapy neural stimulus corresponding to the second neural stimulusassociated with the particular neural activity response (step 4680). Forexample, the NSSS can identify the amplitude(s) from the variedamplitudes of the second neural stimuli which is associated with theparticular neural activity response.

The NSSS can apply the therapy neural stimulus to the subject using thetherapy amplitude (step 4685). In some embodiments, the therapy neuralstimulus may be of a specific modality which resulted in the particularneural activity response (e.g., based on the application of theplurality of first neural stimuli) and having a particularized amplitude(e.g., based on the application of the plurality of second neuralstimuli).

In some embodiments, the NSSS can sense an attentiveness response of thesubject by executing at least one of eye tracking of eyes of thesubject, monitoring heart rate of the subject, or monitoring anorientation of at least one of a head or a body of the subject. The NSSScan use the attentiveness response to determine if the particular neuralactivity response is indicated (e.g., if the attentiveness responseindicates the subject was not paying attention to the neural stimulus,the particular neural activity response may not be indicated).

In some embodiments, the NSSS can vary a therapy parameter of eachtherapy neural stimulus when applying the therapy neural stimulus. Forexample, the NSSS can vary a duty cycle; the duty cycle may bemaintained at a value less than fifty percent, in some embodiments. TheNSSS can vary a pitch of the therapy neural stimulus where the therapyneural stimulus is an auditory stimulation. The NSSS can vary at leastone of a color or an image selection of the therapy neural stimuluswhere the therapy neural stimulus is a visual stimulation. The NSSS canvary a location of the therapy neural stimulus where the therapy neuralstimulus is a peripheral nerve stimulation.

While this specification contains many specific implementation details,these should not be construed as limitations on the scope of anyinventions or of what can be claimed, but rather as descriptions offeatures specific to particular embodiments of particular aspects.Certain features described in this specification in the context ofseparate embodiments can also be implemented in combination in a singleembodiment. Conversely, various features described in the context of asingle embodiment can also be implemented in multiple embodimentsseparately or in any suitable subcombination. Moreover, althoughfeatures can be described above as acting in certain combinations andeven initially claimed as such, one or more features from a claimedcombination can in some cases be excised from the combination, and theclaimed combination can be directed to a subcombination or variation ofa subcombination.

Similarly, while operations are depicted in the drawings in a particularorder, this should not be understood as requiring that such operationsbe performed in the particular order shown or in sequential order, orthat all illustrated operations be performed, to achieve desirableresults. In certain circumstances, multitasking and parallel processingcan be advantageous. Moreover, the separation of various systemcomponents in the embodiments described above should not be understoodas requiring such separation in all embodiments, and it should beunderstood that the described program components and systems cangenerally be integrated in a single software product or packaged intomultiple software products.

References to “or” may be construed as inclusive so that any termsdescribed using “or” may indicate any of a single, more than one, andall of the described terms. References to at least one of a conjunctivelist of terms may be construed as an inclusive OR to indicate any of asingle, more than one, and all of the described terms. For example, areference to “at least one of ‘A’ and ‘B’” can include only ‘A’, only‘B’, as well as both ‘A’ and ‘B’.

Thus, particular embodiments of the subject matter have been described.In some cases, the actions recited in the claims can be performed in adifferent order and still achieve desirable results. In addition, theprocesses depicted in the accompanying figures do not necessarilyrequire the particular order shown, or sequential order, to achievedesirable results.

The present technology, including the systems, methods, devices,components, modules, elements or functionality described or illustratedin, or in association with, the figures can treat, prevent, protectagainst or otherwise affect Alzheimer's Disease. The following areexamples of how the present technology can be used to affect Alzheimer'sDisease.

Definitions

As used herein, the terms “treating,” “treatment,” or “alleviation”refer to both therapeutic treatment and prophylactic or preventativemeasures, wherein the object is to prevent or slow down (lessen) thetargeted pathologic condition or disorder. A subject is successfully“treated” for a disease or condition if, after receiving therapeuticmethods of the present technology the subject shows observable and/ormeasurable reduction in or absence of one or more signs and symptoms ofa particular disease or condition. It is also to be appreciated that thevarious modes of treatment or prevention of medical conditions asdescribed are intended to mean “substantial,” which includes total butalso less than total treatment or prevention, and wherein somebiologically or medically relevant result is achieved.

As used herein, “prevention” or “preventing” of a disorder or conditionwith reference to a treatment method means that the method reduces theoccurrence of the disorder or condition in treated subjects relative toan untreated control subjects.

As used herein, the words “protect” or “protecting” refer to decreasingthe likelihood and/or risk that the subject treated with methods of thepresent technology will develop a given disease or disorder, or delayingthe onset or reducing the severity of one or more symptoms of thedisease, disorder or condition. Typically, the likelihood of developingthe disease or disorder is considered to be reduced if the likelihood isdecreased by at least about 10%, at least about 25%, at least about 50%,at least about 75%, at least about 90%, in comparison to the likelihoodand/or risk that the same subject untreated with a method of the presenttechnology will develop a relevant disorder. In some embodiments, themethods protect a subject against the development of a disorder wherethe methods are administered before the onset of the disorder.

Combination Therapies

In one aspect, the present disclosure provides combination therapiescomprising the administration of one or more additional therapeuticregimens in conjunction with methods described herein. In someembodiments, the additional therapeutic regimens are directed to thetreatment or prevention of the disease or disorder targeted by methodsof the present technology.

In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic regimens compriseadministration of one or more pharmacological agents known in the art totreat or prevent disorders targeted by methods of the presenttechnology. In some embodiments, methods of the present technologyfacilitate the use of lower doses of pharmacological agents known in theart to treat or prevent targeted disorders. In some embodiments, thepharmacological agent is aducanumab.

In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic regimens comprisenon-pharmacological therapies known in the art to treat or preventdisorders targeted by methods of the present technology such as, but notlimited to, cognitive or physical therapeutic regimens.

In some embodiments, a pharmacological agent is administered inconjunction with therapeutic methods described herein. In someembodiments, the pharmacological agent is directed to inducing a relaxedstate in a subject administered methods of the present technology. Forexample, in some embodiments, the pharmacological agent is an anestheticor a sedative. In some embodiments, the pharmacological agent is asedative such as, but not limited to, barbiturates and benzodiazepines.In some embodiments, the sedative is amobarbital (Amytal), aprobarbital(Alurate), butabarbital (Butisol), mephobarbital (Mebaral), methohexital(Brevital), pentobarbital (Nembutal), phenobarbitol (Luminal), primidone(Mysoline), secobarbital (Seconal), thiopental (Penothal), alcohol(ethanol), alprazolam (Xanax), chloral hydrate (Somnote),chlordiazepoxide (Librium), clorazepate (Tranxene), clonazepam(Klonopin), diazepam (Valium), estazolam (Prosom), flunitrazepam(Rohypnol), flurazepam (Dalmane), lorazepam (Ativan), midazolam(Versed), nitrazepam (Mogadon), oxazepam (Serax), temazepam (Restoril),or triazolam (Halcion). In some embodiments, the sedative is ketamine.In some embodiments, the sedative is nitrous oxide.

In some embodiments, the pharmacological agent is directed to inducing aheightened state of awareness in a subject administered methods of thepresent technology. For example, in some embodiments, thepharmacological agent is a stimulant. In some embodiments, the stimulantis an amphetamine or methylphenidate. In some embodiments, the stimulantis lisdexamfetamine, dextroamphetamine, or levoamphetamine. In someembodiments, the stimulant is Biphetamine, Dexedrine, Adderall, Vyvanse,Concerta, Methylin, or Ritalin. In some embodiments, the stimulant iscaffeine or nicotine.

In some embodiments, the pharmacological agent is directed to modulatingneuronal and/or synaptic activity. In some embodiments, the agentpromotes neuronal and/or synaptic activity. In some embodiments, theagent targets a cholinergic receptor. In some embodiments, the agent isa cholinergic receptor agonist. In some embodiments, the agent isacetylcholine or an acetylcholine derivative. In some embodiments, theagent is an acetylcholinesterase inhibitor. In some embodiments, theagent is Aricept/donepezil.

In some embodiments, the agent inhibits neuronal and/or synapticactivity. In some embodiments, the agent is a cholinergic receptorantagonist. In some embodiments, the agent is an acetylcholine inhibitoror an acetylcholine derivative inhibitor. In some embodiments, the agentis acetylcholinesterase or an acetylcholinesterase derivative.

EXAMPLES Example 1: Methods and Devices of the Present Technology forthe Prevention or Treatment of Alzheimer's Disease

This example demonstrates the use of methods and devices of the presenttechnology in the prevention or treatment of Alzheimer's Disease (AD)animal in models and human subjects.

Animal Models

Murine models of AD suitable for use in this example include, but arenot limited to, animals having loss- or gain-of-function mutations, andtransgenic animals. For example, the 3xTg-AD or 5XFAD transgenic mouse.Protocols for use of the 3xTg-AD mouse are provided below asillustrative.

Animals Groups:

3xTg-AD mice are obtained by crossing heterozygous APPswe/PS1dE9 doubletransgenic mice (Jackson Laboratory, Bar Harbor, Me., USA) withheterozygous P301L tau transgenic mice (Taconic Labs, Germantown, N.Y.).Male C57BL/6J mice (Shanghai SLAC Laboratory Animal CO., Ltd, Shanghai,China) and 3xTg-AD mice are maintained in a controlled environment at25±1° C. with a 12/12 h light-dark cycle. Experimental protocols areperformed according to accepted guidelines for animal experimentation.

Fifty male 3xTg-AD mice are randomly divided into five groups (each n ¼10): the 3xTg-AD group, three groups of 3xTg-AD mice treated withmethods and devices of the present technology. Wildtype C57BL/6J miceare used for the control group.

Subjects are behaviorally tested after 2 months of treatment usingmethods known and accepted in the art, including, but not limited to,open field testing (OFT), elevated plus-maze (EPM), Morris water maze(MWM). The animals are sacrificed and the brains preserved for analysis.Half of the brain is used for immunofluorescence, and half for westernblotting and enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA).

Immunohistochemistry:

The 3xTg-AD mice are anesthetized with pentobarbital, perfused withsaline, and then perfused with 4% paraformaldehyde in 0.1 Mphosphate-buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.4. Brains are fixed in 4%paraformaldehyde for 24 h and transferred into PBS containing 30%sucrose. Each brain is sectioned in the coronal plane at an instrumentsetting of 10 mm. Free floating sections are washed with PBS three timesbefore being permeabilized with 0.3% Triton X-100 for 10 min, blockedwith 3% bovine serum albumin (BSA) for 1 h, and incubated overnight at4° C. with the following primary antibodies: rabbit anti-Aβ42 (1:200,Abcam, Cambridge, Cambs, UK) and mouse anti-202/205 phosphorylated tau(ATB, 1:100, Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif., USA). After severalwashes in PBS, the slides are incubated for 1 h at room temperature withthe secondary antibody: DyLight 594 goat anti-rabbit IgG (1:500, ThermoScientific, Rockford, Ill., USA). Nuclei were detected using 40,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI, 1:500, Thermo Scientific). Afterwashing three times in PBS, the sections are mounted on charged slidesfor immunofluorescence detection using an Olympus microscope with DP-70software. The imaging data are analyzed and quantified using Imagepro-plus version 6.0.

Western Blotting Analysis:

Frozen brains are lysed with an ice-cold RIPA lysis buffer (BeyotimeInstitute of Biotechnology, Jiangsu, China) with complete proteaseinhibitor cocktail and phosphatase inhibitor cocktail (Roche,Indianapolis, Ind., USA). Lysates are centrifuged at 12,000 g for 20 minat 4° C. The supernatants are collected and total protein concentrationsestimated using the Bradford method by means of the protein assay kit(Beyotime Institute of Biotechnology). Total proteins are denatured at100° C. for 8 min and 60 mg proteins per lane are separated on 10%SDS-polyacrylamide gel and electro-transferred onto a polyvinylidenedifluoride membrane (Millipore, Bedford, Mass., USA). Membranes areblocked with 5% BSA in Tris-buffered saline with 1% Tween-20 (TBST) for2 h at room temperature and then incubated overnight at 4° C. with thefollowing primary antibodies: rabbit anti-interleukin-1β (IL-1β), rabbitanti-APP Thr668, rabbit anti-tumor-necrosis-factor-α (TNFα), rabbitanti-bcl-2 and anti-bax (1:1000, Life Technologies); rabbit anti-PS1(1:2000, Life Technologies); rabbit anti-interleukin-6 (IL-6) and mouseanti-caspase-3 (1:1000, Abcam), mouse anti-202/205 phosphorylated tau(ATB, 1:100). GAPDH (1:8000, Life Technologies) is used as a loadingcontrol. Membranes are washed with TBST three times for 10 min and thenincubated in the secondary antibody, anti-rabbit or anti-mouse IgGHRP-linked antibody (1:4000, Life Technologies) for 2 h. Blots arevisualized by chemiluminescence (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Ill.,USA). Optical densities are measured and protein levels normalized toGAPDH.

ELISA:

Brain hemispheres are homogenized in ice-cold PBS containing 5 Mguanidine hydrochloric acid and 1× protease inhibitor mixture (pH 8.0).The levels of Aβ42 are quantified by ELISA according to manufacturerinstructions (Invitrogen, Camarillo, Calif., USA) and expressed as ng/gprotein. The oxidant-antioxidant status of tissues is assessed bydetermining the activities of superoxide dismutase (SOD), catalase(CAT), and glutathione peroxidase (GPx), and the concentration ofmalondialdehyde (MDA).

Statistical Analyses:

SPSS statistical software 16.0 for windows is used. All results areevaluated using one-way ANOVA and Dunnett's multiple range tests. Allvalues are expressed as mean±standard error of the mean (S.E.M).Statistical significance is assumed if P<0.05.

Results:

It is predicted that methods of the present technology will inducereversal of symptoms and/or pathologies of AD in animal models. Theseresults will show that methods of the present technology are useful andeffective for the prevention or treatment of AD.

Human Clinical Trials

Human subjects diagnosed as having or suspected to have AD presentlydisplaying one or more symptoms and/or pathologies of AD, including, butnot limited to memory loss, cognitive disorder, and AD biomarkers, suchas, but not limited to beta-amyloid in cerebrospinal fluid,amyloid-positive PET imaging, and genotypic markers (e.g., ApoE), arerecruited using selection criteria known and accepted in the art.

In some studies, subjects are diagnosed as having or suspected to have asporadic AD. In some studies, subjects are diagnosed as having orsuspected to have a familial AD. In some studies, subjects are diagnosedas having or suspected to have early-onset AD. In some studies, subjectsare diagnosed as having or suspected to have late-onset AD.

Clinical studies are conducted in accordance with accepted practices,such as, for example, the protocol of An, et al., J. Alzheimer's Dis.Oct. 4 (2016).

Methods of Prevention and Treatment:

Subjects are administered methods of the present technology at a dosageand frequency commensurate with the stage and severity of disease. Insome embodiments the method is administered once daily, once weekly, oronce monthly. In some embodiments, the method is administered multipletimes daily, weekly, or monthly.

To demonstrate methods of prevention and treatment in human subjects andanimal models, subjects are administered methods of the presenttechnology prior to or subsequent to the development of symptoms and/orpathologies or AD and assessed for reversal of symptoms/pathologies orattenuation of expected symptoms/pathologies using methods known in theart.

Efficacy of prevention and treatment methods of the present technologymay be assessed using methods known in the art, including, but notlimited to the Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale Cognitive Portion(ADAS-Cog), the MMSE, and the Neuropsychological Test Battery (NTB). Inaddition, global assessments and assessments of activities of dailyliving may be obtained through the subject's caregiver, including, butnot limited to the Basic Activities of Daily Living (BADL), the ClinicalDementia Rating (CDR), the Dependence Scale, the Instrumental Activitiesof Daily Living (IADLs), and the Neuropsychiatric Inventory (NPI).

Results:

It is predicted that methods of the present technology will inducereversal of symptoms and/or pathologies of AD in human subjects. Theseresults will show that methods of the present technology are useful andeffective for the prevention or treatment of AD.

FIG. 47 shows an illustrative neural stimulation orchestration system.The device comprises a pair of opaque glasses with a LED illumination onthe interior of the glasses. Headphones worn by the user during thestimulation session provide the auditory stimulation. These headphonesmay be in-ear or over the ear headphones. On the right, the location ofthe illumination for the visual stimulation is seen from a patient'sperspective.

FIG. 48 is a rendering of a neural stimulation orchestration systemcontroller. The controller allows the subject and/or caregiver to adjustoutput amplitude of audio and visual stimulation within a predefinedsafe operating range. The subject or caregiver can pause the stimulationsession.

FIG. 49 is an overview of study design and of patient enrollmentprocess.

Neural Stimulation Orchestration System: The neural stimulationorchestration system is a non-invasive means of inducing gamma brainwaveactivity. The System is comprised of a reusable visual stimulator in theform of subject worn glasses and auditory stimulator in the form ofsubject worn headphones. The neural stimulation orchestration systemgenerates short-duration flashes of white light by means of asolid-state LED (light emitting diode). The flashes are controlled by anembedded microcontroller and typically occur at a repetition rate of 40Hz. The neural stimulation orchestration system also generatesshort-duration clicks of sound, which are 100% amplitude modulated at arepetition rate of 40 Hz.From a subject's perspective, the flashing light and auditory clickstimulation results in the desired induced gamma brainwave activity, butan individual wearing the device is readily able to converse and carryout other cognitive tasks and voluntary movements such as holding thehand of their caregiver while remaining seated. The flickering of thelight is quite quick, so it is less apparent to the subject that thereis an off period for the visual stimulation. For comparison, most modernflat-screen displays (computer monitors and televisions) refresh thecontent on the screen at 60 Hz; at this rate, the flickering is notapparent to the viewer.In this embodiment, the neural stimulation orchestration system (FIG. 47is worn on the head, and it is positioned in front of the eyes and overthe ears by the subject or with assistance from a caregiver. The subjectwearing the neural stimulation orchestration system should remaincomfortably seated throughout the treatment session, as the glasses arean opaque white screen.Instructions for Use are included with each neural stimulationorchestration system. The system is designed for ease of use for olderadults, with no requirements for high dexterity manipulation of thedevice and is accompanied by simple visual instructions in large print.The System includes a hand-held controller (FIG. 48) which allows thesubject, with the assistance from a caregiver if needed, to turn thedevice on, independently adjust the output amplitude for both theauditory and visual stimulation, and to pause and resume the stimulationduring a session.Applicant has performed a comprehensive set of bench testing studiesthat have shown that the stimulation outputs from the neural stimulationorchestration system produces accurate and precise stimuli withcontrolled intensity, frequency, and duty cycle.Usage: All relevant information about the neural stimulationorchestration system is contained in the Instructions for Use includedwith this submission. This includes: indications for use,contraindications, warnings, and precautions, instructions for use,recommendations for patients and caregivers during the use period,instructions for contacting the device manufacture and for return of thedevice.

-   -   a. Choice of Comparator: In order to provide a sham treatment        arm for the study, the sham neural stimulation orchestration        system will produce visual flicker auditory clicks at an average        of 35 Hz frequency with random timing between pulses. The choice        of this comparator comes from a combination of published and        unpublished preclinical data demonstrating in the 5XFAD mouse        model of Alzheimer's disease that random stimulation at 40 Hz        did not demonstrate a significant difference from baseline with        regards to Aβ1-42 clearance as compared to normalized mice        exposed to normalized dark or constant light conditions.    -   b. Overview: The study is a multicenter, prospective,        single-blind, randomized, controlled study of the adherence        rates and efficacy of non-invasive, multi-modal sensory        stimulation in subjects with mild to moderate Alzheimer's        disease. Daily treatment will be performed for the study        duration using the neural stimulation orchestration system. This        study will enroll approximately 180 subjects into the screening        phase of the study, of which up to 60 subjects will be treated        with sensory stimulation. The study will be conducted at up to 8        actively enrolling research sites.    -   c. Study Objective: To assess adherence rates and the efficacy        of non-invasive sensory stimulation for patients with cognitive        impairment.    -   d. Study Population: The primary enrollment target is 60        randomized subjects. Potentially eligible subjects will be        consented and entered into a screening period to establish        legally authorized representative/health care proxy and degree        of cognitive impairment.        Subjects who meet all criteria after the screening period will        undergo baseline assessments to evaluate cognitive performance,        quality of life, general clinical impression, sleep and activity        patterns via actigraphy monitoring. A subset of patients may        undergo EEG monitoring for response to sensory stimulation        and/or magnetic resonance (MR) imaging and/or PET imaging for        collection of feasibility data for future study endpoints.        Eligible subjects will be randomized at a 2:1 ratio of treatment        group to control group.        Treatment Group: Subjects are treated with the neural        stimulation orchestration system daily and are maintained on        baseline symptomatic medications without changes for 6 months.        Control Group: Subjects are treated with the sham neural        stimulation orchestration system daily and are maintained on        baseline symptomatic medications without changes for 6 months.        Subjects will be blinded to their randomized group assignment by        a combination of lack of familiarity of the stimulation and        inability to discern difference in the output of the system        (i.e. subjects will not know the difference between the        treatment device output and the sham device output).        Enrollment will continue until 60 subjects are enrolled. It is        estimated that approximately 180 subjects will be screened to        yield 60 subjects.    -   e. Selection Criteria: be selected based on the following        inclusion and exclusion criteria. An answer of “NO” to any        inclusion criteria or an answer of “YES” to any exclusion        criterion disqualifies a participant from further screening and        from participation in the study.

Inclusion Criteria

-   -   1. Individual is ≥55 years old at the time of screening.    -   2. Individual has a Mini-Mental State Exam (MMSE) score ranging        from 14-26, inclusive.    -   3. Individual has a diagnosis of a clinical syndrome of        cognitive impairment consistent with prodromal AD or MCI due to        AD per National Institute on Aging-Alzheimer's Association        (NIA-AA) diagnostic criteria.    -   4. Individual can identify (or have already identified) a health        care proxy or legally authorized representative who can verify        study inclusion/exclusion criteria.    -   5. Individual has a reliable caregiver or informant (defined as        an individual who knows them well and has contact with them for        at least 10 hours each week).

Exclusion Criteria

-   -   1. Self- or caregiver report of current profound hearing or        visual impairment.    -   2. Self- or caregiver report of history of seizure.    -   3. Active treatment or current prescription with one or more        anti-seizure/anti-epileptic medications including but not        limited to: brivaracetam (Briviact™) carbamazepine (Carbatrol™,        Tegretol™), Diazepam (Valium™), lorazepam (Activan™), clonazepam        (Klonopin™), eslicarbzepine (Apitom™), ethosuximide (Zarontin™),        felbamate (Felbatol™), lacosamide (VIMPAT™), lamotrigine        (Lamictal™), levetiracetam (Keppra™), oxcarbazepine (Oxtellar        XR™ Trileptal™), perampanel (Fycompa™), phenobarbital, phenytoin        (Dilantin™) pregabalin (Lyrica™), tiagabine (Gabitril™),        topiramate (Topamax™), valproate/valproic acid (Depakene™,        Depakote™), and zonisamide (Zonegran™)    -   4. Prior ischemic stroke, intracerebral hemorrhage, or        subarachnoid bleed within the past 24 months.    -   5. Self- or caregiver reported usage of any new medication        within the past 60 days, or current/expected titration of dosage        of any medications during the study period.    -   6. Active treatment or current prescription with memantine        (Namenda™ Namzaric™)    -   7. Self- or caregiver report of physician-diagnosis of        Parkinson's disease.    -   8. Self- or caregiver report of physician-diagnosis of major        depressive disorder.    -   9. Current prescription of any psychiatric agent, or self-report        of clinically-significant psychiatric illness or behavioral        problem that may interfere with study completion, as determined        by study physician.    -   10. Self- or caregiver reported alcohol or substance abuse        within the past year.    -   11. Self- or caregiver reported current enrollment in any        anti-amyloid clinical trial within the past 5 months.    -   12. Subjects who, in the investigator's opinion will not comply        with study procedures.    -   13. Subjects with active implantable neurological devices        including deep brain stimulators (DBS). If patients are going to        undergo MR imaging (optional assessment), then all active        implantable devices including pacemakers, implantable        cardioversion defibrillators (ICDs), spinal cord stimulators,        and non-MR compatible surgical implants will be included as an        exclusion criteria.    -   14. Subject is pregnant, lactating, or of childbearing potential        (i.e. women must be two years post-menopausal or surgically        sterile).    -   15. Exclusion for amyloid imaging with 18F-AV-45: Current or        recent participation in any procedures involving radioactive        agents such that the total radiation dose exposure to the        subject in any given year would exceed the limits of annual and        total dose commitment set forth in the US Code of Federal        Regulations (CFR) Title 21 Section 361.1.    -   f. Study Endpoints

Primary

The primary efficacy endpoint is the change in ADAS-Cog14 from baselineto 6 months following daily sensory stimulation treatment sessions.The primary safety endpoint is the incidence and nature of adverseevents (AE) and serious adverse events (SAE).

Secondary

Secondary endpoints in this study include:

-   -   Changes in Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-Cognitive 14        Item Subscore (ADAS-Cog14) from baseline to 3 months, 6 months,        and 7 months Changes in Neuropsychiatric Inventory (NPI) from        baseline to 3 months, 6 months, and 7 months    -   Changes in Alzheimer's Disease Cooperative Study Clinical Global        Impression of Change (CGIC) from baseline to 3 months, 6 months,        and 7 months    -   Changes from baseline in Alzheimer's Disease Cooperative Study        Activities of Daily Living Inventory (ADCS-ADL) from baseline to        1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 4 months, 5 months, 6 months, and 7        months    -   Changes from baseline in Quality of Life Alzheimer's Disease        (QoL-AD) from baseline to 1 month, 3 months, and 6 months    -   Caregiver burden measures from baseline to 1 month, 3 months,        and 6 months    -   Treatment adherence as measured by patient diary, via video        recordings, and data reports from system.        Changes in actigraphy assessments compared from baseline at        stated time points include:    -   1) Changes from baseline Assessment of daytime mean motor        activity (dMMA) via actigraphy starting at 1-month, 3-month, and        6-month time points as assessed by 60 second epochs;    -   2) Assessment of nighttime mean motor activity (nMMA) via        actigraphy starting at 1-month, 3-month, and 6-month time points        as assessed by 60 second epochs;    -   3) Day time napping as defined by inactivity between final        wakeup time and subsequent bedtime starting at 1-month, 3-month,        and 6-month time points as assessed by 60 second epochs;    -   4) Assessment of sleep time duration and quality as compared to        baseline period at 1-month, 3-month, and 6-month time points    -   g. Subject Recruitment: The study enrolls individuals with        mild-to-moderate cognitive impairment as determined during an        in-person screening visit. Investigational Sites may utilize        several methods to identify and recruit potential subjects.        These methods may include evaluation of patients from their        existing clinical practice, referrals from other physicians,        medical record search, review of available databases, or direct        subject recruitment via advertising. The initial recruitment        effort should identify those subjects that Sites have reasonable        knowledge of having cognitive impairment consistent with        Alzheimer's disease, specifically patients:    -   1. Subjects with mild to moderate cognitive impairment        consistent with Alzheimer's disease or a prior diagnosis of        Alzheimer's disease.    -   2. Subjects, if receiving acetylcholinesterase inhibitors        (AChEI), have been on a stable dose of for at least 60 days        prior to enrollment and who are not being treated with memantime        (Namenda™, Namzaric™)    -   3. Subjects that are able to identify (or have already        identified) a health care proxy who can verify study information        and consents to have the study staff interact with this        individual.    -   4. Subjects that have a reliable caregiver to aid in the        administration of the stimulation and for providing observations        of changes in activities of daily living or side effects that        may occur.        All interested individuals will complete an initial phone screen        or in-person discussion during which they will be provided with        a basic study overview and asked multiple questions related to        study inclusion and exclusion criteria. At the beginning of this        phone screen or in-person discussion, the participant will be        asked if they would like to obtain a copy of the study's        Informed Consent Form (ICF) prior to continuing. If they answer        “yes”, the ICF will be mailed or emailed to the participant and        the phone screen will be rescheduled to a later date.        As part of the initial phone or in-person screen, the individual        will be asked to identify “the family member or other individual        that they trust most for help on making healthcare decisions,”        and to provide consent for the study team to contact this        individual to gain their assent for the potential participant's        involvement in this study.        The study staff will confirm that the individual identified by        the subject are the health care proxy/legally authorized        representative (LAR) for the subject; if they are not the health        care proxy/LAR, the study staff will continue to identify that        individual through the subject, caregiver, and identified        contacts. Once confirmed, the health care proxy/legally        authorized representative (LAR) will be strongly encouraged to        attend the informed consent and the initial study visit. The        health care proxy/LAR may or may not be the subject's caregiver.        The intent of the study is to maintain all enrolled subjects on        their baseline medications without changes for at least 6        months; therefore Investigators (and the subjects' managing        physicians) should not intend or expect to change medications        for at least 6 months after enrollment. A subject may not be        enrolled if the Investigator, subject, or managing physician        does not agree to establish (prior to enrollment) and maintain a        medication regimen without changes for at least 6 month (unless        changes are medically necessary due to a clinically important        event). Investigators, in collaboration with a subject's        managing physicians, should thoroughly consider the subject's        medication level in light of his/her cognitive impairment, to        ensure that the baseline medications/doses can be maintained        without changes for at least 6 months. If pre-enrollment        medication changes are made, the subject must be allowed to        stabilize for at least 30 days prior to the initial screening        visit.        After enrollment, medication changes may be necessary due to a        clinically important event that affects a subject's symptomatic        medication regimen. If medications are changed after enrollment        but prior to randomization and first treatment, the subject will        be either excluded as a screen failure or must wait for the 30        days for “stabilization” on the new medication regimen. If        medications are changed after randomization and first treatment,        the subject will be withdrawn from the study.    -   h. Informed Consent; Once a subject with mild to moderate        cognitive impairment, as described in the above Subject        Recruitment section, has been identified, the study will be        presented to the subject and appropriate legally authorized        representative (LAR)/health care proxy for consideration. In        addition to the consent process from the subject LAR/health care        proxy, consent for the subject's caregiver will be sought in        order to include measures of caregiver burden.    -   i. Determining Decision Capacity to Consent and Surrogate        Consent; An evaluation by a researcher under the supervision of        a clinician who is experienced in the evaluation of patients        with cognitive impairment will be identified at each site. The        capacity must be assessed based on a direct examination of the        subject; the report of others will not suffice.        Subjects who are not capable of consent to research still must        assent to research in order to take part. Assent implies        willingness or, minimally, lack of objection to taking part in        the study. An interpretable statement from the subject regarding        assent must be taken as valid.        The decision capacity assessment should be performed by a        researcher or physician and recorded on the associated CRF. If        the patient has not objected to participating in the study but        does not demonstrate decision making capacity to participate in        the study, surrogate consent will be sought via the legally        authorized representative (LAR)/health care proxy. For all        subjects, a legally authorized representative (LAR)/health care        proxy will be identified at the start of the study due to the        progressive nature of cognitive impairment and Alzheimer's        disease and in consideration of the duration of the study. The        decision capacity will be re-assessed periodically throughout        the study to ensure that any decisions regarding the study        include the appropriate the subject and LAR/health care proxy.        The subject and legally authorized representative (LAR)/health        care proxy will be given adequate time to have all of their        questions answered and to carefully consider participation; this        may include taking an unsigned copy home to discuss        participation with family or friends before making a decision.        If, after understanding the purpose, potential risks and        benefits, and requirements of the study, as well as their rights        as research participants, the individual and health care proxy        agrees to participate, written informed consent shall be        obtained. Informed consent shall be documented in the subject's        medical record and, as applicable, in accordance with any other        Site-specific regulatory requirements. Subjects and the legally        authorized representatives (LAR)/health care proxy will be        informed that they may discontinue the subject's participation        at any time without penalty or loss of benefits to which the        subject is otherwise entitled.        Once a participant and legally authorized representative        (LAR)/health care proxy have consented to the trial and the        caregiver has consented, the subject is considered enrolled and        must undergo screening to ensure that they meet all of the entry        criteria. Subjects who are determined to be ineligible for the        study at any time during the screening process will not be        treated and will be considered a screen failure.    -   j. Screening 1 Visit; Following the consent process, the        screening will occur in 1 visit: Screening 1 Visit. The        preferred screening order and timing are provided as guidance;        however, it is understood that for a given subject, the order        and/or timing of a test(s) may be modified, as appropriate. A        flow chart depicting the study design overview and a patient's        enrollment process is provided in FIG. 49.    -   1. Mini-Mental Status Examination (MMSE) assessment: To confirm        the subject has cognitive impairment within the inclusion        criteria of the study of 12-26, inclusive.    -   2. Medical history: To evaluate for prior or existing medical        conditions and/or procedures that may exclude subjects from the        study and to identify any pre-existing conditions that may be        pertinent to the study's safety evaluation. The intent of the        study is to maintain all subjects on their baseline medications        without changes for the 6-month treatment and follow-up period.    -   3. Review of medications: To confirm doses and history of        medications that may be pertinent to the study's efficacy        evaluation.    -   4. Physical exam: To further evaluate for prior or existing        medical conditions that may exclude subjects from the study and        to establish the subject's baseline medical condition.    -   5. Confirm Inclusion/Exclusion Criteria    -   k. Baseline Visit    -   6. Review of prior imaging (if available): To identify and        assess amyloid status and other findings from available MR or        PET imaging data.    -   7. Confirm Prior Inclusion/Exclusion Criteria: To confirm that        subjects still meet eligibility criteria that were evaluated at        the Screening 1 Visit.    -   8. Neuropsychological Testing: All cognitive testing will be        performed by a trained psychometric grader. All tests and        questionnaires should be administered in the same order with the        ADAS-Cog given first. The same person should administer each        scale at all visits and at the same time of the day. The        interviewed caregiver (ADCS-ADL, NPI, and CGIC) should remain        the same person the whole study.        -   A. Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-Cognitive (ADAS-Cog)        -   B. Neuropsychiatric Inventory (NPI)        -   C. Clinicians Global Impression of Change (CGIC)        -   D. Alzheimer's Disease Cooperative Study-Activities of Daily            Living (ADCS-ADL)        -   E. Quality of Life-Alzheimer's Disease (QOL-AD)—administered            to patient and caregiver    -   9. Baseline actigraphy: To record movement and sleep patterns        for a minimum of 7 to 14 days prior to initiation of sensory        stimulation.    -   10. MR Imaging (Optional Assessment): To record anatomy and        pathophysiology or absence thereof present at baseline.    -   11. EEG Study (Optional Assessment): To record brainwave        activity at baseline.    -   12. Amyloid PET Imaging (Optional Assessment): To record        presence of beta amyloid at baseline.        -   1. Randomization: Randomization will be stratified by study            center at a 2:1 ratio to:    -   1. Treatment Group: Subjects remain blinded and receive a neural        stimulation orchestration system device which outputs sensory        stimulation at a 40 Hz frequency.    -   2. Control Group: Subjects remain blinded and receive a neural        stimulation orchestration system device which outputs sensory        stimulation at a random distribution of time around a mean of 35        Hz.        All study staff and necessary personnel will be instructed that        subjects and caregivers are not to be informed of their        randomization assignments and appropriate measures should be        taken to minimize the risk of premature unblinding.        Investigators performing study follow-up visits and the        subject's referring/managing physicians will not be proactively        informed of a subject's treatment assignment to minimize        potential bias in subject care decisions, To minimize potential        bias in the measurement of the primary endpoint, ADAS-Cog        testing, each investigational site will specify several        designated “blinded” members of their study staff that will not        be informed of the subjects' group assignments and will be        responsible for performing the ADAS-Cog assessment through the 6        month follow-up visit. Prior to unblinding, the effectiveness of        blinding will be assessed by asking subjects and assessors which        group they believe the subject was randomized to. All subjects        will be unblinded after the completion of all required 6 month        follow-up testing.    -   m. Initial Treatment Session: After the Screening 1 Visit and        completion of the baseline actigraphy recording, the subject and        caregiver will be trained on the use of the neural stimulation        orchestration system for use during the treatment period. The        training and initial therapy session will take place under the        supervision of the research staff. The default output settings        for the neural stimulation orchestration system will be        configured and recorded by the study staff. The subject and        caregiver will be “blinded” to the output pattern of the device.        The output of the treatment and sham devices will appear similar        to the user.        The Instructions for Use will be provided along with contact        information for the study site and customer support. The side        effects questionnaire will be completed following the initial        stimulation. The research staff shall confirm the current        medications, assess for side effects and adverse events, and        review study requirements with the subject to help ensure        compliance with the follow-up schedule. Multiple telephone        numbers and email addresses should be obtained from the        participant and caregiver to ensure the ability to contact        him/her at the required follow-up times (e.g. home, mobile).        Treatment: Subjects will then undergo daily treatment with the        Visual auditory sensory stimulation device for a target        treatment time of 60 minutes per day. The subject and/or        caregiver will decide the time of day best suited for them to        deliver the stimulation. The subject will be seated in a        comfortable chair throughout the treatment session. A consistent        time of day is preferred, but the treatment does not have to be        at the same time each day. The subjects/caregivers will be        provided with a “treatment diary” to record the time of day the        stimulation is delivered and any comments that they have        regarding the treatment and its effects each day. An electronic        data capture system in the form of a tablet will be used to        remind subjects and caregivers regarding the treatment session.        The subject and caregiver will be in communication with the        research staff via phone or videoconferencing to assist and        monitor with the treatment session.    -   n. Follow-up Procedures: Table 1 lists the assessment and        procedures required at each follow-up time point for both the        Treatment and Control groups. Additional visits may be required.        For example, if it is determined that the patient was        non-compliant, has had a recent life event that may affect an        accurate cognitive assessment at the follow-up visit, the        follow-up visit should be rescheduled/repeated within the        follow-up window.        All subjects will be followed-up with office assessments at 3,        6, and 7 months. Additional cognitive testing at dates other        than that which is specified by the schedule of activities may        be performed at the discretion of the investigator. Some of the        follow-up visits will be conducted by study staff via phone        interviews with the caregiver. The phone visits will be used to        assess side effects (and if additional in-person follow-up is        required), therapy adherence, and instrumental activities of        daily living. The phone visits will be performed at a minimum of        a monthly basis for all subjects, but they may be performed and        recorded on a more frequent basis at the discretion of the site        and sponsor.        EEG Assessment (Optional Assessment): For a subset of subjects        at selected sites, an EEG study may be performed to record        baseline activity and response to sensory stimulation. It is        expected that this assessment will require an additional 45-60        minutes to complete.        MR Imaging Assessment (Optional Assessment): For a subset of        subjects at selected sites, a MR imaging study may be performed        to record anatomy. It is expected that this assessment will        require an additional 45-60 minutes to complete.        Amyloid PET Imaging Assessment (Optional Assessment): For a        subset of subjects at selected sites, an amyloid PET imaging        study may be performed to record extent of b eta-amyloid.        It is expected that this assessment will require an additional        120 minutes to complete.

TABLE 1 Schedule of Testing On-going Therapy Sessions (M = months ± 14days) Follow Required Screening Baseline Initial Up Testing V1 V2 Tx 1 M2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M MMSE X Medical X History Physical X X X X ExamReview X X X X Medications Review of X Imaging Data NPI1 X X X X ADAS- XX X X Cog14 CGIC1 X X X X Clock X X X X Drawing Test ADL1 X P P X P P XX QOL-AD1 X P P X P P X X Review of X P P X P P X X Side EffectsActigraphy A A A A A A A Monitoring Decision X X Capacity assessmentBlinding X X assessment EEG O O O O assessment MRI O O O O assessmentAmyloid O O O PET assessment X = Office assessment P = Phone assessmentA = In-home assessment O = Optional assessment 1 = Includes caregiverinterview

-   -   o. Screen Failure and Withdrawal: All reasonable measures should        be taken to retain subjects enrolled in this study. However, it        is acknowledged that subjects have the right to discontinue        participation at any time without penalty or loss of benefits to        which the subject is otherwise entitled. The Investigator may        deem study withdrawal an appropriate action for a given subject        due to documented medical reasons.        Screen Failure: If a subject withdraws consent or is excluded by        the Investigator prior to or at the time of the Treatment        Session 1, he/she is considered a screen failure. Data will be        collected up to the point of exclusion.        Withdrawal: In the event that a subject is withdrawn from the        study after Treatment Session 1, either by his/her choice or        that of the Investigator (i.e. documented medical reason), the        following procedures should be adhered to by the Site:    -   1. Document the reason for the withdrawal and date of the last        study contact    -   2. Obtain the subject's written withdrawal request, whenever        feasible    -   3. If withdrawal occurs:        -   A. Between Treatment Session 1 and 3 Month Follow-up Visit            -   i. Report all data that had been collected up to the                time of study withdrawal (last study contact).            -   ii. Request that the subject come into the office for                the 3 Month evaluations to minimally assess safety;                however, if the subject declines or is unable to come                in, conduct an interview for side effects via phone at 1                month.        -   B. After the 3 Month Follow-up Visit            -   i. Report all data that had been collected up to the                time of study withdrawal (last study contact).            -   ii. No additional follow-up is required.                A subject that has withdrawn from the trial will not be                replaced. Subjects in whom the investigational therapy                was delivered for less than 1 month will not be followed                for the duration of the study as part of the intention                to treat (ITT) population.                Risk Analysis: The progression of mild cognitive                impairment and Alzheimer's disease and associated                morbidity and mortality is well known. Beyond the risk                to the individual, the care for these individuals                results in significant stress and economic burden for                families and is a growing challenge for healthcare                systems across the world.                Individuals involved in this study will complete                assessments of cognitive and physical function, be                subjected to relatively low levels of non-invasive                visual and auditory sensory stimulation, and may undergo                EEG, MR, and PET imaging using standard procedures.                Caregivers will be asked to complete assessments of                caregiver burden. Risks associated with each of these                study activities are minimal, as list below.    -   p. Potential Benefits: Although no assurances or guarantees can        be made, there is reasonable expectation that the sensory        stimulation may be beneficial to the subject. Evidence in the        literature suggests that reduction of symptoms of cognitive        impairment may a) reduce negative events that trigger hospital        visits (falls and other accidents) b) improve compliance with        medical treatments for comorbidities c) reduce costs d) delay        institutionalization of subject, and e) increase caregiver        productivity.    -   q. Potential Risks: The sensory stimulation treatments being        evaluated by this study are very similar to devices that are        readily available as consumer products without prescription by        physician such as an MP3 player (e.g. iPod™) and visual        stimulators such as the Delight from Mind Alive. The subject can        easily and safely remove the non-invasive devices at any time        throughout a stimulation treatment without assistance.        The following are potential risks of the sensory stimulation        treatments which are described based on common terminology        criteria for adverse events (CTCAE):    -   1. Seizure—a disorder characterized sudden onset of uncontrolled        electrical discharge in the brain causing alterations in        behavior, sensation, or consciousness.    -   2. Headache—a disorder characterized by a sensation of marked        pain or discomfort in various parts of the head, not necessarily        confined to the area of distribution of any nerve.    -   3. Insomnia—a disorder characterized by difficulty in falling        asleep and/or remaining asleep.    -   4. Nausea—a sensation of unease and discomfort in the upper        gastrointestinal tract    -   5. Dizziness—a disorder characterized by a disturbing sensation        of abnormal movement including but not limited to        lightheadedness, unsteadiness, giddiness, spinning, or rocking.    -   6. Ear Pain—a disorder characterized by a sensation of marked        discomfort in the ear.    -   7. Eye Pain—a disorder characterized by a sensation of marked        discomfort in the eye.    -   8. Dry eye—a disorder characterized by dryness of the cornea and        conjunctiva.    -   9. Anxiety—a disorder characterized by apprehension of danger        and dread accompanied by restlessness, tension, tachycardia, and        dyspnea unattached to a clearly identifiable stimulus.    -   10. Confusion—a disorder characterized by a lack of clear and        orderly thought and behavior.    -   11. Restlessness—a disorder characterized by an inability to        rest, relax, or be still.        There are additional risks that could possibly be associated        with the tests and procedures performed for the clinical study.        These potential risks are described below:        Risks associated with assessments of cognitive testing: Risks        associated with cognitive assessments are minimal, but        participants may experience mental fatigue and/or anxiety during        this form of testing.        Risks associated with EEG: There are no known risks of EEG. It        is considered safe and painless.        Risks associated with MR Imaging: The risks of MR imaging are        well-established including physical risks from the strong,        static magnetic field, risk to hearing, risk of heating of the        body from radiofrequency energy used during the examination, and        risk to electrically active implants. The rate of adverse events        is extremely low; the FDA reports 300 events annually for        several million MR imaging studies performed each year in the        United States.        Risks associated with Amyloid PET Imaging: The primary risk        related to PET is that of radiation exposure associated with the        CT scan or transmission scan and the injected radiotracers.        There is also minor risk associated with the venipuncture and        radioisotope injection (pain and bruising or painful        infiltration of a failed injection). The estimated absorbed        radiation dose for [18F]-FDG (rad/mCi) for a 70 kg adult is        presented in the table below. These estimates were calculated        from human data (Jones et al., 1982) and used the data published        by the International Commission on Radiological Protection for        [18F] FDG for a 70 kg adult with assumptions on biodistribution        from Jones, et al, 1982 and using MIRDDOSE 2 software        (“International Commission on Radiological Protection for 18[F]        FDG,” 1987). The critical organ is the urinary bladder wall,        followed by heart, spleen and pancreas. This radiation dose is        not expected to produce any harmful effects, although there is        no known minimum level of radiation exposure considered to be        totally free of the risk of causing genetic defects or cancer.        The risk associated with the amount of radiation exposure        participants receive in this study is considered low and        comparable to every day risks. No PET studies will be performed        on pregnant or potentially pregnant women, as the protocol        requires female subjects to be postmenopausal as a condition of        participation.        In brief, florbetapir F 18 is an imaging agent that will be used        at low (tracer) doses. The most common adverse events in human        clinical trials include headache, injection site reactions        (injection site rash, extravasation, hemorrhage, irritation and        puncture site hematoma), musculoskeletal pain, fatigue, and        nausea. However, the possibility exists for a rare reaction to        any of the drugs or procedures to which the participant will be        exposed. The full potential for drug-drug interactions is not        presently known. In the event of a study related adverse event,        subjects should not be discharged from the imaging facility        until the event has resolved or stabilized. As with any        investigational study, there may be adverse events or side        effects that are currently unknown and it is possible that        certain unknown risks could be permanent, serious, or        life-threatening. However, if any new risks become known in the        future participants will be informed of them. Participation in        this study may involve some added risks or discomforts, which        are outlined below.

FDG 18F-AV-45 Organ (rad/mCi) (rad/mCi) Adrenals 0.048 0.05 Brain 0.070.037 Breasts 0.034 0.023 Gallbladder Wall 0.049 0.529 Lower LargeIntestine Wall 0.051 0.103 Small Intestine 0.047 0.242 Upper LargeIntestine Wall 0.046 0.276 Heart Wall 0.22 0.048 Kidneys 0.074 0.048Liver 0.058 0.238 Lungs 0.064 0.032 Muscle 0.039 0.032 Ovaries 0.0530.065 Pancreas 0.096 0.053 Red marrow 0.047 0.053 Skin 0.03 0.022 Spleen0.14 0.033 Testes 0.041 0.025 Thymus 0.044 0.027 Thyroid 0.039 0.025Urinary bladder wall 0.32 0.1 Uterus 0.062 0.058 Effective Dose — 0.069Total Body 0.043 0.043Potential psychosocial (non-medical) risks, discomforts, inconvenienceof study procedures: It is reasonable to expect that a patient mayexperience some mild anxiety or stress from disorientation to theirenvironment due to the opaque glasses and auditory stimulation masksnormal sounds from their surroundings. It is expected that the presenceof their caregiver and once the individual becomes more familiar withthe treatment that this anxiety or stress will be reduced.The study may involve unknown or unforeseen side effects orcomplications other than those mentioned above. If the abovecomplications occur, they may lead to follow-up evaluation, monitoring,and care.

-   -   r. Minimization of Risk: The following measures will also be        taken to minimize risk to participants as part of this        investigational plan:    -   1. Physicians and research staff will receive appropriate        training prior to using the system. Training will include        instruction on setup and treatment session management.    -   2. Patients with history of or risk factors for seizure will be        excluded from participation in the study.    -   3. Instructions for Use are provided with each system.    -   4. Patients will be closely monitored at regularly scheduled        intervals for the duration of the study.    -   s. Summary: The detrimental effects of cognitive impairment are        well established and a novel treatment approach is worthy of        investigation. Non-invasive sensory stimulation may provide one        such novel therapy. Although there are several theoretical risks        that could be associated with the device and treatment, the        likelihood and severity of those risks is believed to be low and        will be carefully monitored in the study. The potential benefits        could include symptomatic relief and slowed disease progression,        which justify the investigation of non-invasive sensory        stimulation in this study.    -   t. Sponsor Role and Responsibilities: The study sponsor's        responsibilities include:    -   1. Ensuring that the study is designed and managed in compliance        with all appropriate regulatory standards and is conducted        according to the study protocol.    -   2. Selecting Investigators, qualified by training and        experience, to conduct the study.    -   3. Providing appropriate training to Investigators, site study        staff, and all sponsor representatives.    -   4. Providing the neural stimulation orchestration system only to        participating Investigators and subjects, and tracking the        shipment and disposition of all product.    -   5. Monitoring study data at research sites, including        confirmation that participant informed consent is obtained and        on-going safety levels remain acceptable for the duration of the        trial.    -   6. Ensuring that prior to commencement of the study in each        participating center, the sponsor has on file:        -   A. Written IRB approval        -   B. Approved study-specific participant informed consent        -   C. Signed Investigator's Agreement        -   D. Investigators' current curriculum vitae        -   E. Identified and coordination with local representative            Amendments: The CIP, Investigator Brochure, case report            forms, informed consent form and other subject information,            or other clinical investigation documents shall be amended            as needed throughout the clinical investigation, and a            justification statement shall be included with each amended            section of a document. Proposed amendments to the CIP shall            be agreed upon between the sponsor and principal            investigator, or the coordinating investigator. The            amendments to the CIP and the subject's informed consent            form shall be notified to, or approved by, the IRB. The            version number and date of the amendments shall be            documented.    -   u. Statistical Analysis Plan Summary: This is a multi-center,        prospective, non-randomized, controlled study designed to        evaluate the safety and clinical utility of sensory stimulation        in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease. The primary        effectiveness endpoint of this trial is the change in ADAS-Cog        from baseline to 6 months. The primary safety endpoint is the        incidence and nature of Adverse Events (AE).

Repeated objective measures such as data classified from actigraphyrecordings may allow for sufficient statistical power to discern effectsbetween the treatment and control groups. The variance of thepsychometric scales have been demonstrated longitudinally on healthcontrol populations, mild cognitive impairment, and more advancedAlzheimer's patients through projects such as the Alzheimer's DiseaseNeuroimaging Initiative. A substantial treatment effect from the sensorystimulation would be required to demonstrate a difference between thetreatment and control groups in the design of this study. Therefore,descriptive statistics will be used to evaluate the primary andsecondary endpoints, and ad-hoc secondary analyses will be performed toinform the subsequent design of clinical studies based on thisfeasibility data.

What is claimed is:
 1. A system for treating cognitive dysfunction in asubject in need thereof, comprising: eyeglasses formed from a wireframe;a photodiode coupled to the wireframe and positioned to detect anambient light level between the wireframe and a fovea of a subject; aplurality of light sources coupled to the wireframe and positioned todirect light towards the fovea of the subject; an input device toreceive an identifier of the subject; a profile manager executed by aneural stimulation system comprising a processor configured to:retrieve, based on a lookup, a profile corresponding to the identifierof the subject; select, based on the profile, a light pattern having afixed parameter and a variable parameter; a light adjustment module,executed by the neural stimulation system, configured to: set a value ofthe variable parameter based on applying a policy associated with theprofile using the ambient light level; and a light generation module,executed by the neural stimulation system, configured to: construct anoutput signal based on the light pattern, the fixed parameter and thevariable parameter that is set by the ambient level; and provide theoutput signal to the plurality of light sources to direct light towardsthe fovea of the subject in accordance with the constructed outputsignal.
 2. The system of claim 1, wherein the fixed parametercorresponds to a stimulation frequency, and the variable parametercorresponds to an intensity level.
 3. The system of claim 1, comprising:at least one of the plurality of light sources positioned to direct thelight towards within 15 degrees of the fovea of the subject.
 4. Thesystem of claim 1, comprising: a feedback monitor configured to track,via a feedback sensor, movement of the fovea of the subject; and thelight adjustment module further configured to adjust, responsive to themovement of the fovea of the subject, at least one of the plurality oflight sources to direct the light towards within 15 degrees of the foveaof the subject.
 5. The system of claim 1, comprising: a feedback monitorconfigured to measure physiological conditions using a feedback sensor;a side effects management module to receive the measured physiologicalconditions from the feedback monitor, generate an instruction to adjustthe variable parameter to a second value, and transmit the instructionto the light adjustment module; and he light adjustment module furtherconfigured to receive the instruction from the side effects managementmodule and determine a second value for the variable parameter of thelight pattern.
 6. The system of claim 1, comprising: a feedback monitorconfigured to measure a heart rate of the subject using a pulse ratemonitor; a side effects management module to: receive the heart ratemeasured by the feedback monitor; compare the heart rate with athreshold; determine, based on the comparison, that the heart rateexceeds the threshold; adjust, responsive to the determination that theheart rate exceeds the threshold, the variable parameter to a secondvalue to lower an intensity of the light; and the light adjustmentmodule further configured to receive the second value of the variableparameter, and provide a second output signal to cause the plurality oflight sources to direct light at a lower intensity corresponding to thesecond value.
 7. The system of claim 1, comprising: a feedback monitorconfigured to measure a heart rate of the subject using a pulse ratemonitor, and measure brain wave activity using a brain wave sensor; aside effects management module to: receive the heart rate measured bythe feedback monitor, and receive the brain wave activity measured bythe brain wave sensor; determine that the heart rate is less than afirst threshold, and determine that the brain wave activity is less thana second threshold; and adjust, responsive to the determination that theheart rate is less the first threshold and the brain wave activity isless than the second threshold, the variable parameter to a second valueto increase an intensity of the light; and the light adjustment modulefurther configured to receive the second value of the variableparameter, and provide a second output signal to cause the plurality oflight sources to direct light at an increased intensity corresponding tothe second value.
 8. The system of claim 1, wherein the cognitivedysfunction comprises Alzheimer's disease.
 9. A system for treatingcognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof, comprising:eyeglasses; a sensor coupled to a portion of the eyeglasses andpositioned to detect an ambient light level between the portion of theeyeglasses and a fovea of a subject; a plurality of light sourcescoupled to the eyeglasses and positioned to direct light towards thefovea of the subject; a neural stimulation system comprising a processorconfigured to: retrieve, based on a lookup, a profile corresponding tothe identifier of the subject; select, based on the profile, a lightpattern having a fixed parameter and a variable parameter; set a valueof the variable parameter based on applying a policy associated with theprofile using the ambient light level; construct an output signal basedon the light pattern, the fixed parameter and the variable parameterthat is set by the ambient level; and provide the output signal to theplurality of light sources to direct light towards the fovea of thesubject in accordance with the constructed output signal.
 10. The systemof claim 9, wherein the fixed parameter corresponds to a stimulationfrequency, and the variable parameter corresponds to an intensity level.11. The system of claim 9, comprising: at least one of the plurality oflight sources positioned to direct the light towards within 15 degreesof the fovea of the subject.
 12. The system of claim 9, wherein theneural stimulation system is further configured to: track, via afeedback sensor, movement of the fovea of the subject; and adjust,responsive to the movement of the fovea of the subject, at least one ofthe plurality of light sources to direct the light towards within 15degrees of the fovea of the subject.
 13. The system of claim 9, whereinthe neural stimulation system is further configured to: measurephysiological conditions using a feedback sensor; receive the measuredphysiological conditions from the feedback monitor; generate aninstruction to adjust the variable parameter to a second value; transmitthe instruction to a light adjustment module; and determine a secondvalue for the variable parameter of the light pattern.
 14. The system ofclaim 9, wherein the neural stimulation system is further configured to:measure a heart rate of the subject using a pulse rate monitor; comparethe heart rate with a threshold; determine, based on the comparison,that the heart rate exceeds the threshold; adjust, responsive to thedetermination that the heart rate exceeds the threshold, the variableparameter to a second value to lower an intensity of the light; andprovide a second output signal to cause the plurality of light sourcesto direct light at a lower intensity corresponding to the second value.15. The system of claim 9, wherein the neural stimulation system isfurther configured to: measure a heart rate of the subject using a pulserate monitor; measure brain wave activity using a brain wave sensor;determine that the heart rate is less than a first threshold; determinethat the brain wave activity is less than a second threshold; adjust,responsive to the determination that the heart rate is less the firstthreshold and the brain wave activity is less than the second threshold,the variable parameter to a second value to increase an intensity of thelight; and provide a second output signal to cause the plurality oflight sources to direct light at an increased intensity corresponding tothe second value.
 16. The system of claim 9, wherein the cognitivedysfunction comprises Alzheimer's disease.
 17. A system for treatingcognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof, comprising:eyeglasses; a sensor coupled to a portion of the eyeglasses andpositioned to detect an ambient light level between the portion of theeyeglasses and a fovea of a subject; a plurality of light sourcescoupled to the eyeglasses and positioned to direct light towards thefovea of the subject; one or more processors configured to execute oneor more programs to treat a subject in need of a treatment of a braindisease, the one or more programs including instructions for conductinga therapy session, the therapy session comprising: identifying a profilecorresponding to the identifier of the subject; selecting, based on theprofile, a light pattern having a fixed parameter and a variableparameter; setting a value of the variable parameter based on applying apolicy associated with the profile using the ambient light level;constructing an output signal based on the light pattern, the fixedparameter and the variable parameter that is set by the ambient level;and providing the output signal to the plurality of light sources todirect light towards the fovea of the subject in accordance with theconstructed output signal.
 18. The system of claim 17, wherein the fixedparameter corresponds to a stimulation frequency, and the variableparameter corresponds to an intensity level.
 19. The system of claim 17,comprising: at least one of the plurality of light sources positioned todirect the light towards within 15 degrees of the fovea of the subject.20. The system of claim 17, wherein the therapy session comprises:tracking, via a feedback sensor, movement of the fovea of the subject;and adjusting, responsive to the movement of the fovea of the subject,at least one of the plurality of light sources to direct the lighttowards within 15 degrees of the fovea of the subject.
 21. The system ofclaim 17, wherein the therapy session comprises: measuring physiologicalconditions using a feedback sensor; receiving the measured physiologicalconditions from the feedback monitor; generating an instruction toadjust the variable parameter to a second value; transmitting theinstruction to a light adjustment module; and determining a second valuefor the variable parameter of the light pattern.
 22. The system of claim17, wherein the therapy session comprises: measuring a heart rate of thesubject using a pulse rate monitor; comparing the heart rate with athreshold; determining, based on the comparison, that the heart rateexceeds the threshold; adjusting, responsive to the determination thatthe heart rate exceeds the threshold, the variable parameter to a secondvalue to lower an intensity of the light; and providing a second outputsignal to cause the plurality of light sources to direct light at alower intensity corresponding to the second value.
 23. A method fortreating cognitive dysfunction in a subject in need thereof, comprisingadministering a stimulus to the subject using a system comprising:eyeglasses formed from a wireframe; a photodiode coupled to thewireframe and positioned to detect an ambient light level between thewireframe and a fovea of a subject; a plurality of light sources coupledto the wireframe and positioned to direct light towards the fovea of thesubject; an input device to receive an identifier of the subject; aprofile manager executed by a neural stimulation system comprising aprocessor configured to: retrieve, based on a lookup, a profilecorresponding to the identifier of the subject; select, based on theprofile, a light pattern having a fixed parameter and a variableparameter; a light adjustment module, executed by the neural stimulationsystem, configured to: set a value of the variable parameter based onapplying a policy associated with the profile using the ambient lightlevel; and a light generation module, executed by the neural stimulationsystem, configured to: construct an output signal based on the lightpattern, the fixed parameter and the variable parameter that is set bythe ambient level; and provide the output signal to the plurality oflight sources to direct light towards the fovea of the subject inaccordance with the constructed output signal.
 24. The method of claim23, wherein the cognitive dysfunction comprises Alzheimer's disease.